LandForm

Talk to LandForm

Get
LandForm.

LandForm is a one-year subscription for Autodesk Revit 2024–2027. Tell us who you are, then choose: subscribe and we take you straight to checkout, where the license key and installer link are emailed as soon as payment clears, or evaluate first and we email you the installer link now.

SubscriptionUS$349 per user · per year · every tool and update
I would like to *

Your installer link and license key are emailed here, so please use an address you can open.

LandForm for Autodesk Revit

User guide.

Every tool on the LandForm ribbon, explained the way you use it: what it does, the window with its controls pointed out, a step-by-step workflow and the result you should see.

Guide essentials Installation, compatibility, support, and usage information in one place.
Current guide100 toolsRibbon panels12Supported versionsRevit 2024–2027
Before you begin
01

Save first

Use a working copy when testing a tool for the first time. Preview the proposed result whenever a command offers a preview.

02

Check the view

Most selection problems come from hidden elements, the wrong view type, or an element that is not editable.

03

Follow the numbers

Each page shows the tool window with numbered callouts. The legend beneath it zooms in on every control and says what it does; the workflow then walks through the job in order.

Guide resources

LandForm guide essentials.

Quick reference information for getting started, installing LandForm, checking compatibility, finding support, and reviewing current limitations.

01

Getting started

1. Start Autodesk® Revit® and open the project you want to work on. 2. Open the LandForm tab on the Revit ribbon. 3. Choose a command from one of the LandForm panels: Terrain, Hardscape, Patterns, Modify, Softscape, Annotation, Analysis, Documentation, Management, CAD or Excel. 4. Follow the prompts shown by Revit and any settings in the LandForm window. Each command page in this guide shows the tool window with numbered callouts, the step-by-step workflow and the expected result. 5. Review the preview when one is available, then confirm the operation. Save a working copy before testing a command for the first time. If a tool cannot find or select an element, confirm that you are in a supported view, the element is visible, and it is editable. Press F1 while hovering a LandForm ribbon button to open its page in this guide.

02

Installation and removal

Installation 1. Close Autodesk® Revit®. 2. Run the LandForm installer and follow the on-screen instructions. 3. Start a supported version of Revit. LandForm loads automatically and adds the LandForm tab to the ribbon. 4. Open a project and choose a LandForm command. Follow any license instructions displayed at first use. Uninstallation 1. Close Autodesk® Revit®. 2. Open Windows Settings > Apps > Installed apps. 3. Find LandForm, choose Uninstall, and follow the prompts. 4. Restart Revit after the uninstall is complete. To update LandForm, close Revit and run the newer installer. If installation or licensing help is required, email info@landformautomation.com.

03

Support

Support is available by email at info@landformautomation.com and through https://landformautomation.com. Contact support for installation, licensing, compatibility, workflow, or product questions. Include your LandForm version, Autodesk® Revit® version, Windows version, the command name, a short description of the issue, and screenshots or the exact error message when possible. For project-specific problems, also describe the active view and the elements or files being used. The online User Guide is available at https://landformautomation.com/user-guide. Product updates and release notes are available at https://landformautomation.com/updates.

04

Compatibility and resources

LandForm is a landscape architecture toolkit for Autodesk® Revit® software, covering terrain, planting, analysis, documentation, and interoperability workflows. System compatibility: - Autodesk® Revit® 2024, 2025, 2026, or 2027 - 64-bit Windows - Internet connection for license validation and online documentation Documentation: - User Guide: https://landformautomation.com/user-guide - Product updates: https://landformautomation.com/updates - Website: https://landformautomation.com The searchable User Guide documents every LandForm ribbon command, including preparation, ribbon location, operating steps, dialog controls, screenshots, and expected results. Autodesk and Revit are trademarks of the Autodesk group of companies. LandForm Automation is not affiliated with Autodesk.

05

Known issues

No known critical issues at the time of publication. Performance note: Toposolid editing in Autodesk® Revit® 2024 can be slower than in newer Revit versions, especially with complex terrain. This is an internal Revit limitation, not a LandForm limitation. For improved Toposolid editing performance, use the latest supported Revit version when possible. Some commands depend on the current Revit view, visible and editable model elements, loaded family types, or access to an output location. In workshared projects, borrow or make the target elements editable before running a command. If selection is unavailable, switch to a suitable plan or 3D view and check visibility. Save a working copy before first use. For current notes and resolved issues, see https://landformautomation.com/updates. Report problems to info@landformautomation.com with the LandForm and Autodesk® Revit® versions, command name, steps to reproduce, and any error message.

100 results

Every command on the LandForm ribbon

01

LandForm ribbon panel

About

Preferences and licensing shared by every LandForm tool.

About · LandForm · Settings

Settings

Set the preferences that every LandForm tool shares: the Assistant cards, the pick crosshair, the hover element card and Colored Tabs.

The General Settings window gathers the choices that are about how LandForm behaves on your computer rather than in a particular tool. Turn the LandForm Assistant on or off and restyle its cards, decide how long and what colour the selection crosshair is, switch the hover element card on or off, and colour Revit's view tabs so you can tell plans, sections and models apart at a glance. Everything is saved per Windows user and applies to every Revit project you open.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAbout panelLandForm ▾Settings

Button tooltip: “Control preferences shared by all LandForm tools.”
Before you start
  • Nothing needs to be selected; the window opens from any view.
  • Decide whether you want tab colours grouped by view, by view type or by model before you set up Colored Tabs.
  • A hex colour such as #238BD6 for any custom colour you want to type rather than pick.
Tutorial video

Watch Settings in action

Video coming soon

Settings walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 4 screens · 37 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Settings: General Settings on the Assistant tab, with the assistant switched off
General Settings on the Assistant tab, with the assistant switched off · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Assistant / Cursor / Element Info / Colored Tabs

    Switch between the four groups of settings; this picture shows the Assistant tab.

  2. 2
    Enable LandForm Assistant

    Shows the assistant and its workflow instruction cards while a tool runs; clear it to hide them everywhere.

  3. 3
    Assistant

    Chooses the assistant persona, Classic or Lady.

  4. 4
    Color

    Chooses the colour of the assistant cards: LandForm, Random palette or a single colour such as Blue or Olive.

  5. 5
    Opacity

    Sets how opaque the assistant cards are, from 45% to 100%.

  6. 6
    Settings are stored per Windows user

    Reminds you that every choice is saved for your Windows user and applies in every Revit project.

  7. 7
    Save

    Saves every setting and applies the Assistant, hover card and Colored Tabs changes at once.

  8. 8
    Cancel

    Closes the window without changing any setting.

Settings: Cursor tab set to a full-screen crosshair in a custom red
Cursor tab set to a full-screen crosshair in a custom red · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Cursor

    Opens the settings for the pick crosshair's length and colour.

  2. 2
    Full screen length

    Stretches the pick crosshair across the whole Revit window.

  3. 3
    Manual length

    Limits the crosshair to the total span typed in the box, from 24 to 2000 pixels.

  4. 4
    Use LandForm theme color

    Colours the crosshair to follow the light or dark theme; clear it to use a custom colour.

  5. 5
    #FF0000

    Type the hex colour of the crosshair when the theme colour is not used.

  6. 6
    Pick

    Opens the colour picker for the crosshair colour.

  7. 7
    Swatch

    Shows the crosshair colour that will be used.

  8. 8
    Save

    Saves every setting for the current Windows user.

  9. 9
    Cancel

    Closes the window without changing any setting.

Settings: Element Info tab with the hover card switched on
Element Info tab with the hover card switched on · 6 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Element Info

    Opens the setting for the hover element card.

  2. 2
    Show element info while hovering

    Shows a small card with the category, type name, element ID and workset of the element under a resting cursor; clear it to hide the card everywhere.

  3. 3
    How it works

    Explains when the card appears and that it works in plans, sections, elevations and orthographic 3D views.

  4. 4
    Settings are stored per Windows user

    Reminds you that the choice is saved for your Windows user and applies in every Revit project.

  5. 5
    Save

    Saves the settings and switches the hover card on or off at once.

  6. 6
    Cancel

    Closes the window without changing any setting.

Settings: Colored Tabs tab with tabs coloured by opened model
Colored Tabs tab with tabs coloured by opened model · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Colored Tabs

    Opens the settings that colour Revit's view tabs.

  2. 2
    Enable Colored Tabs

    Colours Revit's document tabs with the chosen style and palette; clear it to restore the standard tabs.

  3. 3
    Project

    Style for project view tabs: a top bar or a border in four weights, or Background Fill.

  4. 4
    Family

    Style for family document tabs, with the same choices.

  5. 5
    Color by

    Each view gives every tab its own colour, Same view type shares one per kind of view, and Same opened model shares one per project or family.

  6. 6
    Reset assignments

    Forgets the colour each open tab was given so colours are dealt out again from the palette.

  7. 7
    Ordered palette

    The colours the tabs cycle through, with a swatch and an editable hex value per row; double-click a row to pick its colour.

  8. 8
    Add

    Appends a colour to the palette.

  9. 9
    Pick

    Opens the colour picker for the selected row.

  10. 10
    Remove

    Deletes the selected colour.

  11. 11
    Up / Down

    Move the selected colour one place earlier or later in the order.

  12. 12
    Defaults

    Restores the standard ten colours, styles and grouping; Enable Colored Tabs is kept.

  13. 13
    Save

    Saves the settings and recolours open view tabs straight away.

  14. 14
    Cancel

    Closes the window without changing any setting.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Settings

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → About panel → LandForm ▾ → Settings.

  2. 02

    Assistant. On the Assistant tab, tick Enable LandForm Assistant to show the assistant and its workflow instruction cards while a tool runs, or clear it to hide them everywhere. Under Behavior, choose the Assistant persona (Classic or Lady), the card Color (LandForm, Random palette, Blue, Olive, Plum, Amber or Gray) and the Opacity of the cards, from 45% to 100%.

    Closing the assistant with its own × button also turns this setting off.

  3. 03

    Cursor. On the Cursor tab, pick Full screen length to stretch the pick crosshair across the whole Revit window, or Manual length and type its total span in pixels (24 to 2000). Tick Use LandForm theme color to follow the light or dark theme, or clear it and type a hex colour or press Pick to choose one; the swatch shows the result.

  4. 04

    Element Info. On the Element Info tab, tick Show element info while hovering to get a small card with the category, type name, element ID and workset of the element under a resting cursor. It works in plans, sections, elevations and orthographic 3D views; clear the box to hide the card everywhere.

  5. 05

    Colored Tabs. On the Colored Tabs tab, tick Enable Colored Tabs, then choose a style for Project tabs and for Family tabs: a top bar or a border in four weights, or Background Fill. Under Color by, choose Each view for a different colour per tab, Same view type to share a colour across all plans, all sections and so on, or Same opened model to colour every tab of one project or family alike.

    Reset assignments forgets which colour each open tab was given so they are dealt out again from the palette.

  6. 06

    Title filters (optional). Press Add under Title filters to create a rule, type the text or regular expression a tab title must match in Match, and set its Color by typing a hex value, pressing Pick or double-clicking the row. Clear On to pause a rule, or select it and press Remove.

    An invalid regular expression falls back to plain text matching.

  7. 07

    Ordered palette. Edit the colours the tabs cycle through: Add appends a colour, Pick (or a double-click) opens the colour picker for the selected row, Remove deletes it, Up and Down change the order, and Defaults restores the standard ten colours.

  8. 08

    Save. Press Save. The Assistant, hover card and Colored Tabs settings take effect immediately; Cancel leaves everything as it was.

What you get

Your choices are written to a settings file for the current Windows user and used by every LandForm tool in every Revit project. The Assistant and hover card switch on or off at once, and open view tabs are recoloured straight away when Colored Tabs is enabled. Reopen the window at any time to adjust them.

Good to know

Tips

  • If Colored Tabs cannot be applied after saving, the other settings are still kept and a warning explains what went wrong; try again after reopening a view.
  • Use Same view type with a short palette when you mostly want to distinguish plans from sections and schedules; use Each view when you juggle many views of the same kind.
  • Title filters win over the palette, so a rule such as Sheet can give every sheet tab one fixed colour while other tabs keep cycling.
  • The old Preview graphics options (Autodesk graphics or the fast LandForm preview, and the point colour) are no longer shown in the window; LandForm tools choose their preview graphics themselves.
Control reference · 34 controls

Every control and what it does

App General Settings34 controls
ControlTypeFunction
AssistantTab

Shows the LandForm Assistant settings: the on/off switch, persona, card colour and opacity.

Enable LandForm AssistantOption

Turns the LandForm Assistant and its workflow instruction cards on or off for every tool. Closing the assistant with its × button also turns it off.

Workflow Persona Combo BoxSelector

Chooses the assistant persona: Classic or Lady.

Workflow Color Combo BoxSelector

Chooses the colour scheme of the assistant cards: LandForm, Random palette, Blue, Olive, Plum, Amber or Gray.

Workflow Opacity SliderSlider

Sets how opaque the assistant cards are, from 45% to 100%.

CursorTab

Shows the pick crosshair settings: its length and colour.

Full screen lengthOption

Extends the crosshair across the complete Revit window.

Manual lengthOption

Limits the crosshair to the span typed in the length box.

Cursor Length Text BoxInput

Total crosshair span in pixels (24 to 2000) when Manual length is selected.

Use LandForm theme colorOption

Colours the crosshair to match the current LandForm light or dark theme instead of a custom colour.

Cursor Color Text BoxInput

Hex colour of the crosshair, for example #A6ECFF, when the theme colour is not used.

PickButton

Opens the colour picker for the crosshair colour.

Element InfoTab

Shows the hover element card setting.

Show element info while hoveringOption

Shows a card with category, type name, element ID and workset when the cursor rests on an element; clear it to hide the card everywhere.

PreviewTab

Transient preview graphics options. This tab is hidden in the current window.

Preview Mode Combo BoxSelector

Chooses between standard Autodesk graphics and the fast LandForm preview for transient previews (hidden tab).

Use Autodesk default point colorOption

Uses Autodesk's default colour for preview points instead of a custom one (hidden tab).

Point Preview Color BoxInput

Hex colour of preview points when the default colour is not used (hidden tab).

PickButton

Opens the colour picker for the preview point colour (hidden tab).

Colored TabsTab

Shows the Colored Tabs settings: tab style, colour grouping, title filters and the palette.

Enable Colored TabsOption

Colours Revit's document tabs with the chosen style and palette; clear it to restore the standard tabs.

Colored Tabs Project Style Combo BoxSelector

Style applied to project view tabs: Top Bar or Border in Light, Medium, Heavy or Heavier weight, or Background Fill.

Colored Tabs Family Style Combo BoxSelector

Style applied to family document tabs, with the same choices as the project style.

Colored Tabs Color Grouping Combo BoxSelector

Each view gives every tab its own colour. Same view type shares a colour across plans, sections, and so on. Same opened model shares a colour across every tab of one project or family.

Reset assignmentsButton

Forgets the colour given to each open tab so colours are dealt out again from the palette.

Colored Tabs Filter Data GridTable

Title filter rules: On, the Match text or regular expression, and the Color a matching tab gets. Double-click a row to pick its colour.

AddButton

Adds a new title filter rule to the list.

RemoveButton

Removes the selected title filter rule.

Colored Tabs Palette Data GridTable

The ordered colours that tabs cycle through, with a swatch and editable hex value per row. Double-click a row to pick its colour.

UpButton

Moves the selected palette colour one place earlier in the order.

DownButton

Moves the selected palette colour one place later in the order.

DefaultsButton

Restores the standard palette, styles and grouping; the Enable Colored Tabs setting is kept.

SaveButton

Saves every setting for the current Windows user and applies the Assistant, hover card and Colored Tabs changes at once.

CancelButton

Closes the window without changing any setting.

Back to tool index ↑

About · LandForm · License

License

See whether this computer is licensed, buy the subscription, or enter a license key to activate LandForm.

LandForm is sold as a one-year subscription; there is no trial. The License window shows the state of the computer you are on, a button to the place where the subscription is sold, and a field for a license key. On a computer that is not yet licensed the LandForm tab shows only this button, so the way to subscribe is always one click away. On a licensed computer the window confirms the license and lets you move the computer to a different key.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAbout panelLandForm ▾License

Button tooltip: “Open the LandForm license window.”
Before you start
  • An internet connection: the window talks to the LandForm license service, and the App Store edition also checks your Autodesk subscription.
  • For a key activation, the key from your purchase or license email, in the form LF-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX.
  • For the App Store edition, Revit signed in with the Autodesk Account that bought the subscription.
Tutorial video

Watch License in action

Video coming soon

License walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 7 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

License: License window on a computer licensed with a key
License window on a computer licensed with a key · 7 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    LICENSED

    The badge tells you where the computer stands, for example LICENSE REQUIRED, LICENSE EXPIRED or RE-VALIDATION NEEDED.

  2. 2
    LandForm Tools is licensed.

    Says how the computer is licensed; for a LandForm key it shows the date the license is valid through.

  3. 3
    License active

    Confirms the tools are available and whether all tools are included or some are greyed out on the ribbon.

  4. 4
    Activate a different license key

    Paste a key in the form LF-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX to move this computer to another license; letters become upper case as you type.

  5. 5
    Activate

    Redeems the key with the license service (or press Enter); the tools change at the next Revit start.

  6. 6
    All LandForm commands are available.

    Status line; during an activation it reports the contact with the license service, then the error or the new status.

  7. 7
    Close

    Closes the window.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use License

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → About panel → LandForm ▾ → License.

  2. 02

    Read the status. The badge at the top tells you where the computer stands: LICENSED, LICENSE REQUIRED, LICENSE EXPIRED, LICENSE DISABLED, RE-VALIDATION NEEDED or, just after an activation, ACTIVATED. The card below says whether the tools are available and, for a licensed computer, whether all tools are included or some are greyed out on the ribbon.

    A licensed computer also shows how it is licensed: an Autodesk App Store subscription verified for the Autodesk Account signed in to Revit, or a LandForm license valid through a given date.

  3. 03

    Subscribe. When a license is required or has expired, the purchase card names the shop for the one-year subscription and the Buy on … button opens it in your browser. The App Store edition sends you to the LandForm listing on the Autodesk App Store, where the subscription is verified automatically with the Autodesk Account you use in Revit. The website edition sends you to landformautomation.com, and the license key arrives by email.

    Email support opens a message to LandForm with the computer name already in the subject line.

  4. 04

    Activate a key. Paste the key into the License key field and press Activate (or Enter). The window reports "Contacting the license service..." and then either the error the service returned or the new status.

  5. 05

    Restart Revit. After a successful activation, a verified subscription or a successful Check again, the badge reads ACTIVATED and the window asks you to restart Revit. The LandForm ribbon is built when Revit starts, so the tools appear after the next start.

  6. 06

    Check again. If the status says the license service could not be reached, press Check again in the footer; the window also re-checks on its own when the startup check did not get an answer. Press Close when you are done.

What you get

Once the computer is licensed, Revit starts with the full LandForm tab and the License window confirms LICENSED with the source of the license and, for a key, its end date. A signed copy of the last answer from the license service is kept on the computer, so LandForm keeps working for up to 14 days without a connection; after that the window shows RE-VALIDATION NEEDED until you reconnect and restart Revit.

Good to know

Tips

  • Already subscribed on the Autodesk App Store but still seeing LICENSE REQUIRED? Sign in to Revit with the Autodesk Account that holds the subscription, then restart Revit.
  • A key can be activated on another computer later; the license service tells you if the key's seats are used up, and support can help.
  • LICENSE DISABLED means the publisher switched this computer off; the window shows only the support button. Email support with your company name and the computer name shown in the window.
  • The italic "License service:" line at the bottom of the window repeats the service's own explanation (pending approval, no matching record, unreachable service) so you can quote it to support.
Control reference · 6 controls

Every control and what it does

License6 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Buy on …Button

Opens the shop for the one-year subscription in your browser: the Autodesk App Store listing in the App Store edition, landformautomation.com in the website edition. Shown while a license is required or expired.

Email supportButton

Opens a new email to LandForm support with the computer name in the subject.

License keyInput

The key from your purchase, license or renewal email (LF-XXXX-XXXX-XXXX). Letters are converted to upper case as you type.

ActivateButton

Redeems the key for this computer with the license service and shows the new status; the tools load at the next Revit start.

Check againButton

Asks the license service for a fresh answer. Shown only while the computer is not licensed.

CloseButton

Closes the window.

Back to tool index ↑
02

LandForm ribbon panel

Terrain

Shape the ground: studio editing, mounds and point sculpting on toposolids.

Terrain · Terrain Studio

Terrain Studio

Open a Floor or Toposolid in a 3D editor over the Revit view, sculpt and grade it with live contours and cut and fill, then save the result back to the same element.

Terrain Studio is where you shape ground the way you would on a physical model: brush the surface up and down, drop in level pads, run graded paths across a slope and pin contours at fixed levels. Every change is a preview until you press Save to Revit, so you can try, undo and compare freely. When you save, LandForm writes the new heights into the original element, keeps a cut and fill history on it, and can create new Toposolids where you asked for them.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelTerrain Studio

Button tooltip: “Sculpt and grade terrain in a dockable 3D editor with live contours.”
Before you start
  • One or more Floors or Toposolids (Toposolid needs Revit 2024 or later) visible in a plan or 3D view. The tool does not start on a sheet.
  • Select the surfaces first if you know which ones you want; with nothing selected, Terrain Studio asks whether to pick one or load every visible Floor and Toposolid. Hide anything you do not want edited before you choose the second option.
  • A Toposolid whose type has a Variable layer cannot be reshaped by Revit. The studio warns you and offers a copy of the type without the variable layer, another type, or carrying on.
  • Decide the brush grid spacing up front: it sets how far apart the new points are under each brush stroke, and finer spacing means more points to save.
Tutorial video

Watch Terrain Studio in action

Video coming soon

Terrain Studio walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 12 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Terrain Studio: Terrain Studio sculpting a site, with contours, the elevation heatmap and cut and fill showing
Terrain Studio sculpting a site, with contours, the elevation heatmap and cut and fill showing · 12 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Brush grid spacing (m)

    Sets how far apart the new points are under each brush stroke.

  2. 2
    Sculpt to Orbit

    The tool buttons: Sculpt, brush settings, Flatten, Smooth, Add pad, Cutter, Add path, Add contour, Outline and Orbit.

  3. 3
    Sculpt brush

    Drag upward on the terrain to raise it or downward to lower it; [ and ] resize the brush.

  4. 4
    Display toolbar

    Switches on contours, the heatmap, flow and slope arrows, labels, CAD guides, Section cut and Saved views.

  5. 5
    Elevation (m)

    Colour scale for the elevation heatmap, from the lowest to the highest ground.

  6. 6
    Cut & fill

    Live cut, fill and net volume for the current edits, with History once the surface has saved revisions.

  7. 7
    Reset all edits and Undo

    Clears every unsaved edit, or steps back one edit.

  8. 8
    Save to Revit

    Writes the new heights into the original element (Ctrl+Enter); larger edits offer a choice of routes.

  9. 9
    Reload geometry

    Discards unsaved edits and reads the surface from Revit again.

  10. 10
    Studies, Export terrain and Import

    Save, load or compare a design, export the terrain, or import a saved study as a new Toposolid.

  11. 11
    View buttons

    Zoom extents, top view and 3D view.

  12. 12
    Sync view, Shortcuts, Auto-hide panels

    Follow the active Revit 3D view, change the keyboard shortcuts, and collapse the tool settings while you orbit or zoom.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Terrain Studio

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Terrain Studio.

  2. 02

    Load the surfaces. Start the tool with the surfaces selected, or choose Pick one surface or All visible floors and Toposolids in the dialog. LandForm reads the geometry and opens the studio over the Revit view, with the rest of the view ghosted around the terrain for context.

    With several surfaces loaded they edit as one mesh: a stroke or grading design changes whichever surface lies under it.

  3. 03

    Sculpt by hand. Choose Sculpt in the bottom action strip and drag upward on the terrain to raise it or downward to lower it. Open the brush settings next to it to set Brush radius (m) and the shape (Circle, Oval, Rectangle, Square); [ and ] resize the brush and Space rotates it by 15°.

    Flatten pulls the ground under the brush to the picked level, and Smooth evens out a rough patch. The m box at the left of the strip is the brush grid spacing.

  4. 04

    Add a pad. Choose Add pad, pick a Pad shape (closed polyline, circle, rectangle, square or a single spot level) and click it on the terrain, or use Pick from Revit to follow a model or detail line. Enter the Pad elevation (m), choose how the Surrounding terrain meets it (Cut / fill embankment, Smooth transition or Straight cut · vertical sides) and set the cut and fill slopes. Press Add pad to stage it.

    Cutter opens the same tool already set to a straight cut, for a flat excavation with vertical sides.

  5. 05

    Add a path. Choose Add path, click the route points and right-click to finish. Set the Centerline (polyline, smooth curve or tangent arcs), Path width (m), shoulders and Crossfall (%), then pick a Grade control: a fixed slope, an end elevation, follow the terrain, or a Design profile you edit in the profile window. Press Add path.

    Turn on Auto-join intersecting paths to blend crossings and T-junctions into paths you have already drawn.

  6. 06

    Hold a contour. Choose Add contour, draw the line, give it a Contour elevation (m) or click individual point labels to give points their own heights, set the Influence width each side (m) and press Add contour. The ground grades between the contour and the existing terrain across that width.

  7. 07

    Check the design. Use the display toolbar along the top to switch on contours, the elevation heatmap, downhill flow arrows or slope grade arrows (amber below the minimum, red above the maximum you set). The Cut & fill card shows cut, fill and net volume for the current edits. Open Section cut and press Draw section line to cut through the terrain; 2D section shows the same cut at true scale.

  8. 08

    Save to Revit. Press Save to Revit (Ctrl+Enter). Sculpting and small edits are written straight away, changing only the touched points. For larger edits a chooser opens with the recommended route first; see the section below. A progress bar runs while Revit works, then the studio closes and an Apply complete notice summarises what was written.

    Prefer New Toposolid when you want a fresh element built from the preview and the source left untouched.

What you get

The edited Floors and Toposolids carry the new shape as their own points, so Revit's shape-editing tools still work on them. Points Revit refuses are skipped and listed in the completion notice instead of cancelling the whole save. Each save adds a revision to the surface's cut and fill history and fills the LF_Terrain parameters on the element (for example LF_Terrain Cut Volume, LF_Terrain Fill Volume, LF_Terrain Net Volume and the overall totals since the first tracked save), with schedules named LF Terrain - Cut and Fill - … and LF Terrain - Cut and Fill History added to the project. With several surfaces loaded, the whole save is one Undo step named "LF-Terrain Studio: Apply Changes to … Surfaces".

More about Terrain Studio

The workspace at a glance

  • Bottom action strip. Studies (save, load, compare or import a design as a new Toposolid), Export terrain (PNG image, contours as DWG or Illustrator, LandXML surface, DWG mesh), Reload geometry, the brush grid spacing, the tool buttons from Sculpt to Orbit, then Reset all edits, Undo, New Toposolid and Save to Revit.
  • Tool settings panel. Appears at the left while Add pad, Cutter, Add path, Add contour or Outline is active. ⌃ Hide collapses it and × closes the tool.
  • Display toolbar. Along the top: contours and their appearance, heatmap, flow and slope arrows, labels, view context, CAD guides (draped linked or imported CAD with snaps and Link CAD…), Section cut and Saved views.
  • Cut & fill card. Live mesh estimate of cut, fill and net volume, with History once the surface has saved revisions.
  • View and window buttons. Top right: zoom extents, top view and 3D view, then Maximize workspace, Move to the next screen (with a second monitor), Fit to Revit view and Return to Revit · Keep pending edits.
  • Top left. Sync view follows the active Revit 3D view, Shortcuts opens the key settings and Auto-hide panels collapses the tool settings while you orbit or zoom.
  • Status bar. Along the bottom edge, it tells you what the current tool expects next.
More about Terrain Studio

Save to Revit: the four routes

  • Apply point by point. Writes only the changed and new points and keeps every untouched point exactly. Fastest when the edit touches a small part of the surface; this is what sculpting always uses.
  • Apply to existing surface · rebuild, no split lines. Resets the surface and re-adds all its points plus the edit in one step. Cheaper when the edit covers most of the surface. Cuts, voids and the cut and fill report are kept; existing split lines are dropped.
  • Apply to existing surface · rebuild with split lines. The same rebuild, then redraws your split lines outside the edit one by one. Can take minutes on surfaces with many lines.
  • Create new Toposolid. Builds a new element from the preview points in the type you choose under Type for the new Toposolid. The source stays unchanged, its cuts are repeated where Revit allows, and the cut and fill history continues on the new element.
Good to know

Tips

  • Return to Revit · Keep pending edits (the close button at the top right) only hides the studio. Run Terrain Studio again on the same surface and your unsaved edits are still there; choosing a different surface asks before discarding them.
  • Reload geometry discards unsaved edits and the studio undo history and reads the surface again, which you need after changing it in Revit.
  • History on the Cut & fill card lists every saved revision, starting with the original surface. Use as current on a row rebuilds the surface in Revit exactly as that version, and Export Excel or Export CSV saves the report.
  • Outline draws a new Toposolid boundary on the terrain, snapping to the top faces of slabs, kerbs and walls, and Create Toposolid makes it immediately with the type and level of the surface underneath. The terrain itself is not changed.
  • Keyboard shortcuts are listed and can be changed under Shortcuts at the top left. Defaults include S Sculpt, F Flatten, M Smooth, D pad, G path, N contour, T Outline, X section and Ctrl+Z undo.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Mounds · Mound Factory

Mound Factory

Place a smooth, preset-shaped mound or depression on a toposolid or floor, preview it on screen, then apply it as real surface points.

Mound Factory is the quickest way to add a berm, a play mound, a planting hill or a shallow swale to existing terrain. You choose a plan silhouette and a section profile, set the size with three numbers, watch the point field preview over the surface, and press Apply. The result is editable Revit geometry: LandForm adds shape points to the surface, so Revit's own tools still work afterwards.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelMounds ▾Mound Factory

Button tooltip: “Create preset landscape mounds or depressions on an editable surface.”
Before you start
  • A Toposolid (Revit 2024 and later) or an editable Floor in the active view. The surface must not be in a group and, in a workshared model, must be editable by you.
  • A plan or 3D view where you can see the spot the mound should sit on. 3D works well because you can judge the height while you preview.
  • Rough target numbers: how wide the mound should be, how high, and how fine the point grid needs to be. Spacing of 0.2 to 0.5 m suits most landscape mounds.
Tutorial video

Watch Mound Factory in action

Video coming soon

Mound Factory walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Mound Factory: Mound Factory toolbar with a Tadpole shape, waiting for a surface pick
Mound Factory toolbar with a Tadpole shape, waiting for a surface pick · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Move / Pick Location

    Click it, then click the toposolid or floor where the mound centre should be.

  2. 2
    Status line

    Tells you what to pick next; here it asks for a surface and a snapped mound centre.

  3. 3
    Shape

    The plan silhouette. Press Space to rotate a non-circular shape in 15° steps.

  4. 4
    Pick Outline

    Returns to Revit to pick model lines or a filled region whose outline becomes the Custom shape.

  5. 5
    Diameter

    Mound width in metres. Long-press and drag vertically to scrub the value.

  6. 6
    Height

    Summit height in metres; a negative value makes a depression.

  7. 7
    Spacing

    Distance between the surface points that will be added, in metres.

  8. 8
    Profile

    The section shape, such as a soft Sphere dome or a flat-topped plateau.

  9. 9
    Edit

    Opens the current profile in the live section window so you can reshape it.

  10. 10
    Preview

    Redraws the point-field preview without changing the model.

  11. 11
    Grips

    Shows the summit-grip commands; Bezier Base shows the base anchors for reshaping the outline.

  12. 12
    Apply

    Adds the previewed mound to the surface as shape points in one undo step.

  13. 13
    0 points

    How many points the mound adds.

  14. 14
    Keys

    Opens the keyboard shortcut settings for size, preview, pick and apply.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Mound Factory

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Mounds ▾ → Mound Factory.

  2. 02

    Pick the location. Click Move / Pick Location, then click the toposolid or floor where the mound centre should be. The toolbar reappears and the status line confirms the surface.

  3. 03

    Choose the plan shape. Open Shape and pick a preset, or choose Custom and trace an outline you have already drawn as model lines or a filled region.

    Press Space to rotate a non-circular shape in 15° steps.

  4. 04

    Set the size. Enter Diameter, Height and Spacing. Long-press any of the three boxes and drag vertically to scrub the value while the preview follows.

    Use a negative Height to make a depression.

  5. 05

    Choose the profile. Open Profile and pick the section shape. Sphere gives a soft dome; a plateau profile keeps a flat top for seating or play equipment.

  6. 06

    Preview. Press Preview and look at the point field on screen. Switch to a 3D view if you want to judge the height against nearby elements; the preview is redrawn when you change a value.

  7. 07

    Refine with grips (optional). Turn on Grips to show the summit grips, then use + Grip, Set Height and Select Grips to raise or lower parts of the mound. Turn on Bezier Base to drag the base anchors and reshape the outline.

  8. 08

    Apply. Press Apply. LandForm adds the shape points to the surface in one undoable step named "LF-Mound Factory: Apply".

What you get

The toposolid or floor now carries the mound as native shape points, with the summit at the height you entered and the base blending into the existing surface at the chosen diameter. The point count on the status line tells you how many points were added. Revit's own Modify Sub Elements tools, Smooth Mound and Point Grip can all edit it further.

Good to know

Tips

  • Keep Spacing coarse (0.5 m or more) while you experiment and tighten it just before the final Apply; dense previews take longer to generate.
  • Mound Factory stores its settings on the surface, so re-running the tool on the same mound reloads the shape, profile and grips you used.
  • For a run of similar mounds, set the numbers once and only repeat Move / Pick Location and Apply for each position.
  • The heights shown on summit grips are metres above the Project Base Point, matching Revit spot elevations. Click a grip label on screen to type an exact level.
  • If the preview does not appear, check that the surface is visible and not hidden by a filter, and that the view is not a sheet or a drafting view.
Control reference · 31 controls

Every control and what it does

Regular Mound20 controls
ControlTypeFunction
KeysButton

Opens the Mound keyboard shortcut settings.

Plan PresetSelector

Chooses the plan silhouette, or Pick Outline to trace a custom outline from the model. Press ` to cycle the presets.

Pick OutlineButton

Returns to Revit so you can pick model lines or a filled region; their outline becomes the Custom plan silhouette.

Pick SurfaceButton

Returns to Revit so you can click the surface and set the mound centre.

DiameterInput

Mound diameter in metres. Type a value or long-press and drag vertically to scrub it.

HeightInput

Mound height in metres; negative values make a depression. Type a value or long-press and drag vertically.

SpacingInput

Distance between the surface points that will be added, in metres. Type a value or long-press and drag vertically.

GripsOption

Shows the summit-grip commands (+ Grip, − Grip, Set Height, Select Grips) on the contextual row.

Bezier BaseOption

Shows the base anchors. Dragging an anchor reshapes the closed Bezier outline with automatic smooth tangents.

Profile PresetSelector

Chooses a standard or fixed section profile for the mound.

EditButton

Opens the current profile in the shared live section window so you can reshape it.

PreviewButton

Redraws the point-field preview without changing the model.

ApplyButton

Writes the previewed mound to the selected surface as shape points.

CloseButton

Closes Mound Factory and removes the preview.

+ GripButton

Pick a point on the mound to insert a summit grip there.

− GripButton

Removes the selected summit grip.

Set HeightButton

Applies the Height value to the selected summit grips.

Grip ElevationInput

Elevation of the selected summit grip in metres above the Project Base Point. Type a value to move the grip there; select grips with Tab or by picking them.

Select GripsButton

Selects several summit grips with hover highlighting.

+ Base PointButton

Inserts a Bezier base anchor at the closest point on the outline.

Mound Shortcut Settings11 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Diameter Down ShortcutInput

Key that decreases Diameter by one step. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Diameter Up ShortcutInput

Key that increases Diameter by one step. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Height Down ShortcutInput

Key that decreases Height by one step. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Height Up ShortcutInput

Key that increases Height by one step. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Spacing Down ShortcutInput

Key that decreases Spacing by one step. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Spacing Up ShortcutInput

Key that increases Spacing by one step. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Pick Location ShortcutInput

Key that starts Move / Pick Location. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Preview ShortcutInput

Key that refreshes the preview. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Apply ShortcutInput

Key that applies the mound. Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

ResetButton

Restores every shortcut to its default key.

DoneButton

Saves the shortcuts and returns to the toolbar.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Mounds · Smooth Mound

Smooth Mound

Draw a path across a toposolid or floor, set the height at each station along it, and let LandForm rebuild the surface as a smooth ridge that blends into the surface boundary.

Smooth Mound is for landforms that follow a line rather than sit on a point: a berm along a boundary, a curving bund, a long play mound or a shallow ridge that screens a car park. You click the stations of the path directly on the surface, raise or lower each one, choose how the section falls away from the crest to the edge of the surface, and watch a live preview of points or contours. Pressing Run writes the result into the surface as native shape points, so Revit's own Modify Sub Elements tools still work afterwards.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelMounds ▾Smooth Mound

Button tooltip: “Shape a surface from an editable station path.”
Before you start
  • A Toposolid (Revit 2024 and later) or a Floor whose shape can be edited. The sketch of that surface becomes the outer boundary the mound blends into.
  • A plan or 3D view where you can click along the line of the crest. The tool refuses to start on a sheet.
  • A rough idea of the crest heights and how fine the point grid should be. Spacing between 0.25 and 0.5 m suits most mounds; the tool warns before it writes very dense grids.
  • Adaptive Points must be visible in the view; LandForm turns the category on for you when it can.
Tutorial video

Watch Smooth Mound in action

Video coming soon

Smooth Mound walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Smooth Mound: Smooth Mound toolbar waiting for the surface pick
Smooth Mound toolbar waiting for the surface pick · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Status line

    Tells you the next step, then what the preview contains and how many shape points were written.

  2. 2
    Z

    Height of the selected station in metres above the Project Base Point; the arrows nudge it by 0.10 m.

  3. 3
    + / −

    Click the surface to insert a station on the nearest segment, or remove the selected one.

  4. 4
    Profile

    The section from crest to boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau.

  5. 5
    Edit

    Opens the live section window, where you drag the curve to change fullness, shoulder width or chamfer.

  6. 6
    Spacing

    Distance between the shape points that will be written, in metres.

  7. 7
    View

    Shows the preview as Points or Isolines.

  8. 8
    Contours

    Contour interval of the Isolines preview; active only while View is Isolines.

  9. 9
    Stations / points

    How many stations the path has and how many points the preview contains.

  10. 10
    Run

    Rebuilds the surface from the preview in one undoable step; it then reads Run Again.

  11. 11
    Keys

    Shows or changes every keyboard shortcut.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Smooth Mound

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Mounds ▾ → Smooth Mound.

  2. 02

    Pick the surface. The pick starts as soon as the toolbar opens: click the toposolid or floor you want to shape. The status line changes from "Step 1" to "Step 2" and the surface boundary is highlighted.

    If you shaped this surface with Smooth Mound before, the previous path and settings are restored from the surface and you can carry on editing them.

  3. 03

    Draw the path. Click the stations of the crest line on the surface, one after another, then press Esc to finish. At least two stations are needed; the draft line appears after the second click.

    To start the line again later, press the Draw path shortcut (Ctrl+Alt+D by default) and click a new set of stations.

  4. 04

    Set station heights. Each station gets an adaptive point grip in the model with an elevation chip beside it. Select a station by clicking its grip, or step through them with Tab and Shift+Tab, then type its level in the Z box, nudge it with the arrows (0.10 m per step), or click the chip on screen and type the exact value.

    Z is metres above the Project Base Point, so the numbers match Revit spot elevations.

  5. 05

    Move, add or remove stations. Drag a grip with Revit's own Move tool to shift a station in plan or height; the preview follows. Press + and click the surface to insert a station on the nearest segment of the path, or − to remove the selected one (the path always keeps at least two).

  6. 06

    Choose the section. Open Profile and pick Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau. Press Edit to open the live section window, where you drag the curve or its grips to change the fullness, shoulder width or chamfer; the toolbar follows your changes.

  7. 07

    Set the grid and the preview. Enter Spacing, the distance between the shape points that will be written (0.05 to 20 m). Under View, choose Points to see the point field or Isolines to see contours at the Contours interval you enter.

    The preview redraws itself about a third of a second after every change; the status line and the "stations | points" counter tell you what it contains.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run (or Ctrl+Alt+Enter). LandForm generates the final point field at your spacing and rebuilds the surface in one undoable step named "LF-Smooth Mound: Apply Shape". When it finishes, the status line reports how many shape points were written and the button changes to Run Again, which starts a fresh surface pick.

What you get

The toposolid or floor now carries the ridge as native shape points: the crest runs through your stations at the heights you set, and the section you chose falls away to the surface boundary, which keeps its original levels. The path and its settings are stored on the surface, so running Smooth Mound on it again reloads them for further editing. Revit's Undo removes the whole rebuild in one step, and Point Grip or Modify Sub Elements can refine the result.

Good to know

Tips

  • If the preview would need more than about 3,500 points, LandForm draws it at a coarser spacing and says so. Run still uses the spacing you entered, after asking you to confirm, so expect it to take longer than the preview did.
  • Spacing of 0.2 m or less (0.4 m on Revit 2024, where toposolid edits are much slower) triggers a warning before the surface is written. For a large area, use a coarser grid or split the work into several mounds.
  • Run is only available while the preview is current. If the status line says the settings or the surface changed, wait for the preview to refresh and press Run again.
  • Press Keys to see or change every shortcut. Defaults: Tab / Shift+Tab select the next or previous station, Ctrl+Alt+Up / Ctrl+Alt+Down change its height, Ctrl+Alt+S and Ctrl+Alt+C step Spacing and Contours (add Shift to step down), Ctrl+Alt++ / Ctrl+Alt+- add or remove a station, Ctrl+Alt+M moves the selected station to a new click, Ctrl+Alt+P refreshes the preview. Shortcuts pause while you are typing in a box.
  • The Contours box is only active while View is set to Isolines.
  • If the grips do not appear, check that the view or its template does not hide the Adaptive Points category.
Control reference · 33 controls

Every control and what it does

Smooth Mound17 controls
ControlTypeFunction
KeysButton

Opens the Smooth Mound keyboard shortcut settings.

Add stationButton

Pick a point on the surface to insert a station on the nearest path segment. Use Keys to edit its shortcut.

Remove selected stationButton

Removes the selected station. At least two stations are retained. Use Keys to edit its shortcut.

Station ElevationInput

Elevation of the selected station in metres above the Project Base Point. Typing a value moves the station and refreshes the preview.

Raise StationButton

Raises the selected station by 0.10 m.

Lower StationButton

Lowers the selected station by 0.10 m.

SpacingInput

Distance between the shape points that will be written, in metres (0.05 to 20).

Increase SpacingButton

Increases Spacing by 0.05 m.

Decrease SpacingButton

Decreases Spacing by 0.05 m.

Section ProfileSelector

Chooses the cross-section curve from the crest to the surface boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau.

EditButton

Opens the live Mound Profile window, where dragging the curve or its grips adjusts fullness, plateau width or chamfer.

ContourInput

Contour interval of the Isolines preview, in metres (0.05 to 20). Active only when View is Isolines.

Increase ContourButton

Increases the contour interval by 0.05 m.

Decrease ContourButton

Decreases the contour interval by 0.05 m.

Preview ModeSelector

Chooses whether the preview shows the generated points or isolines.

RunButton

Writes the previewed surface to the selected host as shape points. Reads Run Again after a rebuild, which starts a new surface pick. Use Keys to edit its shortcut.

CloseButton

Closes Smooth Mound and removes the preview and station grips.

Smooth Mound Shortcut Settings16 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Previous Station ShortcutInput

Key that selects the previous station (default Shift+Tab). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Next Station ShortcutInput

Key that selects the next station (default Tab). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Station Down ShortcutInput

Key that lowers the selected station by 0.10 m (default Ctrl+Alt+Down). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Station Up ShortcutInput

Key that raises the selected station by 0.10 m (default Ctrl+Alt+Up). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Spacing Down ShortcutInput

Key that decreases Spacing by 0.05 m (default Ctrl+Alt+Shift+S). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Spacing Up ShortcutInput

Key that increases Spacing by 0.05 m (default Ctrl+Alt+S). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Contour Down ShortcutInput

Key that decreases the contour interval by 0.05 m (default Ctrl+Alt+Shift+C). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Contour Up ShortcutInput

Key that increases the contour interval by 0.05 m (default Ctrl+Alt+C). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Add Station ShortcutInput

Key that starts the add-station pick (default Ctrl+Alt++). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Remove Station ShortcutInput

Key that removes the selected station (default Ctrl+Alt+-). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Draw Path ShortcutInput

Key that starts drawing a new path on the surface (default Ctrl+Alt+D). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Move Station ShortcutInput

Key that lets you click a new plan location for the selected station (default Ctrl+Alt+M). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Preview ShortcutInput

Key that refreshes the preview (default Ctrl+Alt+P). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

Run ShortcutInput

Key that runs the surface rebuild (default Ctrl+Alt+Enter). Backspace or Delete sets it to Off.

ResetButton

Restores every shortcut to its default key.

DoneButton

Saves the shortcuts and returns to the toolbar.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Auto Mound · Auto Mound

Auto Mound

Turn a whole floor or toposolid into a mound in one click, or raise a mound on just one part of a larger surface: LandForm finds the long axis of the outline, raises an arc along it and blends the sides down to the boundary.

Auto Mound is the fastest way to make a berm or planting mound. There is no path to draw: the tool reads the outline, derives an end-to-end axis with a few grips on it, and shows a live isoline preview at the Height you set. After you pick the surface, Auto Mound asks for the outline the mound rises from. Pick another floor, toposolid or subdivision on it and only that part of the surface is shaped, or click the same surface again to mound all of it. Base switches the outline to a loop of picked edges or lines, or one you draw. Tick Invert and the same shape becomes a pond, basin or swale. Nothing is written to the model until you press Run.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelAuto Mound ▾Auto Mound

Button tooltip: “Create an automatic mound fitted to an editable surface boundary.”
Before you start
  • One editable Floor or Toposolid (Toposolid needs Revit 2024 or later). Either sketch it to the footprint of the mound, or keep a larger surface and give the mound its own Base outline. An elongated outline gives a ridge; a circular outline gives a dome with a single centre grip.
  • A plan or 3D view where you can click the surface. The tool will not start on a sheet.
  • The maximum height of the mound and the point Spacing you want. The defaults are 1.0 m high with points 0.25 m apart.
Tutorial video

Watch Auto Mound in action

Video coming soon

Auto Mound walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 10 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Auto Mound: Auto Mound toolbar waiting for a surface pick
Auto Mound toolbar waiting for a surface pick · 10 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick a surface to begin.

    The status line; click the floor or toposolid to turn into a mound.

  2. 2
    Height

    The summit height; the arrows step it by 0.10 m.

  3. 3
    Add grip / Remove grip

    Change the number of axis grips and redistribute the arc evenly along the axis.

  4. 4
    Profile

    The cross-section from the axis to the boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau.

  5. 5
    Edit

    Opens the live section window to adjust the profile curve.

  6. 6
    Invert

    Sinks the shape below the surface for a pond, basin or swale.

  7. 7
    Spacing

    Distance between the shape points LandForm will add.

  8. 8
    Display

    Shows the preview as Isolines or Points.

  9. 9
    0 stations | 0 points

    Counts the axis stations and shape points in the current preview.

  10. 10
    Run

    Writes the previewed mound to the surface in one undoable step.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Auto Mound

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Auto Mound ▾ → Auto Mound.

  2. 02

    Pick the surface. Revit asks you to select the floor or toposolid to shape as soon as the toolbar opens.

    A surface that already carries an Auto Mound reloads its saved settings.

  3. 03

    Pick the base outline. Revit then asks for the outline the mound rises from. Click a floor, toposolid, toposolid subdivision or filled region on the surface, and only the area inside its outline is shaped. Click the same surface again to mound all of it instead. Base then reads Whole surface. LandForm places the axis with five grips and draws the preview straight away.

    To outline the base another way, change Base and the matching pick starts at once. With Picked edges, click model edges that go all the way round, then Finish. With Model lines, select model lines, detail lines or a filled region that form a closed outline, then Finish. With Drawn outline, click the corners on the surface, then click the first corner again or press Esc to close it. The outline is laid onto the surface and trimmed to its edge, and the axis and grips are worked out from it. The button beside Base picks the outline again. Auto Mound keeps an outline method for the next mound in the same Revit session. A new session always starts with the outline pick, so Auto Mound never reshapes a whole surface unless you click it.

  4. 04

    Set the height. Type the summit height in Height, step it by 0.10 m with the arrows, or press - and + while the toolbar is open. The preview refreshes a moment after each change.

  5. 05

    Shape the axis. Drag any grip in the model to move the axis or change its height there; the preview follows. Add grip and Remove grip change the number of grips and redistribute the arc evenly along the axis. An elongated surface keeps at least three grips; a circular one has a single centre grip.

  6. 06

    Choose the section. Profile sets the cross-section from the axis down to the boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere (the default) or Plateau. Press Edit to adjust the curve in the live section window.

  7. 07

    Invert for a depression (optional). Tick Invert to sink the shape below the surface by the same height. The grips flip through the surface and keep any manual edits you made.

  8. 08

    Set the density and preview style. Spacing is the distance between the shape points LandForm will add. Display switches the preview between Isolines (drawn at 0.10 m intervals) and Points.

  9. 09

    Run. Press Run. LandForm writes the mound in one undoable step named "LF-Auto Mound: Apply Shape" and reports how many shape points it added. The button then reads Run Again, which starts another surface pick. To add another mound to the same surface, choose or re-pick a Base instead.

What you get

The surface is now a mound, or a basin if you inverted it, whose summit line runs along the derived axis at the height you set and falls to the existing boundary elevation with the profile you chose. With a Base outline, only the area inside it changes. The mound rises from the existing ground, sloped or not, and everything outside the outline keeps its shape points and elevations. A ring of points just outside the outline holds the ground there. The settings are stored on the element, so re-running Auto Mound on the same surface reloads them. The points are native shape points, so Revit's Modify Sub Elements tools keep working on them.

Good to know

Tips

  • The axis follows the outline: a strip or crescent gets its true centreline, a circle gets one centre height grip, and the arc is redistributed whenever you add or remove grips.
  • Height cannot go below 0.05 m. Use Invert rather than a negative value to make a hollow.
  • Spacing of 0.20 m or less triggers a warning before Run because of the number of shape points created; on Revit 2024, which edits toposolid points more slowly, the warning starts at 0.40 m.
  • Very dense previews are drawn at a coarser spacing to stay responsive. The status line says so, and Run still uses the spacing you entered.
  • The grips are Adaptive Points. LandForm turns the category on when the tool starts; if they stay hidden, use Utils › Adaptive Points in the Terrain panel.
  • To span several touching surfaces with one mound, use Composite Mound, which shares this toolbar.
Control reference · 14 controls

Every control and what it does

Inflate14 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Add gripButton

Adds an axis grip and redistributes the arc evenly along the axis.

Remove gripButton

Removes an axis grip and redistributes the arc. An elongated surface keeps at least three grips; a circular surface keeps its single centre grip.

BaseSelector

What the mound rises from: Whole surface, Floor / toposolid, Picked edges, Model lines or Drawn outline. Choosing an outline starts its pick.

Pick base againButton

Picks the base outline again with the current Base method.

HeightInput

Maximum mound height in metres, 0.05 m or more. The arrows and the - / + keys step it by 0.10 m.

Display SpacingInput

Distance in metres between the shape points used for the preview and the final mound.

Increase SpacingButton

Increases Spacing by 0.05 m.

Decrease SpacingButton

Decreases Spacing by 0.05 m.

Section ProfileSelector

Cross-section from the axis to the boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau.

EditButton

Opens the live section window to shape the selected profile; the preview follows.

InvertOption

Sink the shape below the surface by the Height instead of raising it, for a pond, basin or swale. The grips flip through the surface and keep any manual edits.

Display SelectorSelector

Shows the preview as Isolines or as generated Points.

RunButton

Writes the previewed mound to the selected surface as shape points. Reads Run Again afterwards to start on another surface.

CloseButton

Closes Auto Mound and removes the preview.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Auto Mound · Composite Mound

Composite Mound

Raise one continuous mound across several touching floors or toposolids, so the landform reads as a single shape while every element stays separate.

Use Composite Mound when a mound has to cross a boundary you cannot remove: a berm that spans two toposolids, or a planting hill shared between a floor and the terrain around it. LandForm combines the outer extents of the surfaces you select, derives one end-to-end axis for the whole area and previews a single point field across all of them. When you press Run it builds a temporary mound, drapes every selected surface onto it and removes the temporary geometry again.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelAuto Mound ▾Composite Mound

Button tooltip: “Create one automatic mound across several editable surfaces.”
Before you start
  • At least two editable Floors or Toposolids that touch in plan (Toposolid needs Revit 2024 or later). Together they must form one usable area.
  • A plan or 3D view where you can select them. The tool will not start on a sheet.
  • A Toposolid type and a level in the project. LandForm builds the temporary mound as a Toposolid where it can and falls back to an exact temporary mesh otherwise.
  • The mound height and the point Spacing, which is written to every surface.
Tutorial video

Watch Composite Mound in action

Video coming soon

Composite Mound walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Composite Mound: Composite Mound toolbar waiting for the surfaces to be selected
Composite Mound toolbar waiting for the surfaces to be selected · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick a surface to begin.

    Status line; it asks you to select the touching floors or toposolids, and after Run reports how many surfaces were draped.

  2. 2
    0 stations | 0 points

    Counts of the axis grips and of the preview points.

  3. 3
    Height

    Summit height in metres; the arrows or the - and + keys step it by 0.10 m.

  4. 4
    + / −

    Add grip and Remove grip change how many axis grips there are; the arc is redistributed evenly each time.

  5. 5
    Profile

    Cross-section from the axis to the boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau.

  6. 6
    Edit

    Opens the live section window to shape the selected profile.

  7. 7
    Invert

    Sinks the shape below the surfaces by the same height, for a basin.

  8. 8
    Spacing

    Distance in metres between the shape points written to every selected surface.

  9. 9
    Run

    Drapes every selected surface onto the previewed mound and writes the shape points.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Composite Mound

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Auto Mound ▾ → Composite Mound.

  2. 02

    Select the surfaces. Revit asks you to select touching floors or toposolids. Click each one and finish the selection. If fewer than two are picked the status line asks you to select again. LandForm estimates the combined outer boundary, places the axis with five grips and shows a point preview across every surface.

  3. 03

    Set the height. Type the summit height in Height, or step it by 0.10 m with the arrows or the - and + keys. The preview refreshes a moment later.

  4. 04

    Shape the axis. Drag the grips in the model to move the axis or change its height, or use Add grip and Remove grip to change how many there are. The arc is redistributed evenly each time.

  5. 05

    Choose the section. Profile picks the cross-section from the axis to the boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau. Edit opens the live section window.

  6. 06

    Invert for a basin (optional). Tick Invert to sink the shape below the surfaces by the same height while keeping any grip edits.

  7. 07

    Set the spacing. Spacing controls the point grid written to each surface. Composite Mound always previews points; there is no isoline display here.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run. LandForm creates the temporary mound, drapes each selected surface onto it, verifies the requested grid on every surface and deletes the temporary mound. The status line reports how many surfaces were draped and how many shape points were written.

What you get

Each selected floor or toposolid now carries its share of the mound as native shape points, and together they form one continuous surface across the joint. The elements are not joined or replaced; each keeps its own type, level and boundary. A surface that did not overlap the mound is left unchanged and named in the status line. The whole run is one Revit undo group, "LF-Composite Mound: Create Mound".

Good to know

Tips

  • Every surface must be editable and in the active document. If LandForm cannot build a complete boundary around the selection, the status line says so; close any gaps between the surfaces and try again.
  • Dense Spacing (0.20 m or less, or 0.40 m on Revit 2024) triggers a warning before Run, because every surface receives the grid. Committing the changes can take a moment on Revit 2024.
  • The grips are Adaptive Points. LandForm turns the category on when the tool starts; if they stay hidden, use Utils › Adaptive Points in the Terrain panel.
  • For a mound on a single surface use Auto Mound instead, which also offers an isoline preview.
Control reference · 12 controls

Every control and what it does

Inflate12 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Add gripButton

Adds an axis grip and redistributes the arc evenly along the axis.

Remove gripButton

Removes an axis grip and redistributes the arc; at least three grips are kept.

HeightInput

Maximum mound height in metres, 0.05 m or more. The arrows and the - / + keys step it by 0.10 m.

Display SpacingInput

Distance in metres between the shape points written to every selected surface.

Increase SpacingButton

Increases Spacing by 0.05 m.

Decrease SpacingButton

Decreases Spacing by 0.05 m.

Section ProfileSelector

Cross-section from the axis to the combined boundary: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau.

EditButton

Opens the live section window to shape the selected profile; the preview follows.

InvertOption

Sink the shape below the surface by the Height instead of raising it, for a pond, basin or swale. The grips flip through the surface and keep any manual edits.

Display SelectorSelector

Hidden in Composite Mound; the preview always shows points.

RunButton

Drapes every selected surface onto the previewed mound and writes the shape points.

CloseButton

Closes Composite Mound and removes the preview.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Sculpt Terrain · Point Grip

Point Grip

Click a few points on a toposolid or floor, give each one a height and a diameter, and apply the resulting mounds or hollows to the surface as shape points.

Point Grip is the quick way to shape a surface locally without drawing an outline first. Every click places a grip, called a station in the toolbar, that pushes the surface up (or pulls it down) within a round, oval or rectangular footprint. You see the result straight away as a preview of points and contours, adjust the grips from the toolbar or by dragging them in the model, and press Apply when the shape is right. Grips can also be chained into one continuous ridge with Connect grips.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelSculpt Terrain ▾Point Grip

Button tooltip: “Create local terrain mounds from manually placed adaptive point grips.”
Before you start
  • A Toposolid (Revit 2024 and later) or a Floor whose shape can be edited. Foundation slabs are not offered.
  • A plan or 3D view of the area; the tool does not start on a sheet.
  • Rough heights and footprints: the first grip starts at a peak 1.0 m above the surface with a 4.0 m diameter, and new grips copy the selected one.
  • Adaptive Points should be visible in the view, otherwise the grips you place cannot be seen or dragged. LandForm warns if the view hides them.
Tutorial video

Watch Point Grip in action

Video coming soon

Point Grip walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Point Grip: Point Grip Mound toolbar with one round grip previewed
Point Grip Mound toolbar with one round grip previewed · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    + / − / Station 1 / 1

    + picks more stations and − removes the selected one; the counter shows which station is selected.

  2. 2
    Z

    Peak level of the selected grip in metres above the Project Base Point; below the surface it makes a hollow.

  3. 3
    D

    Diameter of the selected grip's footprint, in metres.

  4. 4
    Height - / + Diameter [ / ]

    Reminds you of the keys that step the height and the diameter by 0.10 m.

  5. 5
    Shape

    Footprint of the selected grip: Round, Oval or Rectangle.

  6. 6
    D2 and Angle

    Second diameter and rotation for Oval and Rectangle footprints; greyed out for Round.

  7. 7
    Profile and Edit

    Chooses the section (Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau); Edit shapes it in the live profile window.

  8. 8
    Spacing

    Distance between the points that will be written, in metres (minimum 0.10).

  9. 9
    Preview

    Shows the preview as Points, Contours or Points + Contours.

  10. 10
    Contour interval

    Spacing of the preview contours, in metres.

  11. 11
    Keep boundary elevations

    Locks the outer edge of the surface at its current heights.

  12. 12
    Connect grips

    Blends all stations, in the order you placed them, into one smooth ridge.

  13. 13
    Apply

    Writes the mounds to the surface as shape points and keeps the toolbar open.

  14. 14
    Status line

    Confirms when the preview has been rebuilt and reports how many points were written.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Point Grip

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Sculpt Terrain ▾ → Point Grip.

  2. 02

    Place the first grip. Click a point on the toposolid or floor where the first peak should be. The toolbar opens with Station 1 / 1, the preview appears around the point, and Revit keeps asking for more points.

  3. 03

    Add more grips. Keep clicking the same surface to add stations; each new grip takes the height, diameter and shape of the selected one and becomes the selection. Press Esc when you have placed enough.

    Press + at any time to pick more stations, and − to remove the selected one (the last remaining grip cannot be removed).

  4. 04

    Set the selected grip. Click a grip in the model to select it, then type its peak level in Z (metres above the Project Base Point) or step it with the arrows, - and +. Set the footprint with D (arrows, [ and ]). Choose Oval or Rectangle under Shape to unlock D2, the second diameter, and Angle, the rotation in 5° steps.

    A Z below the surface pulls the ground down instead of raising it, which makes a hollow or pond. Each grip also shows an elevation chip in the view; click the chip to type the level in place.

  5. 05

    Move grips in the model. Drag a grip with Revit's Move tool, or select it and move it, to shift the station. Its base is re-projected onto the surface and the peak keeps its height above the ground, so the preview follows.

  6. 06

    Choose the section and the grid. Pick Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau under Profile, or press Edit to shape the section in the live profile window. Enter Spacing, the distance between the points LandForm will write (minimum 0.10 m).

  7. 07

    Tune the preview. Switch Preview between Points, Contours and Points + Contours, and set the Contour interval. Leave Keep boundary elevations on to lock the outer edge of the surface, and turn on Connect grips to blend all stations into one smooth ridge along the order you placed them.

  8. 08

    Apply. Press Apply. LandForm builds the full-resolution point field and edits the surface in one undoable step named "LF-Point Grip Mound: Apply Shape". The status line reports how many points were written and the toolbar stays open, so you can keep adjusting and apply again; press the X to finish.

What you get

The toposolid or floor now carries each mound or hollow as native shape points at the spacing you chose, with the boundary left at its original levels when Keep boundary elevations was on. The grips and settings are stored on the surface together with the edit. Revit's Undo removes an Apply in one step, and Modify Sub Elements or Smooth Mound can refine the result further.

Good to know

Tips

  • Shortcuts work while the toolbar has focus and no box is being edited: - / + step the height and [ / ] the diameter by 0.10 m.
  • Type a value and press Enter, or click elsewhere, to send it to the preview; the status line shows "Point Grip Mound preview ready." when it has been rebuilt.
  • The preview is capped at about 10,000 points so it stays responsive; Apply uses up to 100,000. If the preview looks coarse, the final surface will still be written at your Spacing.
  • D2 and Angle are greyed out for the Round shape, and Contour interval is greyed out while Preview is set to Points.
  • If a grip will not select or drag, check that the view or its template does not hide the Adaptive Points category.
Control reference · 14 controls

Every control and what it does

Point Grip Mound14 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Remove GripButton

Removes the selected station. Disabled while only one station remains.

ShapeSelector

Footprint of the selected grip: Round, Oval or Rectangle. Oval and Rectangle unlock the second diameter and the rotation.

ElevationInput

Peak elevation of the selected grip in metres above the Project Base Point. Arrows step 0.10 m; a value below the surface makes a hollow.

DiameterInput

Primary diameter of the footprint in metres. Arrows step 0.10 m.

Secondary DiameterInput

Second diameter for Oval and Rectangle footprints, in metres. Arrows step 0.10 m.

RotationInput

Rotation of an Oval or Rectangle footprint in degrees. Arrows step 5°.

SpacingInput

Distance between the shape points that will be written, in metres (minimum 0.10). Arrows step 0.05 m.

Profile ModeSelector

Cross-section used by the mound generator: Arc, Bezier, Half Sphere or Plateau.

EditButton

Opens the live profile editor, where dragging the curve or its grips sets fullness, plateau width or chamfer.

ApplyButton

Writes the previewed mounds to the selected surface as shape points and keeps the editor open.

PreviewSelector

Shows the preview as Points, Contours or Points + Contours without changing the model.

Contour IntervalInput

Spacing of the preview contours in metres (minimum 0.05). Active when the preview shows contours.

Keep boundary elevationsOption

Leaves the points on the floor or toposolid boundary at their current heights.

Connect gripsOption

Blends the stations, in the order they were placed, into one smooth long-profile mound instead of separate peaks.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Sculpt Terrain · Attract Lines

Attract Lines

Pull a floor or toposolid up or down to meet model lines drawn at known elevations, so the surface follows your design contours.

Attract Lines is the quickest way to grade a surface to a set of contours or spot levels you have drawn as lines. You draw model lines at the heights the ground should reach, pick the surface, click the lines, and LandForm generates a point grid whose elevations are pulled towards the lines within the Falloff distance and shaped by the Profile between them. The same toolbar has a Smooth mode that rebuilds a rough surface on a regular grid without any lines at all.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelSculpt Terrain ▾Attract Lines

Button tooltip: “Shape a floor or toposolid from elevated model lines.”
Before you start
  • An editable Floor or Toposolid (Toposolid needs Revit 2024 or later).
  • For Attract mode, model lines (detail lines are not picked up) that are level, each placed at the elevation the surface should reach there. Lines joined end to end at one level are picked as a single chain with one click.
  • The grid Spacing (0.5 m by default) and the Falloff distance over which a line's influence fades (5 m by default).
Tutorial video

Watch Attract Lines in action

Video coming soon

Attract Lines walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Attract Lines: Attract From Lines toolbar waiting for the surface pick
Attract From Lines toolbar waiting for the surface pick · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Status line

    Tells you the step: pick the surface first, then the contour lines; skipped lines are noted here.

  2. 2
    Attract

    Attract pulls the surface to picked lines; Smooth rebuilds it on a regular grid without lines.

  3. 3
    Spacing

    Grid spacing of the surface points, in metres.

  4. 4
    Falloff

    Distance in metres over which a line's influence fades; larger values give a wider blend.

  5. 5
    Weight

    How strongly the grid matches the lines, 0 to 1; it returns to 1 when a preview with lines is built.

  6. 6
    Profile

    Shape between contour elevations: Straight, Arc, Cubic or Bulge.

  7. 7
    Grid

    Lays the points out Square or Triangular.

  8. 8
    Points

    The preview's point count; a ! appears when the field is large enough to slow Revit.

  9. 9
    Preview

    Rebuilds the preview grid from the picked lines, or the smoothed grid in Smooth mode.

  10. 10
    Apply

    Writes the point field at your spacing in one undoable step and closes the toolbar.

  11. 11
    Restart

    Clears the surface, lines and preview and starts the surface pick again.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Attract Lines

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Sculpt Terrain ▾ → Attract Lines.

  2. 02

    Pick the surface. The status line reads "Step 1" as soon as the toolbar opens: click the floor or toposolid in the view.

  3. 03

    Pick the contour lines. The prompt moves to "Step 2". Click each elevated model line; every click adds that line plus any lines joined to it, and the preview grid redraws with the new line included. Press Esc when all the lines are in.

    A line that is not level, or one you have already added, is skipped with a note in the status line.

  4. 04

    Tune the blend. Change Spacing, Falloff, Profile and Grid; the preview refreshes as you type. Profile sets the shape between two contour elevations: Straight for a direct match, Arc, Cubic (the default S-curve) or Bulge. Grid lays the points out Square or Triangular.

  5. 05

    Check the preview. The point count sits at the right of the status line, and a ! appears when the field is large enough to slow Revit. Dense previews are drawn at a coarser spacing to stay responsive; the status line says so, and Apply still uses the spacing you entered.

  6. 06

    Apply. Press Apply when the grid follows the lines. LandForm regenerates the field at your spacing, writes it in one undoable step named "LF-Attract From Lines: Apply Shape", reports the number of points and closes the toolbar.

What you get

The surface now carries a regular point grid whose elevations meet the picked lines and blend back into the existing ground beyond the Falloff distance. The lines themselves are untouched, so you can move them and run the tool again. The change is a single Revit undo step.

More about Attract Lines

Smooth mode

Choose Smooth in the mode selector when you have no lines and simply want a tidier surface. Press Preview to see the smoothed grid, which is capped at 800 points for speed, then Smooth Grid to rebuild the surface on exactly that grid while preserving its sampled elevations and boundary. Weight, Profile and Apply are hidden in this mode, and the toolbar closes once the grid is written.

Good to know

Tips

  • Spacing of 0.20 m or less asks for confirmation before Apply, because of the number of shape points it creates.
  • Weight returns to 1 whenever a preview with lines is built, so in practice the lines are matched exactly.
  • Restart clears the surface, the lines and the preview and starts the surface pick again. X closes without changing the model.
  • If the surface is edited while the toolbar is open, Apply refreshes the preview first and asks you to apply again.
  • Keep the document where you picked the surface active; the tool stops if you switch to another one.
Control reference · 11 controls

Every control and what it does

Attract From Lines11 controls
ControlTypeFunction
ModeSelector

Attract pulls the surface to picked contour lines; Smooth rebuilds it on a regular grid without lines.

SpacingInput

Surface grid spacing in metres, 0.1 to 20.

FalloffInput

Distance in metres over which a line's influence fades, 0.1 to 100. Larger values give a wider, smoother blend.

WeightInput

How strongly the grid matches the lines, 0 to 1. It is reset to 1 when a preview with lines is built.

ProfileSelector

Shape between contour elevations: Straight for a direct match, Arc, Cubic (S-curve) or Bulge.

Point DistributionSelector

Square or Triangular layout for the preview and final surface points.

PreviewButton

Rebuilds the preview grid from the picked lines, or the Smooth Grid preview in Smooth mode.

Smooth GridButton

Smooth mode only: writes the previewed regular grid to the surface, keeping its sampled elevations and boundary.

_ApplyButton

Writes the previewed point field to the surface at the entered spacing and closes the tool.

RestartButton

Clears the surface, lines and preview and starts the surface pick again.

CloseButton

Closes Attract From Lines without changing the model.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Sculpt Terrain · Relax Surface

Relax Surface

Smooth or rebuild the interior of a floor or toposolid while every point on its boundary keeps its exact elevation.

Relax Surface repairs what heavy point editing leaves behind: spikes, creases and uneven triangulation inside a surface whose edges are already right. Smooth eases the existing interior points, Rebuild replaces them with a fresh membrane stretched between the boundary elevations, and Guides lets you draw 3D guide contours on the surface that the new interior must pass through. The boundary is pinned in every mode, so the surface still meets kerbs, paths and neighbouring surfaces exactly where it did.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelSculpt Terrain ▾Relax Surface

Button tooltip: “Smooth or recreate a surface from its boundary and optional guide contours.”
Before you start
  • An editable Floor or Toposolid (Toposolid needs Revit 2024 or later). Its top boundary elevations are kept, so fix the edges first.
  • A plan or 3D view where you can click points on the surface. The tool will not start on a sheet.
  • The point Spacing for the regenerated interior (0.5 m by default) and, for Smooth, how many Passes to run (1 by default).
Tutorial video

Watch Relax Surface in action

Video coming soon

Relax Surface walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Relax Surface

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Sculpt Terrain ▾ → Relax Surface.

  2. 02

    Pick the surface. Revit asks for a floor or toposolid as soon as the toolbar opens. In Smooth and Rebuild modes the preview appears straight away; a surface that already carries Relax Surface settings reloads them, guides included.

  3. 03

    Choose the mode. Smooth relaxes the current interior points. Rebuild discards them and recreates the interior from the boundary alone. Guides interpolates the surface through guide contours you draw.

  4. 04

    In Smooth mode, set Passes. Each pass flattens interior detail a little further; the arrows step by 10 and the range is 1 to 1000.

  5. 05

    In Guides mode, draw guides. Press Guide +, click at least two stations across the surface and press Esc to finish. Repeat for each contour. Or press Trace to recreate the surface's existing contours as guide splines with a few grips each, replacing the current guides.

  6. 06

    Edit the guide stations. Select a station and type its height in Z or step it by 0.10 m with the arrows. Drag a station's adaptive grip in the model to move it; the preview follows. + inserts a station on the nearest guide segment, - removes the selected one (a guide left with fewer than two stations disappears), and Guide - removes the selected station's whole guide.

  7. 07

    Set spacing and placement. Spacing sets the distance between the new interior points. Points chooses Grid, which writes evenly spaced points, Isolines, which writes points only along the relaxed surface's contours at the Contours interval, or Delaunay, which keeps only the points the relaxed shape needs within Tol (metres, 0.05 by default) and adds evenly spaced points up to Max edge (metres, 2 by default), so the surface comes out light with even triangles that are never thinner than 20°. Tol and Max edge only apply to Delaunay; leave Max edge empty for no size limit. View switches the preview between Points and Isolines.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run when the preview looks right. LandForm writes the relaxed interior in one undoable step named "LF-Relax Surface: Apply Shape" and reports how many shape points it added. The button then reads Run Again, which starts a new surface pick.

What you get

The surface keeps its boundary exactly and carries a new, evenly relaxed interior: smoothed points in Smooth mode, a clean membrane in Rebuild mode, or a surface that passes through your guide contours in Guides mode. The mode, guides and settings are stored on the element so you can reopen the tool and adjust them. The edit is a single Revit undo step.

Good to know

Tips

  • Spacing of 0.20 m or less (0.40 m on Revit 2024) triggers a warning before Run because of the number of shape points created. Very dense previews are drawn coarser to stay responsive; Run still uses the spacing you entered.
  • Isolines placement writes far fewer points than Grid and gives a surface whose triangles follow the contours; choose Grid when you want an even point field for later editing.
  • The bar shows only the controls the current choices use: the guide tools (Guide +, Guide -, Trace, the station buttons and Z) in Guides mode, Passes in Smooth mode, Contours when the view or the placement uses isolines, and Tol and Max edge once Points is set to Delaunay.
  • Delaunay placement is usually the lightest: flat and gently curved areas get a few even triangles about Max edge across, while crests and hollows keep the points they need to stay within Tol. Drawn guide contours always keep their points, as with Isolines. Switch View to Points to see where the points land before you run.
  • The Points preview draws every generated point and can be slow on big surfaces; Isolines stays fast.
  • If Revit rejects the point-by-point edit, LandForm automatically retries with a full slab-shape rebuild; the status line tells you if both fail.
  • Guide grips are Adaptive Points. LandForm warns when the category is hidden; turn it on with Utils › Adaptive Points in the Terrain panel.
Control reference · 24 controls

Every control and what it does

Relax Surface24 controls
ControlTypeFunction
ModeSelector

Smooth relaxes the current surface, Rebuild recreates it from the boundary alone, Guides interpolates drawn guide contours.

Guide +Button

Draws a new guide contour on the surface: click at least two stations, then press Esc to finish.

Guide -Button

Removes the guide that contains the selected station, or the last guide.

TraceButton

Recreates the surface's existing contours as guide splines with a few grips each, replacing the current guides.

Add guide stationButton

Click the surface to insert a station on the nearest guide segment.

Remove selected guide stationButton

Removes the selected guide station. A guide with two stations is removed entirely.

Station ElevationInput

Elevation of the selected guide station in metres.

Raise StationButton

Raises the selected guide station by 0.10 m.

Lower StationButton

Lowers the selected guide station by 0.10 m.

PassesInput

Number of smoothing passes in Smooth mode, 1 to 1000. More passes flatten interior detail further.

Increase PassesButton

Adds 10 passes.

Decrease PassesButton

Removes 10 passes.

SpacingInput

Distance in metres between the regenerated interior points, 0.05 to 20.

Increase SpacingButton

Increases Spacing by 0.05 m.

Decrease SpacingButton

Decreases Spacing by 0.05 m.

ContourInput

Interval in metres for the isoline preview and for Isolines point placement.

Increase ContourButton

Increases the contour interval by 0.05 m.

Decrease ContourButton

Decreases the contour interval by 0.05 m.

Point PlacementSelector

Grid writes evenly spaced interior points. Isolines writes points only along the relaxed surface's contours at the contour interval. Delaunay keeps only the points the relaxed shape needs within Tol, plus even points up to Max edge.

TolInput

Delaunay placement: largest height difference, in metres, between a dropped point of the relaxed surface and the written one (0.001 to 10; 0.05 by default).

Max edgeInput

Delaunay placement: longest triangle edge in metres for even triangles (0.1 to 1000; 2 by default; empty for no size limit).

Preview ModeSelector

Shows the preview as generated Points or as Isolines.

RunButton

Writes the relaxed surface to the selected floor or toposolid. Reads Run Again afterwards to start on another surface.

CloseButton

Closes Relax Surface and removes the preview.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Utils · Adaptive Points

Adaptive Points

Show or hide the grips the mound tools use, and delete the ones left behind, without opening Visibility/Graphics.

Mound Factory, Smooth Mound, Auto Mound, Composite Mound, Point Grip and Relax Surface all shape terrain through adaptive-point grips you drag in the view. Those grips belong to the Adaptive Points category, so a view or template that hides the category makes the tools look as if nothing happened. The two commands in the Terrain panel's Utils menu manage them: Adaptive Points toggles the category in the active view and its template, and Cleanup Adaptive Points removes handles the LandForm tools created.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelUtils ▾Adaptive Points

Button tooltip: “Toggle Adaptive Points visibility in the current view or its template.”
Before you start
  • A project model view: plan, section, elevation or 3D. Neither command runs on a sheet, and the model must not be read-only.
  • For the cleanup, close any mound editor that is still open; an open editor recreates its own handles.
Tutorial video

Watch Adaptive Points in action

Video coming soon

Adaptive Points walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 4 steps

How to use Adaptive Points

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Utils ▾ → Adaptive Points.

  2. 02

    Toggle visibility. Choose Utils › Adaptive Points. If the category is hidden anywhere in the view or its template, LandForm turns it on; only when it is fully visible does it turn it off. A message confirms "Adaptive Points are ON" or "OFF" and names the view or view template that was changed.

    When the view uses a view template, the template is updated and the view's own setting follows where Revit allows it, so every view on that template shows the grips.

  3. 03

    Finish your mounds. Shape the terrain with the mound tools. Mound Factory, Smooth Mound, Auto Mound and Composite Mound switch the category on themselves when they start; Point Grip and Relax Surface warn you if it is hidden.

  4. 04

    Clean up. Choose Utils › Cleanup Adaptive Points. LandForm searches the whole document for handles tagged by the mound tools and asks you to confirm the number it will delete. Say Yes and a message reports how many were removed.

What you get

The Adaptive Points category is on or off in the active view, or in its template, in one undo step named "LF-Show Adaptive Points" or "LF-Hide Adaptive Points". After a cleanup the document no longer contains LandForm mound handles; the deletion is one undo step, "LF-Clean Up Mound Adaptive Points".

Good to know

Tips

  • Only handles created by Smooth Mound, Auto and Composite Mound, Mound Factory, Point Grip Mound and Relax Surface are deleted. Other adaptive components, including Tensile Creator grips, are left alone.
  • If the toggle reports that visibility cannot be changed in this view type, switch to a plan or 3D view and run it again.
  • A mound tool that cannot turn the category on itself (a read-only model, or a template you do not own) tells you so and points you to this command.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Visibility · Folding/Split Lines

Folding/Split Lines

Hide or show the Folding Lines and Split Lines of Floors and Toposolids in one click.

A floor or toposolid that has been shaped point by point draws a line along every edge of its surface triangles. On a graded site those lines bury the contours, hatches and tags the view is meant to show. This command, in the Terrain panel's Visibility menu, switches the four subcategories that draw them together, so you never have to open Visibility/Graphics for it.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelVisibility ▾Folding/Split Lines

Button tooltip: “Toggle Folding Lines and Split Lines of Floors and Toposolids.”
Before you start
  • A plan, section, elevation or 3D view of a project model. The command does not run on a sheet, in a family document or in a read-only model.
  • Know whether the view takes its model visibility from a view template, because that is where the change will go.
Tutorial video

Watch Folding/Split Lines in action

Video coming soon

Folding/Split Lines walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 4 steps

How to use Folding/Split Lines

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Visibility ▾ → Folding/Split Lines.

  2. 02

    Open the view to clean up. Any plan, section, elevation or 3D view will do.

  3. 03

    Choose Visibility › Folding/Split Lines. If any of the four subcategories is showing, all four are hidden: Floors › Folding Lines, Floors › Split Lines, Toposolids › Folding Lines and Toposolids › Split Lines. A message confirms they are OFF and names the view or template that changed.

  4. 04

    Choose it again to bring them back. Once all four are hidden the same command shows them again.

What you get

The view, or its template, hides or shows the four subcategories in one undo step named "LF-Hide Folding and Split Lines" or "LF-Show Folding and Split Lines". When the view template controls V/G Overrides Model, the template is changed, because that is where Revit takes the setting from, and every view using that template follows. Otherwise only the active view changes.

Good to know

Tips

  • Terrain Studio hides the same four subcategories automatically after it saves a surface, so a studio-edited view is already clean.
  • If the command reports that the lines cannot be hidden in this view type, switch to a plan, section, elevation or 3D view and try again.
  • Hiding the lines is a graphics setting only; the shape points and the geometry are unchanged.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Terrain · Visibility · Depth Fade

Depth Fade

Fade a section or elevation to grey by depth: the cut planting stays black, the trees behind it get lighter the farther back they stand.

A landscape section drawn in plain black reads flat: the hedge on the section line, the tree row behind it and the palm twenty metres back all carry the same line. This command, in the Terrain panel's Visibility menu, measures how far every model element stands behind the section line and overrides its graphics by that depth, in bands, from black at the front to a light grey at the back. It is the same override you would set by hand with Override Graphics in View, applied to the whole view in one go, and taken off again with one click.

Where to find it

LandForm tabTerrain panelVisibility ▾Depth Fade

Button tooltip: “Fade the elements of a section or elevation to grey by their depth.”
Before you start
  • A section, elevation or orthographic 3D view of a project model. The command does not run on a sheet, in a plan, in a perspective view, in a family document or in a read-only model.
  • The view's own graphics: Depth Fade sets the projection line colour and the surface pattern colours of each element in this view only. It leaves cut lines and cut patterns alone, so a cut wall or bed keeps its cut look.
  • Elements inside linked models cannot be overridden one by one, so they are left as drawn and counted in the bar's message.
Tutorial video

Watch Depth Fade in action

Video coming soon

Depth Fade walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Depth Fade

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Terrain panel → Visibility ▾ → Depth Fade.

  2. 02

    Open the view to grade. A section or elevation is the usual case; an orthographic 3D view works too, measured from its nearest element.

  3. 03

    Choose Visibility › Depth Fade. A floating bar opens over the view.

  4. 04

    Set the bands. Type how many depth bands the view is cut into, from 2 to 10 (5 by default). The nearest band is always black; the farthest takes the far shade; the bands between step evenly from one to the other.

  5. 05

    Choose the far shade. Mid grey (128) keeps the background firmly part of the drawing, Light grey (170) is the default, Lighter (200) is a wash, Lightest (225) is barely there.

  6. 06

    Set the depth. With Auto ticked the farthest element in the view (inside the far clip when it is on) gets the farthest band. Untick it to type the depth in metres at which the farthest band starts: everything at that depth or beyond takes the far shade, which keeps the same look across several sections of one site.

  7. 07

    Tick Halftone or Thin lines if you want them. Both apply to every band behind the nearest one: Halftone blends the lines half-way to the paper on top of the grey, Thin lines draws them with line weight 1.

  8. 08

    Apply. The bar reports how many elements were graded, over what depth and to which grey. Apply again whenever the model or the view changes; elements that have left the view are cleared.

  9. 09

    Reset to put the view back. Reset removes exactly the overrides Depth Fade set in this view and nothing else.

What you get

Every model element the view shows carries a view-specific override by depth, in one undo step named "LF-Depth Fade: Apply". A family is measured at its insertion point, so a tree is placed by its trunk and not by the front of its crown, and a tree whose canopy crosses the section line but whose trunk stands five metres back lands in the band five metres back. Anything else, a wall, a floor, a kerb, a Toposolid, is measured at the point of it nearest the viewer, so a cut element is in the nearest band. The view remembers which elements it graded, and Reset ("LF-Depth Fade: Reset") clears only those.

Good to know

Tips

  • Section Planting already draws its background plants in depth-graded greys; Depth Fade does the same for the model trees, walls and surfaces behind the section line, so the two read as one drawing.
  • The overrides are the view's own. Duplicate the view before applying if you want a plain copy, or Reset when you have finished.
  • An element you overrode by hand before applying is replaced by the band's override, and Reset leaves it with no override. Set it again afterwards if it needs its own look.
  • Depth Cueing in the view's Graphic Display Options fades the lines continuously on screen; Depth Fade gives you a fixed number of printable greys you can read off the drawing, and it works in Wireframe too.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
03

LandForm ribbon panel

Hardscape

Kerbs, boulders, graded paths, walls and steps that sit on the terrain.

Hardscape · Kerb

Kerb

Run a kerb along the edge of a floor, toposolid, wall or other site element with one click on the edge, as a Revit Railing of the kerb type you choose.

Kerb saves you sketching a railing path by hand. You pick a kerb type, set how far above and beside the edge it should sit, then click an edge in the view: LandForm traces the boundary of the element's upper surface, flattens it into a railing path and creates the kerb straight away. The toolbar stays open, so a whole site of kerbs is one click per edge. Because a kerb is an ordinary Revit Railing, the profile comes from the railing type, and you can edit the path, swap the type or schedule it like any other railing afterwards.

Where to find it

LandForm tabHardscape panelKerb

Button tooltip: “Create kerbs along surface boundaries.”
Before you start
  • A plan or 3D view. Kerb refuses to start on a sheet, section or elevation.
  • A railing type whose profile is your kerb. The Kerb type list shows every railing type in the project, so load or duplicate the one you need first.
  • The element to trace: a Floor, Roof, Toposolid, Ramp, Stair, Wall, Wall Sweep, Structural Foundation or Generic Model, in this model or in a linked model.
  • The Base and Side offsets you want, in the project's length units (the unit label is shown beside each box).
Tutorial video

Watch Kerb in action

Video coming soon

Kerb walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Kerb: Kerb toolbar with the boundary pick waiting
Kerb toolbar with the boundary pick waiting · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Kerb type

    The railing type that models your kerb; choosing one reloads the offsets last used with it.

  2. 2
    Base

    Lifts the kerb above the level it is created on, in the project's length unit.

  3. 3
    Side

    Shifts the kerb sideways from the edge it follows.

  4. 4
    Placement

    Selected edge runs the kerb along the clicked edge; Entire boundary follows the whole loop it belongs to.

  5. 5
    Status line

    Tells you what to pick next and reports anything that went wrong.

  6. 6
    Link

    Picks from a linked model; the kerb follows the boundary edge nearest your click.

  7. 7
    Reverse

    Flips the direction of the kerb you just created.

  8. 8
    Run Again

    Resumes edge picking after Esc paused it.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Kerb

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Hardscape panel → Kerb.

  2. 02

    Choose the kerb type. Open Kerb type and pick the railing type that models your kerb. The Base and Side boxes reload the offsets you last used with that type.

  3. 03

    Set the offsets. Base lifts the kerb above the level it is created on; Side shifts it sideways from the edge it follows. Leave both at 0 to sit the kerb exactly on the edge.

    The units follow the project's length unit, so a project in millimetres shows Millimeters beside the boxes.

  4. 04

    Choose the placement. Set Placement to Selected edge to run the kerb along just the edge you click, or Entire boundary to follow the whole closed loop that edge belongs to.

    The status line changes to match: "Pick the edge to use" or "Pick an edge on the boundary".

  5. 05

    Pick from a link if needed. Tick Link to pick elements in a linked model instead of this one. Revit picks a link by element rather than by edge, so the kerb follows the boundary edge nearest your click; the hover highlight shows which edge that will be before you click.

  6. 06

    Click the edge. Hover the edge until it highlights, then click. The kerb is created immediately in one undo step named "LF-Kerb: Create Kerb", and the toolbar is ready for the next edge.

    If the status line says "Could not use the selected edge", the click did not land on a boundary edge of the upper surface of a supported element.

  7. 07

    Reverse if needed. Press Reverse to flip the direction of the kerb you just created, so an asymmetric profile faces the other way. This writes one undo step named "LF-Kerb: Reverse Kerb".

  8. 08

    Pause and resume. Press Esc to pause picking; the cursor is freed while the toolbar stays open and the status line reads "Paused - press Run Again or change an option to pick again". Press Run Again, or change the kerb type, an offset, the placement or Link, to pick again. Only the close button ends the tool.

What you get

A Revit Railing of the chosen kerb type now runs along the edge you clicked, or around the whole loop it belongs to. A kerb traced from a Floor, Roof, Toposolid, Ramp or Stair is hosted on that element, so it sits on the surface and follows it; a kerb traced from anything else is created on the nearest level and raised to the height the edge was picked at. The Base and Side values are written to the railing as its offsets. Each kerb is one undo step, and the railing can be edited, retyped or scheduled with Revit's own tools.

More about Kerb

Elements a kerb can follow

Any placement mode can trace the upper-surface boundary of a Floor, Roof, Toposolid, Ramp, Stair, Wall, Wall Sweep, Structural Foundation, or Generic Model, in this model or in a linked model.

Tick Link to pick from a linked model. Revit picks a link by element rather than by edge, so the kerb follows the boundary edge nearest the clicked point; the hover highlight shows which edge that will be before the click. With Link off, only elements of this model are picked.

Revit hosts a railing on a Floor, Roof, Toposolid, Ramp, or Stair only. A kerb traced from a wall, a coping sweep, a generic model, or anything in a link is created on its level and left unhosted, so it holds its position but does not follow the element it was traced from.

More about Kerb

Level and height

The kerb is created on the level nearest the edge it was traced from. A kerb that cannot be hosted is raised to the height it was picked at with a base offset, so a kerb picked on a wall top or a coping stays up there. The Base value in the toolbar is added on top of that height.

Good to know

Tips

  • Kerb remembers the Base and Side offsets separately for each kerb type (the last ten types used) and keeps all its settings between sessions.
  • Entire boundary follows the loop the clicked edge belongs to, so clicking the edge of an opening gives a kerb around that opening, while clicking the outer edge gives the outer boundary.
  • Shape-edited floors and toposolids are triangulated inside, but Kerb finds the true outer and opening boundaries, so you can click any boundary edge of a graded surface.
  • If Revit rejects a long or complicated path ("Revit rejected the railing path"), switch to Selected edge and place the kerb in shorter runs.
  • The Undo and Redo buttons listed below are hidden in the current toolbar; use Revit's Undo, which removes one kerb per step.
Control reference · 10 controls

Every control and what it does

Kerb10 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected Kerb TypeSelector

Railing type used for the kerb; the list holds every railing type in the project. Choosing a type reloads the Base and Side offsets last used with it.

Vertical OffsetInput

Base: lifts the kerb above the level it is created on, in the project's length units. For a kerb that cannot be hosted, this is added to the height the edge was picked at.

Horizontal OffsetInput

Side: shifts the kerb sideways from the traced edge, in the project's length units.

Available Placement OptionsSelector

Selected edge runs the kerb along the one edge you click; Entire boundary follows the whole closed loop that edge belongs to, outer boundary or opening.

LinkOption

Picks from linked models instead of this one. The kerb follows the boundary edge nearest the clicked point, which the hover highlight shows before the click.

UndoButton

Deletes the kerb created last in this session ("LF-Kerb: Undo Last Kerb"). Hidden in the current toolbar; use Revit's Undo instead.

RedoButton

Recreates the kerb removed by Undo at the same elevation and offsets ("LF-Kerb: Redo Kerb"). Hidden in the current toolbar.

ReverseButton

Flips the direction of the kerb created last, so an asymmetric profile faces the other way. Available once a kerb has been created in this session.

Run AgainButton

Resumes edge picking after Esc paused it. Changing any option on the toolbar resumes picking too.

CancelButton

The close button, and the only way to end Kerb: Esc pauses picking instead of closing.

Back to tool index ↑

Hardscape · Boulder Creator

Boulder Creator

Place randomised low-poly boulders as loadable Site-category families, one click at a time, from a size range, a facet count and an irregularity value.

Boulder Creator is for the rockery, the play mound edge or the dry stream bed where you need a dozen boulders that are all different but all the right size. You set the smallest and largest boulder you want, choose how faceted and how fractured the form should be, and press Run. LandForm generates a flat-bottomed, faceted stone solid, writes it into a new Site family with a natural stone material, loads it and places it where you click. Every placement prepares a fresh random shape, so earlier boulders never change.

Where to find it

LandForm tabHardscape panelBoulder Creator

Button tooltip: “Create a unique randomized low-poly boulder as a Site family.”
Before you start
  • A project document open in a plan or 3D view; Boulder Creator does not run on a sheet or inside the Family Editor.
  • The Metric Generic Model.rft family template installed for your Revit version. LandForm builds each boulder family from it and stops with a message if it cannot be found.
  • The size range you want in metres: Size min must be between 0.10 m and 100 m, and max at least the minimum.
  • Somewhere to keep the families: each one is saved under Documents\LandForm\Boulder Families\Revit <version> before it is loaded.
Tutorial video

Watch Boulder Creator in action

Video coming soon

Boulder Creator walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Boulder Creator: Boulder Creator toolbar with the default size range and a shape ready
Boulder Creator toolbar with the default size range and a shape ready · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Size min / max

    Smallest and largest boulder in metres; press Enter or Tab to apply.

  2. 2
    Size readout

    Length × width × height of the current shape.

  3. 3
    Shape

    Code that identifies the current random form.

  4. 4
    Facets

    8 to 20; more facets give more, smaller planar faces.

  5. 5
    Irregular

    0 for a regular form up to 1 for a strongly fractured outline.

  6. 6
    Randomize

    Another shape inside the same size range; the readout and Shape code update.

  7. 7
    Run

    Creates the family, then places one boulder where you click in the view.

  8. 8
    Status line

    Tells you the next step and confirms each boulder placed.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Boulder Creator

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Hardscape panel → Boulder Creator.

  2. 02

    Set the size range. Type Size min and max in metres (0.6 m and 1.8 m by default) and press Enter or Tab. The readout beside the controls shows the resolved length × width × height of the current shape, and the Shape code identifies that random form.

  3. 03

    Choose the detail. Pick Facets from 8 to 20; more facets give more, smaller planar faces. Set Irregular from 0 for a regular form to 1 for a strongly fractured outline; 0.55 is the default.

  4. 04

    Shuffle the form. Press Randomize for another shape inside the same size range. The Shape code and the size readout update each time; repeat until you like the proportions.

  5. 05

    Place the boulder. Press Run, then click the placement point in the view. The status line reads "Pick the placement point in Revit..." while it waits; in a view with no work plane, click a point on a model surface instead.

    LandForm writes the family file, loads it into the project and places one instance at the point you clicked.

  6. 06

    Keep placing. The status line confirms "Created and placed LF-Boulder-… A new random boulder is ready for the next placement." Press Run again for the next boulder, changing the size range or detail between placements if you like. Close the toolbar with the × when you are done.

What you get

Each placement adds a Site-category family instance at the clicked point. The family is named by its size class, for example LF-Boulder-1450x1400 (plan length × width in millimetres, rounded to 50 mm), its file is saved under Documents\LandForm\Boulder Families\Revit <version>, and its type carries the size range, facets, irregularity and shape seed so Boulder Editor can reopen them later. The boulder has a shaded stone material named LF_Boulder_<Stone> chosen from the shape seed, so a group of boulders varies between sandstone, limestone, warm grey, granite and darker rock. Loading and placing are separate undo steps, named "LF-Boulder Creator: Load Boulder Family" and "LF-Boulder Creator: Place Boulder".

Good to know

Tips

  • Boulders of one size class share a family. If a family with the same LF-Boulder-LxW name is already loaded, that boulder is placed as it is and the status line says "same size class". Nudge Size min or max so the rounded size changes, or press Randomize, when you want a different form.
  • Boulders are convex with a flat base, so they sit cleanly on a floor or toposolid; move and rotate them like any other family instance.
  • Press Esc at the placement prompt to cancel; the status line reads "Boulder placement cancelled." and the toolbar stays open.
  • The stone material shows its exact colour in shaded views; the matching plain appearance is used in realistic views and renders.
  • Starting Boulder Creator again while the toolbar is open brings the open toolbar to the front rather than opening a second one.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Hardscape · Boulder Editor

Boulder Editor

Reshape a boulder you placed with Boulder Creator, preview the new form in place, and reload its family so every instance updates without moving.

Boulder Editor opens the same toolbar as Boulder Creator, loaded with the settings stored on the boulder you select. While you change the size range, facets or irregularity, a grey preview of the new form is drawn exactly where the placed instance stands, so you can judge it against the planting and paving around it. When you press Run, LandForm regenerates the family file and reloads it: every instance of that boulder family takes the new shape and stays where it was placed.

Where to find it

LandForm tabHardscape panelBoulder Editor

Button tooltip: “Edit a generated boulder in place.”
Before you start
  • A boulder placed by Boulder Creator. Other families are refused with the message "Select a boulder created by LandForm Boulder Creator."
  • A project document open in a plan or 3D view where the boulder is visible; the preview is drawn in the active view.
  • The Metric Generic Model.rft family template installed for your Revit version, because the family is rebuilt from scratch.
Tutorial video

Watch Boulder Editor in action

Video coming soon

Boulder Editor walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Boulder Editor

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Hardscape panel → Boulder Editor.

  2. 02

    Select the boulder. Select a LandForm boulder before starting the tool, or start the tool and click one when the prompt says "Select a boulder created by LandForm Boulder Creator".

    If several elements are selected, the first LandForm boulder among them is used.

  3. 03

    Read the stored settings. The toolbar opens with the boulder's Size min, max, Facets, Irregular and Shape code. The selected instance is hidden in the active view and a grey preview of its current form is drawn in its place; the status line reads "Editing LF-Boulder-…".

  4. 04

    Adjust the size or detail. Change any value and press Enter, or move to the next box. The preview is redrawn at the instance location after each change.

  5. 05

    Try another form. Press Randomize to preview a different faceted shape while keeping the size controls. The status line reminds you that nothing is saved until you press Run.

  6. 06

    Update the family. Press Run. LandForm regenerates the family file, reloads it over the existing family and redraws the preview; the status line confirms "… was regenerated and reloaded. Existing instances kept their locations."

  7. 07

    Close the editor. Press the ×. The preview is cleared and the hidden instance is shown again in the view.

What you get

The boulder family has been rewritten and reloaded with the new size range, facets, irregularity and shape seed, and those settings are stored on its type again for the next edit. Every placed instance of that family now shows the new shape at its original position and rotation. Reloading is one undo step named "LF-Boulder Creator: Load Boulder Family"; hiding and restoring the edited instance in the view are separate steps named "LF-Boulder Editor: Hide Edited Boulder" and "LF-Boulder Editor: Restore Edited Boulder".

Good to know

Tips

  • Boulders of one size class share a family, so editing one changes all of them. For a one-off variation, place a new boulder with a different size range in Boulder Creator instead.
  • The family keeps its original name after an edit, so a family named LF-Boulder-1450x1400 may no longer measure 1.45 m by 1.40 m once you enlarge or shrink it.
  • The stone colour is chosen from the Shape code, so pressing Randomize can change the material as well as the form.
  • If you select something that is not a LandForm boulder before starting, the tool stops with "The selected family was not created by Boulder Creator." Clear the selection and pick a boulder when prompted.
  • Starting Boulder Editor again while it is open brings the open toolbar to the front rather than starting a second edit.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Hardscape · Linear Grade · Intelligent Path

Intelligent Path

Sketch a centerline on a toposolid and turn it into a graded path, road or trail with width, crossfall, shoulders and embankments, all in one step.

Intelligent Path does the grading work that normally takes an afternoon of sub-elements and spot checks. You draw or pick the centerline, decide whether the path should follow the ground, run at a fixed slope or follow a profile you shape yourself, and press Run. LandForm builds the path surface, blends it into the surrounding terrain with cut and fill batters, and can add railings, station labels and a separate toposolid for the path.

Where to find it

LandForm tabHardscape panelLinear Grade ▾Intelligent Path

Button tooltip: “Grade roads and paths directly on a host Toposolid.”
Before you start
  • A Toposolid that the path will sit on, visible and editable in the active view. Floors are not supported by this tool.
  • Either a clear idea of the route so you can click it on the surface, or existing model or detail lines, arcs or splines that form one connected chain.
  • The design numbers you want to work to: path width, crossfall for drainage, and the cut and fill slopes (horizontal : vertical) your site allows.
  • A 3D view is best for drawing, because the points are clicked directly on the terrain surface.
Tutorial video

Watch Intelligent Path in action

Video coming soon

Intelligent Path walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Intelligent Path: Intelligent Path toolbar waiting for a surface and a centerline
Intelligent Path toolbar waiting for a surface and a centerline · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Surface: Pick

    Selects the host toposolid; its name replaces "No terrain".

  2. 2
    Draw / Pick Lines

    Draw clicks the path points on the surface (Esc finishes); Pick Lines takes a connected chain of lines, arcs or splines.

  3. 3
    Centerline

    Spline for a smooth curve through the points, or Tangent-arc for straight legs joined by arcs.

  4. 4
    Edit / Add / Delete

    Re-enter on-screen editing to move, insert or remove centerline points.

  5. 5
    Path

    Width (m), Variable for a tapering path, Shoulder (m) for a verge strip, and Detail (m), the spacing between graded stations.

  6. 6
    Grade

    Follow surface, Fixed slope or Design profile; here the path drapes over the ground, lifted by Lift (m).

  7. 7
    Edges: Railings

    Lines both path edges with the railing type you choose.

  8. 8
    Stations

    Shows chainage ticks and labels (0+000) along the centerline.

  9. 9
    Create as

    Subdivision keeps the path as a sub-division of the host; Toposolid builds a separate toposolid.

  10. 10
    Profile / Section

    Show the profile panel (ground in green, design level in blue) and the cross-section panel.

  11. 11
    Run

    Grades the path and blends the batters into the terrain.

  12. 12
    Undo / Clear

    Undo removes the path and restores the surface; Clear discards the sketch.

  13. 13
    Status line

    Tells you the next step and reports the result after Run.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Intelligent Path

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Hardscape panel → Linear Grade ▾ → Intelligent Path.

  2. 02

    Pick the surface. In the Surface group, click Pick and select the host toposolid. Its name appears next to the button.

  3. 03

    Sketch the centerline. In the Points group, click Draw and click the path points on the surface; press Esc when the route is complete. Or click Pick Lines and select a connected chain of lines, arcs or splines you have already drawn.

    In the Centerline group, choose Spline for a smooth curve through the points, or Tangent-arc for straight legs joined by arcs of the Radius you enter, like a road alignment.

  4. 04

    Adjust the route on screen. Editing starts as soon as the sketch is finished: drag a grip to move a point, click a + marker between two grips to insert a point there, or Ctrl+click a grip to remove it. Press Esc to stop; Edit, Add and Delete re-enter the same modes later.

  5. 05

    Set the path section. In the Path group, enter Width (m), turn on Variable and enter End (m) for a tapering path, add a Shoulder (m) if you need a verge strip, and set Detail (m), the spacing between the stations LandForm grades.

    Smaller detail follows curves and terrain more closely but takes longer to generate.

  6. 06

    Choose how the path is graded. In the Grade group pick one of three modes. Follow surface drapes the path over the existing ground and lifts it by Lift (m). Fixed slope regrades the path at Slope % from the end you choose with Start, raised or lowered by Start offset (m), with Crossfall % across the path and Cut H:V and Fill H:V for the embankments. Design profile lets you drag the design level on the profile panel; Grips at stations gives you one grip per station to work with.

  7. 07

    Add edges, stations and output type. Turn on Railings and choose a railing type to line both edges. Turn on Stations to see chainage ticks (0+000) at the Interval (m) you set, and Annotate to place those ticks and labels as detail lines and text when you run. Under Create as, choose Subdivision to keep the path as a sub-division of the host, or Toposolid to build a separate toposolid of the selected type.

  8. 08

    Check the profile and section (optional). Turn on Profile to see existing ground in green and the design level in blue along the path. Turn on Section to see the cross-section at any station; drag its grips to shape a crown, swale or rounded verge. Both panels can be made Taller or Floated into their own window.

  9. 09

    Run. Press Run. LandForm grades the path, blends the batters into the terrain and reports the result in the status line. Press Undo to remove the path and restore the surface, or Clear to discard the sketch and start again.

What you get

The host toposolid carries a new path surface along your centerline, at the width, crossfall and grade you set, with cut and fill embankments daylighting into the existing ground. If you chose Toposolid, the path is a separate toposolid of the selected type whose top is the path surface. Railings, station ticks and labels are placed where you asked for them, and the whole operation is one undoable step in Revit.

Good to know

Tips

  • If part of the corridor would leave the surface, LandForm keeps the longest run that fits fully inside and says so in the status line, instead of failing.
  • You cannot change settings while a pick loop is active. Press Esc to leave drawing or editing, change the value, then use Edit to continue on screen.
  • Any grip you move on the Section panel switches the path to a custom section and greys out Width, Crossfall and Shoulder. Press Standard on the panel to return to the simple inputs.
  • Stations are measured from the start of the centerline. Set Start (m) when the path continues an existing chainage.
  • In graded modes the tool writes the cut and fill volumes to the host toposolid as LF_Path Cut Volume and LF_Path Fill Volume, so you can schedule earthworks per path.
Control reference · 36 controls

Every control and what it does

Intelligent Path36 controls
ControlTypeFunction
PickButton

Select the Toposolid the path will sit on.

DrawButton

Click path points directly on the surface; press Esc to finish.

Pick LinesButton

Select a connected chain of model or detail lines, arcs, or splines.

EditButton

Edit the centerline on screen (this starts automatically after a sketch): click a grip then its new location, click a + between grips to add a point there, Ctrl+click a grip to remove it. Stray clicks change nothing. Esc finishes.

AddButton

Add centerline points: click along the path to insert a point; clicks beyond the ends extend it. Esc finishes.

DeleteButton

Delete centerline points: click each grip to remove it. Esc finishes.

RunButton

Create the path on the surface with the settings below.

UndoButton

Remove the generated path and restore the surface.

ClearButton

Discard the sketched centerline and any preview.

CloseButton

Close Intelligent Path.

Centerline ModeSelector

Spline fits a smooth curve through the points. Tangent-arc runs straight tangents between the points with exact-radius arc fillets, like a road alignment.

Fillet RadiusInput

Fillet radius applied at each interior point. The radius shrinks automatically where points are too close together. 0 keeps sharp corners.

Start WidthInput

Width of the path surface, in meters. Greyed out while a custom section from the Section panel is in use.

VariableOption

Taper the width from the start value to a different end value.

End WidthInput

Path width at the end of the spline, in meters.

ShoulderInput

Optional extra strip on both sides of the path. 0 for none.

FacetInput

Spacing between path stations (Detail). Smaller values follow curves and terrain more closely but take longer to generate.

Create As ToposolidSelector

Subdivision keeps the path as a sub-division of the host Toposolid. Toposolid creates a separate Toposolid whose top is the path surface, on the host's level.

Selected Toposolid TypeSelector

Toposolid type for the path (defaults to the host's type).

RailingsOption

Place a railing along both edges of the path.

Selected Edge TypeSelector

Railing type placed along the path edges.

Grade ModeSelector

Follow surface drapes the path over the existing terrain. Fixed slope regrades to a constant slope. Design profile regrades to elevations you edit on the profile panel.

Vertical OffsetInput

Lift: height of the path above the existing surface in Follow surface mode.

Longitudinal GradeInput

Slope %: constant slope along the path from the chosen start end.

StartButton

Click near the centerline end where the slope should begin.

Vertical OffsetInput

Start offset: raises or lowers the start of the path relative to the existing terrain.

Grips at stationsButton

Replace the profile control points with one editable grip at every station interval, seeded on the existing ground. Drag each grip to set that station's design elevation.

CrossfallInput

Sideways tilt for drainage. Positive values fall from left to right along the path direction.

Cut SlopeInput

Embankment slope where the path cuts into the terrain (horizontal : vertical).

Fill SlopeInput

Embankment slope where the path is filled above the terrain (horizontal : vertical).

StationsOption

Show chainage ticks and labels (0+000) along the centerline preview.

Station IntervalInput

Spacing between station ticks and labels.

Station StartInput

Station value at the centerline start. 0 labels the start as 0+000.

AnnotateOption

On Run, also place station tick detail lines and text labels in the active plan view.

ProfileOption

Show the longitudinal profile along the centerline: existing ground in green, design path level in blue. Float it into its own window from the panel.

SectionOption

Show and edit the path cross-section at a station: drag the grips to shape the path; the outer grips become the path edges.

Back to tool index ↑

Hardscape · Linear Grade · Grade Walls

Grade Walls

Turn straight or curved walls into stepped retaining walls that follow the site grade, with a live preview and native wall segments built in one transaction.

Grade Walls does the levelling that otherwise means splitting a wall by hand and typing a top and base offset for every piece. You pick the walls, and LandForm samples the ground on both sides of each one, works out which side is uphill, and splits the wall wherever the grade changes. Each step stands Visible height above the higher ground beside it and is buried Embed depth below the lower ground, so the result reads as a proper retaining wall. The preview shows exactly what will be built; Build Steps replaces the walls with one native Revit wall per step.

Where to find it

LandForm tabHardscape panelLinear Grade ▾Grade Walls

Button tooltip: “Fit stepped walls to the visible site grade.”
Before you start
  • A 3D view that is not a view template. Grade Walls samples the grade through the view, so it refuses to start anywhere else.
  • Straight or curved system walls with a vertical cross-section. Slanted and tapered walls are rejected. Select the walls before you start to see the preview immediately.
  • The ground visible in that 3D view: toposolids, topography, floors, roofs, stairs, ramps, roads and hardscape are all sampled, including those in linked models. Anything hidden in the view is not seen.
  • Your design numbers in metres: how much wall should show above the high side, how deep it should be embedded on the low side, and the step rise you want the wall to step in.
Tutorial video

Watch Grade Walls in action

Video coming soon

Grade Walls walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Grade Walls: Grade Walls toolbar waiting for walls to be picked
Grade Walls toolbar waiting for walls to be picked · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick Walls

    Click the walls in the 3D view and then Finish; the count beside the button shows how many walls are picked.

  2. 2
    Pick straight or curved walls…

    Status line with the next step; after a pick it reports how many steps were fitted.

  3. 3
    0 walls 0 segments

    Counts of the picked walls and of the step segments in the preview.

  4. 4
    Retained

    The biggest grade difference across the run.

  5. 5
    Visible height

    How far each step stands above the higher ground beside it, in metres.

  6. 6
    Embed depth

    How far each step is buried below the lower ground beside it, in metres; 0 keeps the bottom at the low grade.

  7. 7
    Step rise

    The sampled ground heights are rounded to this value, so a smaller rise gives more, shorter steps.

  8. 8
    Elevation snap

    Rounds every step's top and bottom to a multiple of this value; leave it at 0 for exact grades.

  9. 9
    Update Preview

    Resamples the grade and redraws the preview, for example after you change the terrain or the view.

  10. 10
    Build Steps

    Replaces each picked wall with one native wall per step, in one transaction named "LF-Grade Walls".

  11. 11
    Reset

    Clears the walls and the preview without changing the model.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Grade Walls

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Hardscape panel → Linear Grade ▾ → Grade Walls.

  2. 02

    Pick the walls. Press Pick Walls, click the walls in the 3D view and click Finish. The preview is built straight away and the status line reports how many steps were fitted.

    Walls selected before you opened the tool are used as soon as it starts.

  3. 03

    Read the preview. Blue lines are the wall above grade. Amber outlines with diagonal hatching are the buried part. The magenta line is the low grade, and the large red arrows point towards the retained, uphill side. The Retained value on the right is the biggest grade difference across the run.

  4. 04

    Set the visible height and embed depth. Type Visible height and Embed depth in metres. The preview refreshes about a quarter of a second after you stop typing.

  5. 05

    Set the step rise. Type Step rise. The ground heights sampled every 0.5 m along the wall are rounded to this value, and a new step starts wherever the rounded height changes on either side, so a smaller rise gives more, shorter steps.

  6. 06

    Snap the elevations (optional). Type an Elevation snap such as 0.05 to round every step's top and bottom to a multiple of that value, so copings and courses land on round numbers. Leave it at 0 for exact grades.

  7. 07

    Refresh if needed. Press Update Preview to resample after you change the terrain or the view, or whenever you want to be sure the preview matches the toolbar.

  8. 08

    Build the steps. Press Build Steps. LandForm recalculates from the values on the toolbar, replaces each picked wall with its stepped segments in one transaction named "LF-Grade Walls", and selects the new walls. The status line reports "N stepped wall segments created in one transaction."

What you get

The original walls are gone and in their place stands one native Revit wall per step, each of the same wall type, level, orientation and structural setting as the wall it came from, with its base and top set to the sampled grade plus your offsets. Joins at the segment ends are disallowed so every step keeps its own height. Arc walls remain arc walls, split into arc segments. The whole replacement is one undo step, and each new wall can be edited, tagged and scheduled like any wall you drew yourself.

Good to know

Tips

  • If the status line reports "The reference surface does not cover every wall sample", part of a wall has no ground beside it in the view. Make sure a toposolid, topography, floor or paving runs the full length of the wall and is visible in the 3D view.
  • Grade Walls probes both sides of each wall at about half a metre out (further for thick walls), so a wall drawn exactly on the edge of a terrace still finds the ground on each side.
  • Ground in linked models is sampled too, so a wall in your model can be graded against a civil engineer's linked surface.
  • Walls on a spline or other freeform path are graded as straight chords between the step breaks; lines and arcs keep their true geometry.
  • Reset clears the walls and the preview without changing the model; closing the toolbar also removes the preview.
Control reference · 9 controls

Every control and what it does

Arrange Walls9 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Pick WallsButton

Select straight or curved system walls in the 3D view and click Finish; the live preview is built straight away.

Minimum HeightInput

Visible height: how far each step stands above the higher ground beside it, in metres.

DepthInput

Embed depth: how far each step is buried below the lower ground beside it, in metres. 0 keeps the bottom at the low grade.

StepInput

Step rise: the ground heights sampled along the wall are rounded to this increment, so the wall steps in even rises.

Round OffInput

Elevation snap: rounds each step's top and bottom elevation to a multiple of this value, in metres. 0 turns rounding off.

Update PreviewButton

Resamples the grade and redraws the preview with the current values; the preview also refreshes itself a moment after any value changes.

Build StepsButton

Recalculates from the current values and replaces the picked walls with one native wall per step, in one transaction named LF-Grade Walls.

ResetButton

Clears the picked walls and the preview so you can start again.

CloseButton

Closes Grade Walls and removes the preview from the view.

Back to tool index ↑

Hardscape · Linear Grade · Wall Shaper

Wall Shaper

Give walls freeform tops and bottoms, edited in place with grips on the wall, a typed elevation, a slope, or a one-click fit to the ground.

Wall Shaper reshapes one wall or a whole run of walls joined end to end. Handles along the run carry a top and a bottom elevation; you drag them up and down right on the walls, in the unfolded elevation strip under the toolbar, or type exact values and slopes. Straight walls keep their native Revit profile, so tags, dimensions, schedules and hosted doors stay attached and Edit Profile still works afterwards. Curved walls, which Revit cannot give a profile, are trimmed by an LF void family instead. Every Apply is one undo step, and each wall remembers its handles for the next session.

Where to find it

LandForm tabHardscape panelLinear Grade ▾Wall Shaper

Button tooltip: “Give walls freeform tops and bottoms, edited in place.”
Before you start
  • A project with basic or stacked walls that have a vertical cross-section. Curtain walls, slanted or tapered walls and the individual layers of a stacked wall cannot be shaped.
  • Walls that form one run joined end to end. A T or X junction, or two separate runs, are refused; with Joins on, picking a single wall brings its whole run round the corners.
  • A 3D view, elevation or section if you want to drag grips on the walls themselves. In a plan view, use the elevation strip under the toolbar instead.
  • For Fit to Grade, the ground visible in a 3D view: toposolids, topography, floors, roads and hardscape, including linked models. Open the default 3D view once so LandForm has a view to read it through.
Tutorial video

Watch Wall Shaper in action

Video coming soon

Wall Shaper walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Wall Shaper: Wall Shaper toolbar with a two-wall run in the elevation strip
Wall Shaper toolbar with a two-wall run in the elevation strip · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick Walls, Joins

    Pick one wall of the run; with Joins ticked the walls joined to its ends follow round the corners.

  2. 2
    Snap

    Dragged elevations round to this step in millimetres; 0 turns snapping off.

  3. 3
    Elevation strip

    The run unfolded: drag the blue top and amber bottom grips, slide a handle by its triangle, or double-click to add one.

  4. 4
    + / −

    + adds handles where you click along the walls; − removes the selected handle.

  5. 5
    ‹ ›

    Step through the handles; the counter shows which one is selected.

  6. 6
    Top, Bottom

    Type the selected handle's top and bottom in metres above the project base point and press Enter.

  7. 7
    Slope

    A slope in percent or as a ratio, applied to the span or the whole run chosen in the list beside it.

  8. 8
    Smooth

    Draws a curve through the handles instead of straight lines from handle to handle.

  9. 9
    Fit to Grade

    Lands the top and bottom on the ground faces; the gear sets the faces, what to fit and the offsets.

  10. 10
    Apply

    Writes the changed walls in one undo step; the toolbar stays open for more edits.

  11. 11
    Status line

    Reports the walls and run length picked and guides the next step.

  12. 12
    Apply state

    Shows Not applied while the shape on screen differs from the model.

  13. 13
    Undo, Redo

    Step through edits that are not yet applied.

  14. 14
    Reset

    Discard edits returns to the model's shape; Restore original walls removes Wall Shaper's shape entirely.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Wall Shaper

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Hardscape panel → Linear Grade ▾ → Wall Shaper.

  2. 02

    Pick the walls. Walls selected before you started are picked up straight away. Otherwise press Pick Walls, click one wall of the run and click Finish; with Joins ticked the walls joined to its ends follow round the corners. The status line reports the number of walls and the run length, and notes any curved walls that will be shaped by an LF void cutter.

  3. 03

    Drag the grips on screen. In a 3D view, an elevation or a section, drag the blue grips to move the top and the amber grips to move the bottom. Dragged elevations round to the Snap value in millimetres (10 mm by default; 0 turns snapping off). Click an elevation chip on screen to type its value exactly.

  4. 04

    Or edit in the strip. The strip under the toolbar is the run unfolded, and works in any view: drag a grip up or down, slide a handle along the run by its triangle, double-click to add a handle, Ctrl+click or Delete to remove one. A ghost line shows the walls as they stand in the model, with the ground on the high and low side drawn beside it.

    Keyboard: Left and Right select a handle, Up and Down nudge its top by the snap step, Shift+Up/Down nudge the bottom.

  5. 05

    Add handles where you need them. Press + and click along the walls, at an edge or in the middle; press Esc when done. Step through the handles with the ‹ and › buttons, then type Top and Bottom in metres above the project base point and press Enter. The − button removes the selected handle; the two end handles always stay.

  6. 06

    Set a slope. Type a Slope in percent (2.5) or as a ratio (1:20) and press Enter; a negative value falls along the run. The list beside it says what the slope sets: Top, next or Bottom, next from the selected handle to the following one, or Top, run and Bottom, run for one even slope over the whole run from the first handle. The box always shows the current slope of that span.

  7. 07

    Choose straight or smooth. Tick Smooth for a curve through the handles that never overshoots them, or leave it off for straight lines from handle to handle.

  8. 08

    Fit to Grade (optional). Open the gear beside Fit to Grade and choose Faces (Top faces of the ground, or Bottom faces of a slab, ramp or deck overhead), Fit (Top and bottom, Top only or Bottom only) and the Top offset and Bottom offset in metres. Press Fit to Grade: the top lands on the high side of the face plus the top offset, the bottom on the low side plus the bottom offset, with handles only where the face bends. The status line reports the face range that was read; Undo brings the previous shape back.

  9. 09

    Apply. Press Apply. Only the walls whose shape changed are written, all in one undo step named "LF-Wall Shaper: Shape Walls", and the status line confirms how many walls were shaped. Wall Shaper stays open for more edits; the right of the status line shows Not applied while the shape on screen differs from the model.

What you get

Straight walls now carry a native edited profile that follows your handles, so Revit's Edit Profile, tags, dimensions and hosted elements all keep working. Each curved wall has been stretched to cover its highest top and lowest bottom and trimmed by a pinned, hidden LF-Wall Shaper Cutter void family. Every shaped wall stores its handles, so picking the same walls later reopens the exact shape for further editing. The whole Apply is one Revit undo step.

Good to know

Tips

  • Slanted and tapered walls cannot be shaped: set the wall's Cross-Section to Vertical first. Walls whose top or base is attached to a roof or floor are refused at Apply; detach them and apply again. A bottom pulled above a top between two handles is the other usual cause of a refusal.
  • The LF void cutter on a curved wall is pinned and hidden in every view so clicks still pick the wall; Reveal Hidden Elements shows it. If you move the wall, apply again so the cutter follows.
  • Reset offers two choices: Discard edits returns to the shape the walls have in the model (toolbar Undo brings the edits back), and Restore original walls removes Wall Shaper's shape entirely, giving a straight wall its own earlier profile back and a curved wall its original constraints without the cutter.
  • The toolbar's Undo and Redo step through edits that are not yet applied, up to 100 of them. After Apply, use Revit's Undo.
  • The top is always kept at least 10 mm above the bottom, so a slope that would cross the other line is limited and the status line says so.
  • If Fit to Grade reports that no ground was found, make the toposolid, topography or floors visible in a 3D view and try again; walls under a slab need Bottom faces.
  • If a picked wall is deleted or its length changes while the toolbar is open, Apply asks you to pick the walls again.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Hardscape · Linear Grade · Site Steps

Site Steps

Build a flight of site steps off a slab edge, a drawn line or a circle, as a native Revit stair or as stacked Floor or Toposolid treads, in one pick.

Site Steps removes the two things that make Revit stairs painful on a site: no level has to exist at either end of the flight, and there is nothing to sketch. You set up the flight on the toolbar, then pick the line it runs off; the stair is placed square to that line, running into open air, and built straight away with equal risers inside your limits. Pick a slab edge for a straight or concentric flight, chain existing lines or draw one in place for steps that follow a path, or set out a circle for a ring of steps. Choose Stair for a native stair with railings, or Floor or Toposolid for monolithic treads that stay in the hardscape schedules.

Where to find it

LandForm tabHardscape panelLinear Grade ▾Site Steps

Button tooltip: “Build a native stair straight off a slab edge.”
Before you start
  • A project document open in a plan or 3D view; Site Steps does not run on a sheet. A plan view is simplest for Draw and Circular, which click points in the view.
  • Something to run the steps off: the edge of a Floor, Toposolid, Roof or Stair, or model or detail lines you have already drawn.
  • A stair type for a native stair, or a Floor or Toposolid type whose thickness is close to the riser height for monolithic treads. A railing type if the stair should have handrails.
  • Your step rules in metres: target riser (0.150 by default), Min and Max riser (0.100 to 0.180), tread depth (0.400) and, in Manual mode, the total Height to climb.
Tutorial video

Watch Site Steps in action

Video coming soon

Site Steps walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Site Steps: Site Steps toolbar set to build a stair down from a picked edge
Site Steps toolbar set to build a stair down from a picked edge · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    BUILD AS

    Stair, Floor or Toposolid, then the stair or tread type beside it.

  2. 2
    HOST Level / Railing

    The level the flight is measured from, and the railing type for a stair (None removes the railings).

  3. 3
    PATH

    Edge, Lines, Draw or Circular: what the steps run off.

  4. 4
    MODE Manual / Auto

    Manual takes a typed height; Auto measures the rise and run from two slab edges.

  5. 5
    Down / Up / Height

    In Manual mode, the flight hangs Down from the picked line or climbs Up away from it, by this total height in metres.

  6. 6
    STEP Riser / Min / Max / Tread

    The target riser, the riser limits you accept and the tread depth, in metres.

  7. 7
    RUN Across / Width / Center

    Whether the steps run out from the guide or along it, the flight width (0 takes the full edge) and where a narrower flight sits.

  8. 8
    Flip / End riser

    Swaps which end Left and Right mean, or finishes the flight on a riser face instead of a tread.

  9. 9
    Pick Edge

    Picks the guide and builds the flight at once; the label follows the path source.

  10. 10
    Status line

    Tells you the next step, then reports the solved treads and risers.

  11. 11
    Rebuild / Reset

    Replaces the previous flight after you change a setting, or forgets the guide to start a new flight.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Site Steps

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Hardscape panel → Linear Grade ▾ → Site Steps.

  2. 02

    Choose what to build. Under BUILD AS, pick Stair, Floor or Toposolid, then choose the type in the list beside it; the list switches between stair types and tread types to match.

  3. 03

    Choose the host level and railing. Under HOST, pick the Level the flight is measured from; the flight is expressed as offsets from it, so the ends need no level of their own. Set Railing to None to remove the railings Revit adds to every stair, or pick a railing type. Railings apply to the Stair output only.

  4. 04

    Choose the path source. Under PATH, pick Edge to run off a slab edge (arc edges stay curved), Lines to chain model or detail lines, Draw to click the line in the view, or Circular for concentric steps around a centre.

    For Lines, Draw and Circular, Raise lifts or drops the guide in metres and Other side swaps the side the steps fall away to, because a line cannot tell which side is open air. Circular also takes Rad (0 reads the radius from the point you pick) and Sweep in degrees; negative sweeps clockwise and 360 makes a full ring.

  5. 05

    Choose how the rise is measured. Under MODE, Manual takes a typed Height and runs Down from the picked line (hanging the flight below a terrace edge) or Up away from it. Auto, available for the Edge path only, measures the rise and the run from two slab edges, so you only type the number of Steps.

  6. 06

    Proportion the steps. Under STEP, type the target Riser, the Min and Max riser you will accept and the Tread depth. In Manual mode the height is divided into equal risers as close to the target as the limits allow; in Auto mode the step count wins and the limits only warn.

  7. 07

    Set the run. Under RUN, choose Across so the guide is the head of the stair and the steps run out from it, or Along so the guide becomes the walking line with the risers square across it, which turns an arc into a curved or spiral flight. Type Width: running Across, 0 takes the full length of the picked edge; running Along, type the width you want. Use Left, Center or Right to sit a narrower flight against an end of the edge, Flip to swap which end Left and Right mean, and End riser to finish on a riser face instead of a tread.

  8. 08

    Pick the guide; this builds the flight. Press the green button, whose label follows the path source: Pick Edge, Pick 2 Edges (Auto: top edge then bottom edge), Pick Lines then Finish, Draw Line then Esc, or Pick Centre then the start of the sweep. The flight is solved and built immediately, and the status line reports the treads and risers, for example "9 treads and 10 risers, each 150 mm."

    The right of the status line shows the guide and its length, the total Rise, the solved risers and tread in millimetres, and 2R+G, which turns red outside the 550 to 700 mm comfort range.

  9. 09

    Adjust and rebuild. Change any setting and the preview redraws on the same guide: blue treads, magenta risers and the amber guide line. Press Rebuild to replace the previous flight with the new one, so nothing stacks up and a single Undo returns to the start. Press Reset to forget the guide and start a new flight elsewhere.

What you get

With Stair chosen, a native Revit stair now stands on the picked edge, with its base and top expressed as offsets from the host level, the solved riser count, tread depth and run width, and railings removed or set to the type you chose. With Floor or Toposolid, one slab per tread stacks up the flight, each at its own tread level with its Comments set to "LandForm Site Steps - Tread n" so the treads can be scheduled. The new elements are selected when the build finishes, and the whole build, including the removal of a previous flight on Rebuild, is one undo step named "LF-Site Steps: Build Steps".

Good to know

Tips

  • A native stair run has to follow one straight line or one arc. A guide made of several segments, from Lines or Draw, still builds as Floor or Toposolid treads, which is how monolithic site steps are usually modelled anyway.
  • Running Along an arc makes a Revit spiral run, which lays out the wedge-shaped treads itself and is far more robust than a sketched curve. The sweep must stay under a full circle and half the width must not reach past the centre.
  • The direction is worked out for you: a picked edge is probed on both sides and the flight always runs into open air, never back through the slab. Only drawn or picked lines need Other side.
  • The status line warns when a tread solves below 240 mm, when a riser falls outside Min and Max, and in Along mode when the flight is longer than its guide and will be cut short.
  • The chosen stair type still enforces its own riser and tread limits. If Revit refuses the run, check those limits on the type or switch to Floor or Toposolid treads.
  • If the project has no level above the host level, Site Steps adds a temporary level named LF-SiteSteps-Temp to open the stair editor and removes it again; if Revit will not delete it, the status line asks you to delete it by hand.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
04

LandForm ribbon panel

Patterns

Paving patterns: make, overlay, parametric and dissolving layouts.

Patterns · Maker

Pattern Maker

Turn linework you have drawn in Revit into a real fill pattern, model or drafting, that materials, filled regions and other projects can use.

Revit ships with few paving or planting hatches and no editor for new ones. With Pattern Maker you draw one repeating tile of the pattern with detail or model lines, select it, show LandForm the tile with two clicks and press Run. The result is a Fill Pattern in the project, created or redefined in place, so every material and filled-region type that uses it updates at once. The same toolbar can duplicate a filled-region type for the pattern, assign it to the material of a floor or toposolid, and write a PAT file for other projects.

Where to find it

LandForm tabPatterns panelMaker

Button tooltip: “Create or update Revit fill patterns from selected linework.”
Before you start
  • A project document open in a plan, drafting or legend view. Pattern Maker does not run in families, on sheets, or in section and 3D views.
  • The source: detail or model lines, arcs, ellipses or splines that make up one repeating tile, or a filled region whose type uses a non-solid pattern. Curves are approximated by short straight segments.
  • A decision between Model (real-world size, the same at every scale) and Drafting (paper size, built for the active view scale shown on the status bar).
  • A pattern name. Choosing an existing name of the same type redefines that pattern; "Solid fill" cannot be used.
Tutorial video

Watch Pattern Maker in action

Video coming soon

Pattern Maker walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 12 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Pattern Maker: Pattern Maker toolbar with no linework selected yet
Pattern Maker toolbar with no linework selected yet · 12 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Status line

    Tells you the next step and later confirms the pattern was created or updated.

  2. 2
    Refresh Selection

    Reads the lines or filled region selected in Revit and highlights them.

  3. 3
    1:200 / No usable linework selected.

    The active view scale used for drafting patterns, and how many pattern sources are selected.

  4. 4
    Name

    Type a new pattern name, or pick an existing pattern of the current Type to redefine it.

  5. 5
    Type

    Model for real-world size, Drafting for paper size at the active view scale.

  6. 6
    Scale

    Multiplies the drawn tile size; 1.0 keeps the size you drew.

  7. 7
    Region type

    Also makes a filled-region type named after the pattern.

  8. 8
    Assign surface

    After creation, pick a floor or toposolid whose material gets the pattern as its Surface Foreground.

  9. 9
    High resolution

    Keeps the angles of angled and curved linework.

  10. 10
    Run

    Asks for the bottom-left and top-right corners of one tile, builds the pattern, then runs the ticked extras.

  11. 11
    Export PAT

    Writes a PAT file named after the pattern to a folder you choose.

  12. 12
    mm

    The units written into the exported PAT file, mm or inch.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Pattern Maker

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Patterns panel → Maker.

  2. 02

    Select the source linework. Select the lines or the filled region in Revit, then press Refresh Selection. The status bar reports how many pattern sources are selected and the selection is highlighted on screen.

    You can also select before opening the toolbar; the selection is read when the toolbar appears.

  3. 03

    Name the pattern. Type a new name in Name, or pick an existing pattern from the list to redefine it. The list only shows patterns of the current Type.

  4. 04

    Choose the type and scale. Set Type to Model or Drafting. Scale multiplies the drawn tile size; 1.0 keeps the size you drew. Drafting patterns are also divided by the active view scale, so open the view whose scale you document at.

  5. 05

    Tick the extras you want. Region type duplicates a filled-region type named after the pattern with the new pattern as its foreground. Assign surface asks you to pick a floor or toposolid afterwards and sets the pattern as the Surface Foreground pattern of its type's material. Keep High resolution on so angled and curved linework keeps its angles.

  6. 06

    Press Run and mark the tile. Click Run. Revit asks for the bottom-left corner of one repeating tile, then for the top-right corner; a rectangle follows the cursor so you can see the repeat area. Everything inside that rectangle becomes one repeat of the pattern.

  7. 07

    Pick the surface (if asked). With Assign surface ticked, Step 3 asks for the floor or toposolid that should receive the pattern. Press Esc to skip the assignment and keep the pattern.

  8. 08

    Export a PAT file (optional). Press Export PAT and choose a folder. With linework selected you mark the tile again and the file is built from it; with nothing selected, the pattern named in Name is read from the project and exported as it is. Units follow the mm / inch box.

What you get

A fill pattern with the name you typed now exists in the project's Fill Patterns, as a model or drafting pattern, and the status bar confirms that it was created or updated. If a pattern of that name and type already existed, it was redefined in place and every material, filled-region type and view that uses it shows the new linework. The pattern is written in one undo step, "LF-Pattern Maker: Create Fill Pattern", with "LF-Pattern Maker: Create Filled Region Type" and "LF-Pattern Maker: Assign Surface Pattern" added when you ticked those options. An exported PAT file is named after the pattern and saved in the folder you chose.

Good to know

Tips

  • The tile rectangle is the repeat: draw the linework so that what crosses its edges continues correctly on the other side.
  • Curves are tessellated into short straight lines, so a tile with arcs or splines produces many pattern lines; keep curved tiles simple.
  • Drafting patterns are built for the view scale on the status bar (for example 1:200). Run again from another view if the scale changes.
  • Assign surface needs a material it can write to. LandForm uses the type's structural material or the first layer material it finds; when the type's layers have no material it creates one named "LandForm Pattern - " followed by the type name and places it on the first layer. The status bar says so if no writable material is available.
  • Region type duplicates the first filled-region type in the project; if the project has none, the pattern is still created and the status bar tells you no region type was made.
Control reference · 11 controls

Every control and what it does

Pattern Maker11 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Pattern NameSelector

Name of the pattern to create. Pick an existing name from the list, which is filtered to the current Type, to redefine that pattern. "Solid fill" is reserved.

TargetSelector

Model builds a real-world-size pattern; Drafting builds a paper-size pattern for the active view scale shown on the status bar.

Scale MultiplierInput

Multiplies the drawn tile size; 1.0 keeps the size you drew. Drafting patterns are also divided by the active view scale.

Region typeOption

Also duplicates a filled-region type named after the pattern, with the new pattern as its foreground.

Assign surfaceOption

After creation, pick a floor or toposolid; the pattern becomes the Surface Foreground pattern of its type's material.

High resolutionOption

Expands the repeat search so the source line angles are preserved more accurately.

Export UnitSelector

mm or inch, the units written into the exported PAT file; preselected from the project's length units.

Refresh SelectionButton

Reads the detail or model curves or the filled region currently selected in Revit and highlights them.

Export PATButton

Writes a PAT file named after the pattern to a folder you choose, from the selected linework after you mark the tile, or from the existing pattern of that name when nothing is selected.

RunButton

Creates or redefines the pattern: asks for the two tile corners, builds the pattern, then runs the ticked extras.

CloseButton

Closes Pattern Maker and removes the selection highlight.

Back to tool index ↑

Patterns · Overlay

Pattern Overlay

Turn the surface pattern of a floor or toposolid into real model lines that drape over the surface, then keep those lines in step with the host as it changes.

A material's surface pattern is only a display setting: it stays flat in plan, cannot be scheduled and does not follow a sloped toposolid in 3D. Pattern Overlay reads the Surface Foreground pattern of the host's top material, repeats it across the whole top face, clips it to the boundary and drapes every joint onto the surface. You preview the result on screen first, turn it or line it up with a kerb edge, and only then press Apply. The overlay stays linked to its host: three ribbon buttons create it (Overlay), switch automatic rebuilds on or off (Auto Update), and rebuild on demand (Update).

Where to find it

LandForm tabPatterns panelOverlay

Button tooltip: “Create managed model geometry from a host surface pattern.”
Before you start
  • A Floor or Toposolid whose top material has a Surface Foreground pattern that is not a solid fill. A Model pattern gives scale-independent joints; a Drafting pattern is captured at the scale of the view you apply from.
  • A view in which the surface is visible; a plan or a 3D view works best. The tool does not start on a sheet.
  • Use it sparingly, as the toolbar itself warns: modelled joints add many lines to the model, so they are best saved for the final stages of a project. Dense patterns over large areas slow down panning and view regeneration.
Tutorial video

Watch Pattern Overlay in action

Video coming soon

Pattern Overlay walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Pattern Overlay: Pattern Overlay toolbar before a surface is picked
Pattern Overlay toolbar before a surface is picked · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Use sparingly

    Modelled joints add many lines to the model, so save overlays for the final stages.

  2. 2
    Pick Surface

    Click a floor or toposolid to preview its pattern as modelled lines; nothing is created yet.

  3. 3
    Status line

    Tells you the next step, then names the pattern, counts the lines and warns when the pattern is heavy.

  4. 4
    Rotate

    Angle of the pattern in degrees; type a value, or press and drag on the box to nudge it.

  5. 5
    Align to Edge

    Click a straight edge such as a slab edge, kerb or wall; the pattern turns to match it and starts on it.

  6. 6
    Hide pattern in all views

    Tick to hide the native pattern in every plan, section, elevation and 3D view, not only the view you apply from.

  7. 7
    Filter

    Adds the overlay-hosts view filter to all view templates or the active view, or removes it everywhere.

  8. 8
    Edit

    Click a surface that already has an overlay to preview it with its stored rotation and anchor.

  9. 9
    Reset

    Reset Selected removes the overlay of one surface, Reset All every overlay in the project; both restore the native pattern.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Pattern Overlay

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Patterns panel → Overlay.

  2. 02

    Pick the surface. Press Pick Surface and click a floor or toposolid. The surface's native pattern is hidden in the active view and a live preview of the modelled lines is drawn in its place. Nothing is created yet.

    The status line names the pattern and counts the lines, and warns when the pattern is heavy enough to make panning and zooming slow.

  3. 03

    Turn the pattern (optional). Type an angle in Rotate, or press and drag on the box to nudge it. The preview redraws as soon as the value settles.

  4. 04

    Line it up with an edge (optional). Press Align to Edge and click a straight edge, such as a slab edge, kerb or wall. The pattern turns to match it and starts on that edge instead of the project origin; the solved angle appears in Rotate. Clear drops the alignment again.

  5. 05

    Decide where the native pattern is hidden. Leave Hide pattern in all views clear to hide it only in the view you apply from, or tick it to hide it in every plan, section, elevation and 3D view.

  6. 06

    Apply. Press Apply and choose Only the selected surface or All visible instances of this type. When a single surface would get more than 10,000 lines, LandForm asks you to confirm that modelled geometry is really needed. A progress bar runs while the pattern is repeated, clipped and draped; Cancel stops it.

  7. 07

    Keep working. Edit the host, its type, its material or the fill pattern as usual. While Auto Update is on, the overlay rebuilds itself. Press Discard at any point before Apply to drop the preview and bring the native pattern back.

What you get

Each host carries one overlay element in the Hardscape category, named after the pattern, with its lines in the material's pattern colour and the parameters LF_Host, LF_Host ID and LF_Area (the host's area). The host itself is marked with LF_Pattern Overlay and LF_Pattern Overlay ID. The native surface pattern is hidden in the views you chose, and the Folding Lines and Split Lines of floors and toposolids are turned off in the active view (or its view template) so triangulation lines do not compete with the joints. The geometry of each surface is written in one step named "LF-Pattern Overlay: Create Repeated Pattern Shape". Reset removes the overlay and restores the native pattern in every view it was hidden in.

More about Pattern Overlay

Editing an existing overlay

Press Edit and click a floor or toposolid that already carries an overlay. Its stored rotation and edge anchor load into the toolbar, the existing overlay lines step aside in the active view, and the pattern is previewed exactly as it was applied. Adjust Rotate, Align to Edge or Clear as usual, then press Apply to replace the overlay, or Discard to bring the original lines back untouched. Replacing an overlay keeps the views in which the original run hid the native pattern, and the host marks used by the view filter. Picking an already overlaid surface with Pick Surface also hides its old lines while the preview is live, but starts from the angle in the Rotate box rather than the stored one.

More about Pattern Overlay

Auto Update: automatic rebuilds

The Auto Update button on the ribbon reads Auto: On or Auto: Off and its icon changes with it; one click flips the switch, and the choice is remembered between Revit sessions. While it is on, an overlay rebuilds itself as soon as its host changes shape, the host's floor or toposolid type changes, the material that carries the Surface Foreground pattern is edited (including swapping the pattern in the Material Browser), or the fill pattern definition is edited. A compact progress toolbar with Cancel appears while the rebuild runs, and overlays whose host was deleted are removed.

Turn it off to regrade terrain or reshape hardscape on a large model without waiting for overlays after every edit. Overlays touched while the switch is off keep their old lines until you rebuild them with Update.

More about Pattern Overlay

Update: rebuild on demand

Update rebuilds overlays right away, whatever the Auto Update switch says. Select one or more host floors or toposolids first and it offers Selected hosts or All overlays; with nothing selected it offers Pick one host surface or All overlays. Each rebuild reuses the rotation, anchor and hidden-view choice of the original run and shows overall progress. Cancel stops the batch between surfaces, and a closing summary says how many overlays were rebuilt and names the first problem if any failed.

More about Pattern Overlay

Where the native pattern is hidden

The modelled lines and the surface's own pattern draw the same joints, so wherever both show they double up. Applying an overlay therefore hides the host's native surface pattern with a view override.

  • Hide pattern in all views clear: only the view you apply from is changed. Good for working views, studies or a single drawing.
  • Hide pattern in all views ticked: every non-template plan, section, elevation and 3D view is changed. Good for final documentation or a surface that appears in several drawings. On a large model the first pass takes a while; the status line reports the view count while it runs, and later rebuilds only touch views that need changing.

Views created after Apply are not covered either way; apply again, or use the view filter below.

More about Pattern Overlay

The view filter

The Filter button manages a view filter named "LandForm - Pattern Overlay Hosts" that finds every surface marked with LF_Pattern Overlay and hides its native surface pattern.

  • Add Filter to All View Templates — every view using those templates hides the native pattern of overlaid surfaces, including views created later. This is the scalable choice.
  • Add Filter to Active View — the same, for the current view only.
  • Remove Filter Everywhere — takes the filter out of every view and template. The filter itself is kept, so it can be added again quickly.

Unlike per-view overrides, the filter costs nothing per surface and covers views made later. Overlays created before the marks existed mark themselves the next time they rebuild or are applied again.

More about Pattern Overlay

Toolbar controls

ControlFunction
RotateAngle of the modelled pattern in degrees, anticlockwise from the project east-west axis. Press and drag on the box to nudge it.
Align to EdgePick a straight edge with a direction in plan; the pattern turns to match it and starts on it. Arcs, splines and vertical edges are refused.
ClearAppears after an alignment; returns the pattern to zero rotation at the project origin.
Hide pattern in all viewsOn Apply, hides the native pattern in every plan, section, elevation and 3D view instead of only the current one.
FilterAdds the "LandForm - Pattern Overlay Hosts" view filter to all view templates or the active view, or removes it everywhere.
ResetReset Selected removes the overlay of the selected or picked surface; Reset All removes every overlay in the project. Both restore the native pattern.
Pick Surface / Pick AnotherPicks the surface to preview. With a preview live it moves the preview to another surface and restores the first one's pattern.
EditPicks a surface that already has an overlay and previews it with its stored rotation and anchor.
ApplyCreates the overlay from the live preview.
DiscardEnds the preview and brings the native pattern (and any existing overlay lines) back.
CancelShown while work is running; stops it.
CloseCloses the toolbar; a live preview is discarded.
Good to know

Tips

  • Prefer a Model pattern. With a Drafting pattern the status line reports "Drafting snapshot at 1:N", because the joint spacing is frozen at that view scale.
  • Applying to All visible instances of this type uses one shared angle and anchor, so the joints run on continuously across neighbouring surfaces of the same type.
  • The preview is never thinned: it draws exactly the lines Apply will create, in pink on a dark drawing background and deep green on a light one. In a 3D view Revit draws it as part of the scene, so it stays put through pan, zoom and orbit; in a plan it is drawn over the view.
  • If an overlay is not wanted any more, open the Reset menu: Reset Selected clears the selected (or picked) surface, Reset All clears every overlay in the project.
  • If Revit closes the toolbar while a preview is live, for example when the model is closed, the surface's native pattern can stay hidden. Reset Selected restores it on a surface that has an overlay; on one that has none, turn the foreground surface pattern back on in Revit's Override Graphics in View by Element.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Patterns · Patterns · Parametric

Parametric Pattern

Lay a seeded, multi-colour paving pattern over a floor or toposolid, check it live in the view, then export it as an image or build it as coloured Revit geometry.

Parametric Pattern is a quick paving colour study. You pick the host, choose a bond such as running bond, herringbone or hexagon, set the unit size and joint, and give each colour a share of the mix. The pattern is drawn over the host as you type, with an area report per colour. When the study looks right you choose the output: a JPEG for presentations, a pinned PNG placed in a plan view, a lightweight 3D coloured mesh with real Revit materials, or one Floor or Toposolid per paving unit.

Where to find it

LandForm tabPatterns panelPatterns ▾Parametric

Button tooltip: “Generate seeded paving colour patterns over a floor or toposolid.”
Before you start
  • A Floor or a Toposolid (Revit 2024 and later) visible in the active view. The tool does not start on a sheet.
  • For Placed PNG output, make a floor plan, structural plan or area plan the active view. JPEG, 3D mesh and element output work from any model view.
  • For Floors or Toposolids output, a layered Floor or Toposolid type to use as the base: each colour gets its own copy of that type with the colour's material on the top layer.
  • Your paving unit size and joint in millimetres, and the colour shares you want. The shares must add up to exactly 100%.
Tutorial video

Watch Parametric Pattern in action

Video coming soon

Parametric Pattern walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Parametric Pattern: Parametric Pattern on the Host tab with a 600 × 300 mm running bond previewed
Parametric Pattern on the Host tab with a 600 × 300 mm running bond previewed · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Host / Materials / All

    Switch between the host and palette pages, or show them side by side; click the open tab again to hide the options.

  2. 2
    Pattern type

    Chooses the bond, from stack and running bond to hexagon or the host's own pattern.

  3. 3
    Width (mm) / Height (mm) / Joint (mm)

    The paving unit size and joint; hover a field for a slider.

  4. 4
    Seed

    Reshuffles the colours and stagger without changing anything else.

  5. 5
    Rotation (deg)

    Turns the whole pattern grid.

  6. 6
    Align to edge

    Pick a straight edge in the model so the courses run parallel to it.

  7. 7
    Pattern offset X (mm) / Pattern offset Y (mm)

    Slide the grid so a joint lands where you want it.

  8. 8
    Refresh preview

    Redraws the preview over the host now; it also refreshes shortly after each change.

  9. 9
    Mix name

    Pick a saved mix to load its settings, or type a new name to save one.

  10. 10
    Save / Reload / Delete

    Store every setting in the project, restore the named mix, or remove it.

  11. 11
    Create 3D Mesh

    Creates the chosen output; the label follows Create as on the Materials tab.

  12. 12
    Preview ready

    Shows the preview state, cell count and progress.

  13. 13
    Select new host

    Pick another Floor or Toposolid of the same type and redraw the pattern on it.

  14. 14
    Snap

    Pins the window to the edge of the Revit view.

Step by step · 10 steps

How to use Parametric Pattern

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Patterns panel → Patterns ▾ → Parametric.

  2. 02

    Pick the host. Start the tool and click the Floor or Toposolid to pattern. The window opens on the Host tab and draws a first preview over the host.

  3. 03

    Choose the bond. Open Pattern type and pick a layout: Stack bond, Running bond, Random stagger, Herringbone, Triangle, Crazy paving, Pentagonal rosette, Hexagon, Octagon and square, Diamond, Basket weave or Selected host pattern. A hint under the list explains how the chosen layout uses the cell size.

    Herringbone adds a Herringbone angle field. Selected host pattern repeats the host's own Surface Foreground pattern instead of a generated bond.

  4. 04

    Size the units. In the strip under the tabs, set Width (mm), Height (mm) and Joint (mm). Hover a field to get a slider, or type an exact value. Change Seed to reshuffle the colours and stagger without changing anything else.

  5. 05

    Orient the pattern. Under Orientation, set Rotation (deg), or click Align to edge and pick a straight edge in the model so the courses run parallel to it. Use Pattern offset X and Pattern offset Y to slide the grid so a joint lands where you want it.

  6. 06

    Build the palette. Open the Materials tab. Under Use, choose New Revit materials to define colours yourself, or Existing Revit materials to pick materials already in the project. Set Palette size, pick a Colour range to recolour the swatches, then set each colour's share under Distribution (%) until the total line reads "Total: 100%".

    With new materials, click a swatch to change its colour and type a unique material name beside it.

  7. 07

    Check the preview. Choose how the host is drawn under Host display in active view, tick Project preview to host surface if the host is shaped, and click Report to see areas and shares per colour.

  8. 08

    Choose the output. Under Create as, pick JPEG, Placed PNG, 3D Coloured Mesh, Floors or Toposolids. For Floors and Toposolids, choose the Base type and check Warn above (cells).

  9. 09

    Save the mix (optional). Type a name in the Mix name box and click Save to keep every setting in the project for the next host.

  10. 10

    Create. Click the action button at the bottom right. Its label follows the output: Export JPEG, Place PNG, Create 3D Mesh, Create Floors or Create Toposolids. Progress shows beside the buttons, and the window stays open for another variation.

What you get

What you get depends on Create as. JPEG writes an image file wherever you save it and changes nothing in the model. Placed PNG adds a pinned, foreground image sized to the host in the active plan view ("LF-Parametric Pattern: Place PNG"). 3D Coloured Mesh creates one Hardscape DirectShape per colour, draped over the real host surface, using the palette's Revit materials and grouped in a pinned assembly ("LF-Parametric Pattern: Create 3D Coloured Mesh"); LandForm also loads the LF-PLNT-Pattern Tag family so you can tag the assembly with its material areas and shares. Floors or Toposolids creates one selectable element per paving unit, each using a type named after its colour material ("LF-Parametric Pattern: Bake Cells"). Created output carries pattern parameters such as LF_Pattern Layout, LF_Pattern Area and LF_Pattern Coverage %, so you can schedule it. Each create is a normal Revit undo step.

More about Parametric Pattern

Output options

Create asWhat it makesWhere it goes
JPEGA flat image of the patternA file you choose; nothing in the model
Placed PNGA pinned foreground image using material shading colours (no textures)The active plan view, at the host location
3D Coloured MeshOne Hardscape DirectShape per colour, draped over the host, grouped in an assemblyThe model; optional material schedule
FloorsOne Floor per paving unit, one type per colourThe model, on the host's level
ToposolidsOne Toposolid per paving unit, one type per colourThe model, on the host's level
Good to know

Tips

  • Click the highlighted tab again to hide all the options and leave a clear view of the preview. All puts the pages side by side, and Snap pins the window to the edge of the Revit view.
  • Select new host only accepts a Floor or Toposolid with the same type name as the current host. Pick a host of that type, or close and restart the tool.
  • Saved mixes are stored in the Revit project. Save the project to keep them after you close it.
  • If a pattern has more than 50,000 units around the host, LandForm asks before it continues. For Floors and Toposolids it asks again above the Warn above (cells) count. No cancels and keeps the previous preview.
  • Use Placed PNG or 3D Coloured Mesh for large areas. They stay light, while Floors and Toposolids add one element per paving unit and can make the model slow.
Control reference · 86 controls

Every control and what it does

Parametric Pattern84 controls
ControlTypeFunction
SnapButton

Snaps the window to the edge of the active Revit view and keeps it there while Revit moves or resizes; the button then reads Detach. Drag the window away to float it again.

Dock SideButton

Shown while the window is snapped. Moves it to the other side of the view; the arrow points to the side it will snap to.

Host TabToggle

Shows the Host page: saved mixes, Select new host, pattern type and orientation. Click it again while it is the only page open to hide the options and see the preview unobstructed.

Dissolve TabToggle

Dissolving Pattern only; this tab is removed from the Parametric Pattern window.

Materials TabToggle

Shows the Materials page: palette, distribution, output and live preview settings.

All TabToggle

Shows every page side by side and widens the window to fit, which is handy on a second screen. Click again to hide the options.

Width Text BoxInput

Paving unit width in millimetres (default 600). Always editable; Pentagonal rosette and Selected host pattern set their own unit, as the hint under Pattern type explains.

Width SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Width field; drag between 100 and 3000 mm and the preview follows.

Height Text BoxInput

Paving unit height in millimetres (default 300).

Height SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Height field; drag between 100 and 3000 mm.

Joint Text BoxInput

Joint width between units in millimetres (default 8). Joints count as uncovered area in the report.

Joint SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Joint field; drag between 0 and 100 mm.

Seed Text BoxInput

Random seed for stagger, density and colour sampling. The same seed always gives the same pattern; change it to reshuffle.

Seed SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Seed field; drag between 0 and 999.

Saved Mix Combo BoxSelector

Mix name. Pick a saved mix to load all its settings, or type a new name and click Save. Until you type your own, the name follows the pattern, for example PATT-Running Bond-600x300.

SaveButton

Saves every setting under the name in the box, or updates the mix of that name: materials, colours, shares, sizes, rotation, output, base type and preview options. The host is not saved.

ReloadButton

Restores all settings from the named saved mix, discarding current edits.

DeleteButton

Deletes the named saved mix from the project.

Select new hostButton

Returns to Revit so you can pick another Floor or Toposolid with the same type name, then redraws the pattern on it with the current settings.

Pattern Type Combo BoxSelector

Chooses the layout: Stack bond, Running bond, Random stagger, Herringbone, Triangle, Crazy paving, Pentagonal rosette, Hexagon, Octagon and square, Diamond, Basket weave or Selected host pattern (the host's own Surface Foreground pattern).

Herringbone Angle Text BoxInput

Shown for Herringbone only. Angle of the herringbone in degrees (default 45).

Herringbone Angle SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 0 and 90° in 5° steps.

Rotation Text BoxInput

Turns the whole pattern grid, in degrees.

Rotation SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Rotation field; drag between -180 and 180° in 5° steps.

Pattern Offset XText BoxInput

Slides the grid along its own row direction, in millimetres, so a unit edge or joint lines up with the host edge.

Pattern Offset XSliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm.

Pattern Offset YText BoxInput

Slides the grid along its own column direction, in millimetres.

Pattern Offset YSliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm.

Align to edgeButton

Returns to Revit so you can pick a straight edge; the pattern rotation is set to match it.

Influence RadialToggle

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Influence PathToggle

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Influence CircleToggle

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Influence Combo BoxSelector

Dissolving Pattern only; always hidden. It holds the influence choice made with the three influence buttons.

Pick centreButton

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Host centreButton

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Pick pathsButton

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Fade Offset XText BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Fade Offset XSliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Fade Offset YText BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Fade Offset YSliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Path Arrangement Combo BoxSelector

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Path Start Offset Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Path Start Offset SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Path Row Offset Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Path Row Offset SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

ResetButton

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Dissolve Preset Combo BoxSelector

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Dissolve Radius Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Dissolve Radius SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

End Scale Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

End Scale SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

End Density Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

End Density SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Minimum Cut Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Minimum Cut SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Auto fill / cut guide endsOption

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Color Mode Combo BoxSelector

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Part Division Combo BoxSelector

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Color Parts Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Color Parts SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Band Width Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Band Width SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Part Start Offset Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Part Start Offset SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Color Fade Text BoxInput

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Color Fade SliderSlider

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Color Fade Target Combo BoxSelector

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Color Fade Direction Combo BoxSelector

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Auto balance palette for selected pathOption

Dissolving Pattern only. Hidden in Parametric Pattern.

Palette Source Combo BoxSelector

Use: New Revit materials lets you set each colour and name and creates those materials on output; Existing Revit materials lets you pick a project material for each slot and uses its shading colour in the preview.

Palette Combo BoxSelector

Palette size: how many colours the pattern uses (2 to 10 here). Use Add material for more. Reducing the size keeps the hidden entries for reuse.

Color Range Combo BoxSelector

Recolours the new-material swatches from a preset range: Earth, Teal, Greens, Greys, Blues or Bright. Custom keeps your own colours. Hidden when you use existing materials.

Add materialButton

Adds another palette entry at 0%. Existing colours, names and shares are kept; raise the new entry's share to use it.

Output Combo BoxSelector

Create as: JPEG, Placed PNG, 3D Coloured Mesh, Floors or Toposolids. Hover an entry in the list for a description. The action button's label changes to match.

Type Combo BoxSelector

Base type (thickness and layers), shown for Floors and Toposolids. Each colour gets its own named copy of this type with the colour's material on the top layer; thickness and other layers are kept and the base type is not changed.

Limit Text BoxInput

Warn above (cells), shown for Floors and Toposolids (default 1200). Above this count, Create asks first: Yes creates the whole pattern, No cancels. It is a warning, not a cap.

Create or update material scheduleOption

Shown for 3D Coloured Mesh. Creates one native Revit schedule for this pattern and its ordered palette; matching meshes created later appear in it automatically.

ReportButton

Opens or closes the Area Report beside this window.

Host Display Combo BoxSelector

How the host is drawn in the active view while you work: White surface, hide native patterns (recommended); Hide all host patterns; or Keep current host graphics. It is a view-only override; the host material and other views are unchanged.

Keep this view override after CreateOption

Keeps the host display override in this view after an image, mesh or element output is created, so the new pattern stays clear. Off, the original host graphics return when the tool closes.

Project preview to host surfaceOption

Drapes the on-screen preview over a shaped Floor or Toposolid instead of drawing it flat. Exports and created output are not affected.

Refresh previewButton

Redraws the preview now. It also refreshes on its own shortly after you change a setting.

CloseButton

Closes the tool, clears the preview and restores any temporary host display. Output you already created stays.

Create 3D MeshButton

Creates the chosen output. The label follows Create as: Export JPEG, Place PNG, Create 3D Mesh, Create Floors or Create Toposolids. Disabled until the distribution totals 100% and every material is named or chosen.

Parametric Pattern Area Report2 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Area report detailsSection

Expands or collapses the live report: host area, paved area, uncovered remainder, coverage, cell count, and the area and share of every colour. Areas come from the clipped unit geometry.

Export ExcelButton

Saves the current report as an Excel workbook (.xlsx) wherever you choose.

Back to tool index ↑

Patterns · Patterns · Dissolving

Dissolving Pattern

Lay a paving pattern on a floor or toposolid that shrinks, thins out or changes colour with distance from a point, a ring or the lines you pick.

Dissolving Pattern is the paving tool for transitions: a plaza whose setts break up into planting, a path edge that fades into gravel, rings of pavers around a tree. You choose what drives the effect, set how far it reaches and how small, sparse or recoloured the units become at the far end, and watch the result live over the host. It shares its pattern types, palette and outputs with Parametric Pattern, so the finished study can become an image, a 3D coloured mesh or one Floor or Toposolid per paving unit.

Where to find it

LandForm tabPatterns panelPatterns ▾Dissolving

Button tooltip: “Generate paving patterns from a radial point, a path-free circular array, or multiple live paths.”
Before you start
  • A Floor or a Toposolid (Revit 2024 and later) visible in the active view. The tool does not start on a sheet.
  • For a path-driven dissolve, draw the guide first as model lines or detail lines. Connected segments are treated as one guide.
  • A plan view, or an orthographic 3D view that is not edge-on, if you want to drag the centre, radius and rotation grips on screen. Placed PNG output needs a plan view.
  • Your paving unit size in millimetres and the colour shares you want; the shares must add up to exactly 100%.
Tutorial video

Watch Dissolving Pattern in action

Video coming soon

Dissolving Pattern walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Dissolving Pattern: Dissolving Pattern on the Dissolve tab with a radial full dissolve
Dissolving Pattern on the Dissolve tab with a radial full dissolve · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Detach / →

    The window opens snapped beside the Revit view; Detach floats it and the arrow moves it to the other side.

  2. 2
    Host / Dissolve / Materials / All

    Switches between the pages; All shows every page side by side.

  3. 3
    Influence source

    Radial point dissolves around a centre, Selected path follows picked lines, Perfect circle lays the paving in concentric rings.

  4. 4
    Pick centre / Host centre

    Click the influence centre in the view (Esc keeps the last one), or put it back in the middle of the host.

  5. 5
    Centre X offset / Centre Y offset (mm)

    Fine-tunes the centre's distance from the host centre.

  6. 6
    Dissolve / Reset

    Picks a dissolve preset; Reset restores the default dissolve, influence and colour settings.

  7. 7
    Fade radius (mm)

    How far the effect reaches from the influence.

  8. 8
    End size / End density / Min cut size (%)

    How small and how sparse the units are at the fade radius, and the smallest trimmed piece to keep.

  9. 9
    Colour transition

    Colour mode, Colour fade (%), Fade target colour and Fade direction set how units change colour with distance.

  10. 10
    Width / Height / Joint (mm) / Seed

    Paving unit size, joint width and the random seed that reshuffles which units drop out.

  11. 11
    Status line

    Reports the preview state, cell count and time, with a progress bar.

  12. 12
    Refresh preview

    Redraws the preview now; it also refreshes shortly after each change.

  13. 13
    Create 3D Mesh

    Creates the chosen output; the label follows Create as on the Materials tab.

  14. 14
    Close

    Closes the tool and clears the preview and grips; output already created stays.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Dissolving Pattern

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Patterns panel → Patterns ▾ → Dissolving.

  2. 02

    Pick the host. Start the tool and click the Floor or Toposolid. The window opens snapped beside the Revit view on the Dissolve tab, and a first preview is drawn over the host.

  3. 03

    Choose the influence. Under Influence source, click Radial point for a dissolve around a centre, Perfect circle for paving set in concentric rings, or Selected path for a dissolve that follows lines.

    For a centre, click Pick centre and click in the view; keep clicking to compare positions, then press Esc to keep the last one. Host centre puts it back in the middle of the host, and Centre X offset and Centre Y offset fine-tune it. For paths, click Pick paths, select one or more lines and click Finish. The status line confirms how many paths and curves are linked.

  4. 04

    Arrange the units along the guide. With Selected path or Perfect circle, choose a Path arrangement. Influence only keeps a straight grid, Follow tangent turns each unit to the guide, Array along curve lays rows of units along it, and Follow curve + auto-cut bends the units to the curve and trims them where rows collide or meet the host edge. For rows along a path, set Pattern start offset and Row offset to place the first unit.

  5. 05

    Shape the dissolve. Pick a Dissolve preset, then set Fade radius (how far the effect reaches), End size (%) and End density (%) (how small and how sparse the units are at that distance). Min cut size (%) drops slivers left by trimming.

    For a centre-based dissolve you can also drag the grips in the view: the centre dot moves the influence (it snaps to the host centre), the cyan square changes the radius and the amber grip rotates the pattern. With paths, each path has its own radius and start grips. Release to refresh; Esc cancels a drag.

  6. 06

    Set the colour transition. Under Colour mode, Fade blend swaps a growing share of units to the Fade target colour, up to the Colour fade (%) you set, in the Fade direction you choose. Divide into parts paints hard-edged colour bands instead, by Number of parts or Band distance.

  7. 07

    Pick the pattern and unit size. On the Host tab, choose the Pattern type and Orientation, and set Width (mm), Height (mm), Joint (mm) and Seed in the strip under the tabs.

  8. 08

    Build the palette and choose the output. On the Materials tab, set the colours or project materials and their Distribution (%), then choose Create as: JPEG, Placed PNG, 3D Coloured Mesh, Floors or Toposolids.

  9. 09

    Create. Click the action button at the bottom right; its label follows the output (for example Create 3D Mesh). The window stays open, so you can save the mix and try another variation.

What you get

The output is the same as in Parametric Pattern, with the dissolve applied: units shrink, drop out and change colour exactly as the preview showed, and cut pieces are trimmed to the host. JPEG only writes a file. Placed PNG adds a pinned foreground image in the active plan view. 3D Coloured Mesh adds pinned, schedulable Hardscape geometry draped over the host, one shape per colour, grouped in an assembly. Floors and Toposolids create one element per unit with a type for each colour. Created output carries pattern parameters such as LF_Pattern Layout and LF_Pattern Coverage %, and each create is one undo step whose name starts "LF-Parametric Pattern:". The picked guide lines are only references and are never part of the output.

More about Dissolving Pattern

Influence and arrangement choices

Influence sourceArrangement choicesWhat the arrangement does
Radial pointNoneThe grid stays straight; size, density and colour change with distance from the centre.
Selected pathInfluence onlyThe grid stays straight; the dissolve is measured from the nearest picked line.
Selected pathFollow tangentEach unit is turned to follow the nearest line.
Selected pathArray along curveWhole units are laid in offset rows along each line.
Selected pathFollow curve + auto-cutUnits bend with the line, rows close evenly, and collisions and the host edge are trimmed.
Perfect circleCircular influence, Follow circle tangent, Radial arrayUnits stay square to the grid, turn to the ring, or are laid in true concentric rings (the default).
Good to know

Tips

  • Picked paths stay linked. Move or reshape a guide line and the paths and preview update on their own; undo a deletion and the link comes back.
  • With several paths, each one gets a label in the view (P1, P2 and so on) and its own row for radius and offsets. The main value sets all of them at once; change a row to give one path its own setting.
  • Pentagonal rosette starts from the five-sided paving unit at 276 × 478 mm; six units form an 828 × 956 mm interlocking rosette. Width and Height stay editable and scale the whole rosette.
  • Combine a low End density with a small End size for a softer, more natural dissolve. Units can remain beyond the fade radius at the end size and density.
  • Reset next to the preset restores the default dissolve, influence and colour settings without touching the palette, pattern type or output.
Control reference · 86 controls

Every control and what it does

Parametric Pattern84 controls
ControlTypeFunction
SnapButton

The Dissolving Pattern window opens snapped to the edge of the active Revit view and follows it, and the button reads Detach. Click it to float the window, or Snap to pin it again.

Dock SideButton

Shown while the window is snapped. Moves it to the other side of the view; the arrow points to the side it will snap to.

Host TabToggle

Shows the Host page: saved mixes, Select new host, pattern type and orientation. Click it again while it is the only page open to hide the options for an unobstructed preview.

Dissolve TabToggle

Shows the Dissolve page: influence source, dissolve settings and colour transition. The window opens on this tab.

Materials TabToggle

Shows the Materials page: palette, distribution, output and live preview settings.

All TabToggle

Shows every page side by side and widens the window to fit, which is handy on a second screen. Click again to hide the options.

Width Text BoxInput

Paving unit width in millimetres (default 600). When units are arrayed along a curve or ring it sets the spacing along it.

Width SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Width field; drag between 100 and 3000 mm.

Height Text BoxInput

Paving unit height in millimetres (default 300). When units are arrayed along a curve or ring it sets the row depth.

Height SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Height field; drag between 100 and 3000 mm.

Joint Text BoxInput

Joint width between units in millimetres (default 8).

Joint SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Joint field; drag between 0 and 100 mm.

Seed Text BoxInput

Random seed for stagger, density and colour sampling. The same seed always gives the same pattern; change it to reshuffle which units drop out and which change colour.

Seed SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Seed field; drag between 0 and 999.

Saved Mix Combo BoxSelector

Mix name. Pick a saved mix to load all its settings, including the dissolve, or type a new name and click Save. Until you type your own, the name follows the pattern, for example PATT-Running Bond-600x300.

SaveButton

Saves every setting under the name in the box, or updates the mix of that name: palette, sizes, rotation, dissolve and colour settings, output and preview options. The host and picked paths are not saved.

ReloadButton

Restores all settings from the named saved mix, discarding current edits.

DeleteButton

Deletes the named saved mix from the project.

Select new hostButton

Returns to Revit so you can pick another Floor or Toposolid with the same type name, then redraws the pattern on it with the current settings.

Pattern Type Combo BoxSelector

Chooses the layout: Stack bond, Running bond, Random stagger, Herringbone, Triangle, Crazy paving, Pentagonal rosette, Hexagon, Octagon and square, Diamond, Basket weave or Selected host pattern. Hidden while units are arrayed along a curve.

Herringbone Angle Text BoxInput

Shown for Herringbone only. Angle of the herringbone in degrees (default 45).

Herringbone Angle SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 0 and 90° in 5° steps.

Rotation Text BoxInput

Turns the pattern grid, in degrees. On a Perfect circle it sets where the rings start. Hidden while units are arrayed along a picked path.

Rotation SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the Rotation field; drag between -180 and 180° in 5° steps. The amber grip in the view does the same.

Pattern Offset XText BoxInput

Slides the grid along its own row direction, in millimetres. The influence centre does not move with it.

Pattern Offset XSliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm.

Pattern Offset YText BoxInput

Slides the grid along its own column direction, in millimetres.

Pattern Offset YSliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm.

Align to edgeButton

Returns to Revit so you can pick a straight edge; the pattern rotation is set to match it. With a picked path and a straight grid, the anchor unit stays in place while the pattern turns.

Influence RadialToggle

Radial point: the dissolve radiates from a centre you pick or offset from the host centre.

Influence PathToggle

Selected path: the dissolve follows picked model or detail lines, measured as the shortest plan distance to the nearest line; units can array along them.

Influence CircleToggle

Perfect circle: units are arranged in rings around the influence centre, with no lines needed.

Influence Combo BoxSelector

Always hidden; it holds the choice made with the three influence buttons above.

Pick centreButton

Returns to Revit so you can click the influence centre. Keep clicking to try other positions; Esc keeps the last one. Shown for Radial point and Perfect circle.

Host centreButton

Puts the influence centre back in the middle of the host by setting both centre offsets to 0.

Pick pathsButton

Select one or more model or detail lines, then click Finish. Connected segments form one guide; separate selections stay independent, and all of them stay linked to the preview.

Fade Offset XText BoxInput

Centre X offset: distance of the influence centre from the host centre along X, in millimetres.

Fade Offset XSliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm, or drag the centre dot in the view.

Fade Offset YText BoxInput

Centre Y offset: distance of the influence centre from the host centre along Y, in millimetres.

Fade Offset YSliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm.

Path Arrangement Combo BoxSelector

Shown for Selected path and Perfect circle. For paths: Influence only, Follow tangent, Array along curve, or Follow curve + auto-cut, which bends units along the paths, fits closed rows evenly and trims collisions and the host edge. For a circle: Circular influence, Follow circle tangent or Radial array.

Path Start Offset Text BoxInput

Pattern start offset, shown when units are arrayed along picked paths. 0 starts a full unit exactly at the path start; positive values slide it forward, negative back. On closed loops it moves where the ring of units begins.

Path Start Offset SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm, or drag the amber grip on the path.

Path Row Offset Text BoxInput

Row offset: slides the rows across the path. 0 puts the first row's edge on the path; positive values move rows to the left of the path direction, negative to the right.

Path Row Offset SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between -50,000 and 50,000 mm, or drag the amber corner grip to set start and row offsets together.

ResetButton

Restores the default dissolve, influence and colour settings: Radial point at the host centre, Full dissolve, the starting radius, 25% end size, 15% end density and 75% colour fade. The palette, pattern type and output are kept.

Dissolve Preset Combo BoxSelector

Full dissolve shrinks and thins units (25% size, 15% density at the radius). Colour fade only keeps every unit full size and fades colour. Fixed size along guide switches to Selected path with Array along curve and lays whole units along the picked path with no fade.

Dissolve Radius Text BoxInput

Fade radius in millimetres: the distance over which units reach the end size and density. It starts at half the shorter side of the host's plan bounding box. With paths it reads All path radii and sets every path at once.

Dissolve Radius SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 1,000 and 50,000 mm, or drag the cyan square grip in the view.

End Scale Text BoxInput

End size (%): unit size at the fade radius as a share of the full size. Units shrink steadily from 100% at the influence.

End Scale SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 5 and 100%.

End Density Text BoxInput

End density (%): share of units kept at the fade radius. Units drop out at random, more of them the farther they are from the influence.

End Density SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 0 and 100%.

Minimum Cut Text BoxInput

Min cut size (%): smallest trimmed piece to keep, as a share of its unit at its faded size. Pieces cut by the host edge, a guide end or a neighbouring row that fall below it are left out. 0 keeps every fragment.

Minimum Cut SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 0 and 100%.

Auto fill / cut guide endsOption

Shown when units are arrayed along picked paths. On (default), each row runs past both guide ends so the ends are fully paved and the overhang is cut. Off, the rows stop at the guide start and end.

Color Mode Combo BoxSelector

Fade blend mixes colours randomly toward the fade target across the influence distance. Divide into parts splits the distance from the influence into hard-edged bands, one palette colour per band, with no fading.

Part Division Combo BoxSelector

Division method for Divide into parts. Equal parts splits the whole surface extent into the chosen number of bands; By distance makes every band a fixed width and repeats the palette outward.

Color Parts Text BoxInput

Number of parts for Equal parts, from 2 to 12. Colours repeat when there are more parts than palette colours.

Color Parts SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 2 and 12.

Band Width Text BoxInput

Band distance in millimetres for By distance: the width of every colour band.

Band Width SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 100 and 50,000 mm.

Part Start Offset Text BoxInput

Start offset in millimetres: the distance from the influence before the first band begins.

Part Start Offset SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 0 and 50,000 mm.

Color Fade Text BoxInput

Colour fade (%): the largest share of units that change to the fade target colour, reached at the far end of the fade. 0 turns the colour fade off.

Color Fade SliderSlider

Appears when you hover the field; drag between 0 and 100%.

Color Fade Target Combo BoxSelector

Fade target colour: the palette colour (C1, C2 and so on) that units change to. It defaults to the last colour.

Color Fade Direction Combo BoxSelector

Fade blend: Away from influence puts the target colour toward the outside; At influence concentrates it on the centre or path. With Divide into parts the label becomes First colour (C1): C1 at influence or C1 at outer edge.

Auto balance palette for selected pathOption

Shown for Selected path with Fade blend. Sets the target colour to 0% in the base mix so it appears only in the path fade, and shares the rest toward the lighter colours.

Palette Source Combo BoxSelector

Use: New Revit materials lets you set each colour and name and creates those materials on output; Existing Revit materials lets you pick a project material for each slot and uses its shading colour in the preview.

Palette Combo BoxSelector

Palette size: how many colours the pattern uses (2 to 10 here). Use Add material for more. Reducing the size keeps the hidden entries for reuse.

Color Range Combo BoxSelector

Recolours the new-material swatches from a preset range: Earth, Teal, Greens, Greys, Blues or Bright. Custom keeps your own colours. Hidden when you use existing materials.

Add materialButton

Adds another palette entry at 0%. Existing colours, names and shares are kept; raise the new entry's share to use it.

Output Combo BoxSelector

Create as: JPEG, Placed PNG, 3D Coloured Mesh, Floors or Toposolids. Hover an entry in the list for a description. The action button's label changes to match.

Type Combo BoxSelector

Base type (thickness and layers), shown for Floors and Toposolids. Each colour gets its own named copy of this type with the colour's material on the top layer; the base type is not changed.

Limit Text BoxInput

Warn above (cells), shown for Floors and Toposolids (default 1200). Above this count, Create asks first: Yes creates the whole pattern, No cancels.

Create or update material scheduleOption

Shown for 3D Coloured Mesh. Creates one native Revit schedule for this pattern and its ordered palette; matching meshes created later appear in it automatically.

ReportButton

Opens or closes the Area Report beside this window.

Host Display Combo BoxSelector

How the host is drawn in the active view while you work: White surface, hide native patterns (recommended); Hide all host patterns; or Keep current host graphics. It is a view-only override; the host material and other views are unchanged.

Keep this view override after CreateOption

Keeps the host display override in this view after an image, mesh or element output is created. Off, the original host graphics return when the tool closes.

Project preview to host surfaceOption

Drapes the on-screen preview over a shaped Floor or Toposolid instead of drawing it flat. Exports and created output are not affected.

Refresh previewButton

Redraws the preview now. It also refreshes on its own shortly after you change a setting.

CloseButton

Closes the tool, clears the preview and grips and restores any temporary host display. Output you already created stays.

Create 3D MeshButton

Creates the chosen output. The label follows Create as: Export JPEG, Place PNG, Create 3D Mesh, Create Floors or Create Toposolids. Disabled until the distribution totals 100% and every material is named or chosen.

Parametric Pattern Area Report2 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Area report detailsSection

Expands or collapses the live report: host area, paved area, uncovered remainder, coverage, cell count, and the area and share of every colour after the dissolve.

Export ExcelButton

Saves the current report as an Excel workbook (.xlsx) wherever you choose.

Back to tool index ↑
05

LandForm ribbon panel

Modify

Reshape, split, align, convert and project elements onto surfaces.

Modify · Drape

Drape

Project the shape points of floors and toposolids onto another surface so they follow its levels, with the face alignment and vertical offset you choose.

Drape is how you make paving, kerb slabs, path floors or a thin toposolid sit on the terrain instead of floating at a level. You set how the two surfaces should meet, press Run, click the source surface to read levels from and then the floors or toposolids that should follow it. LandForm projects every target point onto the source and writes the result as native shape points, so Revit's own Modify Sub Elements tools still work afterwards.

The source can be a floor, toposolid, legacy topography, a generic model or other family, a model line, or a CAD link or import, and it may sit inside a Revit link. Targets are floors and toposolids in the current model that Revit allows you to shape-edit.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelDrape

Button tooltip: “Drape editable surfaces to another terrain reference.”
Before you start
  • One or more target Floors or Toposolids that accept shape editing (Modify Sub Elements). The source element itself cannot be a target.
  • A source to read levels from: a floor, toposolid, topography, generic model, model line, or a CAD link or import, in the current model or in a Revit link.
  • A plan or 3D view in which you can click both the source and the targets. Drape does not start on a sheet.
  • Decide how the surfaces should meet: which face of the source should drive which face of the target, and whether the target needs an extra vertical offset.
Tutorial video

Watch Drape in action

Video coming soon

Drape walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Drape: Drape toolbar set to Top to Top with Split points
Drape toolbar set to Top to Top with Split points · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Align

    Which source face drives which target face, source first; here Top to Top.

  2. 2
    Points

    Where the shape points come from: Base Pts (default), Boundary, Bnd Spaced, Bnd+Inside or Split, shown here.

  3. 3
    Offset

    Lifts (positive) or lowers (negative) the result after projection, in metres.

  4. 4
    Snap / Auto

    With Auto on, the snap reach is measured each run; untick it to type a Snap distance yourself.

  5. 5
    Line

    Adds points along straight target edges at this spacing, 0.5 m by default.

  6. 6
    Curve

    Adds points along curved target edges at this spacing.

  7. 7
    Faces

    Adds dense face samples when the source points are too sparse; Base Pts and Split only.

  8. 8
    Clear

    Removes the target's existing shape points first; Split switches it on, so it is greyed here.

  9. 9
    Run

    Saves the settings, then asks you to pick the source and the target surfaces.

  10. 10
    Status line

    Tells you the next step, then shows progress and "Drape complete" with the counts.

  11. 11
    Reset Shape

    Removes shape editing from the selected floors and toposolids, or from every eligible visible surface, after a confirmation.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Drape

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Drape.

  2. 02

    Set the alignment. Open Align and choose how the faces meet. Each entry names the source face first and the target face second: Top to Top keeps the target top on the source top, Top to Bottom sets the target underside on the source top, Bottom to Top sets the target top on the source underside, and Bottom to Bottom aligns both undersides. Element thicknesses are taken into account automatically.

  3. 03

    Choose the point source. Open Points. Base Pts (the default) copies the source's own interior points onto the target, which gives a light, exact result. Boundary uses only the target outline and is fastest. Bnd Spaced places boundary points by distance only, Bnd+Inside adds the source's interior points to those, and Split adds split-line constraints for a tighter triangulation.

    Base Pts, Bnd+Inside and Split switch Clear on automatically so old shape points cannot remain.

  4. 04

    Set the offset and snap reach. Type an Offset in metres to lift (positive) or lower (negative) the result after projection, or tick the Auto box beside it to take the offset from each target's own type thickness instead: every picked target is lifted by its thickness from the chosen alignment, so with Top to Top a planting bed or paving surface stands on the source with its underside on it rather than flush with it, and targets of different types each rise by their own thickness in one run. The Offset box hides while its Auto is on. Leave the Snap Auto on so the Snap distance is measured each run from how far the target boundaries reach beyond the source (capped at 2 m and never less than the target thickness), or untick it and type a Snap distance yourself.

    Target points that fall outside the source are snapped to the nearest point on the source boundary within this reach; points beyond it are dropped.

  5. 05

    Add boundary and face points (optional). Tick Line or Curve and set a spacing in metres to add points along straight or curved edges of the target (0.5 m by default). Tick Faces to add dense face samples when the source points are too sparse; it is available in Base Pts and Split modes only.

    Tick Clear to remove the target's existing shape points before the new ones are written.

  6. 06

    Run and pick the source. Press Run. Revit asks for the source element to read elevations from: click the floor, toposolid, topography, generic model, model line or CAD link, in the current model or in a link.

    As you move the cursor, the status line names the surface Revit would take ("Under the cursor: Toposolids : LF-Ground · about 42 × 9 m") and its footprint is outlined in the view, so where surfaces overlap (paving or a planting bed lying on the terrain, for example) you can see which one is live before you click; Tab cycles the overlapping ones. If you click the wrong one anyway, LandForm lists every surface under the point top-down with each one's type, height at the click, footprint size and element Id, marks the one Revit selected, and asks which is the source; Pick again returns to the view. A click on a model line or a CAD import is taken as meant.

  7. 07

    Pick the targets. Click the floors or toposolids to drape and press Finish. Only elements that accept shape editing can be selected.

  8. 08

    Answer the flat-source prompt if it appears. When the source is flat, LandForm offers Align by Height Offset From Level (fast), which shifts each target's Height Offset From Level instead of adding points, or Normal drape for the full projection.

  9. 09

    Watch the status line. The progress bar runs while points are projected and a Cancel button appears; pressing it rolls back the whole run. When it finishes the status line reads "Drape complete" with the number of successful and failed targets, and why each failed target failed: a failed target keeps its old position, which is the usual reason a surface floats above the terrain after a run. In Top to Bottom and Bottom to Bottom it also names targets whose type has a variable-thickness layer, because such a target keeps a flat underside whatever its top does and cannot sit on a sloping base; untick Variable in the type's Structure.

What you get

Each target now carries native shape points that follow the source at the alignment and offset you chose, so its top (or underside) hugs the terrain. The points are ordinary Revit sub-elements: Modify Sub Elements, Point Grip and Relax Surface can edit them further. A normal run is one undo step named "LF-Drape: Drape to Surface"; the flat-source shortcut is "LF-Drape: Drape to Flat Elevation". Your settings are saved and restored the next time you open Drape.

Good to know

Tips

  • Long-press any number box (Offset, Snap, the Line and Curve spacings) and drag up or down to scrub the value.
  • With the Offset Auto box on, the "Drape complete" message names the type thickness that was used, or the range when the targets carry different types. A target whose type has no thickness gets an offset of 0.
  • Keep Base Pts unless you have a reason not to: it keeps the point count tied to the source, so a target never ends up with a dense cloud of points.
  • Faces can add a great many points. Use it only when the source has too few interior points to describe the shape.
  • A model line source drapes onto a thin ribbon built along the line; a CAD source uses its mesh as authored or triangulates its 3D linework into a terrain surface.
  • Reset Shape removes shape editing from the selected floors and toposolids, or from every eligible visible surface when nothing is selected, after a confirmation. Only elements that already have shape editing are changed. Use it for a clean start before re-draping.
Control reference · 16 controls

Every control and what it does

Drape Experimental16 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Elevation alignmentSelector

Chooses which face of the source drives which face of the target: Top to Top, Top to Bottom, Bottom to Top or Bottom to Bottom (source face first). Element thicknesses are added or subtracted automatically.

Point sourceSelector

Boundary uses the target outline only (fastest). Bnd Spaced adds boundary points by distance. Bnd+Inside adds spaced boundary points plus the source's interior points. Base Pts copies the source's interior points (default). Split adds split-line constraints for tighter triangulation.

Vertical offsetInput

Vertical offset in metres applied after projection: positive lifts, negative lowers. Hidden while the Offset Auto box is on.

Auto (Offset)Option

Takes the offset from each target's own type thickness: every target is lifted by its thickness from the chosen alignment, so Top to Top stands it on the source instead of flush with it. Hides the manual Offset box.

Max snapping distanceInput

How far a target point that falls outside the source may be snapped to the nearest point on the source boundary, in metres. Points beyond this reach are dropped. Larger values may reduce accuracy. Hidden while the Snap Auto box is on.

Auto (Snap)Option

Measures the snap distance each run from how far the target boundaries sit outside the source (capped at 2 m, never less than the target thickness) and hides the manual Snap box.

ClearOption

Removes the target's existing shape points before the projected points are written. Switched on automatically for Base Pts, Bnd+Inside and Split.

LineOption

Adds points along straight boundary segments at the Line spacing. Locked on in Bnd Spaced and Bnd+Inside.

Line point spacingInput

Distance in metres between generated points along straight segments (0.5 by default).

CurveOption

Adds points along curved boundary segments at the Curve spacing. Locked on in Bnd Spaced and Bnd+Inside.

Curve point spacingInput

Distance in metres between generated points along curves (0.5 by default).

FacesOption

Adds dense face samples on top of the base points when they are too sparse. Available in Base Pts and Split modes only.

VizOption

Development diagnostic, hidden in the released toolbar: draws the snap zone and dropped points as a temporary Generic Model after the run.

Reset ShapeButton

Removes shape editing from the selected floors and toposolids, or from all eligible surfaces visible in the view when nothing is selected, after a Yes/No confirmation.

RunButton

Saves the settings, then asks you to pick the source and the target surfaces and drapes them.

CancelButton

Shown while a run is in progress. Stops the run and rolls back every change it made.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Convert

Floor / Toposolid Converter

Turn selected floors into toposolids, or toposolids into floors, keeping the outline, openings, shape points, type build-up and parameters that Revit can carry across.

The Convert button is for the moment a surface was modelled as the wrong class: a landscape area drawn as a floor that now needs toposolid behaviour, or a toposolid that should really be a paving floor. Instead of redrawing the sketch and re-entering every point, you select the surfaces, confirm once, and LandForm rebuilds each one as the opposite class on the same level and removes the original.

Because Revit cannot change an element's class in place, the result is a new element with a new Element Id. Anything that pointed at the old element, such as tags, dimensions, hosted elements or constraints, is not transferred; the confirmation dialog reminds you of this before anything changes.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelConvert

Button tooltip: “Convert floors to toposolids, or toposolids to floors.”
Before you start
  • One or more Floors (not foundation slabs) or Toposolids to convert. You can select them before pressing Convert or pick them when prompted.
  • Toposolids exist in Revit 2024 and later, so the project must be open in a version that supports them.
  • The project needs at least one type of the destination class: a toposolid type when converting floors, a floor type when converting toposolids. LandForm duplicates one of them if no type with the same name exists.
  • Check what depends on the surfaces first. Tags, dimensions and hosted elements on the originals are lost when the originals are replaced.
Tutorial video

Watch Floor / Toposolid Converter in action

Video coming soon

Floor / Toposolid Converter walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 5 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Floor / Toposolid Converter: Surface Convert confirmation for one selected surface
Surface Convert confirmation for one selected surface · 5 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Convert 1 selected surface?

    States how many selected surfaces will be converted.

  2. 2
    Replacement warning

    Each new element replaces its original; tags, dimensions, hosted elements and constraints do not carry across.

  3. 3
    Convert Floor ↔ Toposolid

    Goes ahead: floors become toposolids and toposolids become floors in the same run.

  4. 4
    Creates the opposite surface class

    Each surface is rebuilt on the same level with its outline, openings and shape points, then the original is deleted; a surface that fails is left untouched.

  5. 5
    Cancel

    Closes the dialog with nothing changed.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Floor / Toposolid Converter

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Convert.

  2. 02

    Select the surfaces. Select floors and toposolids in the view and press Convert, or press Convert first, click the surfaces one by one and press Finish. Foundation slabs and other element kinds are skipped.

  3. 03

    Confirm the replacement. The Surface Convert dialog states how many surfaces will be converted and that each new element replaces its original. Choose Convert Floor ↔ Toposolid to go ahead, or close the dialog to cancel with nothing changed.

  4. 04

    Let LandForm rebuild each surface. For every selected element it reads the sketch (outer boundary and openings), the level, the height offset and the shape points, finds or creates a matching type of the opposite class, creates the new element, copies its parameters, re-applies the shape points and deletes the original.

    Floors become toposolids and toposolids become floors in the same run; mixed selections are fine.

  5. 05

    Read the report. A report dialog says "Conversion complete", "Conversion partially complete" or "Conversion could not be completed", lists how many floors and toposolids were converted, and notes any surfaces that failed. Open the details for the new element ids, any optional values that could not be copied, and Revit's own message.

  6. 06

    Review the new surfaces. They are left selected when the dialog closes, so you can check them in the Properties palette or in a 3D view straight away.

What you get

Each converted surface is replaced by a new element of the opposite class on the same level, with the same outline and openings, the same Height Offset From Level value, and its shape points re-applied so the surface keeps its grading. The type is a floor or toposolid type with the same name as the original type; when LandForm has to create it, it copies the compound structure (layers and materials) and the type parameters from the source type. Workset, Comments, Mark, phases, pinned state and shared or project parameters bound to both categories are copied too. LandForm pattern overlays and parametric pattern modules hosted on the original are rebuilt onto the new element. The whole run is one undo step, and a surface that fails is rolled back on its own without affecting the others.

Good to know

Tips

  • Shape points are carried across, but split lines you drew with Modify Sub Elements are not recreated; only their end points survive. Redraw them on the new element if you need them.
  • If a type with the original's name already exists in the destination class, LandForm uses it instead of duplicating, so convert a few surfaces first and check the resulting type before converting everything.
  • Hosted relationships and annotations cannot follow the element across classes. Re-tag and re-dimension the new elements afterwards.
  • A surface with no usable sketch profile or no level is reported as failed and left untouched. Sketch it cleanly in Revit, then run Convert again on that element alone.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Surface · Split

Split

Cut one floor or toposolid into separate elements along a line you draw or pick, punch a hole in it, or trim away the part you do not want, while the new edges keep the heights of the original surface.

Split saves you from copying a surface and editing two sketches by hand when a lawn, a paved area and a planting bed need to become separate elements with their own type, material or phase. You pick the surface, choose how to draw the splitter (a line and arc path, a rectangle, a polygon, a circle, an arc, existing lines, or the edges of another element such as a kerb), and LandForm rewrites the boundary sketches for you. The original element keeps one region and each other region becomes a copy of it, so type, parameters and shape stay the same on every piece.

With Trim on, only what you want is kept: after the splitter, click the part to remove and it is gone, the way Trim works in CAD. One splitter can trim every floor and toposolid it crosses, so a row of paving strips that runs onto a kerb is cleaned up in one pass instead of an Edit Boundary on each.

With Offset boundary there is nothing to draw: the surface's own edge, moved out or in by a distance, is the splitter. Outside, the band around the surface becomes a new surface of the same type (a mowing strip around a lawn, a kerb band around paving); inside, the band along the edge is split off the surface itself.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelSurface ▾Split

Button tooltip: “Divide or trim a floor or toposolid along a splitter path.”
Before you start
  • A Floor or Toposolid visible in a floor plan, site or engineering plan, area or ceiling plan, or a 3D view. Split does not start on a sheet or in a section.
  • If you want to pick the splitter instead of drawing it, draw it first as model lines or detail lines in plan. The chain must be flat (drawn on a horizontal plane) and its pieces must touch end to end.
  • An open splitter has to cross the surface from edge to edge. A closed shape (rectangle, polygon, circle) can sit fully inside the surface.
  • To cut along another element (a kerb, a wall, the edge of another floor or toposolid), use Pick edges. The edges do not have to reach across the surface: an end that stops inside it runs on along its own line or arc to the surface edge.
  • For a band along the surface's own edge, use Offset boundary and type the distance in metres. Nothing is drawn.
Tutorial video

Watch Split in action

Video coming soon

Split walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 5 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Split: Split Surface toolbar with Line / Arc path chosen
Split Surface toolbar with Line / Arc path chosen · 5 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Draw: Line / Arc path

    Chooses how the splitter is drawn: a line and arc path, rectangle, polygon, circle, three-point arc, existing lines, picked edges or the offset boundary.

  2. 2
    Sides

    Number of sides, 3 to 24; only active for Polygon.

  3. 3
    Hole

    Removes the closed shape as an opening instead of making it a separate surface.

  4. 4
    Draw

    Starts drawing the splitter on the surface; the split or hole is applied as soon as the drawing is finished.

  5. 5
    Status line

    Tells you the next step, then reports how many surface regions were created.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Split

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Surface ▾ → Split.

  2. 02

    Pick the surface. Start the tool and click the floor or toposolid you want to divide. If a supported surface is already selected, the toolbar opens straight away without asking.

  3. 03

    Choose a drawing method. Open Draw and pick the shape of the splitter. For Polygon, type the number of Sides. For Offset boundary, type the Offset distance in metres and choose Outside or Inside.

  4. 04

    Decide between a split, a hole and a trim. Leave Hole and Trim off to keep every region as its own surface. Turn Hole on when you want a closed shape removed from the surface as an opening. Turn Trim on when you want to delete the part on one side of the splitter. Hole and Trim cannot both be on, and neither applies to a band outside the surface.

  5. 05

    Press Draw and draw the splitter. Click points on the surface. The preview line follows the cursor, and the endpoint, midpoint, intersection, nearest and alignment snaps help you land on existing geometry.

    Line / Arc path: click for straight segments; hold Shift while you click an endpoint to make that segment an arc, then click a point on the arc. Press Esc to finish. Rectangle: two opposite corners. Polygon and Circle: the centre, then a radius point. Three-point arc: start, end, then a point on the arc. Pick existing lines: click one line of the chain; every connected line of the same kind (model or detail) in the view is collected for you. Pick edges: click the edges to cut along, one at a time, then press Esc. Edges that meet end to end join into one line, and edges that do not meet each make their own cut. Click a picked edge again to drop it. Offset boundary: the button reads Offset and there is nothing to click. Every edge of the surface, holes included, is moved by the distance: Outside grows the surface, Inside shrinks it. Lines stay lines and arcs stay arcs; only where an edge would fold back on itself (an arm narrower than twice the distance, a gap that closes) is it redrawn as a polyline, and the status line says so.

  6. 06

    Let LandForm apply it. When the splitter is complete, LandForm checks that it really divides or encloses part of the surface and applies the change. The status line reports how many surface regions were created.

    With Trim on, nothing changes yet: click each part to remove instead. In a plan view the part under the cursor turns red before you click. You can click parts of the surface you started with or of any other floor or toposolid the splitter crosses. Each click is applied straight away. Press Esc when you are done. With Offset boundary, Outside, the surface is not touched: the band gained around it (and into each hole wider than twice the distance) is created as a new surface, a copy of this one with the band as its boundary. Inside, the band along the edge is split off like any other region: the surface keeps the inside and the band becomes a copy. With Hole on, the inside becomes an opening instead and the surface keeps the band; tick Keep inside to keep the inside as well, as a surface of its own sitting in the opening. Trim works as usual.

  7. 07

    Split again or close. The toolbar stays open, so you can choose another method and press Draw again on the same surface. Press Close when you are done.

What you get

The original floor or toposolid now holds one of the regions, and every other region is a copy of it with the same type, parameters and level. With Trim, the part you clicked is deleted and the element keeps the rest, so its id, tags and schedule entries stay with it. If the splitter crosses a surface more than once, the pieces left after a trim become separate elements, and the original keeps the largest. Along the new edges LandForm adds shape points projected onto the original top surface, so sloped terrain keeps its heights where it was cut; the status line tells you how many points were restored. With Hole on, the surface keeps its outline and gains an opening. With Offset boundary, Outside, the surface is unchanged and a new surface of the same type, level and offset holds the band; on a shaped surface the band's inner edge sits on the surface's top and its outer edge carries those heights across, so a kerb band around sloped paving follows the paving. Each split is one step in Revit's undo list, named "LF-Split Surface" (or "LF-Create Surface Opening" for a hole, "LF-Offset Surface Boundary" for a band outside). Each trim click is a step of its own, named "LF-Trim Surface".

Good to know

Tips

  • If the status line says the splitter must divide or enclose part of the surface, extend an open path so both ends reach past the surface edge, or draw the closed shape fully inside it.
  • A hole must lie completely inside the surface. A shape that touches or crosses the edge is rejected with a red message, and nothing changes.
  • The toolbar stays tied to the surface you picked first. To split one of the new pieces, close the toolbar and start Split again on that piece. Trim is the exception: its clicks work on any floor or toposolid the splitter crosses.
  • To trim a row of paving strips back to a kerb, turn on Trim, choose Pick edges, click the kerb edge next to the paving, press Esc, then click the overhanging end of each strip.
  • For Rectangle, Polygon, Circle and Three-point arc, pressing Esc before the last click cancels the drawing; the model is not changed and the toolbar waits for the next Draw.
  • To split along a kerb or path edge you already drew in plan, use Pick existing lines rather than tracing it again. To split along a kerb that is modelled, use Pick edges.
  • For an edging strip of another material, use Offset boundary, Outside with the strip's width, then change the new surface's type. For a border planting inside a bed, use Inside.
  • An Inside offset wider than half the surface leaves nothing inside and is refused; use a smaller distance. A band Outside overlaps whatever surfaces lie next to this one, so trim or split those afterwards if they should give way.
Control reference · 9 controls

Every control and what it does

Split Surface Draw9 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected ModeSelector

Chooses how the splitter is created: Line / Arc path, Rectangle, Polygon, Circle, Three-point arc, Pick existing lines, Pick edges, or Offset boundary.

Polygon SidesInput

Polygon side count from 3 to 24. Only active for the Polygon method.

OffsetInput

Distance from the surface boundary in metres. Only active for the Offset boundary method.

Outside / InsideSelector

Which side of the boundary the band lies on: Outside makes a new surface around this one and leaves it unchanged; Inside splits the band along the edge off this surface.

HoleOption

Subtract the closed drawing as an opening instead of creating a separate inner surface. With Offset boundary, Inside, the part inside the offset becomes the opening and the band is kept.

Keep insideOption

With Hole on for an inside offset: keep the part inside the opening as a surface of its own instead of removing it. The surface keeps the band with the opening; the inside becomes a copy.

TrimOption

Remove the parts you click instead of keeping every piece. After the splitter, click each part to delete, on this or any other floor or toposolid it crosses; press Esc to finish.

Draw / OffsetButton

Start drawing or picking the selected splitter in Revit; the split or hole is applied as soon as the drawing is finished, and with Trim on you then click the parts to remove. With Offset boundary the button reads Offset and applies at once.

CloseButton

Closes the Split Surface toolbar and clears the preview.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Surface · Merge

Merge

Combine two or more floors, or two or more toposolids, into one new element: the edges where they meet disappear, overlaps are counted once, small gaps along the seams are closed, and the new surface carries the heights of the ones it came from.

Merge is the opposite of Split and Explode. Paving laid as strips, a lawn drawn in two halves, planting beds that grew piece by piece or a terrain split for an earlier edit can all be put back together without redrawing a sketch. You select the surfaces and LandForm works out the overall outline in plan, the way a boolean union does, then creates one new floor or toposolid from it with the type, level, offset, comments and shared parameters of the largest surface you selected. The shape points and split lines of every source are carried across so a sloped top stays as it was. Nothing is edited in place: the originals are either deleted or left where they are, as you choose.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelSurface ▾Merge

Button tooltip: “Combine floors or toposolids into one new element.”
Before you start
  • A plan or 3D view with at least one Floor or Toposolid visible. The tool does not start on a sheet or in a section.
  • The surfaces must be of one kind: only floors, or only toposolids. To merge a floor with a toposolid, turn one of them into the other with Convert first.
  • The surfaces do not have to touch exactly. Gaps and slivers up to 5 mm along the seams are closed, surfaces that overlap are joined with the overlap counted once, and surfaces that stand clearly apart become separate pieces of one sketch (what Explode takes apart again).
  • The new surface is a new element with a new id. Tags, schedule rows and elements hosted on the originals stay with the originals: keep the originals if you need them, or re-host and re-tag on the new surface.
  • In a workshared model, make sure you can edit every surface you select if you intend to delete them.
Tutorial video

Watch Merge in action

Video coming soon

Merge walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 5 steps

How to use Merge

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Surface ▾ → Merge.

  2. 02

    Select the surfaces. Select two or more floors, or two or more toposolids, before you start the tool, or start it and click them in the view, then press Finish on the Options Bar. Only floors and toposolids can be picked; one surface alone, or a mix of floors and toposolids, is refused with a message and nothing changes.

  3. 03

    Choose what happens to the originals. A LandForm dialog names the surface the new one takes its type, level, offset and parameters from, and offers Merge and delete the originals or Merge and keep the originals. The first choice also counts the elements hosted on the originals, which go with them. Close the dialog to do nothing.

  4. 04

    Let LandForm merge them. The overall outline is computed in plan: arcs stay true arcs (an arc cut by another surface comes back as the arc that is left, and two arcs of one circle meeting at a seam become a single arc), corners along the seams are cleaned up so two squares become one rectangle, and hair-thin slivers where two surfaces drew a shared edge slightly differently are healed. A new surface is created from the outline. Where any surface is shaped, or the surfaces sit at different heights, shape editing is turned on and the boundary corners, every source's shape points and their user-drawn split lines are added so the merged top follows the surfaces it came from. Flat surfaces at one height merge into a flat surface with no shape editing. With delete chosen, the originals are then removed.

  5. 05

    Read the summary. A LandForm dialog says which surface the new one was modelled on, whether the outline is one piece or several, how much overlap was counted once, how many arcs were kept, and how many shape points, split lines and parameters were carried over. The new surface is left selected.

What you get

One new floor or toposolid holds the combined outline, with the type, level, offset and parameters of the largest original. Holes stay holes unless another surface covered them. The originals are gone or still in place, as you chose. If Revit cannot accept the outline with its arcs, the outline is drawn as straight segments instead and the dialog says so. The whole merge is one step in Revit's undo list, named "LF-Merge Surfaces", so Undo brings deleted originals back.

Good to know

Tips

  • Merge surfaces of the same type when you can. With different types the largest surface's type wins, and the dialog names the types that were merged in.
  • Surfaces at different heights merge into one surface whose top ramps between them: Merge carries each surface's corners at its own height and Revit interpolates in between. Drape or Match Edge the result if you want a different transition.
  • The dialog counts the arcs kept. Only an arc drawn so coarsely that its corners do not sit on its circle, or one Revit itself refuses, is redrawn as straight segments, and the dialog says so.
  • Openings cut with the Opening tool are part of the sketch and survive. Openings placed with Revit's Opening by Face or Shaft tools are hosted on the originals: keep the originals, or cut the openings again on the new surface.
  • Keeping the originals is a safe way to compare: the new surface sits exactly over them, and you can delete them yourself once you are happy.
  • To take a merged surface apart again, use Explode for separate pieces or Split along a line.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Surface · Opening

Opening

Cut an opening or notch into a floor or toposolid from a boundary LandForm finds, one you pick, or one you draw, while the surrounding surface keeps its heights.

Use Opening when a planter, a pool, a building footprint or a tree pit has to be cut out of a paving slab or a terrain toposolid. Instead of editing the boundary sketch by hand, you point at the thing that should make the hole: LandForm can detect visible elements overlapping the surface, follow the outline of another floor or toposolid, trace the loop of an edge you click, use connected lines, or let you draw a rectangle, circle or line and arc loop. An Offset grows or shrinks the cut, so you can leave a clearance gap or an edge strip without redrawing anything.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelSurface ▾Opening

Button tooltip: “Create an opening in a floor or toposolid.”
Before you start
  • The Floor or Toposolid to cut must be visible in a plan or 3D view. The tool does not start on a sheet.
  • Have the cutter ready in the same view: a second floor or toposolid, model elements such as walls, railings or families, or connected model lines or detail lines drawn flat in plan. You can also draw the cutter on the fly.
  • A cutter can sit fully inside the surface (an opening) or overlap its edge (a notch). It must touch the surface somewhere, or nothing is cut.
  • Decide the clearance you want, in metres: a positive Offset makes the opening bigger than the cutter, a negative one makes it smaller.
Tutorial video

Watch Opening in action

Video coming soon

Opening walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 10 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Opening: Surface Opening toolbar waiting for the target floor or toposolid
Surface Opening toolbar waiting for the target floor or toposolid · 10 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Step 1: Pick a target floor or toposolid…

    The status line tells you what to click or draw next.

  2. 2
    Target

    Names the floor or toposolid you picked to cut.

  3. 3
    Source

    Where the cutter boundary comes from: Auto, Surface, Edge, Lines or Draw.

  4. 4
    Offset

    Grows (positive) or shrinks (negative) the cutter boundary, in metres.

  5. 5
    Show visible cutter

    Finds, picks or draws the cutter; the label follows the source.

  6. 6
    Cutter

    Shows how many cutter loops were found.

  7. 7
    Remove cutter

    Click cutters in the view to drop them from the list; press Esc when done.

  8. 8
    Preview

    Redraws the cutter boundary at the current offset.

  9. 9
    Create

    Cuts the previewed boundary out of the target and restores its heights.

  10. 10
    Restart

    Clears the target, cutter and preview and asks you to pick the target again.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Opening

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Surface ▾ → Opening.

  2. 02

    Pick the target. As soon as the toolbar opens, Revit asks you to select the floor or toposolid to cut. Click it; its name appears as Target on the status line.

    If you press Esc here, use Restart to pick again.

  3. 03

    Choose the cutter source. Open Source and pick Auto, Surface, Edge, Lines or Draw (see "Cutter sources" below).

  4. 04

    Set the offset. Type a value in Offset in metres, or leave it at 0 to cut exactly on the cutter boundary.

  5. 05

    Get the cutter boundary. Press the cutter button. Its label follows the source: Show visible cutter for Auto, Draw cutter for Draw, Cutter for the others. Then click or draw as the status line asks. The boundary appears as an on-screen preview, and Cutter on the status line shows how many loops were found.

  6. 06

    Tidy the cutters (optional). If Auto found a loop you do not want, press Remove cutter and click on that cutter in the view; keep clicking to remove more, then press Esc.

  7. 07

    Adjust and preview. Change Offset and press Enter, click out of the box, or press Preview to redraw the boundary at the new size.

  8. 08

    Create the opening. Press Create. A progress bar runs while LandForm rewrites the boundary sketch and restores the surface heights, and the status line ends with "Opening created".

  9. 09

    Cut more or close. The target stays selected, so you can choose another source and cut again. Press Restart to switch to a different surface, or the close button to finish.

What you get

The floor or toposolid now has the opening (or notch) in its boundary sketch, at the cutter outline grown or shrunk by the offset. Before the sketch changes, LandForm samples the existing shape points and the heights along the cut edge, then adds them back, so a sloped toposolid or a shaped floor keeps its levels around the new opening. The change shows in the undo list as "LF-Surface Opening: Edit Opening Profile" followed by "LF-Surface Opening: Restore Shape Points".

More about Opening

Cutter sources

SourceWhat LandForm uses as the cutter
AutoEvery visible model element or line in the view that overlaps the target and forms a closed loop, apart from the target's own outline. Several cutters can be found at once.
SurfaceThe boundary sketch of another floor or toposolid that you click.
EdgeThe closed loop that contains an edge you click on any model element, such as the top edge of a wall, kerb or family.
LinesA chain of connected model lines or detail lines, collected from the one line you click.
DrawA closed rectangle, circle or line and arc loop you draw on the surface.
More about Opening

Toolbar controls

ControlFunction
SourceChooses where the cutter boundary comes from: Auto, Surface, Edge, Lines or Draw.
OffsetGrows (positive) or shrinks (negative) the cutter boundary, in metres.
Show visible cutter / Cutter / Draw cutterFinds, picks or draws the cutter for the chosen source. Available once a target is picked.
PreviewRedraws the cutter boundary with the current offset. Available once a cutter exists.
Remove cutterLets you click cutters in the view to drop them from the list; press Esc when done.
CreateCuts the previewed boundary out of the target and restores its heights. Available once a preview is shown.
RestartClears the target, cutter and preview, and asks you to pick the target again.
CloseCloses the toolbar and removes the preview.
Good to know

Tips

  • If Auto reports that no boundary was found, make sure the cutter is visible in the active view and overlaps the target, or switch Source to Edge, Surface or Lines and pick it directly.
  • With Lines, click one line of the chain; every connected line of the same kind (model or detail) in the view is collected. An open chain is closed with a straight line between its two ends.
  • With Draw, a short dialog asks for Line / Arc path, Rectangle or Circle. In a line and arc path, hold Shift while clicking an endpoint to make an arc, finish back at the first point, and press Esc.
  • If a large offset fails, try a smaller one. Tight curves or self-crossing outlines can make Revit reject the offset boundary.
  • Changing Source clears the current cutter and preview, so pick the cutter again after you switch.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Surface · Explode

Explode

Break a floor or toposolid whose sketch holds several separate outlines into one element per outline, in a single click.

A single Revit floor or toposolid can carry several disconnected pieces in its boundary sketch. That happens when a sketch is traced from CAD, when one element was drawn for several planting beds or paving islands, or after an opening or split cuts a surface into separate parts. Explode finds every separate outer outline, together with the holes inside it, and turns each one into its own element, so you can tag, schedule, phase or change the type of each piece on its own. There is no window to fill in: you select the surfaces and LandForm does the rest.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelSurface ▾Explode

Button tooltip: “Separate disconnected floor or toposolid sketch islands.”
Before you start
  • A plan or 3D view with at least one Floor or Toposolid visible. The tool does not start on a sheet or in a section.
  • Know which surfaces you want to break up. Surfaces with only one outline are skipped and left untouched, so it is safe to select more than you need.
  • In a workshared model, make sure you can edit the surfaces you select.
Tutorial video

Watch Explode in action

Video coming soon

Explode walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 4 steps

How to use Explode

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Surface ▾ → Explode.

  2. 02

    Select the surfaces. Select one or more floors or toposolids before you start the tool, or start it and click them in the view, then press Finish on the Options Bar. Only floors and toposolids can be picked.

  3. 03

    Let LandForm separate them. Each selected surface is checked for separate outlines. The original element keeps one piece and LandForm creates a copy of it for every other piece, then trims each sketch to its own outline.

  4. 04

    Read the summary. A LandForm dialog reports how many surfaces were processed, how many surfaces now exist, how many were unchanged, how many failed, and how many shape points were restored.

    If nothing needed separating, the dialog says that no disconnected surface islands were found and the model is not changed.

What you get

Every piece that was a separate outline in the original sketch is now its own floor or toposolid. Each piece starts as a copy of the original, so the type, level and instance parameters carry over, and any hole that sat inside a piece stays with that piece. Each exploded surface is one step in Revit's undo list, named "LF-Explode Surface Islands", so you can take back one surface at a time.

Good to know

Tips

  • Pre-select all the surfaces from a CAD trace or a site plan and run Explode once; unaffected surfaces are reported as unchanged instead of failing.
  • If a surface is listed as failed, the others are still processed and the failed one is rolled back to exactly how it was, with no half-made copies left behind.
  • An island drawn inside a hole of another island becomes its own element too, so nested rings come apart cleanly.
  • To divide one continuous outline into parts, use Split instead; Explode only separates outlines that are already disconnected.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Surface · Filler

Filler

Fill the holes in a floor or toposolid with new floors or toposolids that follow the heights of the opening edges.

Filler is for the moment after you have cut openings for planters, tree pits, pools or paving inserts and now need a surface inside each one. Instead of tracing every hole and setting its shape points by hand, you click the host, choose the output type, and LandForm builds a floor or toposolid in each opening. The new element sits at the height of the opening edge, can be raised or lowered, shrunk away from the edge to leave a joint, and can either stay flat between its corners or drape over the whole surface.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelSurface ▾Filler

Button tooltip: “Create floors or toposolids inside selected host openings.”
Before you start
  • A Floor or Toposolid with at least one opening in it, visible in a model view. The host can also sit in a linked Revit model. The tool does not start on a sheet.
  • The Floor type or Toposolid type you want for the fillers must already be loaded in the project. Toposolid output needs Revit 2024 or later.
  • Decide the numbers first: how far the filler should sit above or below the edge (Z), and how wide a joint you want between the filler and the opening edge (Loop).
Tutorial video

Watch Filler in action

Video coming soon

Filler walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Filler: Filler toolbar waiting for the host surface
Filler toolbar waiting for the host surface · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Status line

    Tells you the current step; here it asks you to select a floor or toposolid.

  2. 2
    No host selected

    Shows the host name and the number of openings once you pick a host.

  3. 3
    Output

    Creates the fillers as Floors or Toposolids and reloads the Type list.

  4. 4
    Type

    The floor or toposolid type used for the new fillers.

  5. 5
    Z (m)

    Raises (positive) or lowers (negative) the filler from the opening edges.

  6. 6
    Loop (m)

    Pulls the filler boundary in from the edge (positive) or pushes it out (negative).

  7. 7
    Align

    Corners sets heights only at the filler's corners; Full surface drapes the whole filler.

  8. 8
    Iso (m)

    Contour spacing of the live preview; in Full surface mode also the spacing of interior shape points.

  9. 9
    Fill Opening (Loop)

    Click openings one by one to fill each as you click; press Esc when done.

  10. 10
    All openings

    Turns the button into Fill All Openings, which fills every opening of the host at once.

  11. 11
    Undo

    Deletes the fillers created by the latest fill.

  12. 12
    Run Again

    Picks a different host and runs Filler again.

  13. 13
    Clear

    Drops the current host and the preview.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Filler

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Surface ▾ → Filler.

  2. 02

    Select the host. When the toolbar opens, Revit asks you to select a floor or toposolid. Click the host surface; every opening found in its top face is outlined on screen, and the status line shows the host name and the number of openings.

  3. 03

    Choose what to create. Set Output to Floor or Toposolid, then pick the Type. The type list refreshes when you change the output.

  4. 04

    Set the offsets. Type Z (m) to raise (positive) or lower (negative) the filler from the opening edges. Type Loop (m) to pull the filler boundary in from the edge (positive) or push it out (negative).

  5. 05

    Choose how it follows the ground. Set Align to Corners to give the filler heights only at its corners, or Full surface to drape the whole filler with extra points around its edge and across its interior. Use Iso (m) to set the spacing of the contour lines in the live preview.

    As soon as you change a value, the preview redraws the filler boundary and its contour lines over the openings.

  6. 06

    Fill one opening at a time. Press Fill Opening (Loop). Hover near an opening to highlight it, then click: the filler is created immediately. Keep clicking other openings, and press Esc when you are done.

  7. 07

    Or fill them all. Turn on All openings; the button changes to Fill All Openings. Press it to create a filler in every opening of the host in one go.

  8. 08

    Check and continue. Press Undo to delete the fillers you just created, Run Again to pick a different host, Clear to drop the current host, or the close button to finish.

What you get

Each filled opening now holds a new floor or toposolid of the chosen type, on the host's level (for a linked host, the level nearest the opening). Its boundary is the opening outline moved by the Loop offset, and its shape points carry the heights of the opening edge plus the Z offset, so it lines up with sloped terrain. The status line reports how many fillers were created and how many were skipped. Each fill appears in Revit's undo list as "LF-Filler: Create Filler".

Good to know

Tips

  • If no opening is found, the host has no holes in its top face. Cut one first with Opening or Split with Hole turned on.
  • Full surface is the better choice for a filler inside a warped or sloping toposolid. In that mode Iso (m) also sets the spacing of the interior shape points, which is never finer than one twenty-fourth of the opening's size.
  • A positive Loop offset is an easy way to leave a gap for an edging strip or a kerb between the filler and the host.
  • Undo on the toolbar only removes the fillers from the latest fill. To go back further, use Revit's own Undo.
  • If one opening cannot be filled, the rest are still created and the status line counts the skipped ones.
Control reference · 12 controls

Every control and what it does

Filler12 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Surface KindSelector

Output: whether the fillers are created as Floors or Toposolids. Changing it reloads the Type list.

Selected TypeSelector

Floor or toposolid type used for the new filler.

Vertical OffsetInput

Vertical offset from the source opening edges in meters.

Loop OffsetInput

Positive values shrink the filler boundary; negative values expand it.

Isoline IntervalInput

Live preview isoline interval in meters. In Full surface mode it also sets the spacing of the interior shape points.

Alignment ModeSelector

Use only loop corners or fully drape the filler to the reference surface.

All openingsOption

Create fillers for every opening on the selected host.

CreateButton

Fill Opening (Loop) lets you click openings one by one, creating each filler as you click until you press Esc; with All openings on it reads Fill All Openings and fills every opening at once.

UndoButton

Deletes the fillers created by the latest fill.

Run AgainButton

Select another surface and run Filler again.

ClearButton

Clear the current selection or temporary preview.

CloseButton

Closes the Filler toolbar and removes the preview.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Match Edge

Match Edge

Lift or drop the edge of a floor or toposolid so it meets a neighbouring surface, by adding shape points where the two boundaries cross in plan.

Match Edge is for the seam between two pieces of ground: a path slab against a lawn toposolid, a new toposolid butting an existing one, or your site model meeting the terrain in a linked file. You choose the target surface whose edge should move, then click the surfaces (or linked edges) it should match. LandForm finds the points where the boundaries meet, reads the reference's height there, adds your Offset, and writes shape points onto the target, so the edge follows the reference instead of leaving a step. Each reference is applied the moment you click it, so you can work your way around a target in one run.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelMatch Edge

Button tooltip: “Match a target surface edge to a reference surface elevation.”
Before you start
  • A target Floor or Toposolid that can be shape edited: not a foundation slab, not in a group, and editable by you in a workshared model. Toposolids need Revit 2024 or later.
  • One or more reference surfaces whose edges the target should meet. These can be floors or toposolids in the project, floors or toposolids inside a loaded Revit link, or a single model edge inside a Revit link.
  • The two boundaries must actually cross or touch in plan. Match Edge works at the intersections, so a target that floats clear of every reference gets no points.
  • Decide the Offset: 0 m makes the edge flush; a negative value such as -0.05 m keeps the target edge below a kerb or paving.
Tutorial video

Watch Match Edge in action

Video coming soon

Match Edge walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 3 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Match Edge: Match Edge toolbar with a flush 0 m offset, ready to run
Match Edge toolbar with a flush 0 m offset, ready to run · 3 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Offset

    Vertical offset in metres added to every matched height; 0 makes the edges flush, a negative value keeps the target below the reference.

  2. 2
    Run

    Starts picking: the target floor or toposolid first, then any number of references, each written as soon as you click it.

  3. 3
    Status line

    Tells you what to pick next and reports how many points were matched; press Esc to finish.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Match Edge

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Match Edge.

  2. 02

    Set the offset. Type the vertical Offset in metres. Values between -10,000 and 10,000 are accepted; the status line asks you to correct anything else before Run becomes available.

  3. 03

    Press Run and choose the target. Click the floor or toposolid whose edge should change. If exactly one editable surface was already selected when you pressed Run, LandForm uses it and skips straight to step 3; the status line says so.

  4. 04

    Click the first reference. Click a floor or toposolid in the project, or click a floor, toposolid or model edge inside a loaded Revit link. The status line reads "Matching boundary elevations…" while LandForm works.

    Clicking the target itself is refused with "Select a different reference surface".

  5. 05

    Read the result. The status line reports "N points matched. Pick another reference, or press Esc to finish." Each reference is written to the model immediately in its own undo step named "LF-Match Edge", so you can undo one reference without losing the others.

    If a reference gives "No points were created", its boundary does not cross the target in plan; pick another or press Esc.

  6. 06

    Keep going around the target. Click every other surface the edge should meet. Shape editing is switched on for the target automatically if it was not already.

  7. 07

    Press Esc to finish. The status line sums up: "N points matched from M reference(s)." Run again for another target, or close the toolbar.

What you get

The target floor or toposolid now carries new shape points along the stretch of its boundary that meets each reference, each sitting at the reference surface's height plus your offset. The two edges line up in section and the step between them is gone. Points are added where the target boundary crosses the reference boundary, where the target already had boundary corners over the reference, and, for a reference surface, where the reference's own fold lines cross the target edge, so the match follows a sloping or faceted neighbour rather than a single level. Where the reference was a linked edge, the target's existing boundary points on that edge are moved to the edge height instead of duplicated. Everything is native Revit shape editing, so Modify Sub Elements and the other LandForm terrain tools can refine it afterwards.

Good to know

Tips

  • Match Edge measures the reference by projecting straight down onto it, using your active 3D view if one is open (its detail level is switched to Fine) or a temporary 3D view that is deleted afterwards. Working in a 3D view is slightly faster for that reason.
  • Only the boundary gets points; the interior of the target is untouched. Use Align Points when you need the whole surface, not just its edge, to follow another object.
  • A reference inside a Revit link is read through the link's position, so a moved or rotated link is handled correctly. Edges can only be picked from linked models, not from host-model elements.
  • If the target edge runs exactly along the reference edge rather than crossing it, points are created at the target's existing boundary corners and wherever the reference's fold lines meet the edge. Add a few shape points along the target edge beforehand if you need a denser match.
  • Match Edge does not start on a sheet and works in project files only.
Control reference · 3 controls

Every control and what it does

Match Edge3 controls
ControlTypeFunction
OffsetInput

Vertical offset in metres added to every matched reference elevation. 0 makes the edges flush; a negative value holds the target edge below the reference. Accepts -10,000 to 10,000 m and is remembered between sessions.

_RunButton

Starts picking in Revit: the target floor or toposolid first (a single preselected surface is used automatically), then any number of reference surfaces or linked edges, each written to the target as soon as it is clicked. Press Esc to finish.

CloseButton

Closes Match Edge. Points already matched stay in the model.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Align Points

Align Points

Add shape points to a floor or toposolid so its surface meets the objects, lines or edges you pick.

Align Points saves you placing and typing spot heights by hand when a surface has to tie in with something else: the underside of a bench or wall so it sits on the ground, the top of a kerb so the paving comes up flush, a 3D line that carries a design level, or the edge of a neighbouring slab. You choose a mode, pick the surface that should change, then pick the references. LandForm reads their elevations, adds or moves native shape points on the target, and leaves the result editable with Revit's own shape editing tools. References can be in the host model or in a linked Revit model.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelAlign Points

Button tooltip: “Align surface shape points to selected objects, lines, or edges.”
Before you start
  • A target Floor or Toposolid (Revit 2024 and later) that can be shape edited. Foundation slabs are not accepted. The tool does not start on a sheet.
  • The references you want to follow: model or detail lines for Lines mode, any solid element (walls, families, floors, toposolids) for Objects and Edges modes. They may sit in a linked Revit model.
  • A view where both the target and the references are visible and easy to click. 3D views work well for picking tops, undersides and edges.
  • A Step (sampling distance) in metres. 0.5 m suits most site work; smaller values follow curves more closely but add more points.
Tutorial video

Watch Align Points in action

Video coming soon

Align Points walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Align Points: Align Points toolbar in Edges mode, ready to run
Align Points toolbar in Edges mode, ready to run · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Mode

    Objects follows the faces of picked elements, Lines copies the elevations of picked lines, Edges makes the target meet a picked edge.

  2. 2
    Top / Bottom

    In Objects mode, brings the surface flush with the tops of the objects, or lets the objects sit on it.

  3. 3
    Segment / Loop

    In Edges mode, uses the picked edge only, or the whole top outline it belongs to.

  4. 4
    Step

    Distance between sampled points along lines and edges, in metres.

  5. 5
    Offset

    Raises (positive) or lowers (negative) every written point, in metres.

  6. 6
    Clear inside

    Removes old interior points under the new ones first; boundary points are kept.

  7. 7
    Run

    Starts the picks: the target surface first, then the references; Esc finishes.

  8. 8
    Status line

    Tells you what to pick next, counts the references and reports how many points were aligned.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Align Points

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Align Points.

  2. 02

    Choose a mode. Under Mode, pick Objects to follow the faces of picked elements, Lines to copy the elevations of picked lines, or Edges to make the target meet a picked edge.

    In Objects mode, choose Top to bring the surface flush with the tops of the objects, or Bottom so the objects sit on the surface. In Edges mode, choose Segment for the picked edge only or Loop for the whole top outline that edge belongs to.

  3. 03

    Set the numbers. Enter Step (m), the distance between sampled points along lines and edges, and Offset (m) to raise or lower every written point, for example a negative offset to leave room for a finish. Tick Clear inside if old interior points under the new ones should go first.

  4. 04

    Run and pick the target. Click Run, then click the Floor or Toposolid that should receive the points. If exactly one suitable surface is already selected when you click Run, LandForm uses it and skips this pick.

  5. 05

    Pick the references. Click the objects or lines to follow, one after another; the status line counts them. Press Esc when finished and LandForm writes all the points in one go.

    In Edges mode every edge you pick is applied straight away and the status line reports the points aligned. Keep picking edges, and press Esc to finish.

  6. 06

    Check and repeat. Read the result on the status line, check the surface in 3D or section, and click Run again for another target or another set of references. Close the toolbar with the X when you are done.

What you get

The target Floor or Toposolid now carries native shape points at the elevations of the references, plus the Offset you entered. In Objects and Lines modes the whole run is one undo step named "LF-Align Points"; in Edges mode each picked edge is its own "LF-Align Points" step, so you can undo one edge at a time. Points that already sit at a sampled position are moved rather than duplicated. The status line reports how many points were aligned, how many Revit refused and how many interior points were cleared. Nothing else about the target changes, and Revit's Modify Sub Elements tools still work on it.

Good to know

Tips

  • In Objects mode, where two faces overlap in plan (a step, an overhang, stacked objects), Top keeps the higher point and Bottom the lower one.
  • Only areas of the reference that lie over the target in plan can give it elevations. A vertical edge has no length in plan, so it gives no points; pick a top or bottom edge instead.
  • In Edges mode, target points within about 45 mm of the edge are raised or lowered to it. Where the edge runs along the target boundary, the points are placed on the boundary itself.
  • One run writes at most 2,500 points. If the status line says the safety cap was reached, use a larger Step or split the references over several runs.
  • Clear inside removes interior points inside the outline of the new points only. Boundary and corner points of the target are never deleted.
  • The mode, Step, Offset and Clear inside settings are remembered for the next time you open the tool.
Control reference · 12 controls

Every control and what it does

Align Points12 controls
ControlTypeFunction
ObjectsOption

The target follows the top faces or the undersides of the elements you pick. Faces are sampled at their vertices and every Step along their edges.

LinesOption

The target copies the elevations of the model or detail lines you pick, sampled every Step along each line.

EdgesOption

The target takes the picked edge's elevation all along the edge, wherever the edge lies over the target in plan: target points within 45 mm of the edge are raised or lowered, and new points are added at the edge's corners and at each Step. Where the edge runs along or within 45 mm of the target boundary, the points go on the boundary itself.

Align to the top of the objectsOption

Top: the target meets the top faces of the picked objects, so the surface comes up flush with them. Available in Objects mode.

Align to the bottom of the objectsOption

Bottom: the target meets the undersides of the picked objects, so they sit on the surface. Available in Objects mode.

SegmentOption

Edges: use only the picked edge.

LoopOption

Edges: use the whole top outline the picked edge belongs to, even when the top is made of many faces.

SpacingInput

Step, in metres: the distance between sampled points along lines, edges and face outlines. Between 0.05 and 1,000 m; default 0.5 m.

OffsetInput

Added to every written elevation, in metres. Positive raises the target above the reference, negative lowers it below.

Clear insideOption

Removes the existing interior points inside the outline of the new points before writing them. Boundary points are kept.

_RunButton

Starts the pick sequence: the target surface first, then the references. Press Esc to finish picking.

CloseButton

Closes the Align Points toolbar. Points already written stay in the model.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Project Family

Project Family

Drop or lift family instances straight down or up onto the floor or toposolid beneath them, in one step for the whole selection.

Project Family fixes the trees, bollards, benches and light columns that float above or sink into the ground after the terrain has changed. You select the instances, and LandForm finds the surface under each one and moves it vertically onto it. Plan positions never change, only the elevation. By default it uses every Floor and Toposolid visible in the active view, including those in linked models; turn that off to project onto hosts you pick yourself.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelProject Family

Button tooltip: “Project family instances vertically onto visible or selected surface hosts.”
Before you start
  • The family instances to move must be point-based model families (placed by a single insertion point) and must not be pinned. Line-based families are not supported.
  • The surfaces to land on: Floors or Toposolids (Revit 2024 and later) visible in the active view, in this model or in a linked Revit model. To land on roofs, walls, stairs, ceilings or older topography surfaces, pick them as hosts instead.
  • Any model view other than a sheet. A 3D view lets you see the result straight away.
Tutorial video

Watch Project Family in action

Video coming soon

Project Family walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 5 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Project Family: Project Family toolbar set to land on visible hosts, including links
Project Family toolbar set to land on visible hosts, including links · 5 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Visible hosts

    Lands the instances on every Floor and Toposolid visible in the view; untick it to pick the host surfaces yourself.

  2. 2
    Links

    Also uses the Floors and Toposolids in linked models shown in the view; linked hosts are only read.

  3. 3
    Category

    Limits the selection to one category, such as Planting; All Categories allows any point-based model family.

  4. 4
    Run

    Select the instances and click Finish (or use the current selection); they move onto the surfaces in one undo step.

  5. 5
    Ready

    Status line; after a run it reports how many instances were projected and how many could not be resolved.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Project Family

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Project Family.

  2. 02

    Choose the hosts. Leave Visible hosts ticked to land on the Floors and Toposolids shown in the view, and tick Links if some of them are in a linked model. Untick Visible hosts if you want to name the surfaces yourself.

  3. 03

    Limit the category (optional). Pick a category under Category, for example Planting, so a window selection only grabs those instances.

  4. 04

    Run and select the instances. Click Run, then select the family instances and click Finish on the Options Bar. If instances are already selected when you click Run, LandForm uses them straight away.

  5. 05

    Pick the hosts (only with Visible hosts off). Click each surface to project onto, in this model or in a link, and press Esc when done.

  6. 06

    Check the result. The status line reports how many instances were projected and how many could not be resolved. If any failed, LandForm selects them so you can see which ones; otherwise it selects the moved instances.

What you get

Each projected instance has moved straight up or down so its insertion point sits on the top surface of the host below or above it; its plan position and rotation are unchanged. The whole run is one undo step named "LF-Project Family: Project Family Instances". The hosts themselves are not modified, and linked models are only read. Instances that miss every host, or that Revit refuses to move, stay where they were and are left selected after the run.

Good to know

Tips

  • Where hosts overlap in plan, for example a Floor over a Toposolid, the instance lands on the uppermost surface at its insertion point.
  • If an insertion point sits just outside a host edge, LandForm also tries a few nearby points around it, up to 0.1 m away, before it reports the instance as unresolved.
  • Pinned instances cannot be selected. Unpin them first, or they are skipped.
  • Run from a 3D view to judge the result immediately. In a 3D view, the tool sets the view's detail level to Fine so the surfaces are read accurately; from a plan view it uses a temporary 3D view instead.
  • The Category list only shows categories that have projectable instances in the project when the toolbar opens. Close and reopen it after placing a new kind of family.
Control reference · 9 controls

Every control and what it does

Project Family9 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Visible hostsOption

On (default): every Floor and Toposolid visible in the active view is a landing surface. Off: after selecting the instances, you pick the host elements yourself; Floors, Toposolids, roofs, walls, stairs, ceilings and topography surfaces are accepted, in the model or in a link.

LinksOption

On (default): with Visible hosts on, also uses the Floors and Toposolids in linked models shown in the view. Linked hosts are read only.

Instance CategorySelector

Limits which family instance category can be selected. All Categories allows any point-based model family.

_RunButton

Starts the run: select the instances (or use the current selection), pick hosts if Visible hosts is off, then the instances are moved onto the surfaces in one undo step.

CloseButton

Closes Project Family. Instances already projected stay where they are.

OffsetInput

Not shown on the current toolbar. The projection always uses an offset of 0 m, so instances sit exactly on the surface.

ToleranceInput

Not shown on the current toolbar. When a vertical line misses a host edge, LandForm searches up to 0.1 m around the insertion point.

Param offsetOption

Not shown on the current toolbar; reading the offset from a parameter is off.

Parameter NameInput

Not shown on the current toolbar; it is only used together with Param offset.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Rotate

Rotate

Turn many family instances at once by a fixed or random angle, square them back to the project, or line them up with an edge or with another instance.

Rotate is the quick fix for planting, furniture, bollards, boulders and any other point-based family that has been placed facing the wrong way. Drag the angle slider and every controlled instance turns about its own insertion point while you watch, so you can judge the result on the drawing before you keep it. Random gives a planting layout a natural, hand-placed look in one click, Edge and Perp set seats or lights parallel or square to a wall, kerb or path edge, and Match copies the orientation of one instance onto others.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelRotate

Button tooltip: “Rotate point-based family instances with live preview and alignment tools.”
Before you start
  • A plan or 3D view of a project. Rotate refuses to start on a sheet, in a section, elevation or drafting view, and in the Family Editor.
  • Point-based family instances that are not pinned. Pinned instances and line- or face-based elements are left out; unpin anything you want to turn.
  • When the toolbar opens it takes control of every unpinned point-based instance visible in the active view and selects them all. Use Select straight away if you only want to turn some of them.
  • For Edge and Perp, a model element with a non-vertical edge to align to, such as a wall, floor, kerb or toposolid edge.
Tutorial video

Watch Rotate in action

Video coming soon

Rotate walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 10 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Rotate: Rotate toolbar previewing 89 selected instances
Rotate toolbar previewing 89 selected instances · 10 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Select

    Pick the instances to control; the count beside it shows how many are under control.

  2. 2
    Angle

    Drag the slider or type a value from -180 to 180 degrees; it also sets the Random range and the Edge / Perp offset.

  3. 3
    Status line

    Reports the preview and how many instances were turned or skipped.

  4. 4
    Apply

    Keeps the previewed rotation as the new starting point and leaves Rotate open.

  5. 5
    Mode, Fixed

    Turns every instance by the angle and keeps the result, like Apply.

  6. 6
    Random

    Gives each instance its own random turn within plus or minus the angle.

  7. 7
    Edge, Perp

    Pick a reference edge, then an instance, to turn it parallel or square to that edge.

  8. 8
    1 ref

    Keeps one picked edge so you can click many instances against it.

  9. 9
    Match

    Copies the rotation of one picked instance onto each instance you click.

  10. 10
    Reset

    Turns every controlled instance back to the project orientation.

Step by step · 10 steps

How to use Rotate

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Rotate.

  2. 02

    Open a plan or 3D view. Start Rotate. The toolbar appears at the top of the view and all unpinned point-based instances in the view are selected and counted.

  3. 03

    Choose the instances. If you only want some of them, press Select, pick the instances and finish the pick. Press Esc instead to keep the current set.

  4. 04

    Preview an angle. Drag the slider or type a value in the box. After a moment every controlled instance turns about its own insertion point, from where it was when you last applied.

  5. 05

    Keep it. Press Apply (or Fixed) to keep the rotation. The angle becomes the new starting point, so the next preview turns the instances further from here.

  6. 06

    Randomise for a natural layout (optional). Set the slider to the largest turn you want, for example 45°, and press Random. Each instance gets its own random angle within plus or minus that range. Press Random again until the pattern looks right.

  7. 07

    Align to an edge (optional). Set an Offset angle if the family's front is not along its own x-axis, then press Edge (parallel) or Perp (square). Pick a reference edge, then the instance to turn; repeat edge-then-instance pairs and press Esc when done.

    Tick 1 ref first to pick one edge and then click as many instances as you like against it.

  8. 08

    Match another instance (optional). Press Match, pick the instance whose rotation you want to copy, then click each target instance. Press Esc to finish.

  9. 09

    Square up (optional). Press Reset to bring every controlled instance back to the project orientation.

  10. 10

    Close. Press the × to close the toolbar. Any preview you did not apply is turned back first.

What you get

The instances keep their positions and only their rotation about the vertical axis through their insertion point changes. Each preview, apply, reset, alignment and match is a separate step in Revit's undo list, named "LF-Rotate Family Instances: Preview Rotation", "Apply Rotation", "Randomize Rotation", "Reset Rotation", "Align Rotation to Edge" or "Match Rotation", so you can step back through them with Undo after you close the toolbar. The status line reports how many instances were turned and how many were skipped.

Good to know

Tips

  • Edge, Perp and Match change the instances as soon as you click them; they do not wait for Apply.
  • If instances are reported as skipped, they were pinned, deleted or are not point-based. Unpin them and press Select to bring them back under control.
  • Pick a sloping or horizontal edge for Edge and Perp; a vertical edge has no direction in plan and is rejected with a message.
  • If the angle box shows an error, the value is outside -180 to 180 or is not a number; the status line asks for a valid angle and the buttons wait until it is fixed.
  • Rotate stays tied to the project you started it in. If you switch to another project, close the toolbar and start it again there.
Control reference · 12 controls

Every control and what it does

Rotate Instances12 controls
ControlTypeFunction
SelectButton

Pick the unpinned point-based family instances to control, replacing the current set. Esc keeps the current set. Any unapplied preview is turned back first.

FixedButton

Turns every controlled instance by the Angle value from its last applied rotation and keeps the result.

RandomButton

Gives each instance a fresh random turn within plus or minus the Range value and keeps it. A range of 0 is set to 180 degrees first.

ResetButton

Turns every controlled instance back to the project orientation and resets the angle to 0.

EdgeButton

Pick a reference edge, then an instance; the instance turns parallel to the edge in plan plus the Offset angle. Esc finishes.

PerpButton

Pick a reference edge, then an instance; the instance turns perpendicular to the edge plus the Offset angle. Esc finishes.

1 refOption

Keeps one picked edge for Edge and Perp so you can click many instances against it.

MatchButton

Pick one source instance, then click target instances to give them the same rotation. Esc finishes.

Angle DegreesSlider

Sets the angle, range or offset from -180 to 180 degrees and previews the rotation in the model as you drag.

AngleInput

Exact angle, range or offset in degrees; stays in step with the slider.

_ApplyButton

Keeps the current preview as the new starting rotation and leaves Rotate open. Enter does the same.

CloseButton

Closes Rotate and turns any unapplied preview back to the last applied rotation.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Array

Array

Copy a family instance along a path you draw or pick, at a fixed spacing or a fixed count, with every copy turned to follow the path.

Array is the tool for a row of trees along a curving avenue, bollards around a kerb, lights along a promenade or bench seats around a plaza. Revit's own array only works along a straight line or a radius; here the path can be any polyline, arc chain or smooth curve, an existing model edge, or a chain of connected lines. You see cyan preview copies before anything is committed, and the finished array remembers its path and settings, so you can reopen it later and change the spacing or reshape the route.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelArray

Button tooltip: “Copy a family instance along a drawn or selected path.”
Before you start
  • A project open in a plan, 3D, section, elevation or drafting view. Array does not start on a sheet or in the Family Editor.
  • The family to copy, either placed once in the model or loaded into the project. Any stand-alone family instance can be copied; nested components, curtain panels and mullions, title blocks and profiles cannot. Detail items must be drawn in the active view.
  • If the path already exists, model or detail lines joined end to end, or a visible model edge such as a kerb, wall or floor edge.
  • Your target spacing in metres, or the number of items you need.
Tutorial video

Watch Array in action

Video coming soon

Array walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Array: Path Array toolbar waiting for a source family and a path
Path Array toolbar waiting for a source family and a path · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Source: Pick Family

    Pick the family instance to copy along the path; Esc keeps the current source.

  2. 2
    Families…

    Choose the source from a list of every family Array can copy, filtered by Category or Search.

  3. 3
    No source selected

    Shows the category and ID of the source once you have picked it.

  4. 4
    Path

    Shape of the path between points: Line, Line + Arc, Arc, Spline or Bezier.

  5. 5
    Draw

    Click the path points in the view; Esc finishes.

  6. 6
    Pick Edges / Connected Lines

    Use visible model edges, or a model or detail line and every line joined to it end to end, as the path.

  7. 7
    Distribution, Spacing and Count

    By spacing places items a fixed distance apart in metres; By count spreads a fixed number along the path.

  8. 8
    Closed, Reverse, Align, Start, End

    Close the loop, reverse the station order, turn each copy to the path, and place items exactly on the path ends.

  9. 9
    Offset

    Shifts every item sideways from the path, in metres: positive to the left of the path direction, negative to the right.

  10. 10
    Move Guide

    Moves one path point by picking, for elevations, sections and perspective views where grips are not shown.

  11. 11
    Undo / Clear

    Removes the last path point, or the whole path.

  12. 12
    Status line

    Tells you what to do next; the item count appears at its right end.

  13. 13
    Run

    Places the copies, saves the array settings and closes the toolbar.

  14. 14
    Edit Saved

    Reloads a saved array from one of its items so you can change it and run it again.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Array

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Array.

  2. 02

    Choose the source. Press Pick Family and click the instance to copy; its category and ID appear beside the buttons. If you selected an instance before opening Array, it is used straight away.

    Press Families… instead to choose from a list of every family Array can copy, filtered by Category or Search. A family that is not placed yet gets one instance at the start of your path, and that instance becomes the first item.

  3. 03

    Pick the path style. In Path, choose Line for straight segments, Arc or Line + Arc for arcs through each set of three points, Spline for a smooth curve through every point, or Bezier for a softer smoothed curve.

  4. 04

    Draw or pick the path. Press Draw and click the path points in the view; the next segment follows the cursor, and the preview copies update after each click. Press Esc when the path looks right.

    Or press Pick Edges and pick one or more visible model edges, then Finish, or press Connected Lines and pick one model or detail line: every line joined to it end to end is used too.

  5. 05

    Set the distribution. Choose By spacing and enter Spacing in metres, or By count and enter Count. Tick Start and End to place items exactly on the path ends, Closed to join the last point back to the first, and Align to turn each copy to the path direction.

  6. 06

    Offset the row (optional). Tick Offset and enter a distance in metres to shift every item sideways from the path, for example to set trees back from a kerb line. Positive values shift to the left of the path direction, negative to the right.

  7. 07

    Adjust the path. In plan and 3D views, drag the square grip on any path point; the preview updates when you let go. In elevations, sections and perspective views, use Move Guide: pick a grip, then pick its new location. Undo removes the last path point and Clear removes the whole path.

  8. 08

    Run. Check the item count at the right of the status line and press Run. LandForm places the copies, saves the array settings and closes the toolbar.

What you get

The model now holds one copy of the source family at every station along the path; the source itself stays where it is and counts as an item when it sits on a station. All copies are ordinary family instances that you can schedule, tag or edit like any other. The whole placement is one undo step named "LF-Path Array: Create or Update Array". The path, settings and member list are stored on the source, the copies and any picked path elements, so Edit Saved can reload the array later.

Good to know

Tips

  • To change an array, select one of its items and start Array, or press Edit Saved and pick an item. The old path and settings come back; press Run and the previous copies are replaced by the new ones.
  • Picked edges and lines are turned into editable path points, up to 18 per curve. Switch Path to Spline to keep a curved edge smooth between those points.
  • If Run stays greyed out, check that there is a source, at least two path points, and that Spacing is at least 0.01 m or Count is a whole number above zero.
  • Preview copies are temporary and are removed when you press Run or close the toolbar; they never stay in the model.
  • Closed ignores End, because the end of a closed loop is the same point as its start.
Control reference · 22 controls

Every control and what it does

Path Array22 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Pick FamilyButton

Pick the family instance to copy along the path. Esc keeps the current source.

Families…Button

Choose the source from a list of the families Path Array can copy, when it cannot be picked on screen. A placed family is copied from one of its instances; a family that is not placed yet gets one instance at the start of the path, which becomes the first item.

Edit SavedButton

Reload a saved Path Array, with its path and settings, from a selected or picked member so you can change it and run it again.

Draw ModeSelector

Shape of the path between guide points: Line, Line + Arc, Arc, Spline or Bezier.

DrawButton

Click guide points in the active view, adding to the current path; Esc finishes. Points snap to endpoints, midpoints, intersections and the work plane grid.

Pick EdgesButton

Pick one or more visible model edges and press Finish to use them as the path.

Connected LinesButton

Pick one model or detail line; every line of the same kind joined to it end to end becomes part of the path.

Move GuideButton

Move one path guide point by picking. In plan and 3D views every path point also carries a square grip: drag it to reshape the path, and the array preview updates when you let go (Esc cancels a drag). Move Guide covers elevations, sections and perspective views, where grips are not shown.

Distribution ModeSelector

By spacing places items a fixed distance apart; By count spreads a fixed number of items along the path.

SpacingInput

Distance between items along the path, in metres (at least 0.01). Used with By spacing.

CountInput

Number of items along the path. Used with By count.

ClosedOption

Joins the last path point back to the first and spaces the items around the loop.

ReverseOption

Reverses the station order along the path; a family placed new from Families… then starts at the far end.

AlignOption

Turns every copy to follow the path direction at its station.

StartOption

Places an item exactly on the path start.

EndOption

Places an item exactly on the path end (ignored for a closed path).

OffsetOption

Shifts every item sideways from the path by the offset distance.

OffsetInput

Signed sideways offset in metres: positive to the left of the path direction, negative to the right.

UndoButton

Removes the last path guide point.

ClearButton

Removes the whole path so you can start again.

RunButton

Creates the array, or replaces the copies of the saved array you are editing, then closes the toolbar.

CloseButton

Closes Path Array and removes the preview copies without placing anything.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · ToFamily · In-Place Family

In-Place Family

Turn model-in-place elements into loadable family files (RFA), and optionally swap each one in the project for an instance of its new family.

Model-in-place components are quick to sketch but awkward to live with: they cannot be copied between projects, scheduled as types or reused from a library. In-Place Family takes the solid geometry of each in-place instance you choose, builds a new family from a Revit family template, saves it as an RFA file with a name you control, and can load it back into the project, place it exactly where the original stood and remove the original. You can convert a whole batch of planters, seats or sculpted landforms in one run.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelToFamily ▾In-Place Family

Button tooltip: “Convert model-in-place solids into loadable Revit families.”
Before you start
  • A project open in a plan or 3D view. The tool does not start on a sheet, in other view types or in the Family Editor.
  • One or more model-in-place family instances with real solid geometry. Elements with no solids, such as an in-place family made only of lines, are skipped.
  • A folder where the RFA files should be saved. The first time you open the tool it suggests a Generated Families\In-Place folder in LandForm's data folder in your user profile.
  • Selecting the in-place elements before you start saves a step: the tool reads the current selection when it opens.
Tutorial video

Watch In-Place Family in action

Video coming soon

In-Place Family walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

In-Place Family: In-Place Family window opened with no model-in-place instances selected
In-Place Family window opened with no model-in-place instances selected · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick Elements

    Returns to Revit so you can pick model-in-place instances; Esc keeps the current list.

  2. 2
    Use Current Selection

    Replaces the list with the model-in-place instances in the current Revit selection.

  3. 3
    Use

    One row per instance: clear Use to leave a row out, and read Result after a run.

  4. 4
    0 of 0 included

    Counts how many rows will be converted.

  5. 5
    Family category / template

    Chooses the Revit family template for the new families; Browse picks any other .rft file.

  6. 6
    Output folder

    Where the RFA files are saved; Browse chooses the folder.

  7. 7
    Prefix and Family name pattern

    Name each new family from {Prefix}, {ElementName}, {Category} and {ElementId}.

  8. 8
    Load and place generated family in project

    Loads each new family and places an instance where the original stood; clear it to create the RFA files only.

  9. 9
    Delete original after replacement is placed

    Removes the in-place element once its replacement is placed.

  10. 10
    Overwrite existing generated RFA files

    Replaces a file of the same name; when cleared, new files get a number added.

  11. 11
    Status line

    Tells you what is missing before you can run, and shows progress during the run.

  12. 12
    Run

    Generates a family for every included instance, and loads and places it when that option is on.

  13. 13
    Close

    Closes the window and saves the current settings.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use In-Place Family

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → ToFamily ▾ → In-Place Family.

  2. 02

    Bring in the instances. Select the model-in-place elements in Revit and start In-Place Family; they are listed straight away. Otherwise press Pick Elements, pick them in the view and finish the pick, or select them in Revit and press Use Current Selection.

  3. 03

    Choose what to convert. Clear the Use tick on any row you want to leave alone. The count at the top right shows how many rows are included.

  4. 04

    Choose the family template. Pick a template from Family category / template; the list holds the loadable model templates installed with Revit and starts on Generic Model. Press Browse to use any other .rft file.

  5. 05

    Set where and how files are saved. Enter or Browse to the Output folder, then set Prefix and Family name pattern. The pattern can use {Prefix}, {ElementName}, {Category} and {ElementId}; the default {Prefix}-MIP-{ElementName} gives names such as LF-MIP-Planter.

  6. 06

    Decide what happens in the project. Leave Load and place generated family in project ticked to load each new family and place an instance where the original stood, and Delete original after replacement is placed to remove the in-place element in the same step. Clear the first option to create the RFA files only.

    Clear Overwrite existing generated RFA files to keep older files; new ones then get a number added to their name.

  7. 07

    Run. Press Run. The progress bar moves through the list and the Result column reports each row as converted, with its file name, or skipped, with the reason.

  8. 08

    Check the summary. The Last run box shows how many instances were converted and skipped and the output folder. Close the window when you are done, or pick more instances and run again.

What you get

Each converted instance now has its own RFA file in the output folder, containing its solids as free-form geometry, with the family category set to the original element's category whenever the template allows it. With loading on, the family is loaded into the project and one instance is placed at the centre of the original geometry, on the same Workset, so it lines up with where the in-place element was. Each replacement is its own undo step named "LF-In-Place Family: Load and Place Replacement". Your settings are remembered for the next time you open the tool.

Good to know

Tips

  • The new family's origin is the centre of the original geometry's bounding box. Keep that in mind when you place the family again elsewhere.
  • Only the finished solid geometry is carried across, with any voids already cut. Materials, parameters and lines of the in-place family are not; add them in the Family Editor if you need them.
  • If a family of the same name is already loaded in the project, it is overwritten by the new version.
  • Run stays greyed out until at least one row is included, the template is a valid .rft file, and the output folder, prefix and name pattern are filled in. The status line tells you which one is missing.
  • Characters that are not allowed in file names are replaced with an underscore.
Control reference · 14 controls

Every control and what it does

In Place Family14 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Family Template PathSelector

Chooses the Revit family template for the new families, from the loadable model templates installed with Revit. Generic Model is the default.

BrowseButton

Picks any Revit family template file (.rft) from disk and adds it to the list.

Output FolderInput

Folder where the generated RFA files are saved; it is created if it does not exist.

BrowseButton

Chooses the output folder for the generated family files.

PrefixInput

Text inserted wherever the name pattern contains {Prefix}.

Family Name PatternInput

Name of each new family, built from {Prefix}, {ElementName}, {Category} and {ElementId}.

Load and place generated family in projectOption

Loads each new family and places one instance where the original stood. When cleared, LandForm only creates the RFA files.

Delete original after replacement is placedOption

Deletes a source model-in-place instance only after its replacement family instance is placed. Available only while loading is on.

Overwrite existing generated RFA filesOption

Replaces a file of the same name. When cleared, LandForm adds a number to avoid replacing an existing family file.

Use Current SelectionButton

Replaces the list with the model-in-place instances in the current Revit selection.

Pick ElementsButton

Returns to Revit so you can pick model-in-place instances; only in-place elements can be picked. Esc keeps the current list.

ItemsTable

One row per instance: tick Use to include it, and read the Result column after a run.

RunButton

Generates a family for every included instance and loads and places it when that option is on.

CloseButton

Closes In-Place Family and saves the current settings.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · ToFamily · Lines to Detail Item Family

Lines to Detail Item Family

Turn a group of detail lines into a Detail Item family, loaded into the project and placed back where the lines were.

When you have drawn a paving joint, a tree pit edge or a fixing detail with detail lines and want to reuse it, this tool saves you the round trip through the Family Editor. Select the lines, give the family a name, click an insertion point, and LandForm builds the family from Revit's Detail Item template, loads it, places one instance on the same spot and can delete the loose lines. From then on the detail is a single component you can copy, schedule and swap.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelToFamily ▾Lines to Detail Item Family

Button tooltip: “Convert detail lines into a loadable Detail Item family.”
Before you start
  • A plan, section, elevation, detail, drafting or legend view that contains the detail lines. The tool does not start on a sheet or in a 3D view.
  • The Metric Detail Item.rft template for your Revit version in Revit's default English family template folder. LandForm always builds the family from it and stops with a message if it is missing.
  • A family name that is not yet used in the project. The standard is LF-DT- followed by at least five descriptive characters, for example LF-DT-Tree Pit Edge.
  • Decide where the insertion point should be, such as a corner or the centre of the detail; it becomes the family's origin.
Tutorial video

Watch Lines to Detail Item Family in action

Video coming soon

Lines to Detail Item Family walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 4 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Lines to Detail Item Family: Lines to Detail Item Family toolbar waiting for a family name
Lines to Detail Item Family toolbar waiting for a family name · 4 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Name

    Type the rest of the family name after LF-DT-; the list shows the Detail Item families already in the project.

  2. 2
    Status line

    Confirms the name is available or tells you what to change, here to add at least five descriptive characters.

  3. 3
    Delete lines

    Removes the source lines once the family is placed; clear it to keep them.

  4. 4
    Run

    Creates, loads and places the family; it stays greyed out until the name is valid.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Lines to Detail Item Family

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → ToFamily ▾ → Lines to Detail Item Family.

  2. 02

    Select the lines (optional). Select the detail lines in the active view before you press Run. If nothing suitable is selected, LandForm asks you to drag a window around them instead.

  3. 03

    Name the family. The Name box starts with LF-DT-; type the rest of the name. The status line confirms "This name is available." or tells you what to change. Open the list to see the Detail Item families already in the project.

  4. 04

    Choose whether to keep the lines. Leave Delete lines ticked to remove the source lines once the family is placed, or clear it to keep them.

  5. 05

    Run. Press Run. If you did not preselect lines, drag a window around them now. Press Esc at any prompt to cancel.

  6. 06

    Pick the insertion point. Click the point in the view that should become the family origin.

  7. 07

    Check the result. The new family is loaded and one instance is placed at the insertion point, so it sits exactly over the original lines. The status line reports that the family was loaded and placed.

  8. 08

    Repeat or close. Enter another name and press Run for the next detail, or close the toolbar with ×.

What you get

The project now contains a new Detail Item family with one type, built from your lines and placed once in the current view at the point you picked. If Delete lines was ticked, the source lines are gone. Loading, placing and deleting are one undo step named "LF-Lines to Detail Item Family: Load and Place Family", so a single Undo puts the lines back.

Good to know

Tips

  • The family is built in a temporary file and only lives inside the project; no RFA is kept on disk. To reuse it in another project, open it with Revit's Edit Family and save it from there, or copy and paste the instance.
  • The lines inside the family use the family's default detail line style, not the line styles you drew with. Adjust them in the Family Editor if the weights matter.
  • Only detail lines drawn in the active view are used. Model lines, filled regions and lines from other views are ignored.
  • Lines drawn in a section or elevation are transformed into the family's own view, so the detail keeps its orientation when it is placed back.
  • Run is greyed out while the name is too short, contains characters that are not allowed in file names, or matches a family already in the project.
Control reference · 3 controls

Every control and what it does

Detail Item Family3 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Family Name Combo BoxSelector

Name of the new family, normally LF-DT- followed by at least five descriptive characters. The list shows the Detail Item families already in the project, so you can avoid their names.

Delete linesOption

Deletes the source detail lines once the new family instance is placed. Clear it to keep the lines.

RunButton

Uses the selected detail lines, or asks you to window-select them, then asks for the insertion point and creates, loads and places the family.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Contour · Line Elev

Set Line Elevations

Lift traced contour lines to their true heights: one connected contour at a time, or a whole set of contours stepped by a fixed interval.

When you trace contours from a survey drawing, every model line ends up flat on the same level. Set Line Elevations (Line Elev on the ribbon) moves them to the heights they represent, so they can drive a Toposolid or be checked in 3D. Pick one line and LandForm moves the whole connected contour; or select many contours, show the direction they climb, and LandForm gives each one the next elevation in the sequence.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelContour ▾Line Elev

Button tooltip: “Set model-line elevations for contour and grading workflows.”
Before you start
  • Model lines drawn on horizontal work planes, visible in the active view and not pinned. The tool does not run on a sheet.
  • The segments of one contour must meet end to end (within about 25 mm in plan) to be treated as one connected line.
  • The height of the first contour, and for a set of contours the interval between them. Elevations are in metres, measured from the Revit internal origin.
Tutorial video

Watch Set Line Elevations in action

Video coming soon

Set Line Elevations walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 6 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Set Line Elevations: Set Line Elevations toolbar in Single mode, ready to pick a contour
Set Line Elevations toolbar in Single mode, ready to pick a contour · 6 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Elevation

    Height of the contour in metres; in Multiple mode, the height of the first contour.

  2. 2
    Mode

    Single sets one connected contour; Multiple steps a series of contours by the interval.

  3. 3
    Interval

    Height step between neighbouring contours in Multiple mode; negative values step down.

  4. 4
    Style

    Tick it to give the moved lines the line style chosen beside it.

  5. 5
    Run

    Starts picking: one contour line in Single mode, or the contours and then a direction in Multiple mode.

  6. 6
    Status line

    Tells you what to pick and reports how many model lines were updated.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Set Line Elevations

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Contour ▾ → Line Elev.

  2. 02

    Enter the elevation. Type the height of the contour in Elevation.

  3. 03

    Choose the mode. Pick Single to set one contour, or Multiple to set a series and enter the Interval between them.

  4. 04

    Set the line style (optional). Tick Style and choose a line style if the moved lines should change style as well.

  5. 05

    Single: pick one line. Press Run and click any segment of the contour. That line and every model line joined to it end to end in the active view move to the Elevation.

  6. 06

    Multiple: select the contours. Press Run, select all the contour lines in the series and press Finish on the options bar.

  7. 07

    Multiple: show the direction. Click a start point on any visible element near the first contour, then a second point in the direction the contours climb. The contours are taken in the order they lie along that direction: the first gets the Elevation, the next one Elevation plus Interval, and so on across the selection.

  8. 08

    Carry on. The status line reports how many model lines were updated. Change the values and press Run again for the next contour or series, or close the toolbar when you are done.

What you get

The model lines keep their plan shape and now sit on horizontal work planes at the new heights, so a 3D view shows the contours stacked at their real levels. Each run is one step in Revit's Undo list: "LF-Set Line Elevations: Set Line Elevation" for Single and "LF-Set Line Elevations: Set Elevations by Direction" for Multiple.

Good to know

Tips

  • In Single mode the connected search covers all model lines in the active view, not only selected ones. Make sure neighbouring contours do not touch, or they will move together.
  • In Multiple mode only the lines you selected are moved; touching lines inside the selection are treated as one contour.
  • Multiple orders the contours by their average position along the direction you clicked. It works best for contours that run side by side across the site; for closed rings around a hill or a hollow, set each ring with Single.
  • Lines on vertical or sloping work planes, and pinned lines, are ignored.
Control reference · 8 controls

Every control and what it does

Set Line Elevations8 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Base ElevationInput

Contour elevation in metres, from the Revit internal origin. In Multiple mode it is the height of the first contour of the sequence.

SingleOption

Pick one model line; it and every model line connected to it end to end move to the elevation.

MultipleOption

Select several contours, then pick a start and a direction point; each contour group gets the next elevation by interval.

IntervalInput

Elevation step in metres between neighbouring contours in Multiple mode. Negative values step down.

StyleOption

Change the line style of the moved lines to the style chosen beside it.

Selected Line StyleSelector

Line style applied to the moved lines when Style is ticked.

_RunButton

Start picking model lines (and, in Multiple mode, the start and direction points).

CloseButton

Close the Set Line Elevations toolbar.

Back to tool index ↑

Modify · Contour · Contour Draw

Contour Draw

Sketch contour lines level by level on an automatic work plane, then turn them into a new Toposolid or push them into terrain you already have.

Contour Draw is for shaping landform the way you would on tracing paper. You set a start level and an interval, click a contour, press Esc, and the work plane steps up to the next level so you can draw the next one straight away. While you draw, LandForm shows where the current level and the next one cut the existing ground, so new contours can tie in where they should. When the contours are done, one click builds a Toposolid from them or reshapes an existing Toposolid or Floor.

Where to find it

LandForm tabModify panelContour ▾Contour Draw

Button tooltip: “Draw model-line contours level by level from a compact toolbar.”
Before you start
  • A plan or 3D view. The tool does not start on a sheet. Building or reshaping a Toposolid needs Revit 2024 or later and at least one Toposolid type in the project.
  • Elevations are survey elevations (shared coordinates) in metres. In a plan view, Elev starts at the elevation of the view's level.
  • Decide the contour Interval: the default is 0.50 m and the smallest is 0.05 m. A negative interval steps downhill.
  • Contour lines drawn in this session are working lines. They are removed when you close the toolbar, so build or apply the surface first.
Tutorial video

Watch Contour Draw in action

Video coming soon

Contour Draw walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Contour Draw: Contour Draw toolbar ready for the first contour
Contour Draw toolbar ready for the first contour · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Elev

    The survey elevation of the current contour; the target button beside it picks the level from the model.

  2. 2
    Interval

    How far the level steps after each contour; a negative interval steps downhill.

  3. 3
    Mode

    Spline from control points, spline through every point, or Revit's own Model Line tool.

  4. 4
    Draw

    Starts drawing at the current level; Esc finishes the contour and steps to the next level.

  5. 5
    Shortcut reminder

    The keys for the current mode.

  6. 6
    Auto Trace

    Traces a contour you click on a visible Toposolid or Floor, with grips to adjust it.

  7. 7
    Edit Points, Move grips

    Reshapes a picked contour; the list sets whether a click moves, adds or removes points.

  8. 8
    New from

    Builds a new Toposolid from the Contours, a Drawn Area or an Enclosed Area.

  9. 9
    Offset

    Raises or lowers a newly created Toposolid relative to the contours.

  10. 10
    Existing, Apply Contours

    Pushes the contours into a picked Toposolid or Floor as shape points.

  11. 11
    Clean pts, Tol

    Removes existing interior points within the tolerance of each contour first.

  12. 12
    Clear Lines

    Deletes the contours drawn in this session, after asking.

  13. 13
    Status line

    Tells you the next step and what the last action did.

  14. 14
    Curve count

    How many contours sit at the current level and in total.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Contour Draw

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Modify panel → Contour ▾ → Contour Draw.

  2. 02

    Set the start level. Type the Elev of the first contour and the Interval, or use the arrows: Elev steps by one interval and Interval by 0.05 m.

    Or press the target button beside Elev and click the model. On a Toposolid the level snaps to the nearest visible contour; on a floor, a linked CAD or Revit file or any other geometry it takes the exact height you clicked. Drawing starts at that level right away.

  3. 03

    Choose the mode. Spline (control pts) shapes the contour from control points, Spline (through pts) passes it through every point you click, and Revit draw opens Revit's own Model Line tool on a work plane at the level.

  4. 04

    Draw the contours. Press Draw and click the points of the first contour. The work plane grid appears at the current level; an amber line shows where that level cuts the visible Toposolids and Floors, amber dots mark where it leaves a surface, and a thinner cyan line shows where the next level will run.

    Press Esc to finish the contour: it is created as a model line, the level steps by one Interval and the next contour starts. Press Esc again with no points to pause. In Revit draw mode, press + for the next level and - for the previous one.

  5. 05

    Trace an existing contour (optional). Press Auto Trace and click near a contour on a visible Toposolid or Floor. LandForm traces it, smooths it and shows it as a pink preview with grips; adjust the grips and press Esc to create the line.

  6. 06

    Reshape a contour (optional). Press Edit Points and pick a contour; it is reduced to a few grips at its own level. The box beside the button sets what a click does: Move grips (Ctrl+click removes a grip), Add points (clicks past either end extend the line) or Remove points. Esc moves on to the next contour, a second Esc ends editing.

  7. 07

    Build a new Toposolid. On the second row, under New from, press Contours, Drawn Area or Enclosed Area (see the table below). Set Offset first if the surface should sit above or below the contours, for example a negative value to leave room for a paving build-up.

  8. 08

    Or reshape an existing surface. Press Apply Contours and pick the Toposolid or Floor. The contours become shape points at their own elevations. With Clean pts on, existing interior points within Tol of each contour are removed first so old and new levels do not fight.

  9. 09

    Tidy up. Press Clear Lines to delete the contours drawn in this session, or close the toolbar, which removes them along with the work plane grid.

What you get

Each hand-drawn contour is a model line on a horizontal work plane at its own level, and each is a separate Undo step such as "LF-Contour Draw: Draw Contour at 12.50 m". The curve count on the right of the status line shows how many contours sit at the current level and in total. A new Toposolid uses the first Toposolid type in the project and the level of the active plan (or the lowest level), and is one Undo step, "LF-Contour Draw: Create Toposolid from Contours". Apply Contours adds the shape points in one step, "LF-Contour Draw: Add Contour Points to Surface" (or "Replace Surface Contours" with Clean pts on), reports any points that fell outside the surface or on its edge, and then removes the lines this tool drew.

More about Contour Draw

How the toolbar is arranged

The toolbar has two rows, one for each job the tool does, with the status line underneath.

Contours. The top row makes and edits contour lines: Mode, Elev with its pick button, Interval, then Draw, Auto Trace, Edit Points with its click mode, and Clear Lines. The shortcut reminder beside them changes with the mode.

Toposolid. The bottom row turns lines into terrain. There are three ways to create a new Toposolid:

New fromUse it when
ContoursThe contour lines already cover the area. Their own shape becomes the outline. Uses this session's lines, or asks you to select some.
Drawn AreaYou want to set the outline yourself. Click the corners and press Esc to close the shape; then click an edge's midpoint grip and click where it should sit to bend that edge into an arc. A second Esc builds the Toposolid, with its edge matched to the surfaces around it and the contours inside draped onto it.
Enclosed AreaPaths, kerbs, steps, walls or railings already ring the space. Select them and the open area between them is filled, with its levels read from the surrounding surfaces. A selected element standing inside the area is left out as an opening.

Beside those, Existing › Apply Contours reshapes a Toposolid or Floor that is already there, with Clean pts and Tol controlling the clean-up of nearby old points, and Offset shifts any newly created surface.

You do not have to draw contours first: Drawn Area and Enclosed Area both work with no contours at all.

Good to know

Tips

  • A contour needs at least two points. If you finish with only one, the same level is offered again.
  • New from Contours follows the outline of the contours themselves. If Revit refuses that outline, LandForm falls back to an automatic boundary and says so on the status line.
  • Offset applies to new Toposolids only. Apply Contours always lands exactly on the contour elevations.
  • Clear Lines asks before deleting, touches nothing drawn before the toolbar was opened, and keeps any line a Toposolid or Floor depends on. It can be undone.
  • The highlighted button tells you the next step: Draw while there are no contours, Apply Contours once some exist.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
06

LandForm ribbon panel

Softscape

Planting libraries, mixes, palettes, connectors and schedules.

Softscape · Planting · Planting Library

Planting Library

Browse one shared plant library with photos and live family sketches, then create the plants you choose as Planting families and Toposolid types in the project.

Planting Library is the office plant palette inside Revit. Trees, palms, xeriscapes, shrubs, groundcovers, ornamental grasses, climbers, lawns and indoor plants sit in one window with instant search, filter chips, a table or photo-card view and a detail panel that sketches the family before it exists. Check the records you need and press one button: trees, palms, xeriscapes, climbers and indoor plants become generated Planting families, while shrubs, groundcovers, ornamental grasses and lawns become Toposolid types (with optional placeable families). The same window updates content already in the project, opens the in-place editor for a one-off exception, loads matching tags and builds schedules.

The library reads the bundled LandForm catalog or your own company workbook, so the office keeps editing one Excel file and every project reads from it.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelPlanting ▾Planting Library

Button tooltip: “Manage, search, and update the shared plant library in one place.”
Before you start
  • A project document must be open; the library does not start in a family document.
  • Decide the library source. The bundled catalog is read-only; Settings › Save as library… exports it as an editable workbook you can point the tool at, or Browse company library… loads a workbook you already maintain.
  • Shrubs, groundcovers and ornamental grasses create Toposolid types; decide whether you also need placeable families for them (Also create families). Lawns always create Toposolid types only.
  • If you intend to use Create + Place, open a plan or 3D view where you can click the placement point.
Tutorial video

Watch Planting Library in action

Video coming soon

Planting Library walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Planting Library: Planting Library docked as the compact strip, browsing Trees
Planting Library docked as the compact strip, browsing Trees · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Trees (80)

    Chooses the plant category; the number is how many records it holds.

  2. 2
    Search

    Every word must match the code, botanical or common name, form, water need, tolerances or remarks. Press / to jump here.

  3. 3
    Code ▲

    One row per plant with its photo, code, botanical and common name. Click a row to make it active; click a heading to sort.

  4. 4
    Status

    Shows whether each plant is Not added or already In Project.

  5. 5
    Row check boxes

    Tick the plants to create; Shift-click a box to check a range.

  6. 6
    Check all visible

    Checks every plant the filters currently show; the count beside it gives the plants shown.

  7. 7
    checked

    Counts the checked plants; Clear unchecks everything, including rows hidden by filters.

  8. 8
    Add checked to project (0)

    Creates every checked plant without a placement pick.

  9. 9
    Create + Place · ACA ARA

    Creates the one checked plant, or the highlighted row when nothing is checked, and asks for the planting point. Enter does the same.

  10. 10
    Status line

    Reports loading, progress and the final report of each create or update.

  11. 11
    Create schedule

    Opens Create a schedule for a plant schedule or formatted schedules per category.

  12. 12
    Compact toggle

    Docks the library as this narrow strip on the right edge of the view; press it again to fit the full window back.

  13. 13
    Settings ▾

    Library actions: company library, reload, edit source, save as library, naming standards, workbook guide and matching tags.

  14. 14
    + Add species

    Appends a new record to the editable company workbook; enabled only while one is active.

Step by step · 11 steps

How to use Planting Library

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Planting ▾ → Planting Library.

  2. 02

    Let the catalog load. The status line reports progress per category and ends with "N records loaded from …". The source badge at the top names the active workbook (green border when it is editable, amber when a sheet fell back to the bundled catalog); click it to open the workbook guide.

  3. 03

    Pick a category. The left rail lists All plants, then the categories grouped as Created as families (Trees, Palms, Xeriscapes, Climbers & Creepers, Indoor Plants) and Created as Toposolid types (Shrubs, Groundcovers, Ornamental Grasses, Lawns), each with its record count.

  4. 04

    Narrow the list. Type in Search (press / to jump to it); every word you type must match somewhere in the code, botanical or common name, form, water need, tolerances or remarks. Click the Project status, Form, Water need and Drought tolerance chips, or tick Native only and With photo only; Clear removes the filters. Switch between Table and Cards, click a column header to sort, and use Group by to section the table by category, form, water need or status.

  5. 05

    Review a plant. Click a row to show it in the right-hand panel: the photo, the family preview sketch (with the clear zone it will plant into), botanical and common name, plant code, form, mature size, installation size, water need, native and adaptive status, pot size, drought and salinity tolerance, source and remarks. Hover any thumbnail to zoom it; right-click a row for a short action menu.

  6. 06

    Check the records you want. Tick the box, double-click a row, or Ctrl/Shift-select several rows and press Space. Shift-click a box to check a range, or tick Check all visible for everything the filters currently show. Compare lays up to eight checked plants side by side; Clear unchecks everything, including rows hidden by filters.

  7. 07

    Decide about low planting families. When shrubs, groundcovers or grasses are checked, Also create families appears in the footer. Leave it off to create Toposolid types only; tick it to generate placeable Planting families as well.

  8. 08

    Create the content. Press Add checked to project (N) to create every checked record without a placement pick. To place one plant, use Create + Place in the detail panel or the right-click menu (it reads Create type for Toposolid categories): the record is created and Revit asks you to pick the planting point. The footer shows item-by-item progress and the final report, and the matching planting tags are refreshed automatically.

  9. 09

    Update later. When the workbook changes, check the records and press Update checked (N). Only records already In Project are updated; their generated names, materials, type images and family geometry are brought in line and every placed instance keeps its location.

  10. 10

    Customise one plant (optional). Edit / Customize… opens the in-place Planting Editor for the active record so you can preview it in Revit and override its form, size or installation graphics for this project. Lawns cannot be edited here; change their thickness in the workbook.

  11. 11

    Build schedules. The schedule button opens Create a schedule: Plant schedule makes one schedule for every category, sectioned with subtotals, and the formatted schedule buttons make one schedule per category that mirrors the workbook columns (a Planting schedule for family categories, a Toposolid schedule for low planting and lawns). They appear in the Project Browser under Schedules.

What you get

Every checked plant now exists in the project: generated Planting families for trees, palms, xeriscapes, climbers and indoor plants, Toposolid types for shrubs, groundcovers, grasses and lawns, and both when Also create families was on. The library data travels with the content as planting parameters, the plant code is written to Type Mark and the botanical name to Description so stock tags and schedules read them, and the workbook photo becomes the Type Image. The row's status switches to In Project. Family creation runs as the generator's own undo steps ("LF-Planting Family Generator: Load Family" and "LF-Planting Family Generator: Place Family"); schedules are created as "LF-Planting Library: Create Plant Schedule" and "LF-Planting Library: Create Formatted Schedule".

More about Planting Library

Company workbook essentials

  • Start from Settings › Save as library…: it writes a complete workbook with every sheet the tool reads, the bundled records, their photos and an Asset ID column, then switches the tool to that file. A workbook you browse to may hold any subset of the sheets; a missing sheet is filled from the bundled catalog.
  • Sheet names decide the category (case, spaces and the numeric prefix are ignored). The guide inside the tool lists the exact names for your workbook.
  • Tree layout sheets (trees, palms, xeriscapes, climbers, lawns, indoor) need at least Plant Code and Botanical Name, and also read Common Name, Native, Adaptive, Irrigation Classification, Pot Size, Caliper, Installation Size, Mature Height, Mature Spread, Drought Tolerance, Salinity Tolerance, Form and Remarks. Sizes are text; the first number in the cell drives the geometry.
  • Low-planting sheets (shrubs, groundcovers, ornamental grasses) use the columns Asset ID, Plant Code, Botanical Name, Common Name, Category, Native, Irrigation Classification, Pot Size, Installation Height m, Installation Spread m, Mature Height m, Mature Spread m, Density, Planting Form, Default Output, Variation Seed, Library Version and Remarks. The four … m columns must be plain numbers.
  • Photos go on the plant's row in a column headed Picture, Image or Photo, as a picture anchored to the cell, an Excel in-cell picture or a file path. A record without a photo borrows the bundled one for the same code or botanical name.
  • Density sets the plant count of area planting: 4 means 4 plants per m², 0.5 m, 500 mm or 45 cm is a centre spacing on a triangular grid, and adding square switches to a square grid.
  • Plant Code is the key everywhere (type names, Type Mark, status, tags, schedules, the editor). Keep it unique per sheet and do not change it once content exists in projects.
Good to know

Tips

  • The compact toggle in the top bar docks the library as a narrow strip on the right edge of the active view, with a category dropdown, the search box and the list. Create + Place · CODE in its footer places the one checked plant (or the highlighted row when nothing is checked), and Enter does the same, so you can type, arrow to the plant and place without the mouse. Press the toggle again to fit the full window back over the view.
  • Settings ▾ holds the library actions: Browse company library…, Reload from source, Edit source in Excel, Use bundled library, Save as library…, Naming standards…, Library workbook guide…, Load matching tags, and switches to hide the category rail or the plant panel. Close the workbook in Excel before Reload from source; a locked file makes that category fall back to the bundled catalog for the session and the source badge turns amber.
  • + Add species is enabled only while an editable workbook is active. Its fields are the columns of the selected sheet; Plant Code, Botanical Name, Mature Height and Mature Spread (metres) are required. The record is appended to the workbook and the library reloads.
  • Naming standards… sets the parameter prefix (LF_ is the stock standard), the family name prefix (LF_ gives LF-PL-), the text case written to types and schedules, the shared parameter file (LF_PlantingParameters.txt), and the two-way link between Type Mark/Description and the library code/botanical name. Turn the link off if your office uses Type Mark for keynotes.
  • Load matching tags loads the planting tag and the Toposolid area and count tags with their labels bound to the parameter names this project uses; find them under Annotate › Tag by Category. The same refresh runs after every create or update.
  • Keyboard: / focuses the search, Up/Down move the highlight, Space checks the selection, Ctrl+A selects every visible row, Esc clears the search or closes a menu or dialog.
  • The window buttons at the top right Maximize the studio, move it to the next screen (needs a second monitor), fit it to the Revit view again, or close it.
Control reference · 38 controls

Every control and what it does

Plant Library26 controls
ControlTypeFunction
CollapseButton

Collapse the library to its header while editing a plant.

Compact ActionsButton

Import, edit, export, or schedule the plant library.

Import UpdateButton

Load a company library workbook, reload it after edits, or return to the bundled library.

Add PlantButton

Append a new record to the active editable library workbook.

Save as Library...Button

Export every catalog sheet into one editable workbook that any company can maintain and share.

Formatted ScheduleButton

Create or refresh a schedule mirroring the active category's Excel columns: same fields, same order, headers without the LF_ prefix. Trees, palms, and other loadable plants create a Planting schedule; shrubs, groundcovers, grasses, and lawns create a Toposolid schedule.

Category List BoxList

Chooses the plant category to browse; the number beside each category is how many records it holds.

Project Status Combo BoxSelector

Shows only records with one project status, for example those already In Project.

Form Combo BoxSelector

Filter by canopy or planting form.

Irrigation Combo BoxSelector

Shows only records with one irrigation classification (water need).

Native onlyOption

Shows only records whose native status reads NATIVE.

Select all visibleOption

Check or clear every row currently shown by the filters.

Clear checkedButton

Clear every checked batch row, including rows hidden by filters.

Plant catalogTable

The spreadsheet-style catalog: code, botanical and common name, form, mature size, water need and project status. Click a row to review it; tick Batch to include it.

Include in batchOption

Include this record. Shift-click checks a range; Ctrl/Shift-select rows and press Space to toggle them together.

Show full dataButton

Show the spreadsheet-style catalog, filters, and batch selection tools.

Compact Category Combo BoxSelector

Choose a plant category.

Search Text BoxInput

Search plant code, botanical name, common name, or traits.

Select all visibleOption

Check or clear every row currently shown by the filters.

Compact Plant List BoxList

Ctrl-click selects separate rows; Shift-click selects a range. Checking a highlighted row applies to the highlighted selection.

Include in batchOption

Include this record. Shift-click checks a range; Ctrl/Shift-select rows and press Space to toggle them together.

Also create individual Planting familiesOption

Applies to shrubs, groundcovers, and ornamental grasses. Tree and xeriscape records always generate a Planting family.

Add Checked to Project (0)Button

Create content for every checked row: Toposolid types for low planting, generated Planting families for trees and xeriscapes.

Create Active + PlaceButton

Create only the active row's content and place its Planting family at a picked point.

Update Checked (0)Button

Update checked library content that is already in the project.

Edit / Customize...Button

Open the in-place editor to preview the plant in Revit and override its 3D form, dimensions, or installation graphics for a project-specific exception. Available for tree and xeriscape records.

Plant Library Add Plant12 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Category Combo BoxSelector

Library category, and therefore the workbook sheet, the new record is appended to.

Code Text BoxInput

Plant code, required. It must be unique within the sheet and is the key used by type names, tags and schedules.

Botanical Text BoxInput

Botanical name, required.

Common Text BoxInput

Common name, optional.

Mature Height Text BoxInput

Mature height in metres, required; it drives the family geometry.

Mature Spread Text BoxInput

Mature spread in metres, required; it drives the family geometry.

Install Height Text BoxInput

Installation height in metres, optional.

Native Text BoxInput

For example NATIVE or ADAPTIVE.

Irrigation Text BoxInput

For example LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.

Remarks Text BoxInput

Free-text remarks stored with the record and shown in the detail panel.

CancelButton

Closes the dialog without adding a record.

Add PlantButton

Appends the record to the active editable workbook and reloads the library.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Planting · Section Planting

Section Planting

Stand 2D shrub, groundcover, grass, hedge and lawn elevations on the planting beds a section or elevation shows, both on the beds the section cuts and on the beds visible behind it.

Sections through a landscape usually show planting beds as bare ground lines, and dressing them by hand means placing and mirroring dozens of 2D shrubs per view, then doing it again whenever the ground changes. Section Planting reads the Toposolid and floor planting beds in the active section or elevation and places LandForm elevation symbols along them. You decide once which symbols each planting type uses by dragging them onto the type in a mapping studio; LandForm works out the spacing, sizes, mirroring and draw order, and lays the beds behind the cut super light so the drawing reads in depth.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelPlanting ▾Section Planting

Button tooltip: “Stand 2D shrub and groundcover elevations on the planting beds a section shows.”
Before you start
  • A section or elevation view is active. Plan, 3D and sheet views are refused.
  • The planting beds are Toposolids or floors with a planting type, for example types created by the Planting Library, zones made by Planting Zones, or your own types such as *LF-SS-PENNISETUM RUBRUM*. Types made outside the library are matched to the plant library by their Type Mark (plant code), Description or name. Plants placed as Planting families (3D plant families, for example from Apply Mix) are not beds: they keep their own look in the section.
  • The section's crop region and far clip cover the beds you want to dress. Beds outside the view depth are not drawn.
  • The Revit Metric Detail Item.rft family template for your Revit version; the elevation families are built from it.
Tutorial video

Watch Section Planting in action

Video coming soon

Section Planting walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 18 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Section Planting: Section Planting with three planting types mapped and a shrub bed previewed
Section Planting with three planting types mapped and a shrub bed previewed · 18 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Active view

    The section or elevation being dressed and how many plants it already holds.

  2. 2
    Search and filters

    Find a type by name, code or botanical name; In this view and Unmapped narrow the list.

  3. 3
    Auto-map

    Gives every unmapped planting type symbols that suit its category.

  4. 4
    Re-read

    Reads the Toposolid and floor types from Revit again after you change them.

  5. 5
    Category heading

    Drop a symbol here to map every type in the category at once.

  6. 6
    Mapped symbols

    The elevation symbols used for this type; several symbols are mixed along the bed.

  7. 7
    Category, size and spacing

    Shown for the selected type: category override, height and width in metres, and automatic or manual spacing.

  8. 8
    Place

    Untick to leave this type out when placing.

  9. 9
    Pop out

    Moves the type list, the symbols and the preview into a window of their own for mapping; Back to the panel or closing it brings them back.

  10. 10
    Hide

    Folds the symbol gallery away in the docked panel; the symbols already on the types stay.

  11. 11
    Symbol filters

    Show all symbols or only shrubs, hedges, groundcovers, grasses, xeriscape or lawn.

  12. 12
    Elevation symbols

    Drag a symbol onto a type or a category heading to map it.

  13. 13
    Preview

    The selected type's plants laid out along a bed, with a 1 m scale bar.

  14. 14
    Shuffle

    Another random arrangement; changes the preview only.

  15. 15
    Placement options

    Cut beds, Background beds up to a distance in metres, and how Background plants are toned down.

  16. 16
    Place in view

    Places the mapped plants in the active section or elevation.

  17. 17
    Update all views

    Lays the plants out again in every view that holds them.

  18. 18
    Remove

    Deletes the Section Planting plants in the active view; pinned plants stay.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Section Planting

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Planting ▾ → Section Planting.

  2. 02

    Open the section. Make the section or elevation you want to dress the active view, then start Section Planting from Softscape › Planting ▾.

  3. 03

    Review the planting types. The studio lists the Toposolid and floor planting types (floor types carry a *floor* tag), with each plant's category (shrub, groundcover, grass, hedge or lawn) and suggested height from the library. Change Category if LandForm guessed wrong; type names containing *hedge* are treated as hedges. Press Re-read after changing types in Revit.

  4. 04

    Map the symbols. Drag one or more elevation symbols from the symbol library onto each planting type. Several symbols on one type are mixed along the bed for a natural look. Press Auto-map to give every unmapped type a suitable symbol for its category. On one screen, press Pop out above the symbols to map in a window of its own: the type list and the symbols side by side, as large as you like, and on a second screen if you have one; Back to the panel, or closing that window, brings them back. In the docked panel the symbol strip and the preview fold away with Hide, the bar above the symbols drags the strip taller or shorter, and a type's category, size and spacing editors open when you select it.

  5. 05

    Set the spacing (optional). Leave spacing on automatic, which uses the plant's mature spread, or choose Manual (m c/c) and enter a centre-to-centre distance, prefilled from the library planting density. Hedges and lawns are laid continuously and have no spacing.

  6. 06

    Preview. Select a type to preview its plants along a bed. Press Shuffle for another random arrangement; the preview only changes the studio, not the model.

  7. 07

    Place. Choose which beds to dress at the bottom of the studio: Cut beds for the beds the section cuts, Background beds up to a distance in metres behind the section line, and how Background plants are toned down: Light (the default: halftone grey that still reads as planting), Lighter, Lightest (barely there), Halftone only or As drawn. The three grey choices get paler the farther a bed stands behind the section line. Press Place in view. LandForm builds one 2D family per symbol and size, named like *LF-ELEV-Shrub 002 950x900*, and stands the plants on the cut beds and on the beds visible behind the section line. The status line then says what was not dressed: beds of planting types that have no symbols yet, and Planting families standing in the view.

    With Earth hatch ticked, the same Place also hatches the earth under the ground the section line cuts, exactly at the line, and draws the ground line over it in Wide Lines. The earth starts at the top of Toposolids and planting floors, and under paving and other floors below the floor's type thickness. It then runs down through the layers beneath to the underside of the cut ground. A deck standing clear above the ground is skipped, and walls, planters and steps cut by the line stay clear. Pick the filled region type beside the option and how deep it reaches: Cut ground bottom, or 0.5 to 5 m below the lowest cut ground. LF Section Earth is LandForm's own type: the project's Earth pattern in grey with masking, made only when the project lacks it. With Wall hatch ticked, every wall the section line cuts gets a concrete filled region of its exact cut face, outlined in Wide Lines. LF Section Concrete is LandForm's own type, using the project's Concrete pattern in grey with masking; pick another filled region type beside the option if your office has one. The earth and wall hatches are drawn in front of the plants, so plant parts below the ground line or across a wall are covered.

  8. 08

    Update after design changes. When the ground, the beds or the mapping change, press Update all views to lay the plants out again in every view that holds them.

  9. 09

    Remove (optional). Press Remove to delete the Section Planting plants in the active view.

What you get

The view shows 2D elevation plants standing on its planting beds, sized from each plant's mature height and the symbol's proportions, spaced along each bed with slight size variation, every other plant mirrored. Their draw order follows depth: nearer plants sit over farther ones and the cut rows over all, so each plant masks only what stands behind it. Each planting type gets its own family type named like the Toposolid or floor type, with the plant code as Type Mark and the botanical name as Description, so the plants can be tagged and scheduled. The mapping is saved with each planting type, so the next section in the project starts from the same choices.

Good to know

Tips

  • A bed stays bare? Read the status line after placing. *Not dressed* names planting types that have no symbols yet: drag symbols onto them and place again. *Not beds* names Planting families standing in the view (for example a row of shrub families placed by Apply Mix): they are 3D plants, not beds, and keep their own look. Model that planting as a Toposolid or floor of the planting type to have it dressed.
  • Update all views and Remove never touch plants you drew yourself, or plants placed by Section Planting that you have pinned. Pin a plant to keep it exactly where it is.
  • Background plants show only where the whole plant is visible. 2D plants are detail items, which Revit always draws over the model, so a plant standing behind a kerb, planter wall or step would be drawn across it. Section Planting therefore leaves out every background plant that anything in front of its bed would hide, even in part: a lawn set lower than the paving edge in front stays bare, and a planter wall or building leaves out the plants behind it. A bed flush with the paving in front still shows. The row stands where the bed first shows above what is in front: along the top of a wall when a bank rises behind it, at the near edge of a flat lawn. Planting families, people, lights and railings are not counted as hiding anything.
  • A mound raised from the bed's own Toposolid behind the section line is dressed as background planting, so the mound does not appear bare.
  • Continuous symbols, such as hedges and lawns, follow rolling ground best when they are short, so keep lawn symbols low.
  • Old elevation families that are no longer used after you change a mapping can be removed with Model CleanUp.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Planting · Planting Editor

Planting Editor

Change the form, size, symbols and installation graphics of a planting family you placed from the LandForm plant library, with a live preview on the placed plant, then regenerate the family so every instance updates where it stands.

Library plants are generated from approved values, but a project often needs an exception: a taller clear trunk over a footpath, a narrower crown in a courtyard, a different plan symbol for one drawing set, or a clear zone and staking shown for the planting details. Planting Editor opens the same customise panel as the Planting Library directly on a plant you click in the model. The plant you picked is hidden while you edit and a preview takes its place, so you see each change in context. When you press Update Existing, the family is rebuilt and reloaded, and every placed instance of it keeps its own position.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelPlanting ▾Planting Editor

Button tooltip: “Edit a placed library planting in place.”
Before you start
  • A planting family that was created from the LandForm plant library placed in the project. Other planting families are refused with a message, because only library families carry the values the editor needs.
  • A view where you can see and click the plant. A plan view suits plan symbols; a 3D view or section suits form and height.
  • The Revit Metric Planting.rft or Metric Generic Model.rft family template for your Revit version; the family is rebuilt from one of them.
  • Decide whether the change is a project exception. The editor changes this project's family only; the library record keeps its approved values.
Tutorial video

Watch Planting Editor in action

Video coming soon

Planting Editor walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Planting Editor: Planting Editor on the Form tab, previewing an oval neem tree
Planting Editor on the Form tab, previewing an oval neem tree · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Plant Summary

    Botanical and common name, photo, current symbol, plant code, canopy form, mature size, project status and caliper.

  2. 2
    MORE LIBRARY DETAILS

    Expands the specification, suitability and remarks from the library.

  3. 3
    Form · Oval

    The form tab; its label shows the current form.

  4. 4
    Form gallery

    Pick another silhouette; a form that differs from the library asks you to confirm the project exception.

  5. 5
    Size · 9 × 6 m

    Height, crown, clear trunk and trunk diameter, plus the clear zone, rootball and staking graphics.

  6. 6
    Plan · Default

    Chooses the plan symbol, filtered by plant group and scaled to the crown.

  7. 7
    Elevation · 3D massing

    Chooses the outline drawn in elevations and sections.

  8. 8
    Status line

    Confirms the live preview at the placed plant and reports any automatic size adjustment.

  9. 9
    Preview & Place

    Moves the live preview to a point you pick in the view.

  10. 10
    Reset to library

    Restores the approved library values and clears your overrides.

  11. 11
    Update Existing

    Regenerates and reloads the family; every instance updates and keeps its location.

  12. 12
    Select Another Plant

    Closes the editor so you can pick the next library plant in the model.

  13. 13
    Run

    Updates the family like Update Existing and places one more instance at the preview point.

  14. 14
    Edit in Excel

    Opens the plant's row in a company library workbook to change its approved values; the bundled catalog is read-only.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Planting Editor

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Planting ▾ → Planting Editor.

  2. 02

    Choose the plant. Select a library planting instance in the view, then start Planting Editor. With nothing selected, the tool asks you to pick one.

  3. 03

    Check the summary. The Plant Summary panel shows the botanical and common name, plant code, canopy form, mature height and spread, caliper and, under More library details, the specification, suitability and remarks from the library. The editor starts from the values stored with the family.

  4. 04

    Change the form (optional). On the Form tab, pick another silhouette such as Round, Columnar, Weeping or one of the succulent and cactus forms. If it differs from the library form, LandForm asks you to confirm the project exception first.

  5. 05

    Change the size and installation graphics. On the Size tab, edit Height (m), Crown Ø (m), Clear trunk (m) and Trunk Ø (m). Tick Clear zone, Rootball and Staking to draw those graphics with the family, and choose Clear zone shape: Default (bowl) uses Clear zone Ø, Cube asks for Depth, Length and Width, and Cylinder asks for the diameter and Depth.

  6. 06

    Change the symbols (optional). On the Plan symbol tab, choose the plan symbol, filtered by All, Trees, Palms or Grasses; symbols scale to the crown diameter. On the Elevation tab, choose the outline drawn in elevations and sections.

  7. 07

    Watch the preview. Every change redraws the preview at the plant's location in the active view. Press Preview & Place to move the preview to another point if you want to judge it elsewhere. Press Reset to library to go back to the approved library values.

  8. 08

    Update. Press Update Existing. LandForm regenerates the family, reloads it into the project and reports that existing instances were updated.

  9. 09

    Edit another plant or close. Press Select Another Plant to close the editor and pick the next library plant in the model, or close the window to finish. The plant you edited reappears in the view.

What you get

The planting family is rebuilt with your values and reloaded into the project in one undo step named "LF-Planting Family Generator: Load Family". Every instance of that family, in every view, takes the new form, size and graphics, and keeps its own location. A new RFA file is saved to the planting library output folder, in a subfolder for your Revit version, and the values are stored with the family, so opening the editor on it again starts from your project exception.

More about Planting Editor

Editor window

ControlFunction
Plant SummaryLibrary name, photo, code, canopy form, mature size, project status and caliper for the plant being edited, with more library details on request.
Reset to libraryRestores the approved library values for this plant and clears your overrides.
FormSilhouettes for the 3D form. Hidden for plants whose shape comes from a fixed recipe.
SizeHeight, crown diameter, clear trunk and trunk diameter, plus the Clear zone, Rootball and Staking graphics and the clear-zone shape and size.
Plan symbolPlan symbol drawn in plan views, scaled to the crown diameter, with a filter by plant group.
ElevationOutline drawn in elevations and sections in place of the 3D massing.
Select Another PlantCloses the editor and lets you pick another placed library plant.
Update ExistingRegenerates and reloads the family; every instance updates and keeps its location.
Preview & PlaceMoves the live preview to a point you pick in the view.
RunRegenerates and reloads the family as shown, and places one more instance at the preview point.
CloseCloses the editor without applying further changes and shows the edited plant again.
Good to know

Tips

  • Update Existing changes all instances of the family, not just the one you clicked. To keep the original for some plants, create a separate family from the Planting Library instead.
  • Round, Spreading, Open and Irregular trees need a Clear trunk of at least 3.0 m and a Trunk Ø of no more than 0.25 m, unless the library itself gives other values. The clear trunk must also be at least 0.10 m below the overall height, and the trunk must be thinner than the crown.
  • For a Round crown, LandForm keeps the crown height between 0.8 and 1.2 times the crown diameter and adjusts Height (m) to fit, with a note in the status line.
  • If the rootball would not fit inside the clear zone you set, it is reduced automatically and the status line tells you the new size.
  • When the library is a company workbook, Edit in Excel opens its row so you can change the approved values for every project; reload the library after saving. The bundled catalog is read-only.
  • Run regenerates and reloads the family just like Update Existing, and also places one more instance at the preview point. Use Update Existing when you only want to change the plants already placed.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Planting · Tree Survey

Tree Survey Import

Read the arborist's tree survey spreadsheet and place every surveyed tree in the model, with its height, crown, stem, protection zone and retention verdict written to parameters.

Tree Survey Import takes the schedule an arboricultural consultant delivers, whether a BS 5837 schedule (UK), an AS 4970 tree assessment (Australia), a council-format table (New Zealand), a plain point export or a bespoke layout, and turns each row into a tree in the project. You map the columns once, choose how the trees are located (grid coordinates, latitude and longitude, or the tree tags written on a CAD survey), and press Run. The tree constraints plan, retained and removed tree schedules and tags then all follow from the data, and a revised schedule updates the same trees instead of doubling them.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelPlanting ▾Tree Survey

Button tooltip: “Import an arboricultural tree survey schedule as parametric survey trees.”
Before you start
  • The survey as an .xlsx, .xlsm or .csv file. The header row can sit below a title block; LandForm finds it.
  • A way to locate the trees: Easting / Northing (or X / Y) columns, latitude and longitude columns, or a CAD survey drawing linked or imported into the current view where each tree's ID is written as text.
  • For grid coordinates, a project whose shared coordinates are either not set yet or already on the survey's grid. For latitude and longitude, the project's Site Location (Manage › Location) set to the site.
  • At least one Level, and at least two Phases if you want existing and removed trees phased automatically.
Tutorial video

Watch Tree Survey Import in action

Video coming soon

Tree Survey Import walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Tree Survey Import: Tree Survey toolbar waiting for a survey file, AU — AS 4970 profile selected
Tree Survey toolbar waiting for a survey file, AU — AS 4970 profile selected · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Open Survey

    Choose the .xlsx, .xlsm or .csv schedule to read.

  2. 2
    Sheet

    Picks the right sheet when the workbook has several.

  3. 3
    Profile

    The built-in column layout; it switches by itself to the one whose column names match.

  4. 4
    Map

    Opens the Column Mapping panel for columns, units, zone rule and tree style.

  5. 5
    Coordinates

    How the trees are located: shared survey grid, Project Base Point, internal origin, latitude and longitude, or CAD text.

  6. 6
    Level

    The level the trees are hosted on.

  7. 7
    Run

    Places or updates every tree, then selects and zooms to them.

  8. 8
    Template

    Saves LandForm's schedule workbook with example sheets for each region.

  9. 9
    Status line

    Gives the next step, then rows read and the totals placed, updated and not located.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Tree Survey Import

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Planting ▾ → Tree Survey.

  2. 02

    Open the survey. Press Open Survey and choose the file. The status line reports how many rows were read and on which row the headers were found. If the workbook has several sheets, pick the right one in Sheet.

  3. 03

    Check the profile. Profile switches by itself to the built-in layout whose column names match: UK — BS 5837, AU — AS 4970, NZ — council schedule or Simple points (Code, Name, X, Y, Z). Anything the profile does not cover is guessed from the header text. The count beside Run shows how many trees were recognised.

  4. 04

    Review the mapping. Press Map to open the Column Mapping panel. For each LandForm field, such as Tree ID, Species, Height, Trunk diameter, Crown spread or Easting / X, choose the spreadsheet column it reads from and the unit (mm, cm, m, ft or in). For a single Crown spread column, say whether it holds a Diameter or a Radius. The line under the list previews the first tree and any warnings.

  5. 05

    Set the rules. In the same panel, choose the Zone rule used when the schedule has no RPA or TPZ column, how four Crown radii combine (Average or Maximum), and what Trees look like: Planting Library forms or Massing (fast). Leave Update existing by Tree ID and Phase existing / removed ticked unless you want otherwise.

  6. 06

    Choose how trees are located. Pick the Coordinates option that matches the schedule (see Coordinate options below). For Match CAD text, press Pick CAD and click the survey drawing; the button then shows how many text labels were read.

  7. 07

    Pick the level. Choose the Level the trees are hosted on. Trees without a ground level column sit on this level.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run. LandForm prepares the tree families, places or updates every tree, then selects and zooms to them. The status line gives the totals placed, updated, marked for removal and not located, and the first warning.

  9. 09

    Save the profile (optional). If you changed the mapping for a consultant's own layout, type a name next to Save Profile and press it, so their next schedule maps itself.

What you get

Every located tree is now a family instance on the chosen level, carrying the survey values as instance parameters. With Planting Library forms, each species and size gets its own generated planting family, and a separate LF Survey Zone instance on the Site category draws its protection zone; with Massing (fast), every tree is an instance of the single parametric LF Survey Tree family, which draws its own zone. All placements are one undo step named "LF-Tree Survey: Import Survey Trees". When phasing is on, trees are created in the project's first phase and removed trees are demolished in the active view's phase, so Existing, Demolition and Proposed views show the right trees without filters.

More about Tree Survey Import

Template

Press Template to save LandForm's schedule workbook, Tree-Survey-Template.xlsx, wherever you like; it then opens in the tool so you can see the mapping against real rows. The workbook holds a Read me sheet, complete example sheets for the UK BS5837, AU AS4970 and NZ layouts, a Simple XYZ sheet for total-station or GIS point exports (Code, Name, X, Y, Z), and a Field Map that explains every column. Hand it to the arborist, or paste an existing survey into the sheet for your region: the built-in profiles map its headers without any setup.

More about Tree Survey Import

Coordinate options

OptionWhat the X, Y and Z columns mean
Survey coordinates (shared)Grid coordinates (OS, MGA, NZTM or a site grid) matched to the project's shared coordinates. If the project has no shared coordinates yet and the trees would land far from the origin, LandForm sets the Survey Point to the schedule's grid, rounded down to 100 m, and says so in the run summary. A project already on a different grid is refused with the fix spelled out.
Project Base PointValues measured from the Project Base Point, as Revit spot coordinates report in Project mode.
Internal originRaw Revit internal coordinates. Values far from the origin are offset by their rounded centre instead, leaving shared coordinates unchanged.
Latitude / Longitude (WGS84)Degrees, placed against the project's Site Location. Map Longitude to Easting / X and Latitude to Northing / Y.
Match CAD textEach tree goes where its Tree ID is written as text in the picked CAD drawing.

A mapped Z column (ground level) is used when present and read in the same system; otherwise trees sit on the chosen level.

More about Tree Survey Import

What the trees carry

  • Instance parameters LF_Tree Height, LF_Tree Canopy Diameter, LF_Tree Trunk Diameter, LF_Tree Protection Radius and LF_Tree Structural Radius hold the sizes, and in the LF Survey Tree family they drive the geometry.
  • LF_Tree ID, LF_Tree Species, LF_Tree Common Name, LF_Tree Category, LF_Tree Retention, LF_Tree Condition, LF_Tree Structure, LF_Tree Age Class, LF_Tree Notes and LF_Tree Survey Source (the file name) carry the schedule text. They are shared parameters bound to Planting and Site instances, so they tag and schedule, and can be used on your own planting families.
  • Mark receives the Tree ID so standard planting tags read it, and Comments receives the schedule's action or retention text.
  • LF_Tree Retention reads Remove when the action column contains words such as *remove* or *fell*, or when the BS 5837 category is U; otherwise Retain.
  • The root protection area is a dashed circle on the Root Protection Area subcategory, and an AS 4970 structural root zone uses Structural Root Zone. Style or hide them per view in Visibility/Graphics; the Show Protection Zone instance parameter turns a zone off for one tree.
  • Planting Library forms names each generated family LF-SURVEY plus the species and size, with heights and spreads rounded to 0.5 m. Palms get fronds, conifers taper and broad species such as oaks spread; a re-import at the same size reuses the family.
  • Save Profile stores the mapping as a JSON file in the Tree Survey Profiles folder of LandForm's data folder in your user profile. Copy the file to a colleague and the same consultant's layout maps itself on their machine.
Good to know

Tips

  • Re-run the import with a revised schedule and Update existing by Tree ID ticked: trees with the same LF_Tree ID are moved, retyped and updated instead of duplicated.
  • Multi-stem entries such as 170 + 190 are combined into the BS 5837 equivalent single stem, the square root of the sum of the squares.
  • Rows with no Tree ID, species or measurement (sub-headings, totals, footnotes) are skipped. A tree without a height gets 6 m, and one without a crown spread gets 60 % of its height; the Map panel preview lists these as warnings, together with duplicate Tree IDs (when updating, the later row wins).
  • Warnings from a run, such as trees with no coordinates or no matching CAD text, are appended to %TEMP%\LandForm\TreeSurvey-warnings.log; the status line shows the first one.
  • Reading CAD text exports the view to DXF behind the scenes, so allow a few seconds on a large drawing. A tag such as T12 in the schedule matches T12, T 12 or 12 on the drawing.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Mixes · Mix Studio

Mix Studio

Lay out a plant mix on a planting area, shuffle and compare layouts side by side, then place the one you choose in Revit as a Plant Mix with its assembly and tag.

Mix Studio is the planting workspace for optioneering. You pick the area, and the studio draws the mix straight away as coloured canopy circles and boulder outlines on a plan. Change the spacing, pattern or randomness and the plan follows; press Shuffle layout for another arrangement and Keep this option on the ones worth comparing. You can also build or edit the mix itself in the studio, and move, rotate, group and lock boulders by hand before you place anything.

The chosen layout becomes real planting family instances dropped onto the surface below each point, carrying the same Plant Mix data the tags, schedules and Mix Inventory read.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelMixes ▾Mix Studio

Button tooltip: “Lay out a plant mix on one area and compare options before placing.”
Before you start
  • A closed planting area: a closed chain of model or detail lines, a Filled Region, a Floor, a Room, a Toposolid or a topography surface. Select it before you start, or pick it when prompted; several areas can be picked in one go.
  • At least one Planting family loaded. Site, Hardscape, Entourage and Generic Model families can join a mix as counted items such as boulders or benches. Only families placed on a point or work plane qualify, not hosted or line-based ones.
  • A plant mix is optional: if the project has none yet, you create one in the studio with New.
Tutorial video

Watch Mix Studio in action

Video coming soon

Mix Studio walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Mix Studio: Mix Studio with a triangular layout on a toposolid and the new-mix editor open
Mix Studio with a triangular layout on a toposolid and the new-mix editor open · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Toposolid 1652483 · 3928.7 m²

    The picked area's name and its size in m².

  2. 2
    Plant mix

    Chooses the mix to lay out; the plan draws every plant as a canopy circle sized from its family.

  3. 3
    Composition

    Lists each plant's share and count in the current layout.

  4. 4
    New / Edit / Delete

    New and Edit open the mix editor on the right; Delete removes the selected mix from the project after you confirm.

  5. 5
    New mix

    Name the mix, add plants and their share in % with + Add plant, and counted items with + Add item. Save mix stores it in the project, Cancel drops the edits.

  6. 6
    Spacing (m) / Grid / Triangular

    Sets the distance between plants and the planting pattern.

  7. 7
    Random positions / Position variation

    Gives a natural look and sets how far plants wander from the pattern.

  8. 8
    Minimum distance between plants (m)

    Stops two plants landing too close together.

  9. 9
    Clip inside boundary (m) / Clearance around rocks (m)

    Keeps planting back from the edge and adds a gap between boulders and the plants beside them.

  10. 10
    Shuffle layout / Keep this option

    Shuffle layout makes a new random arrangement; Keep this option adds the current layout to Options.

  11. 11
    Options

    The kept layouts: rename one, click it to show it again, or discard it with ×.

  12. 12
    Plan

    Shows the mix as canopy circles. Click, Shift+click and drag boulders to move them; scroll to zoom and drag empty space to pan.

  13. 13
    View card

    Fits the area to the plan and zooms out or in.

  14. 14
    Place in Revit

    Places the showing layout as planting family instances on the surface; the status line below reports how many elements were placed.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Mix Studio

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Mixes ▾ → Mix Studio.

  2. 02

    Select the area. Select the planting area and start Mix Studio, or start it with nothing selected and pick one or more areas, then click Finish. The studio opens with the area name and its size in m² at the top left.

    To change a mix that is already placed, select one of its plants instead; see "Updating a placed mix" below.

  3. 03

    Choose the mix. Pick it in Plant mix. The plan draws every plant as a canopy circle sized from its family, and the Composition table on the right lists each plant's share and count.

  4. 04

    Build or edit a mix (optional). Press New or Edit to open the mix editor on the right. Give it a Name, add rows with + Add plant (a family type and its share in %) and + Add item (boulder, bench…) (a family type and how many per placement). The plan follows every change. Press Save mix to store it in the project, or Cancel to drop the edits.

    Shares that do not add up to 100% are saved scaled to 100%. Delete removes the selected mix from the project after you confirm; planting already placed stays.

  5. 05

    Set the layout. Enter Spacing (m) and choose Grid or Triangular. Leave Random positions on for a natural look and set how far plants wander with Position variation; Minimum distance between plants (m) stops two plants landing too close. Clip inside boundary (m) keeps planting back from the edge, and Clearance around rocks (m) adds a gap between boulders and the plants beside them.

  6. 06

    Shuffle and keep options. Press Shuffle layout for a new random arrangement; the badge at the top of the plan shows the layout number. Press Keep this option to add the current layout to Options, where you can rename it, click it to show it again, or discard it with ×.

  7. 07

    Adjust boulders and plants by hand. Click a boulder to select it with its group, Shift+click to add more, and drag to move them; the plants re-settle around the boulders. Drag the rotate handle or use the 15° buttons to turn the selection. See "Editing boulders on the plan" below.

  8. 08

    Place. Select the option you want (or leave the current layout showing) and press Place in Revit. The status line reports how many elements were placed and confirms the mix assembly.

What you get

Every plant and item of the layout is now a family instance in the model, dropped onto the surface below its point, with items turned to the rotation you gave them. Each picked area gets its own placement with its own Plant Mix assembly and tag, and the whole placement is one undo step named "LF-Mix Studio: Place Mix Layout". The planting carries the mix data, so tags, schedules and Mix Inventory pick it up like any other Plant Mix placement, and Mix Studio can reopen it later.

More about Mix Studio

Updating a placed mix

Select any plant of a placed mix and start Mix Studio. The studio opens that placement exactly as it stands: every plant keeps its species and every boulder is locked where it is. The area line reads "updating a placed mix" and the main button becomes Update in Revit. Move or delete plants and boulders, change the layout settings, or press Shuffle layout for a fresh arrangement, then press Update in Revit. The new instances are created first and the old ones are deleted only after that, in one step named "LF-Mix Studio: Update Mix Layout".

More about Mix Studio

Editing boulders on the plan

  • Clicking a boulder selects its whole group. Shift+click adds or removes boulders and plants from the selection; click empty space or press Esc to clear it.
  • Group makes the selected boulders move and rotate together, Ungroup separates them, and Edit group lets you move or rotate single boulders inside a group without ungrouping it; press Finish or Esc when done.
  • Lock (or a double-click on a boulder) keeps it where it is through shuffles and moves; Unlock frees it again.
  • Delete (or the Delete key) removes the selected plants or boulders from this layout only.
  • A move or turn that would push a boulder outside the area is refused, and a plant whose stem would sit on a rock is always left out.
Good to know

Tips

  • Canopy sizes are measured from the actual planting families, so the circles on the plan match what lands in the model.
  • If you press Place in Revit while the mix editor is open, the mix is saved first and the layout is placed as soon as Revit confirms the save.
  • Spacing (m), the pattern, Random positions and the clip are saved with the mix when you press Save mix, and are loaded again whenever you choose that mix. Choosing another mix clears the kept options, so place or note the one you want first.
  • Scroll to zoom the plan and drag empty space to pan. The view card at the top right fits the area, zooms in and out, and the window buttons beside it maximise the studio, move it to another screen or fit it to the Revit view.
  • Apply Mix opens the same studio in a compact window for placing a mix on several areas quickly, without options or boulder editing.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Mixes · Apply Mix

Apply Mix

Place an existing plant mix on one or more planting areas in a few clicks, each area getting its own Plant Mix placement with assembly and tag.

Apply Mix is Mix Studio in a compact window, for when the mix is already decided and you just want it on the ground. You select the areas, choose the mix, glance at the plan and the plant counts, shuffle if the arrangement does not suit, and place. There are no layout fields to fill in: the spacing, pattern, randomness and boundary clip come from the mix itself.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelMixes ▾Apply Mix

Button tooltip: “Apply a plant mix to one or more areas in a few clicks.”
Before you start
  • One or more closed planting areas: closed chains of model or detail lines, Filled Regions, Floors, Rooms, Toposolids or topography surfaces.
  • At least one plant mix saved in the project. Apply Mix has no mix editor, so create or edit mixes in Mix Studio first.
  • The planting families the mix uses must still be loaded in the project.
Tutorial video

Watch Apply Mix in action

Video coming soon

Apply Mix walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 7 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Apply Mix: Apply Mix window with a toposolid area picked, waiting for a mix
Apply Mix window with a toposolid area picked, waiting for a mix · 7 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Toposolid 1663257 · 1.1 m²

    The picked area's name and its total size in m².

  2. 2
    Plant mix

    Chooses the saved mix to place; the line beneath it then lists the plant counts and total area.

  3. 3
    Plan

    Draws the area outline, with every plant as a canopy circle and every boulder or item as an outline.

  4. 4
    Shuffle layout

    Makes a new random arrangement until the planting reads well.

  5. 5
    Place in Revit

    Places the mix on each picked area, each with its own Plant Mix assembly and tag.

  6. 6
    Status line

    Reports how many elements were placed.

  7. 7
    View card

    Fits the area in the plan and zooms in and out.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Apply Mix

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Mixes ▾ → Apply Mix.

  2. 02

    Select the areas. Select the planting areas and start Apply Mix, or start it with nothing selected, pick the areas and click Finish. The window opens with the area name and its total size in m².

  3. 03

    Choose the mix. Pick it in Plant mix. The plan draws every plant as a canopy circle and every boulder or item as an outline, and the line beneath the selector lists how many of each plant will be placed, followed by the total area.

  4. 04

    Shuffle if needed. Press Shuffle layout for a new random arrangement until the planting reads well. The badge at the top of the plan shows the layout number.

  5. 05

    Place. Press Place in Revit. The status line reports how many elements were placed and, when you picked several areas, that each area got its own assembly.

  6. 06

    Refine later (optional). To change one of the placements, select any of its plants and start Mix Studio, which reopens that placement with the full set of layout, option and boulder controls.

What you get

The mix is now placed as family instances dropped onto the surface below each point. Every picked area is its own placement with its own Plant Mix assembly and tag, so tags, schedules and Mix Inventory report the areas separately. The whole placement is one undo step named "LF-Mix Studio: Place Mix Layout".

Good to know

Tips

  • Item counts in a mix are per area: a mix with three boulders puts three boulders in every area you picked.
  • The layout uses the spacing, Grid or Triangular pattern, random positions and boundary clip saved with the mix, a minimum distance between plants of half the spacing and a 0.15 m clearance around rocks. To change any of these, use Mix Studio.
  • If you select a plant of an already placed mix, Apply Mix opens that placement for updating and the button reads Update in Revit; the old instances are replaced only after the new ones exist.
  • Scroll to zoom the plan and drag empty space to pan. The view card at the top right fits the area and zooms in and out.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Mixes · Planting Zones

Planting Zones

Split planting beds into planting zones by a pattern and a planting hierarchy, then create every zone as its own floor or toposolid with its planting type.

Drawing drifts by hand means sketching dozens of split lines across a bed and then deciding, zone by zone, what goes where. Planting Zones does the linework for you. It draws the pattern over your beds (long sweeping lines with cross cuts that stop on them, the way parcel linework is drawn, or drifts, ribbons, waves, bands and grids), shares the ground between tall shrubs, shrubs and groundcover by plant count and height, and gives neighbouring zones different types. You shuffle until a layout reads well, steer it with a stroke or a split of your own, and create it in one step.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelMixes ▾Planting Zones

Button tooltip: “Split planting beds into planting zones by pattern and planting hierarchy.”
Before you start
  • One or more planting beds: Floors, Toposolids or Filled Regions. Beds that touch are laid out as one bed, so drifts run on across the joint.
  • Planting types to give the zones: toposolid types (or floor types) in the project, ideally made by the Planting Library, whose mature height lets Auto-fill types sort them into tiers.
  • A plan or 3D view (not a sheet).
Tutorial video

Watch Planting Zones in action

Video coming soon

Planting Zones walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Planting Zones: Planting Zones with two touching toposolids and a filled region, Sweeping parcels, tiers auto-filled and one zone selected
Planting Zones with two touching toposolids and a filled region, Sweeping parcels, tiers auto-filled and one zone selected · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pattern gallery

    Twelve patterns, each drawn on your own beds. Click one to lay it out.

  2. 2
    Shape

    The sliders the chosen pattern uses: zone size, size variety, stretch, organic, crossing lines, band width and so on.

  3. 3
    Legend

    The tiers with the share of the bed each one has, plus the front and guide strokes when you add them.

  4. 4
    Plan

    The zones, filled with each zone's type colour and a texture per tier (canopies, shrubs, groundcover dots).

  5. 5
    Guide stroke

    A dashed stroke you dragged; the lines near it follow its direction.

  6. 6
    Selected zone

    Size, widest point and bed of the zone you clicked; change its tier or type, or Merge several.

  7. 7
    View card

    Fits the beds and zooms in and out.

  8. 8
    Height grading / Contrast

    How the tiers are arranged over the bed.

  9. 9
    Auto-fill types

    Puts the project's planting types into the tiers by mature height.

  10. 10
    Create as

    Toposolids or floors.

  11. 11
    Tier

    Plants %, plants per m² and height range, the ground the tier needs against what was laid out, and its types.

  12. 12
    Mode bar

    Select, Draw split, Guide stroke and Front.

  13. 13
    Create

    The zone count and area, and the button that creates the zones in Revit.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Planting Zones

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Mixes ▾ → Planting Zones.

  2. 02

    Select the beds. Select the floors, toposolids or filled regions and start Planting Zones (Softscape › Mixes), or start it with nothing selected, pick the beds and click Finish. The window opens over the view with every bed drawn and a first layout.

  3. 03

    Pick a pattern. Click a card in the gallery. Shuffle (or ◀ ▶) gives another layout with the same settings; the number is the layout's seed.

  4. 04

    Shape it. Move the sliders under Shape. Zone size is the area the zones aim for (a garden drift of 5 to 20 plants is about 1 to 3 m², a park mass of 20 to 100 plants about 3 to 15 m²). Size variety mixes small and large zones, Stretch makes them long and narrow, Organic makes the lines wander and the cuts bow. Min width joins zones too narrow to plant to a neighbour; Edge band adds a band of the lowest tier along the edge.

  5. 05

    Steer it (optional). Press Guide stroke (G) and drag along the direction the lines should run. Press Draw split (C) and click points to draw your own split; double-click or Enter ends it, and an end that stops short runs on to the next line. Smooth on the draw card makes the new split a curve through its points, off makes it straight lines. Press Front (F) and click the sides people see a bed from: its tall plants move to the back and its bands run parallel to the front.

    - Reshape a split. A split stays selected after you draw it, and in Select mode a click on any split selects it again. Drag its square grips to move points, the round grip in the middle of a segment to bow it into an arc (drag it back onto the line to straighten it), or drag the line itself to move the whole split. The card above the plan sets the clicked segment to Straight, Arc or Smooth (Shift for every segment of the split); a smooth segment shows tangent grips you drag to shape it, and Alt while dragging breaks the tangent for a corner. Double-click the line to add a point, double-click a point to remove it, Delete removes the point or the split.

  6. 06

    Set the tiers. Click Auto-fill types, or add types to each tier with + Add a toposolid type…. Each tier has a share by plant count and a planting density; the bar shows the ground the tier needs against what was laid out. Choose Height grading (tall in the middle, or at the back when a front is picked) or Contrast (neighbouring zones differ, tall zones spread out).

  7. 07

    Edit zones (optional). In Select mode click a zone to see it; change its tier or type in the card. Shift-click several neighbouring zones and press Merge (M) to join them.

    - Surface zones. Set a zone's tier to Surface (not planted) for gravel, soil, mulch, lawn or hardscape, then pick any toposolid or floor type of the project in Type. Surface zones take no plants and are listed apart in the legend and the summary; the tiers share the planted ground that is left. A floor type (paving) on a toposolid bed is laid over the bed as a floor when the zones are created, and the ground under it keeps the bed's type. - Match type. Press Match… in the zone card (or Match on the mode bar, T) and click the zones that should get the same tier and type, or the same surface; with no zone selected, the first click takes the source. Esc ends it. - Undo. Every edit in the studio (pattern, sliders, shuffle, splits, guide strokes, front sides, merges, zone tiers and types, the tiers themselves) can be undone and redone with the arrows at the left of the mode bar or Ctrl+Z / Ctrl+Y; the arrow's tooltip names the edit.

  8. 08

    Compare. Press Keep this option to add the layout to Options; click an option to bring it back.

  9. 09

    Create. Press Create … in Revit. Zones of a tier without a type keep the bed's own type, and you are asked first.

What you get

Every floor or toposolid you picked is split along the zones: each zone becomes its own element with the zone's type, and the element you picked keeps one of the zones. Zone outlines run along real arcs where the lines curve, and toposolids keep their shape points along the new edges, so sloped beds stay sloped. Filled regions stay as they are, with a new toposolid (or floor) per zone at their level. The whole creation is one undo step named "LF-Planting Zones: Create Zones".

More about Planting Zones

Patterns

  • Sweeping parcels — long lines along the bed, oblique lines crossing them and cross cuts that stop on them: zones of varied size, like hand-drawn parcel linework.
  • Long drifts — narrow drifts along the bed with slanted ends that overlap (a Jekyll border).
  • Interlocking drifts — drifts whose ends hook into each other with S-shaped cuts.
  • Bold masses — a few large sweeps of one plant each.
  • Blocks in a matrix — organic blocks set in one continuous matrix zone (the matrix is groundcover; Matrix share sets its size).
  • Ribbons — parallel ribbons that follow the bed or your guide stroke.
  • Diagonal stripes — clean stripes at an angle to the bed, cut off by its edge.
  • Waves — parallel sinuous bands along the bed.
  • River — one meandering ribbon from end to end in the middle tier, drifts on both banks.
  • Swirl — lines spiralling around one or two centres.
  • Edge bands — bands stepping in from the edge (or the front), each cut into zones.
  • Parterre grid — compartments on a straight or warped grid, rows staggered if you like.
Good to know

Tips

  • Shares are plant counts, the way planting designers and the German mixed-planting trials give them (about 10% structure plants, 35% companions, 55% groundcover). Ten tall shrubs at 1.5 per m² need far more ground than ten groundcovers at 9 per m², so the tool turns the counts into ground with each tier's density. Choose Shares by: Area to give the shares as area instead.
  • Follow the bed's slopes and points (on by default) keeps the zones on the bed's surface: a split floor or toposolid keeps its shape points, and zones made from a filled region are draped onto the floor or toposolid under them with the Drape engine. Turn it off for flat zones at the bed's level offset.
  • A bed edited in Revit after the studio read it is read again before anything is created, so the zones always match the bed.
  • Once the zones are created, Pick beds… at the top left starts again on other beds without closing the window.
  • Scroll to zoom the plan, drag empty space to pan, and press Home to fit the beds.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Mixes · Surface Mix

Surface Mix

Combine several Toposolid types into one named mix and turn it into a real Toposolid type that carries the recipe as tag-ready parameters.

Surface Mix is for planting beds that are modelled as one toposolid but specified as a blend: 60 % of one groundcover, 40 % of another. You build a Type board of Toposolid types with target percentages, choose which existing type supplies the construction and graphics, and press Run. LandForm duplicates that base type under the mix name and writes the composition into three type parameters, so tags and schedules can read the mix without any manual typing. The mix definition is saved in the project, so you can reopen it, change a percentage and update the type later.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelMixes ▾Surface Mix

Button tooltip: “Create and edit Toposolid Surface Mix types with tag-ready parameter data.”
Before you start
  • Revit 2024 or later, because the tool works on Toposolid types. The project must already contain at least one Toposolid type that is not itself a Surface Mix type; otherwise the tool stops with "Create or load a Toposolid type before building a Surface Mix."
  • The component types you want to blend, for example the shrub and groundcover Toposolid types created by Planting Library.
  • The target percentages. They must add up to exactly 100 before the type can be created.
  • Optional: if your office tags read its own parameters, know which writable text type parameter on Toposolid types should receive the mix name, contents and percentages.
Tutorial video

Watch Surface Mix in action

Video coming soon

Surface Mix walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Surface Mix: Surface mix designer with a balanced mix on the Type board
Surface mix designer with a balanced mix on the Type board · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    New Mix

    Starts a fresh draft named Surface Mix 01, 02 and so on; only one unsaved draft exists at a time.

  2. 2
    Name

    Name of the mix, which becomes the name of the generated Toposolid type.

  3. 3
    Base Toposolid type

    The type whose construction and graphics the new type duplicates.

  4. 4
    Toposolid library

    Search by name (Clear empties the search), select a type and press Add selected to Type board, or double-click it.

  5. 5
    Add Type

    Adds the next type not yet on the board as a new card; the targets rebalance evenly.

  6. 6
    Toposolid type / Target / Spacing

    The card's type, its target share in per cent and a design spacing in metres. Picking a type already on the board merges the two cards.

  7. 7
    Bin button

    Removes that type's card from the mix; the targets rebalance.

  8. 8
    Target balance

    Running total of the targets, here 100% and ready; Run stays disabled until the mix is valid.

  9. 9
    Surface tag type prefix

    Find a prefix at the start of type names and Replace it in tag and schedule text; leave Replace blank to remove it. Revit type names are not changed.

  10. 10
    Parameter Linker…

    Mirrors the mix name, contents and percentages into your own text type parameters; the summary beside it reads Off or the number of linked fields.

  11. 11
    Run

    Saves the mix library and creates or updates the Toposolid type in one undo step.

  12. 12
    Status line

    Guidance and the result of the last action, such as the type just created.

  13. 13
    Saved mix

    Switches between the mixes in this project; the red button deletes the mix and its generated type after a Yes/No confirmation.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Surface Mix

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Mixes ▾ → Surface Mix.

  2. 02

    Start or pick a mix. The window opens on the first saved mix. Press New Mix in the footer for a fresh draft (named "Surface Mix 01", "Surface Mix 02" and so on) and type its Name under Mix identity. The name becomes the name of the generated Toposolid type.

    Only one unsaved draft exists at a time: if a draft is already waiting, New Mix selects it instead of making another.

  3. 03

    Choose the base type. Under Base Toposolid type, pick the type whose construction and graphics the new type should duplicate. A new draft starts with the first available type here and on the board.

  4. 04

    Fill the Type board. In Toposolid library, type part of a name to search, select a type and press Add selected to Type board (or double-click it). + Add type on the board adds the next type that is not yet used. Each type gets a card, and the targets are rebalanced evenly every time a card is added or removed.

  5. 05

    Set the targets. On each card choose the Toposolid type, enter its Target share in per cent and a design Spacing in metres for that plant type. The Target balance panel shows the running total and what is missing ("Adjust targets by 10% to reach 100%"); Run stays disabled until the mix is valid, and hovering it shows the reason.

    Picking a type that is already on the board merges the two cards into one and adds their targets together.

  6. 06

    Link your own parameters (optional). Press Parameter Linker…, tick Enable Parameter Linker, map Mix name, Contents and Percentages to text type parameters from your project, then press Save links. The summary beside the button reads "Off" or "2 fields linked". While linking is on, LandForm manages those values and restores any manual edit from the mix.

  7. 07

    Run. Press Run. The mix library is saved to the project and the Toposolid type is created, or updated if this mix already has one, in one undo step named "LF-Surface Mix: Create Mix Type". The status line confirms "Created Toposolid type 'LF Dry Garden Mix'. The editor remains open."

  8. 08

    Reopen, update or delete. Use Saved mix to switch between mixes; every generated Surface Mix type is listed there. Edit the cards and press Run again to update the type, including a rename. The red delete button next to Saved mix removes the mix and its generated type after a Yes/No confirmation; it is refused while any Toposolid still uses the type.

What you get

The project now holds a Toposolid type named after the mix, duplicated from the base type, with three type parameters filled in: LF_Surface Mix (the mix name), LF_Surface Mix Contents (one line per component, such as "60% - Groundcover A @ 0.5 m") and LF_Surface Mix Percentages ("60%; 40%"). Assign it to toposolids like any other type; the recipe stays attached to the type however many toposolids use it. The window stays open so you can build the next mix, and Mix Inventory lists the type under Surface Mixes with its composition and the toposolids that use it.

More about Surface Mix

Parameter Linker

ControlFunction
Enable Parameter LinkerSwitches the mirroring on. With it off the three LandForm parameters are still written; only your own parameters stay untouched.
Mix nameYour text type parameter that should receive the mix name.
ContentsYour text type parameter for the composition lines.
PercentagesYour text type parameter for the percentage list.
Save linksStores the mapping with the mix library. Two fields cannot share one target parameter.
Good to know

Tips

  • Each Toposolid type can appear on the board only once. If you pick a duplicate, LandForm combines the two cards and tells you so in the status line.
  • Type names in the contents text lose the "LF-OG-" prefix, so a type called LF-OG-Sesuvium reads as "Sesuvium" in tags and schedules.
  • Deleting is refused with "'Mix' is assigned to 3 Toposolids" while the type is in use; reassign those toposolids first.
  • If the status line says "Revit is busy. Try the action again.", finish the current Revit command and press Run once more.
  • A mix name that matches an unrelated Toposolid type is rejected so LandForm never overwrites a type it did not create; choose another name.
Control reference · 7 controls

Every control and what it does

Surface Mix7 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected MixSelector

The Saved mix list: switches between the mixes stored in this project, including every generated Surface Mix type.

Selected Mix.NameInput

Name of the mix. It becomes the name of the generated Toposolid type and the value of LF_Surface Mix.

Parameter Linker…Button

Opens the Parameter Linker, where the mix name, contents and percentages can be mirrored into your own text type parameters for tags and schedules.

+ Add typeButton

Adds the next Toposolid type that is not yet on the Type board as a new card and rebalances the targets evenly.

Selected TypeSelector

The Toposolid type a card contributes to the mix. Choosing a type that is already on the board merges the two cards into one.

PercentageInput

Target share of this type in per cent. All cards must total exactly 100 before Run is enabled.

CancelButton

Closes Surface Mix. Mixes saved by Run stay in the project.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Palettes · Mix Inventory

Mix Inventory

See every Plant Mix placed in the project and every Surface Mix type, with their composition, then select, reveal or delete the model elements behind them.

Mix Inventory is the audit window for planting mixes. The Plant Mixes tab lists each mix with how many plants it has placed and breaks that down by family and type; the Surface Mixes tab lists each generated Toposolid type with the toposolids that use it and the recipe stored on the type. From either tab you can select the elements in Revit, zoom to them, or (for Plant Mixes) delete a whole placement cleanly, including its tags.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelPalettes ▾Mix Inventory

Button tooltip: “Inspect Plant Mix placements and Toposolid Surface Mix types.”
Before you start
  • At least one Plant Mix placed by Mix Studio or Apply Mix, or one Surface Mix type created by Surface Mix. With neither, the tool reports "No LandForm mixes were found."
  • For Reveal, a view in which the mix elements are visible; selection works from any view.
  • The window is modal: finish with it before returning to the model.
Tutorial video

Watch Mix Inventory in action

Video coming soon

Mix Inventory walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Mix Inventory: Mix Inventory on the Surface Mixes tab, showing one mix and its composition
Mix Inventory on the Surface Mixes tab, showing one mix and its composition · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Plant Mixes / Surface Mixes

    Switches between placed Plant Mixes and generated Surface Mix Toposolid types.

  2. 2
    1 SURFACE MIX

    Counts the mixes on the open tab.

  3. 3
    Find mix

    Filters the list by mix name, and here by generated Toposolid type name too.

  4. 4
    Surface Mix

    The list of mixes with their generated Toposolid type and how many toposolids use it; click a row to load its composition.

  5. 5
    Composition

    Each Toposolid type in the selected mix with its target percentage and plan symbol diameter.

  6. 6
    Select

    Makes every element of the chosen mix the current Revit selection.

  7. 7
    Reveal

    Selects the elements and zooms the active view to them.

  8. 8
    Status line

    Tells you what to do next.

  9. 9
    Close

    Returns to the model.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Mix Inventory

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Palettes ▾ → Mix Inventory.

  2. 02

    Pick the tab. Open Plant Mixes for placed planting or Surface Mixes for Toposolid types. The badge in the header shows the count, for example "3 PLANT MIXES".

  3. 03

    Find the mix. Type in Find mix to filter the list by mix name (on the Surface Mixes tab the generated Toposolid type name is searched too). Click a row to load its Composition below: for a Plant Mix the family, type, placed count and share of each component; for a Surface Mix each Toposolid type with its target percentage and plan symbol diameter.

  4. 04

    Select the elements. Press Select. Every placed instance of the Plant Mix, or every toposolid using the Surface Mix type, becomes the current Revit selection, so you can inspect, move or filter them.

  5. 05

    Reveal them. Press Reveal to select the elements and zoom the active view to them. If the view cannot show them, the selection still applies.

  6. 06

    Delete a Plant Mix (optional). Press Delete on the Plant Mixes tab and confirm. LandForm removes the placed planting instances, deletes the Planting Palette tags that belong to the mix, resets the host overrides those tags applied, and removes the saved mix definition, in one undo step named "LF-Mix Inventory: Delete Mix". Family types stay loaded.

  7. 07

    Close. Press the X in the footer to return to the model.

What you get

Nothing changes in the model unless you delete a mix: Mix Inventory is a reading tool whose Select and Reveal only set the Revit selection and view. After a delete, the mix's planting instances and tags are gone, its hosts show their normal graphics again, and the mix disappears from the list; the families and types it used remain in the project for other mixes.

Good to know

Tips

  • The Placed column counts every planting instance that still carries the mix's placement data; instances copied by hand keep that data and are counted too.
  • The Target column on the Plant Mixes tab is each type's share of what is actually placed, rounded to whole per cent, so it is the figure to compare against the mix you specified.
  • A Surface Mix row with Used at 0 is a generated type that no toposolid has yet; Surface Mix can delete it.
  • Delete works per placement group named by the mix: if the same mix was applied to several areas, all its instances go together.
  • The search is live and case-insensitive; clear it to see every mix again.
Control reference · 14 controls

Every control and what it does

Planting Inventory14 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Plant MixesTab

Lists every Plant Mix placed in the project with its placed count and composition.

SearchInput

Filter by Plant Mix name.

Select MixButton

Select: makes every placed instance of the chosen Plant Mix the current Revit selection.

Show Mix In ViewButton

Reveal: selects the mix's instances and zooms the active view to them.

Delete MixButton

Delete all placements belonging to the selected Plant Mix, with their Planting Palette tags, host overrides and saved definition; family types stay loaded.

Selected MixTable

The list of placed Plant Mixes: mix name and how many plants are placed.

Selected Mix.ItemsTable

Composition of the selected Plant Mix: family, type, placed count and share of the placed total.

Surface MixesTab

Lists every Toposolid type generated by Surface Mix with its recipe and usage.

Surface SearchInput

Filter by Surface Mix or generated Toposolid type name.

Select Surface MixButton

Select: makes every toposolid that uses the chosen Surface Mix type the current Revit selection.

Show Surface Mix In ViewButton

Reveal: selects those toposolids and zooms the active view to them.

Selected Surface MixTable

The list of Surface Mixes: mix name, generated Toposolid type and how many toposolids use it.

Selected Surface Mix.ItemsTable

Composition stored on the selected type: each Toposolid type with its target percentage and plan symbol diameter.

CloseButton

Closes Mix Inventory.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Palettes · Annotate Planting

Annotate Planting

Tag the Plant Mix assemblies in the active view with an Assembly Tag that reads the mix name, percentages, type names and counts straight from each assembly.

Every mix placed by Mix Studio or Apply Mix is a Revit assembly carrying two parameters: LF_Planting Palette (the mix name) and LF_Planting Palette Contents (the actual percentages, planting type names and placed counts). Annotate Planting places Assembly Tags that display them, either on every assembly visible in the view at a fixed offset, or on one assembly at a point you click. Running it again moves and retypes the tags that already exist instead of adding duplicates, so the drawing stays tidy as the mixes change.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelPalettes ▾Annotate Planting

Button tooltip: “Tag Plant Mix assemblies in the active view.”
Before you start
  • At least one Plant Mix placed in the project, so an assembly exists to tag. Without one the tool reports "No Plant Mix assemblies were found."
  • A view that can hold tags: a plan, section, elevation or other graphical view. 3D views and view templates are refused.
  • An Assembly Tag type. LandForm loads its bundled tag, LF-PLNT-Mix Tag, automatically; your own Assembly Tag family works too as long as its labels read LF_Planting Palette and LF_Planting Palette Contents.
  • The distance, in metres, that automatic tags should sit above the assemblies.
Tutorial video

Watch Annotate Planting in action

Video coming soon

Annotate Planting walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Annotate Planting: Planting Assembly Tags window with the bundled mix tag, a 1.5 m offset and leaders on
Planting Assembly Tags window with the bundled mix tag, a 1.5 m offset and leaders on · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Assembly tag type

    Chooses the loaded Assembly Tag type, listed as "Family : Type"; the bundled LF-PLNT-Mix Tag is selected on first use.

  2. 2
    Automatic offset (m)

    Distance from the centre of each assembly, along the view's up direction, where automatic tags are placed.

  3. 3
    Draw a leader

    Gives every created or updated tag a leader line back to its assembly.

  4. 4
    Tag content comes from the assembly

    Reminds you that the tag text is read from LF_Planting Palette and LF_Planting Palette Contents; edit the tag family to change typography and layout.

  5. 5
    Choose a loaded Assembly Tag type…

    Status line with the next step.

  6. 6
    Tag visible assemblies

    Tags every Plant Mix assembly visible in the active view at the offset, updating existing tags and removing legacy planting notes.

  7. 7
    Tag selected assembly

    Hides the window so you can click one mix assembly and then where its tag head should go.

  8. 8
    X

    Closes the window when you have finished tagging.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Annotate Planting

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Palettes ▾ → Annotate Planting.

  2. 02

    Choose the tag type. Assembly tag type lists every loaded Assembly Tag type as "Family : Type". The bundled LF-PLNT-Mix Tag is selected on first use; afterwards the tool remembers your last choice.

  3. 03

    Set the offset and leader. Enter Automatic offset (m), the distance from the centre of each assembly, measured in the view's up direction, where automatic tags are placed (1.5 m by default). Tick Draw a leader if the tags should point back at their assemblies.

  4. 04

    Tag everything in the view. Press Tag visible assemblies. Every Plant Mix assembly visible in the active view receives a tag at the offset; assemblies that already have one keep it, moved to the new position and switched to the chosen type. Legacy planting text notes from earlier LandForm versions are removed at the same time. This is one undo step named "LF-Annotate Planting: Tag Mix Assemblies".

  5. 05

    Or place one tag by hand. Press Tag selected assembly. The window hides while you click a Plant Mix assembly in the view and then click where the tag head should go. The step is named "LF-Annotate Planting: Tag Selected Mix Assembly".

    Only LandForm mix assemblies can be picked; ordinary Revit assemblies are filtered out.

  6. 06

    Read the summary. A dialog reports how many tags were created, how many updated and how many legacy notes were removed. The window stays open for the next view; close it with the X in the footer.

What you get

Each Plant Mix assembly in the view carries an Assembly Tag whose text comes live from the assembly's LF_Planting Palette and LF_Planting Palette Contents parameters, so when a mix is updated the tag follows without any retyping. Typography and layout belong to the tag family; edit the family to change them. Your tag type, leader and offset settings are saved on this computer for the next session.

Good to know

Tips

  • If the tool stops with "No Assembly Tag type is loaded", load an Assembly Tag family whose labels read LF_Planting Palette and LF_Planting Palette Contents, then run Annotate Planting again.
  • A negative offset is refused; use 0 to place automatic tags on the assembly centre.
  • Tags are matched to assemblies, not to positions, so you can press Tag visible assemblies after moving planting and every tag re-centres on its assembly.
  • Tagging all visible assemblies works per view: open each plan that needs tags and press the button again.
  • Only assemblies created by LandForm mixes are tagged; assemblies you made yourself are ignored.
Control reference · 5 controls

Every control and what it does

Planting Palette Tagging Settings5 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected Assembly Tag TypeSelector

The loaded Assembly Tag type used for new tags and applied to existing mix tags when they are updated. The bundled LF-PLNT-Mix Tag is the default.

Automatic OffsetInput

Distance in metres from the assembly centre, along the view's up direction, where Tag visible assemblies places each tag head.

Draw a leaderOption

Gives every created or updated tag a leader line back to its assembly.

Tag selected assemblyButton

Hides the window, lets you click one Plant Mix assembly and then the tag position, and creates or updates that one tag.

Tag visible assembliesButton

Tags every Plant Mix assembly visible in the active view at the automatic offset, updating existing tags and removing legacy planting notes.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Connector

Connector

Draw a connector line through a run of the same planting and finish it with one planting tag, in a single pick sequence.

Connector is the fast way to annotate a hedge, a row of trees or a drift of shrubs: instead of tagging each plant, you click along the run, LandForm collects every planting the route crosses, draws the connector as arcs or straight segments on its own line style, and places one planting tag with a leader at the point you choose. The tag references every planting in the run, and the connector remembers its settings so it can be updated later.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelConnector

Button tooltip: “Create planting connector graphics and a tag.”
Before you start
  • A plan view. Connector only runs in floor, ceiling, area or landscape plans and refuses other views.
  • Planting family instances placed in the view. A connector joins plantings of the same family and type as the first one you click.
  • A planting tag type for the label. LandForm loads its bundled LF-PLNT-Tag automatically and lists any other Planting Tag types in the project.
  • The Gap you want between the connector arcs and the plants, in metres.
Tutorial video

Watch Connector in action

Video coming soon

Connector walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 7 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Connector: Connector toolbar ready to start a run
Connector toolbar ready to start a run · 7 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Symbol

    The planting tag type placed at the end of the connector; the bundled LF-PLNT-Tag is the default.

  2. 2
    Gear

    Opens Normal Tag Settings to choose the planting parameter that receives the plant type name.

  3. 3
    Gap

    Offset of the connector arcs from the plantings, in metres.

  4. 4
    Auto nearby

    Adds every matching planting each segment crosses; clear it to add only the planting nearest each click.

  5. 5
    Create

    Starts the pick sequence at the first planting.

  6. 6
    Status line

    Tells you the next step and confirms when the connector is created.

  7. 7
    Tab / Backspace / Esc

    While you draw: Tab changes the shape or leader, Backspace undoes a step, Esc finishes the route.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Connector

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Connector.

  2. 02

    Set the symbol and gap. Choose the tag type under Symbol, enter the Gap in metres and decide whether Auto nearby should sweep up every planting the route crosses.

  3. 03

    Choose the label parameter (optional). Press the gear button to open Normal Tag Settings, pick the planting parameter under Write plant type name to, and press Run. LandForm writes each planting's type name into that parameter so the tag label can show it.

  4. 04

    Press Create and pick the first planting. The toolbar hands over to Revit with the prompt "Pick the first planting for the LandForm connector". Click the plant where the run should start.

  5. 05

    Draw the route. Click along the run. After each click, LandForm adds the plantings of the same type that the new segment crosses and redraws the preview. Press Tab to change the shape (arcs on the left, arcs alternating sides, arcs on the right, straight lines), Backspace or a click back on the last point to undo a step, and Esc when the route is complete.

  6. 06

    Place the tag. Click the elbow of the 90° leader, then the tag location; or press Tab first to switch to a straight leader and click the tag location directly.

  7. 07

    Let LandForm finish. The connector curves and the tag are created in one step named "LF-Plant Connector: Create and Style Connector", the curves are then moved to the LF-Plant Connector line style in a short second pass, and the status line reports "Connector created successfully." The toolbar stays open for the next run.

What you get

The view contains the connector as detail lines on the dedicated LF-Plant Connector line style, following the arcs or segments you drew at the gap you set, plus one planting tag attached to every planting in the run with the leader you placed. The chosen text parameter on each planting holds its type name, which is what the tag label displays. The tag stores the connector settings, so the Plant Connector update tools can redraw or restyle it later, and the selection is cleared ready for the next run.

Good to know

Tips

  • Pressing Esc at the very first prompt cancels without changing the model; the status line reads "Connector creation cancelled."
  • With Auto nearby off, each click adds exactly one planting and the connector follows the order you clicked, which suits S-shaped or doubling-back runs.
  • The connector only picks up plantings of the same family and type as the first one, so overlapping runs of different species stay separate.
  • Gap and Auto nearby are remembered between sessions; Tab choices for the shape and leader are saved as you make them.
  • If the toolbar reports "Revit is busy", finish the Revit command that is running and press Create again.
Control reference · 15 controls

Every control and what it does

Plant Connector8 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Tag TypeSelector

The Planting Tag type (Family : Type) placed at the end of the connector; the bundled LF-PLNT-Tag is the default.

Open Normal Tag SettingsButton

Opens Normal Tag Settings to choose the planting parameter that receives the plant type name shown by the tag label.

Curve OffsetInput

The Gap: offset of the connector arcs from the plantings, in metres. Must be greater than zero.

Auto nearbyOption

Include matching plantings crossed by each segment. Clear to use only the planting closest to each click and keep the click order.

Line StyleSelector

Detail line style used by connector curves. Hidden in the current release: connectors always use the LF-Plant Connector style.

RedrawButton

Shown only when the toolbar is opened on one existing connector tag. Pick the first planting, redraw the route, then press Update to apply it.

AcceptButton

Create starts the pick sequence; it reads Update when editing an existing connector.

CancelButton

Closes the Connector toolbar.

Plant Connector Normal Settings3 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected ParameterSelector

Write plant type name to: the writable text parameter on each planting that receives its type name, so the tag label can display it.

Override ThicknessInput

Connector line thickness from 0.1 to 1.6 mm, matching Revit line weights 1 to 16. This override section is hidden in the current release.

RunButton

Saves the settings for the next connector.

Plant Connector Text Settings4 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected Text StyleSelector

Text type used for a count-text connector label. The count-text mode is switched off in the current toolbar, so this window is not reachable from it.

Landing LengthInput

Length of the text landing in metres for a count-text label.

PrefixesInput

Type-name prefixes to strip from count-text labels, one per line (commas and semicolons also work).

RunButton

Saves the count-text settings.

Back to tool index ↑

Softscape · Plant Mix Schedule

Schedule

Create or refresh the Plant Mix schedule: one row per mix with its combined composition and total plant count, built only from the mixes LandForm placed.

The ribbon button is labelled Plant Mix Schedule. It has no window: press it and LandForm gathers every Plant Mix assembly created by Mix Studio or Apply Mix, writes the mix name and composition onto the planting it contains, and creates (or rebuilds) a planting schedule called LandForm - Plant Mix Schedule. Ordinary planting families and assemblies you made yourself are left out, so the schedule reads as a clean bill of mixes. If any mix includes counted site items such as boulders or benches, a second schedule, LandForm - Plant Mix Items, lists those per mix.

Where to find it

LandForm tabSoftscape panelPlant Mix Schedule

Button tooltip: “Create or refresh the combined Plant Mix schedule.”
Before you start
  • At least one Plant Mix placed with Mix Studio or Apply Mix. Without one the tool stops with "No created Plant Mix assemblies were found. Apply a Plant Mix to an area first."
  • Any project view can be active; the schedule opens as the active view when it is done.
  • Nothing to set up beforehand: the shared parameters the schedule needs are bound automatically on each run.
Tutorial video

Watch Schedule in action

Video coming soon

Schedule walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Schedule

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Softscape panel → Plant Mix Schedule.

  2. 02

    Press Plant Mix Schedule. LandForm counts the mix assemblies in the project and binds the reporting parameters to the Planting category (and to the site-item categories) if they are not there yet.

  3. 03

    Members are synchronised. Every planting inside a mix assembly receives the mix name in LF_Planting Palette, the combined composition text, and a grouping key in LF_Planting Mix Group that the schedule filters on. Site items in the mix receive the mix name and a LF_Planting Mix Item key.

  4. 04

    The schedule is built. An existing "LandForm - Plant Mix Schedule" is reset and refilled; otherwise a new Planting schedule is created with the columns Mix, Composition and Plant Count, sorted by mix, not itemised, with a Grand Total row. The hidden group field keeps unrelated planting out. All of this is one undo step named "LF-Plant Mix Schedule: Create Schedule".

  5. 05

    Items get their own schedule. When any mix carries counted items, "LandForm - Plant Mix Items" is created or refreshed as a multi-category schedule with Mix, Item and Count columns and its own grand total.

  6. 06

    Read the confirmation. The schedule opens as the active view and a dialog reports how many LandForm mix assembly instances were scheduled and that unrelated assemblies were excluded.

  7. 07

    Run again after changes. Place, update or delete mixes as the design develops, then press the button again; the same schedules are refreshed in place, so views placed on sheets keep working.

What you get

The Project Browser holds LandForm - Plant Mix Schedule under Schedules/Quantities, listing each mix once with its combined actual composition and the total number of plants, plus a grand total, and LandForm - Plant Mix Items when boulders or other counted items are part of a mix. The planting in each mix now carries LF_Planting Palette and the composition text as instance parameters, so your own tags and schedules can read them too.

Good to know

Tips

  • The schedule is driven by assemblies: a mix placed without an assembly (for example one whose elements Revit could not assemble) does not appear. Mix Inventory shows what was placed.
  • Column headers and widths are reset on every run; add presentation changes to a duplicate schedule if you need a custom layout.
  • Type names in the composition lose the "LF-OG-" prefix by default, matching the Surface Mix and tag conventions.
  • If the run stops with "The Plant Mix assembly parameters are not schedulable", apply a Plant Mix once more and run the schedule again; the first placement creates the fields.
  • The schedule deliberately ignores ordinary planting families and non-LandForm assemblies; use a standard Planting schedule for everything else.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
07

LandForm ribbon panel

Annotation

Dimensions, coordinates, tags and location maps for site drawings.

Annotation · Dims · 3D Dimension

3D Dimension

Measure the true straight-line distance between any two points on the model and, if you want, keep the measurement as model lines.

3D Dimension is the quick check you reach for when Revit's own Measure tool is not enough: how far is it from the top of a wall to the kerb below, from a tree trunk to the edge of a toposolid, from one corner of a pergola to the opposite one? You click two points on surfaces, faces or edges, and LandForm reports the total distance together with its horizontal and vertical parts. Nothing in the model changes unless you choose to keep the guide.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnnotation panelDims ▾3D Dimension

Button tooltip: “Measure a true point-to-point distance in 3D.”
Before you start
  • A 3D view or a plan view. Sections, elevations, drafting views and sheets are refused with a reminder to open a 3D or plan view.
  • The elements you want to measure between must be visible so you can click directly on them. Elements inside loaded Revit links can be picked too.
  • A 3D view is the better choice when the two points sit at different levels, because you can see both the slope of the measurement and where the guide lands.
Tutorial video

Watch 3D Dimension in action

Video coming soon

3D Dimension walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 6 steps

How to use 3D Dimension

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Annotation panel → Dims ▾ → 3D Dimension.

  2. 02

    Pick the first point. Revit prompts you to pick the first 3D dimension point. Click a surface, face or edge. When you click close to the end of an edge, LandForm snaps to that corner so the measurement starts exactly at the vertex.

  3. 03

    Pick the second point. A guide line now follows the cursor from the first point, so you can see the measurement before you commit. Click the second point on any surface, face or edge; it snaps to edge ends in the same way.

    If the two points are almost the same place, LandForm asks you to pick two points that define a measurable distance and lets you pick again.

  4. 04

    Read the result. A dialog headed "3D dimension measured." lists Distance (the straight line between the points), Horizontal (the plan distance) and Vertical (the level difference), all in metres to three decimals. The guide stays highlighted on screen while the dialog is open.

  5. 05

    Decide what to do with the guide. Press Keep guide to write the measurement into the model as model lines, Measure another to discard it and pick a new pair of points, or Cancel to finish.

  6. 06

    Repeat or finish. After Keep guide or Measure another the tool goes straight back to step 1. Press Esc during a pick to leave the tool.

What you get

If you only read the numbers, the model is untouched. Each time you press Keep guide, LandForm adds model lines for the measured line and a short tick mark at each end, sized to the view scale, in one undo step named "LF-3D Dimension: Keep Dimension Guide". The lines are ordinary model lines on their own sketch planes, so you can select, move or delete them like any other line.

Good to know

Tips

  • The dialog always reports in metres with three decimals, whatever the project units are.
  • Picking in a plan view puts both points on the faces you click, so the Vertical value still reflects the real level difference between those faces.
  • For a pure level difference use Z Dimension instead: it locks the second point over the first so the horizontal offset cannot creep in.
  • The guide lines are plain model lines in the Lines category. Give them a dedicated line style or delete them before issuing drawings.
  • Pressing Esc while a prompt is showing ends the tool; any guides you already kept stay in the model.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Annotation · Dims · Z Dimension

Z Dimension

Measure the vertical distance between two points on the model while the second point stays locked directly above or below the first.

Z Dimension answers the question "how much higher is that than this?" without the horizontal offset getting in the way. You pick a base point, then pick any point whose level you want to compare it with; LandForm takes only the elevation of that second pick and drops it onto the vertical line through the base point. The result is the level difference plus both elevations, and you can keep the vertical guide as model lines for later reference.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnnotation panelDims ▾Z Dimension

Button tooltip: “Measure vertical elevation difference while locking X/Y.”
Before you start
  • A 3D view. Plans, sections, elevations, drafting views and sheets are refused with a reminder to open a 3D view, because only a 3D view shows the vertical line the tool draws.
  • Both points must be clickable on a surface, face or edge, including geometry inside loaded Revit links.
  • Decide which point is the base: the elevations in the result are reported relative to it, so pick the lower or the reference element first.
Tutorial video

Watch Z Dimension in action

Video coming soon

Z Dimension walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Z Dimension

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Annotation panel → Dims ▾ → Z Dimension.

  2. 02

    Pick the base point. Revit prompts you to pick the base point for the Z dimension. Click a surface, face or edge; a click near the end of an edge snaps to that corner. This point fixes the X and Y of the measurement.

  3. 03

    Pick the elevation reference. Move the cursor and a live guide appears: a vertical line rising or falling from the base point, joined by a horizontal line to wherever the cursor is, so you can see which level is being read. Click the point whose elevation you want to compare. Only its height is used; its position in plan is ignored.

    If the second point is at almost the same elevation as the base, LandForm asks you to pick two points that define a measurable distance and lets you pick again.

  4. 04

    Read the result. A dialog headed "Z dimension measured." lists Z distance, Base elevation and Reference elevation, all in metres to three decimals.

  5. 05

    Keep the guide or carry on. Press Keep guide to write the vertical line, the horizontal link to the reference point and the end ticks into the model as model lines; press Measure another to discard the guide and start a new measurement; press Cancel to finish.

  6. 06

    Repeat or finish. After either Keep guide or Measure another the tool returns to step 1. Press Esc at a prompt to leave the tool.

What you get

Reading the numbers changes nothing in the model. Each Keep guide adds model lines for the vertical measurement, the horizontal line back to the point you clicked and a short tick at each end, sized to the view scale, in one undo step named "LF-Z Dimension: Keep Dimension Guide". The lines are plain model lines and can be moved or deleted like any other.

Good to know

Tips

  • The elevations in the dialog are measured from the project's internal origin, not from the survey point, so compare them with each other rather than with shared-coordinate levels.
  • Values are always in metres with three decimals, regardless of project units.
  • Because the second pick only contributes its height, you can click a far-away element such as a kerb top or a floor edge to read how far the base point sits above or below it.
  • Use 3D Dimension when you need the true sloping distance between two points instead of the level difference alone.
  • Pressing Esc while a prompt is showing ends the tool; guides you already kept stay in the model.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Annotation · Dims · Dimension By Line

Dimension By Line

Drag one line across a drawing and get a live Revit dimension string to everything it crosses, with nothing selected first.

Dimension By Line replaces the click-click-click of the standard Aligned Dimension tool. You press Dimension, click a start point, drag across the walls, lines, grids, columns or other elements you want measured, and click an end point. Every element the line cuts becomes a witness, LandForm orders and de-duplicates the crossings, and Revit creates a real dimension attached to real references, so it keeps updating when the model moves. The toolbar stays open so you can drag string after string until you press Esc.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnnotation panelDims ▾Dimension By Line

Button tooltip: “Dimension everything a dragged line crosses.”
Before you start
  • A plan, section, elevation or drafting view, or the family editor. In views without a work plane LandForm sets one for you on the view's own plane; drafting views and legends need none.
  • Elements of the categories you want measured must be visible in the view. Model lines, detail lines, grids, walls, columns and structural columns are measured out of the box; open Setup to add more.
  • Decide whether each kind of element should be read at its Edges (the outer faces the line cuts) or its Centre (a wall centreline, a grid, a reference plane or a family's centre reference).
  • Dimensions are created with the project's default linear dimension type, so set the type you want before you start.
Tutorial video

Watch Dimension By Line in action

Video coming soon

Dimension By Line walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Dimension By Line: Dimension By Line toolbar ready to drag a dimension line
Dimension By Line toolbar ready to drag a dimension line · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Direction

    The string is squared to the first element it cuts, so rotated content dimensions cleanly.

  2. 2
    Snap

    Object snaps uses Revit's snapping while you pick; Off lands exactly where you click.

  3. 3
    Overall

    Adds an outer dimension from the first witness to the last.

  4. 4
    Pick placement

    Adds a third click to choose where the finished string sits.

  5. 5
    Links

    Also measures elements inside loaded Revit links.

  6. 6
    Setup

    Opens the What to measure panel: the categories the line picks up and whether each is read at its edges or centre.

  7. 7
    Dimension

    Starts the line: click a start point, drag across the elements and click an end point.

  8. 8
    Status line

    Guides each pick and reports how many witnesses each new dimension got.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Dimension By Line

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Annotation panel → Dims ▾ → Dimension By Line.

  2. 02

    Check the toolbar settings. Direction shows how the string is squared: the dimension line turns to sit square to the first element it cuts, so rotated content dimensions as cleanly as orthogonal content. Set Snap to Object snaps to use Revit's snapping while you pick, or Off to land exactly where you click. Leave Overall on to add an outer dimension from the first witness to the last, tick Pick placement to choose where the string sits with a third click, and tick Links to measure elements inside loaded Revit links as well.

  3. 03

    Choose what is measured (optional). Press Setup to open the What to measure panel. Tick the categories the line may pick up and, for each, choose Edges, Centre or Edges + centre; categories with only one way to be measured show a greyed-out choice. All ticks every category, None clears them and Defaults restores the shipped settings. Press Setup again to hide the panel.

    Every change is saved immediately and remembered the next time you open the tool.

  4. 04

    Start the line. Press Dimension. The status line asks you to drag a dimension line across what you want dimensioned; click the start point.

  5. 05

    Drag across the elements. As you move the cursor, the line follows it and a small cross marks every reference the line is picking up, so you can see which witnesses you will get before you commit. Click the end point.

    In a very heavy view the live crosses may pause so the pick stays smooth; the crossings are still found when you click.

  6. 06

    Place the string (optional). With Pick placement on, the finished dimension line follows the cursor while the crosses stay on the elements. Click where the string should sit, clear of the geometry.

  7. 07

    Read the status and continue. The status line reports "Created dimension 1 across N witness(es)", adding "plus an overall dimension" when Overall applied. Drag the next line straight away, or press Esc to finish; the final message counts the dimensions you created.

What you get

Each drag leaves a native Revit dimension in the active view whose witnesses are attached to the faces, centrelines, grids or lines the dragged line crossed, in one undo step named "LF-Dimension By Line: Create Dimensions". With Overall on and more than two witnesses, a second dimension spanning the first and last witness sits about 10 mm (on paper) outboard of the string, on the side away from the measured geometry. Because the references are real, the dimensions move and re-read when the model changes, exactly like dimensions you place by hand.

More about Dimension By Line

What the line can pick up

CategoriesMeasured atOn by default
Model lines, Detail lines, Room separation lines, Reference lines, Curtain grid linesCentre only (the line itself)Model lines, Detail lines
Grids, Reference planes, LevelsCentre only (the datum)Grids
TrussesCentre onlynone
Walls, Columns, Structural columns, Structural framing, Structural foundations, Floors, Roofs, Ceilings, Railings, Casework, Generic models, Mechanical equipment, Air terminals, Curtain panels, Curtain wall mullions, PartsEdges, Centre or Edges + centre (start at Edges)Walls, Columns, Structural columns
Doors, Windows, Ducts, Round ducts, Pipes, Cable trays, ConduitsEdges, Centre or Edges + centre (start at Edges + centre)none
Structural rebarEdges, Centre or Edges + centre (starts at Centre)none
Curtain walls, Foundation slabs, Ramps, Area reinforcement, Path reinforcement, Pipe insulations, Duct insulationsEdges onlynone
Good to know

Tips

  • Revit will not accept a dimension whose references are not parallel. If the status line says Revit would not accept those witnesses together, try a shorter drag or untick categories in Setup so the string only crosses parallel faces.
  • If the line finds fewer than two references, nothing is created and the status line says so. Check that the categories you crossed are ticked and that you dragged fully across the elements.
  • Centre mode on walls takes the wall centreline; on grids and reference planes the datum itself; on a family the centre reference plane. Edges takes the two outer faces the line cuts, so one element never yields more than two edge witnesses, however many parts it contains.
  • Ticking All in Setup makes a busy view slower to scan. Keep only the categories you need.
  • If a view has no work plane and will not take one, set one under Architecture > Work Plane and press Dimension again.
  • The toolbar is modeless: you can zoom, pan and change views between drags without closing it.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Annotation · Dims · Live Coordinates

Live Coordinates

Write the X, Y and Z position of every family instance in the categories you choose into parameters you can tag and schedule, and keep those values current as the instances move.

Live Coordinates is how you get setting-out data onto trees, lights, bollards, boulders and other placed families without typing a single number. Pick the model categories, decide whether the values should be shared (survey) coordinates, project coordinates or Revit's internal origin, and press Run. LandForm writes the values into instance parameters, creating and binding its own LF_X, LF_Y and LF_Z parameters if you ask it to, and registers an updater so that dragging an instance rewrites its coordinates straight away.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnnotation panelDims ▾Live Coordinates

Button tooltip: “Write and maintain live coordinates on family instances.”
Before you start
  • A project document (not a family) open in a plan or 3D view. Other view types are refused with a reminder.
  • The families you want to track must already be placed. The window lists only model family-instance categories that exist in the model and can carry instance parameters, such as Planting, Generic Models, Furniture, Site and Entourage, with the number of instances after each name.
  • Decide which coordinate system the values should report: Shared coordinates for survey Easting and Northing, Project coordinates for distances from the Project Base Point, or Internal origin.
  • If you prefer to write into parameters the families already have, they must be instance parameters of text, number or integer type.
Tutorial video

Watch Live Coordinates in action

Video coming soon

Live Coordinates walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 12 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Live Coordinates: Live Coordinates with Planting ticked and the LandForm managed parameters
Live Coordinates with Planting ticked and the LandForm managed parameters · 12 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Filter box

    Type part of a category name to shorten the list.

  2. 2
    All / None

    Tick or clear every category currently shown.

  3. 3
    Categories

    Tick each category whose instances receive coordinates; the number in brackets is how many instances the model holds.

  4. 4
    Count line

    Counts the ticked categories and their instances.

  5. 5
    Create or bind LandForm managed parameters

    Creates LandForm's shared text parameters and binds them to the ticked categories; clear it to write into existing instance parameters.

  6. 6
    X parameter / Y parameter / Z parameter

    Parameters that receive the X, Y and Z values; keep LF_X, LF_Y and LF_Z or pick or type other names.

  7. 7
    Also write one combined XYZ text parameter

    Also writes one text value with all three coordinates, handy for a one-line tag.

  8. 8
    Combined XYZ

    Parameter that receives the combined text, LF_XYZ by default.

  9. 9
    Reference

    Shared coordinates for survey Easting and Northing, Project coordinates from the Project Base Point, or Internal origin.

  10. 10
    Units

    Meters, Feet or Internal feet. Scroll down for Precision and the live updater options.

  11. 11
    Status line

    Tells you what to set next.

  12. 12
    Run

    Binds any managed parameters, writes the coordinates and reports how many elements were updated.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Live Coordinates

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Annotation panel → Dims ▾ → Live Coordinates.

  2. 02

    Tick the categories. In the Categories panel, tick each category whose instances should receive coordinates. Type in the filter box to shorten the list, and use All or None to tick or clear every row currently shown. The line beneath the list counts the categories and instances you have selected.

    On the first run Planting is ticked for you; if you had elements selected when you opened the tool, their categories are ticked instead, and on later runs your previous choice is restored.

  3. 03

    Choose the parameters. Leave Create or bind LandForm managed parameters ticked and LandForm will create its shared text parameters and bind them as instance parameters (in the Data group) to the ticked categories before writing, so nothing has to exist in the families beforehand. Keep the defaults LF_X, LF_Y and LF_Z in X parameter, Y parameter and Z parameter, or type different names.

    Clear the checkbox to write into existing instance parameters instead: pick them from the drop-down lists, which offer every parameter found on the eligible families.

  4. 04

    Add a combined value (optional). Tick Also write one combined XYZ text parameter to also write a single text such as X=512.345 m, Y=1203.210 m, Z=14.250 m into the Combined XYZ parameter (LF_XYZ by default). This is handy for a one-line tag.

  5. 05

    Set reference, units and precision. In the Coordinates panel choose the Reference system, the Units (Meters, Feet or Internal feet) and the Precision, the number of decimal places from 0 to 8 used for text values.

  6. 06

    Decide on live updating. Leave Enable live updater ticked to keep the values synchronised whenever a tracked instance moves. Clear it to write the values once and remove live-coordinate tracking from every element in the document.

    Leave Use bounding-box center when no point location exists ticked so families without an insertion point are measured at the centre of their extents instead of being skipped. Line-based families are measured at the midpoint of their line.

  7. 07

    Run. Press Run. LandForm binds any managed parameters, writes the coordinates to every instance in the ticked categories and reports how many elements were updated, how many categories are enabled, and any instances it had to skip.

What you get

Every family instance in the ticked categories now carries its coordinates in the chosen parameters, formatted to the precision you set, ready for tags and schedules. With the updater enabled, each instance is tagged as tracked and LandForm rewrites its values the moment it is moved, in an undo step named "LF-Live Coordinates: Update Coordinates". The run itself is one undo step named "LF-Live Coordinates: Apply Coordinates", and the closing dialog reads "Live coordinates enabled." or, with the updater off, "Live coordinates updated once."

Good to know

Tips

  • If the window refuses to open with "No suitable family-instance categories were found", the model has no placed families in categories that allow bound instance parameters; load and place them first.
  • A warning after Run such as "n parameter value(s) were missing or read-only" means a ticked category has no parameter of the name you chose. Tick Create or bind LandForm managed parameters or pick a parameter that exists on those families.
  • When you write into your own parameters, a length-type parameter receives the true length so Revit formats it in project units; text parameters receive the value rounded to Precision; integer parameters receive the rounded whole number.
  • Values from Internal origin are Revit's internal coordinates and ignore the Project Base Point and Survey Point. Use Shared coordinates for setting-out drawings.
  • Boundary Coordinates uses the same engine to write Easting and Northing on its markers, so a model can carry both without conflict.
Control reference · 17 controls

Every control and what it does

Live Coordinates17 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Category FilterInput

Type part of a category name to shorten the list. All and None act only on the rows that remain visible.

AllButton

Ticks every category currently shown in the list.

NoneButton

Clears every category currently shown in the list.

Is CheckedOption

The tick in front of each category row. Instances of ticked categories receive coordinates and, with the updater on, are tracked. The number in brackets is how many instances the model contains.

Create or bind LandForm managed parametersOption

Creates LandForm's shared text parameters (LF_X, LF_Y, LF_Z and, when used, LF_XYZ) and binds them as instance parameters in the Data group to the ticked categories before writing. Clear it to write into instance parameters the families already have.

XParameter NameSelector

Parameter that receives the X value (Easting in shared coordinates). Pick an existing instance parameter or type a name; LF_X is the managed default.

YParameter NameSelector

Parameter that receives the Y value (Northing in shared coordinates). Pick an existing instance parameter or type a name; LF_Y is the managed default.

ZParameter NameSelector

Parameter that receives the Z value (elevation). Pick an existing instance parameter or type a name; LF_Z is the managed default.

Also write one combined XYZ text parameterOption

Also writes a single text value such as "X=512.345 m, Y=1203.210 m, Z=14.250 m" into the Combined XYZ parameter.

Combined Parameter NameSelector

Text parameter that receives the combined value; LF_XYZ is the managed default. Enabled only while the combined option is ticked.

Coordinate ReferenceSelector

Shared coordinates reports survey Easting, Northing and elevation; Project coordinates measures from the Project Base Point; Internal origin uses Revit's internal coordinates.

UnitSelector

Meters converts the values to metres; Feet and Internal feet write the values in feet.

PrecisionInput

Number of decimal places from 0 to 8 used when the value is written as text.

Enable live updaterOption

Registers the LandForm updater so tracked instances are rewritten whenever they move. Clear it to write once and remove live-coordinate tracking from every element in the document.

Use bounding-box center when no point location existsOption

Measures families that have no insertion point and are not line-based at the centre of their bounding box instead of skipping them.

RunButton

Binds parameters if asked, writes the coordinates to every instance in the ticked categories, applies the updater setting and reports the counts.

CancelButton

Closes the window without writing anything.

Back to tool index ↑

Annotation · Dims · Boundary Coordinates

Boundary Coordinates

Place a numbered coordinate marker at every corner of a Floor or Toposolid boundary, with live Easting and Northing values you can schedule.

Use Boundary Coordinates when a setting-out plan needs a point table: paving edges, platform corners, planting bed outlines. LandForm reads the top boundary of each selected surface, including any openings, removes corners that two surfaces share, and places one annotation marker per point in the active view. Each marker carries its number and its shared-coordinate Easting and Northing in metres, and LandForm can build the note block that lists them on a sheet.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnnotation panelDims ▾Boundary Coordinates

Button tooltip: “Place schedulable coordinate markers at surface boundary vertices.”
Before you start
  • A plan view that shows the Floors or Toposolids you want to set out (Toposolid needs Revit 2024 or later). The markers are annotations, so they belong to the view you place them in.
  • Check the project's shared coordinates first: Easting and Northing are read from the shared coordinate system, not from the internal origin.
  • Decide the numbering scheme: a prefix such as P or LF_, the first number and how many digits each number should have.
Tutorial video

Watch Boundary Coordinates in action

Video coming soon

Boundary Coordinates walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Boundary Coordinates: Boundary Coordinates toolbar set to number points PT.1, PT.2… with a schedule
Boundary Coordinates toolbar set to number points PT.1, PT.2… with a schedule · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Prefix

    Text placed before each point number.

  2. 2
    Start

    The number given to the first point of the first placement.

  3. 3
    Pad

    Minimum number of digits; 3 gives 001, 002, 003.

  4. 4
    Automatic update

    Keeps Easting and Northing current when a marker moves.

  5. 5
    Number by polygon

    Sketch a path over the point preview after picking; numbers follow your path.

  6. 6
    Create schedule

    Builds a note block listing each marker's Number, Easting and Northing.

  7. 7
    Filter by view name

    The schedule mode: one note block for the active view, or Split by view for every view with markers.

  8. 8
    Place

    Uses the selected Floors and Toposolids, or asks you to pick them, then places the numbered markers.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Boundary Coordinates

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Annotation panel → Dims ▾ → Boundary Coordinates.

  2. 02

    Select the surfaces (optional). Select the Floors and Toposolids in the plan view before you press Place, or leave the selection empty and pick them when asked.

  3. 03

    Set the numbering. Enter a Prefix, the Start number and the Pad width.

  4. 04

    Choose the options. Leave Automatic update on so moved markers keep their coordinates current. Turn on Number by polygon if you want to control the numbering order, and Create schedule with the Schedule mode you need.

  5. 05

    Press Place. If nothing was selected, click each Floor or Toposolid and press Finish on the Revit options bar.

  6. 06

    Sketch the numbering path (Number by polygon only). The boundary points appear as a preview. Click the start of the path, then a second point for the direction, and keep clicking along the boundary; press Esc to finish. Every point is numbered in the order of its nearest position along your path.

    Without Number by polygon, the points are numbered surface by surface, in order along the model's X axis.

  7. 07

    Check the summary. A message reports how many surfaces were read, how many unique boundary points were found, how many markers were placed and how many note blocks were created.

  8. 08

    Place more points. Select the next surfaces and press Place again. LandForm asks whether to Continue from the next number in the sequence or Start again from 1.

What you get

The active view holds one LF_Coordinates_Point marker at each unique corner of the outer boundaries and openings of the selected surfaces. Each marker's Number, Easting and Northing parameters are filled in (shared coordinates, metres, three decimals) and its Owner View records the view name. With Create schedule on, a note block named "LF Coordinates - " followed by the view name lists the markers of that view. Placement runs as several steps in Revit's Undo list, starting with "LF-Boundary Coordinates: Prepare Coordinate Point Family" and "LF-Boundary Coordinates: Place Boundary Points".

Good to know

Tips

  • Only the top face of each surface is read, so a shape-edited Toposolid gives you its outer corners and openings, not the interior triangulation points.
  • Corners that two adjoining surfaces share get a single marker, so you can select a whole run of paving bays at once.
  • The Start box is used for the first placement only. Later placements in the same session offer to continue the sequence or restart from 1.
  • An existing note block with the same name is left as it is, so placing more markers in the same view simply adds rows to that note block.
  • No elevation is written. Add spot elevations if the setting-out table needs levels as well.
Control reference · 8 controls

Every control and what it does

Boundary Coordinate Options8 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Number PrefixInput

Text placed before each point number, for example P1, P2, P3.

Start NumberInput

Number given to the first point of the first placement. Later placements ask whether to continue the sequence or start again from 1.

Number PaddingInput

Minimum number of digits, from 0 to 8. Use 3 for 001, 002, 003.

Automatic updateOption

Keep Easting and Northing synchronized when a coordinate marker moves.

Number by polygonOption

After the surfaces are picked, sketch a path over the point preview; numbers follow the points' order along that path. Esc finishes the path.

Create scheduleOption

Create a note block named "LF Coordinates - " plus the view name, listing Number, Easting and Northing.

Schedule ModeSelector

Filter by view name creates one note block for the active view; Split by view creates one for every view containing coordinate markers.

PlaceButton

Pick the Floors and Toposolids (or use the current selection), then place the numbered markers and write their coordinates.

Back to tool index ↑

Annotation · Tag Studio

Tag Studio

Line up tags and text notes along a landing line you pick, with parallel leaders at one angle, and keep every new tag in the same leader style while the toolbar is open.

Planting plans and site plans quickly fill up with leaders that cross and labels that wander. Tag Studio tidies them in one move: you select the annotations, set the leader angle and lengths, click where the labels should line up, and LandForm stacks them in a neat column with parallel leaders, ordered so the leaders do not cross. It works on element tags, room, space and area tags, and text notes that have a leader.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnnotation panelTag Studio

Button tooltip: “Arrange tags onto straight landing lines with parallel leaders.”
Before you start
  • A plan, section or other annotatable view with the tags or text notes already placed. Text notes need exactly one leader; tags need their leader turned on.
  • Decide the look you want: a leader angle (45° is the default), whether every label should have the same landing and leader length, and the gap between stacked labels.
  • Lengths on the toolbar are in millimetres, measured in the model.
Tutorial video

Watch Tag Studio in action

Video coming soon

Tag Studio walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 10 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Tag Studio: Tag Studio toolbar with a 75° leader angle and free ends
Tag Studio toolbar with a 75° leader angle and free ends · 10 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Angle

    Leader angle from horizontal, 0 to 90°.

  2. 2
    Straight

    Draws each leader as a single segment with no elbow.

  3. 3
    Free ends

    Detaches tag leaders from their elements.

  4. 4
    Landing

    Gives every label the same landing length, in millimetres.

  5. 5
    Leader

    Fixes the length of the angled segment; available only while Landing is on.

  6. 6
    Gap

    Space between stacked labels, in millimetres.

  7. 7
    Alternate

    Shifts every other row sideways by the offset, so long labels interleave.

  8. 8
    No snapping

    Turns off Revit's snaps for the landing pick.

  9. 9
    Arrange

    Stacks the selected annotations along the landing point you click next.

  10. 10
    Status line

    Tells you what to do next and reports how many annotations were arranged.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Tag Studio

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Annotation panel → Tag Studio.

  2. 02

    Select the annotations. Select the tags and text notes you want to line up. You can also skip this and pick them after pressing Arrange.

  3. 03

    Set the leader style. Enter the leader Angle from horizontal, 0 to 90°. Turn on Straight for a single leader segment with no elbow, and Free ends to detach tag leaders from their elements.

    Turn on Landing and enter a length to give every label the same landing; with Landing on, Leader fixes the length of the angled segment too. With annotations selected, each change restyles them at once.

  4. 04

    Set the stacking. Enter the Gap between stacked labels. Turn on Alternate and enter an offset to shift every other row sideways, so long labels interleave instead of colliding. Tick No snapping if Revit's snaps get in the way of the pick.

  5. 05

    Press Arrange. If nothing was selected, click the annotations in the view and press Finish on the options bar.

  6. 06

    Pick the landing point. Click on the side the leaders should point toward: above and to the right of the labels points the leaders up and right, below and to the left points them down and left. The annotations stack along the vertical line through your click, with parallel leaders at the chosen angle.

    LandForm orders the rows so leaders do not cross and swaps neighbouring rows where that clears a leader running through another label.

  7. 07

    Try another position (optional). Click a different landing point to rearrange the same annotations there. The status line reports how many were arranged each time.

  8. 08

    Finish. Press Esc. The status line summarises the placements, and the whole run becomes one step in Revit's Undo list, "LF-Tag Studio: Place Tags".

  9. 09

    Keep tagging. Leave the toolbar open while you place more tags or text notes: each new one is styled automatically with the current leader settings.

What you get

The selected annotations sit in a tidy column at the landing point you chose, each with a leader at the same angle and, if you fixed them, the same landing and leader lengths. Tags keep pointing at their elements unless you chose Free ends. Leader-style changes made with annotations selected are separate Undo steps named "LF-Tag Studio: Style Selected Tags", and automatic styling of new annotations appears as "LF-Tag Studio: Style New Tags".

Good to know

Tips

  • An Angle of 0 gives horizontal leaders: each label keeps its own row and lines up on the landing point instead of stacking.
  • The Leader box is available only while Landing is on. Without a fixed leader length, each leader is fitted to its label.
  • Pinned annotations, tags that point at several elements and text notes with more than one leader are skipped. If fewer labels move than you selected, check those first.
  • Close the toolbar when you want to place tags without Tag Studio restyling them. Your settings are saved for next time.
  • If the view has no work plane for picking, LandForm sets one on the view for you before the pick.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Annotation · Location Map

Location Map

Download an Esri satellite or topographic map of the site and place it behind the active plan at real-world size, aligned to True North.

Location Map gives you instant site context without hunting for an aerial photo, scaling it and rotating it by hand. LandForm works out where the plan sits on the globe from the Revit project location and shared coordinates, asks Esri for a map of exactly that area, fades it to the opacity you choose and drops it into the view as a background image. The image is embedded in the project and belongs to that one plan, so each view can carry its own map.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnnotation panelLocation Map

Button tooltip: “Place an Esri map background at the project location.”
Before you start
  • Open a floor, site, engineering or area plan. The tool does not run in 3D views, sections or sheets.
  • Set the project's place under Manage > Location and check the shared coordinates; both are used to find the latitude, longitude and rotation of the map.
  • Zoom and pan the plan so that the area you want covered fills the screen. LandForm centres the map on what you can see and sizes it to match.
  • You need an internet connection: the map is requested live from Esri's public map services every time you run the tool.
Tutorial video

Watch Location Map in action

Video coming soon

Location Map walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Location Map: Location Map set to satellite imagery at 65% opacity
Location Map set to satellite imagery at 65% opacity · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Project location

    Place name and where the map is centred, normally the Visible screen center.

  2. 2
    Latitude / Longitude

    Coordinates of the map centre; type other values to map a different spot.

  3. 3
    Use project location

    Restores the latitude and longitude worked out for the view.

  4. 4
    Map style

    Esri World Imagery (satellite) or Esri World Topographic.

  5. 5
    Ground width (m)

    Real-world width of the image, 25 m to 20,000 m; the height follows the image proportions.

  6. 6
    Fit active view

    Returns to the width that covers the visible area.

  7. 7
    Image quality

    Standard, High or Very high.

  8. 8
    Image opacity

    Fades the image against white so linework stays readable on top.

  9. 9
    Replace existing Location Map in this view / Pin image

    Swap out a map placed earlier, and pin the new image so it cannot be moved by accident.

  10. 10
    Information panel

    Explains where the centre is applied and how the image is positioned, faded and credited.

  11. 11
    Run

    Downloads the map, places it behind the plan and selects the new image.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Location Map

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Annotation panel → Location Map.

  2. 02

    Frame the view. Zoom the active plan to the area the map should cover, then start Location Map.

  3. 03

    Check the centre. Under Geographic center, Project location shows the place name and where the map will be centred, normally the Visible screen center. Latitude and Longitude are filled in for that point; type other values to map a different spot, or press Use project location to restore them.

  4. 04

    Choose the map. Pick a Map style: Esri World Imagery (satellite) or Esri World Topographic.

  5. 05

    Set the coverage. Ground width (m) is the real-world width of the image, between 25 m and 20,000 m; its height follows the image proportions. Press Fit active view to go back to the width that covers the visible area.

  6. 06

    Set quality and opacity. Choose an Image quality (Standard, High or Very high) and drag Image opacity to fade the image against white, so linework stays readable on top.

  7. 07

    Choose the options. Leave Replace existing Location Map in this view on to swap out a map placed earlier, and Pin image on so it cannot be moved by accident.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run. LandForm downloads the map, places it and selects the new image. A summary reports the centre, the coverage in metres, the opacity and any map it replaced.

What you get

The plan now has one raster image on the background layer, behind all model graphics, scaled to the ground width you set and rotated so that it matches True North in this view, rotated views included. The pixels are embedded in the project as an image type named "LandForm Location Map - Satellite" or "- Topographic" followed by the date, so there is no external file to keep track of. The placement is one step in Revit's Undo list, "LF-Location Map: Place Background".

Good to know

Tips

  • The map is view-specific. To show it in another plan, open that plan and run the tool again there.
  • Revit has no opacity setting for images, so the fade is baked into the picture. To change it, run the tool again with Replace existing on.
  • Esri's attribution is stamped into the image. Keep it visible on any sheet you issue.
  • If Esri cannot produce the requested size, LandForm retries at a smaller compatible size and the summary lists the pixel size it used.
  • Snapping to the image is switched off, so it never catches your clicks while you draw over it. Your style, quality, opacity and checkbox choices are remembered until you close Revit.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
08

LandForm ribbon panel

Analysis

Quality checks and studios for sun, sight lines, slopes, bubble diagrams and play areas.

Analysis · QA/QC · Plant Distance

Plant Distance

Check that every visible tree and plant keeps a minimum clearance from your paths, see the ones that are too close in red, and move them clear in one click.

Plant Distance is the QA/QC pass to run before a planting plan goes out: a tree set too close to a footpath means lifted paving later, and a shrub placed on the path blocks it. You pick the Floors that represent the paths and type the clearance; the view turns into a review, with the paths outlined in blue, every failing plant filled red with a witness line to the nearest path edge, and the rest of the model greyed out. A report lists each failing plant with its actual distance. Resolve previews a fix in green and Apply moves the planting so it sits exactly at the minimum clearance.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelQA/QC ▾Plant Distance

Button tooltip: “Check tree and plant clearance from a path.”
Before you start
  • The paths must be Floors. Toposolids, filled regions and model lines cannot be picked as paths.
  • A plan or 3D view that shows the planting you want to check. Only planting visible in the active view is tested, and the tool does not run on a sheet or a view template.
  • The minimum clearance in metres. The last value you used is remembered; the first time it is 1.0 m.
  • In a workshared model, the planting must be editable by you if you intend to Apply the proposed moves.
Tutorial video

Watch Plant Distance in action

Video coming soon

Plant Distance walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 6 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Plant Distance: Plant Distance report bar before any paths are picked
Plant Distance report bar before any paths are picked · 6 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Min.

    Minimum clearance between planting and the path edge, in metres; it must be greater than zero.

  2. 2
    Select Path

    Click one or more path Floors in Revit and press Finish; the review runs as soon as the pick ends.

  3. 3
    Status line

    Names the selected paths and the minimum distance.

  4. 4
    Refresh

    Runs the check again with the current paths and minimum, and clears any preview.

  5. 5
    Resolve

    Previews the proposed moves in green without changing the model; enabled only when plants fail.

  6. 6
    Apply

    Moves the planting as previewed in one undoable step; enabled only while a preview is showing.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Plant Distance

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → QA/QC ▾ → Plant Distance.

  2. 02

    Open the report bar. The compact Plant Distance Report window appears at the top of the drawing area with Select Path, the Min. box, Refresh, Resolve, Apply and a close button. Nothing in the view changes yet.

  3. 03

    Set the clearance. Type the minimum distance in metres into Min.. It must be a number greater than zero; anything else is refused with a warning.

  4. 04

    Pick the paths. Press Select Path, click one or more path Floors in Revit and press Finish. The review runs at once: the paths turn blue, everything else goes halftone grey, and every plant closer than the minimum is filled solid red with a red line to the nearest path edge.

    The distance is measured in plan, from the plant's placement point to the nearest edge of the floor's top face. A plant standing on a path is measured to the edge of that path.

  5. 05

    Read the report. The window grows to show CHECKED, COMPLIANT and FAILED counts and the Non-compliant planting list, closest first, with each plant's type name, element ID and actual distance in metres. The status line names the selected paths and the minimum.

  6. 06

    Refresh after changes. Change Min. or move planting in Revit, then press Refresh to run the same paths again. Press Select Path to pick a different set of paths.

  7. 07

    Preview the fix (optional). Press Resolve. Each failing plant is drawn in green at its proposed position with a green line from where it stands now. The move is perpendicular to the nearest path edge and just long enough to reach the minimum clearance; a plant standing on the path is moved off it.

  8. 08

    Apply. Press Apply to move the planting in one undoable step named "LF-Plant Distance: Resolve Non-Compliance". The check runs again and the moved plants stay highlighted green so you can see what changed. Plants that are pinned, grouped or owned by another user stay where they are, and a warning says so if none could be moved.

  9. 09

    Close. Press the close button or Close & Clear. The red, blue and grey overrides are removed and the view looks as it did before.

What you get

While the window is open, the active view carries temporary graphic overrides: blue path outlines, red failing planting, grey context and the red or green witness lines. Closing the window restores every override, so nothing about the view is left behind. The model itself changes only when you press Apply: each moved plant is shifted in plan to exactly the minimum clearance from the path edge, keeping its type, level and host; the move is one entry in Revit's undo list, and the green highlight marks the moved plants until you close or refresh.

Good to know

Tips

  • Only planting that is visible in the active view is checked. Hide a design option or planting layer you do not want tested, or open a view that shows the whole site.
  • Resolve moves each plant straight away from its nearest path edge; it does not check whether the new spot lands in another path, a building or another plant. Look at the green preview before you press Apply.
  • Apply is disabled again whenever you change Min., press Refresh or pick new paths. Press Resolve again to get a fresh preview.
  • If the status line says Revit is busy, finish the Revit command you are in and press the button again.
  • The window opens at the top-left of the drawing area; drag it by the handle on the left if it covers the planting you are reviewing.
Control reference · 7 controls

Every control and what it does

Plant Distance Report7 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Select PathButton

Returns to Revit so you can pick one or more path Floors and press Finish; the review runs as soon as the pick ends.

Min.Input

Minimum permitted clearance between planting and the path edge, in metres. Must be greater than zero.

RefreshButton

Runs the check again with the current paths and minimum distance, and clears any resolution preview.

ResolveButton

Previews the proposed perpendicular moves in green without changing the model. Enabled only when there are failures.

ApplyButton

Moves the planting as previewed in one undoable step and highlights the moved plants green. Enabled only while a preview is showing.

CloseButton

Closes the window, clears the preview and restores the view's graphics.

Close & ClearButton

The same as Close, from the report footer.

Back to tool index ↑

Analysis · QA/QC · Untagged Elements

Untagged Elements

Find every model element in the active view that no tag points at, paint it red and leave it selected so you can tag it straight away.

Untagged Elements is the check to run on a planting plan, a site plan or a detail before it goes on a sheet. It collects the taggable model elements the view shows (planting, site furniture, walls, floors, families of any model category), reads every tag placed in the same view and compares the two. A short report tells you how many elements are untagged out of how many were checked, and the untagged ones are highlighted and selected in the view.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelQA/QC ▾Untagged Elements

Button tooltip: “Highlight visible model elements without a tag.”
Before you start
  • The view to check, with its visibility set so that everything that should be tagged is showing. Hidden elements are not checked, and the tool does not run on a sheet or on a view template.
  • The tags must be in this view. A tag in another view does not count, so check each annotated view on its own.
Tutorial video

Watch Untagged Elements in action

Video coming soon

Untagged Elements walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 5 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Untagged Elements: Untagged Elements report after 369 elements were highlighted
Untagged Elements report after 369 elements were highlighted · 5 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    UNTAGGED ELEMENTS

    Names the check that wrote the report.

  2. 2
    Highlighted 369 untagged element(s) in red.

    How many elements no tag in this view points at; it reads "No untagged model elements found" when every candidate has a tag.

  3. 3
    Checked 369 visible candidates.

    How many taggable model elements the view shows.

  4. 4
    Run the tool again to refresh the review after adding tags.

    Each run clears the previous red before it highlights again.

  5. 5
    OK

    Closes the report; the untagged elements stay selected and red in the view, ready for tagging.

Step by step · 5 steps

How to use Untagged Elements

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → QA/QC ▾ → Untagged Elements.

  2. 02

    Run the check. There is nothing to set: the tool reads the active view as soon as you start it.

  3. 03

    Read the report. A dialog reports either "Highlighted N untagged element(s) in red" with how many visible candidates were checked, or "No untagged model elements found" when every candidate has a tag.

  4. 04

    Review the view. Each untagged element is drawn with heavy red lines and a solid red fill, and all of them are left selected. Tag them with Revit's tag tools, or zoom to the selection to find the stragglers.

  5. 05

    Tag and run again. Every run first restores the graphics it changed on the previous run, then applies the new highlight, so the red never accumulates. Run the tool once more when everything is tagged and the view returns to normal.

What you get

No model element is changed. The red is a per-element graphic override in the active view, applied in one step named "LF-Untagged Elements: Highlight Untagged Elements" and removed by the next run ("LF-Untagged Elements: Clear Highlight") or by Undo. The untagged elements remain selected after the dialog closes, ready for tagging.

Good to know

Tips

  • What counts as a candidate: a model-category element placed in the model (not view-specific) that has a location. Revit links, CAD imports, groups, assemblies and rooms, areas and spaces are skipped; the members of a group are checked individually.
  • Only tags in the active view that point at an element of this model count. Tags of linked elements are ignored, as are the linked elements themselves.
  • The record of the previous highlight lives for the current Revit session. If a view still shows red elements after Revit was restarted, select them and reset their graphic overrides in Revit, or Undo if the run is still in the undo list.
  • Big views with many candidates take a moment; the dialog appears when the comparison is done.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Analysis · Studios · Sun Analysis

Sun Analysis

Render the active view with real-time shadows, measure how much of each terrace, lawn or play area is in shade, and accumulate a sun-hours heatmap for any date or period.

Sun Analysis (the Sun Studio workspace, under Analysis > Studios) opens the visible model, links included, in a 3D viewer that places the sun from the project's site location, true north and time zone. Scrub the day and the shadows follow; pick the surfaces that matter and read their shaded share at any time of day; run a period and a heatmap builds over every surface in view. You can also sketch paths, areas and planting that exist only in the studio, to test a design idea before it is modelled. The model is only changed when you Bake to Revit or Commit to Revit.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelStudios ▾Sun Analysis

Button tooltip: “Render the active view with real-time shadows and a sun-hours heatmap.”
Before you start
  • A project view (plan, section or 3D) that shows the area to study. The studio reads what the view shows, respecting design options, phases and hidden categories, and includes the visible linked models. It does not run on a sheet.
  • The project location, time zone and true north set in Revit. The sun is placed from them, and the studio checks its own sun against Revit's for the view's sun settings and reports "Matches Revit's sun".
  • For the Incident radiation metric, an EPW weather file for the site.
  • The surfaces you want figures for: the terraces, lawns, play areas or paths whose shade matters.
Tutorial video

Watch Sun Analysis in action

Video coming soon

Sun Analysis walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Sun Analysis: Sun Analysis measuring shade coverage on three picked surfaces at 16:35
Sun Analysis measuring shade coverage on three picked surfaces at 16:35 · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Refresh / PNG / Hi-res PNG

    Refresh re-reads the model after edits; PNG and Hi-res PNG save a picture of the preview.

  2. 2
    Zoom extents / Top / 3D

    Fit the model in the preview, or switch to a top or 3D view.

  3. 3
    Tabs

    Display, Draw, Shade coverage, Sun hours, Heatmap and Views & export switch the panel; here Shade coverage is open.

  4. 4
    Preview

    The visible model with real-time shadows, the picked surfaces painted blue where shaded and yellow where sunlit. Middle-drag orbits, Shift + middle-drag pans, the wheel zooms.

  5. 5
    Sun & time

    Pick the Date (Today is one click) and drag the Time slider; the shadows follow.

  6. 6
    Play day / Solar noon

    Sweeps through the day, or jumps to solar noon.

  7. 7
    Altitude / Azimuth

    The sun's position, with the site's location and true north below.

  8. 8
    Picking… (click surfaces, Esc to finish)

    The Pick surfaces button while a pick runs: click the terraces, lawns and play areas in the preview.

  9. 9
    Hint

    Click a surface to add it to the shade set, click again to remove it; Esc finishes.

  10. 10
    Surfaces to measure

    The picked surfaces and their total area.

  11. 11
    Result

    Shaded share at the slider time, followed by the whole-day average.

  12. 12
    Shade table

    The table from Show the table: area, shaded share and sun hours per surface and for all analysed.

  13. 13
    Legend

    The Shaded and Sunlit colours painted on the counted surfaces.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Sun Analysis

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → Studios ▾ → Sun Analysis.

  2. 02

    Open the viewer. The studio reads the active view, shows its progress and fits itself over the Revit window. The toolbar gives Zoom extents, Top, 3D, Refresh, PNG and Hi-res PNG; middle-drag orbits, Shift + middle-drag pans, the wheel zooms at the cursor and right-click opens the view menu. The tabs Display, Draw, Shade coverage, Sun hours, Heatmap and Views & export switch the panel; Sun & time stays above them.

  3. 03

    Set the sun. Under Sun & time, pick the Date (Today is one click) and drag the Time slider; the shadows follow. Press Play day to sweep the day, Solar noon to jump to it. The readout gives the sun's altitude and azimuth and the site line shows the location and true north.

    The studio starts at the date and time of the view's own sun settings.

  4. 04

    Choose how the model looks (Display). Pick a View style: Category colours, Revit material colours, Realistic (materials, glass, sky), Black & white, Black & white, planting green, White with edges or White with edges, planting green. Planting renders as modelled or as lollipop trees for flat (RPC) plants or for all planting. Switch on Edges, Sun path diagram, Orthographic view, Ground plane and Soft shadows as you need.

    Under Categories, untick a category to leave it out entirely (not drawn, no shadow, not analysed), give it a colour with its swatch, or slide it see-through: a transparent category still casts its shadow and is still analysed, which Revit's own transparency does not do.

  5. 05

    Measure shade coverage. On the Shade coverage tab press Pick surfaces and click the terraces, lawns and play areas in the preview; they are listed under Surfaces to measure with their area. The Result block gives the shaded share at the time on the slider, follows the slider as you move it, and adds a whole-period average for the Period for the average you choose. Show the table floats a per-surface table (surface, area, shaded, sun hours) over the preview.

    Under Options, set the Sample grid (m), tick Include vertical faces to count walls (top faces only by default; undersides never), and choose whether the counted surfaces are painted in the Shaded and Sunlit colours.

  6. 06

    Run sun hours, radiation or sky view. On the Sun hours tab pick the Metric: Direct sun hours, Incident radiation (kWh/m², needs EPW) or Sky view factor. Choose the Surfaces (Picked surfaces (shade set), Terrain & paving, Clicked element or All surfaces), the Grid (m) and press Run. The result colours the surfaces with a legend and fills the per-surface table.

    The period, daily window and sample interval for this run are the ones set on the Heatmap tab.

  7. 07

    Build a heatmap of the view (Heatmap). Set Analysis to Sun-hours heatmap or Shade-hours heatmap, choose the Period (This date, 21 June, 21 December, 21 March (equinox), Solstices + equinox, This month, Three months from this date or Whole year), the From and To hours and Sample every 60, 30, 20 or 10 minutes. The heatmap builds progressively over everything in view, pauses while you navigate and restarts when the camera moves. Tick Highlight ≥ to mark the places that reach a number of hours, and set its opacity.

  8. 08

    Sketch design ideas (Draw, optional). Choose Path, Area or Plant and click in the preview; Enter, a double-click or clicking the first corner finishes, Backspace takes a point back and Esc cancels. A path has a Width (m), a Style (Straight or Curved), a Surface (Paving, Lawn, Planting bed or Water) and a Colour; a plant takes a Plant family type from the model's planting families (searchable), a Shape in the studio, a Mature size and an Installation size. Sketched items cast and receive shadows and are counted in Shade coverage when ticked in the Sketched items list; click an item's name for grips to reshape it, ✎ to rename it.

    Convert model trees… turns the model's planting into studio trees with a mature size and an installation size per type, and Show and analyse studio trees at switches between the two. Commit to Revit… creates the sketched paths, areas and plants as Revit elements of the types you choose, on a Level, draped with shape points when Follow the surface below is ticked.

  9. 09

    Save, report and bake (Views & export). Save view keeps a snapshot of everything (date and time, display, analysis settings, picked surfaces, camera), named by date and time and renamed with ✎. Save study… writes the whole setup to a .lfsun file and Load study… brings it back. Report PDF and CSV export the current analysis; Batch export… renders a matrix of dates and times (this date, 21 March, June, September and December, the 21st of every month, or a custom list; times as a range or a list) as one PDF page per frame with the shade table, optionally with a PNG per frame. Bake to Revit writes the analysis into the active Revit view as an Analysis Visualization with a legend.

What you get

Nothing in the model changes until you ask for it. Bake to Revit writes the shaded/sunlit, sun-hours, radiation or sky-view values onto the faces of the analysed elements in the active 3D, plan or section view as an Analysis Visualization, with a blue-to-red legend in a display style named "LandForm Sun Studio"; one bake per view, so a new bake replaces the earlier one, and points on linked elements are reported and skipped. The undo entry is named "LF-Sun Studio: Bake …" after the metric. Commit to Revit… creates the sketched paths and areas as floors or toposolids and the sketched plants as family instances, each with "LandForm Sun Studio sketch - name" in Comments, in one step named "LF-Sun Studio: Commit Sketch"; the committed items leave the sketch and the view is read again so they come back as real elements. PDF, CSV, PNG and .lfsun studies are files you choose a location for.

Good to know

Tips

  • Click any element in the preview for its card: Select in Revit selects and shows it in the Revit view, and a planting element offers Convert to studio tree. Refresh re-reads the model after edits.
  • Sun Analysis replaces the earlier Shade Coverage study and is unlocked by the same license.
  • If the sun check under Sun & time does not report a match with Revit's sun, check the project location, time zone, daylight-saving flag and true north: the studio takes all four from the project and the active view.
  • Paths and areas you draw are added to the shade set by themselves and get a row in the report table; model surfaces need Pick surfaces. The painted sunlit/shaded colours are not drawn while the Draw tab is open.
  • The sketch is remembered per project and saved inside .lfsun studies, but not inside saved views, so restoring a view never discards what you drew since.
  • Closing the studio with the red button keeps its state; start Sun Analysis again to show it and re-read the view.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Analysis · Studios · Isovist Analysis

Isovist Analysis

Map what can be seen from where: the area a viewer sees from a spot, visibility fields over the whole site and 3D viewsheds on the terrain and facades.

Isovist Analysis (the Isovist Studio workspace, under Analysis > Studios) opens everything the active view shows, including linked models, conceptual masses and the project's CAD files, in a workspace over the Revit view. An isovist is the area a viewer can see from one spot. Use it for sightlines and view corridors, natural surveillance and safety reviews, how open or enclosed a space feels, and where a landmark or a sign can be seen from. The model is only changed when you create filled regions or bake an analysis display.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelStudios ▾Isovist Analysis

Button tooltip: “Map what can be seen from where: plan isovists, visibility fields and 3D viewsheds.”
Before you start
  • A project view (plan or 3D) that shows the site and its surroundings; the tool does not run on a sheet. Linked models, masses (even while Show Mass is off in Revit) and CAD files are read as well.
  • Terrain, floors or paving for the ground. The default Line of sight over the terrain method follows them; on a view without any ground the studio falls back to the eye-level cut.
  • An active plan view when you want the isovists created as filled regions.
  • The eye height (1.6 m by default) and the view distance (100 m by default) you want to work with.
Tutorial video

Watch Isovist Analysis in action

Video coming soon

Isovist Analysis walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Isovist Analysis: Isovist Studio with one all-round viewpoint in a 3D view
Isovist Studio with one all-round viewpoint in a 3D view · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Refresh, PNG

    Re-reads the visible model, or saves the preview as an image.

  2. 2
    Zoom extents, Plan, 3D

    Fits the model in the preview and switches between plan and 3D.

  3. 3
    Tabs

    Isovist, Field, 3D viewshed, Tower, Obstacles and Export hold each part of the study.

  4. 4
    Place / move viewpoints

    Click where a viewer stands, on the terrain, a floor or a terrace (shortcut P).

  5. 5
    Name, Eye height (m)

    Names the selected viewpoint and sets its eye height.

  6. 6
    Field of view, Angle (°), Facing (° from N)

    Picks a field-of-view preset or a custom angle, and the facing clockwise from project north.

  7. 7
    Viewpoint handles

    Drag the dark pad to move the viewpoint, the green arrow to raise the eye and the orange ring to turn it.

  8. 8
    Method

    Line of sight over the terrain follows the ground; the eye-level plan cut suits flat sites.

  9. 9
    Target height (m)

    How far above the ground each sight line aims: 1.6 m for a standing person, 0 for the ground itself.

  10. 10
    Measures card

    Visible area, share of the ground within the view distance, farthest sightline, openness, compactness and occlusivity for the viewpoint.

  11. 11
    Status line

    Confirms the last action, here a moved viewpoint.

Step by step · 10 steps

How to use Isovist Analysis

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → Studios ▾ → Isovist Analysis.

  2. 02

    Open the workspace. The visible model is read and the studio fits over the Revit view. The toolbar gives Zoom extents, Plan, 3D, Refresh and PNG; the tabs are Isovist, Field, 3D viewshed, Tower, Obstacles and Export.

  3. 03

    Place the viewpoints. Press Place / move viewpoints (P) and click where a viewer stands: on the terrain, a floor or a terrace. Each viewpoint gets a Name, an Eye height (m), a Field of view (360° · all round (classic isovist), 200° · whole human field, 120° · both eyes (binocular), 60° · central vision, camera or a custom Angle) and a Facing in degrees clockwise from project north.

    The selected viewpoint shows handles: drag the dark pad on the ground to move it (it follows the surface under the pointer), the green arrow to raise or lower the eye in a 3D view, the orange ring or its knob to turn it, and the blue knobs on the wedge edges to widen or narrow a limited field of view. Shift snaps to 0.5 m and 15°, Esc cancels a drag. Arrow keys move the viewpoint 0.1 m, PageUp and PageDown change the eye height by 0.1 m, [ and ] turn it 5° (with Shift: 1 m, 1 m, 15°) and Delete removes it.

  4. 04

    Choose the method. Line of sight over the terrain (any site) follows the ground: each sight line runs from the eye to a Target height (m) above the ground, 1.6 m to see a standing person, 1.0 m for a child or a seated person, 0 to see the ground itself. Slopes, crests and dips count, and anything standing in between blocks the line only where it is tall enough, so a sight line passes under a tree canopy or over a low wall. Eye-level plan cut (flat sites, classic) cuts the obstacles at each viewer's eye level; it is exact on flat ground, where both methods agree when the target is at eye height.

    Set the View distance (m), the number of Rays (360 to 2880) and the Default eye height (m) for new viewpoints. Under Display, switch the Isovist fill, Sight rays, the Obstacle cut at eye level and Draw isovists on top of the model, and set the Fill opacity.

  5. 05

    Read the measures. The card for the selected viewpoint gives the visible area, the share of the ground within the view distance, the farthest sightline, openness (rays that reach the view distance), compactness (how enclosed the space is) and occlusivity (the length of hidden edges). With two or more viewpoints it also gives the area seen by at least one and by two or more, and which landmarks each sees.

  6. 06

    Run a field (Field tab). Choose the Surfaces (Terrain, floors & paving, or Picked surfaces you click with Pick surfaces), the Grid (m) and the Measure: Visible area, Longest sightline, Mean sightline, Compactness, Openness, Occlusivity, Seen by viewpoints or Sees landmarks. Press Run: an isovist runs from every grid point and the grid is coloured by the measure, with a legend. CSV exports the points and Bake to Revit writes the field onto the surfaces in the active Revit view as an Analysis Visualization.

  7. 07

    Show the 3D viewshed. On the 3D viewshed tab tick Show 3D viewshed to see, from any camera, what the viewpoints actually see on the terrain, facades and roofs. Choose From all viewpoints or the selected one, and the Colouring: Visible / hidden in the two colours you set, or the Number of viewpoints that see it.

  8. 08

    Study tall buildings (Tower tab). Press Place landmarks (L) and click points that matter to the view: the sea, a park, a monument, the top of a tower; the height lifts the target above the clicked point. For floor-by-floor views press Pick building (B) and click a building or a mass (touching elements of the same model come with it; click again to add or remove). Choose the Floors (Automatic, Mass floors only, Revit levels only or Every floor height), the Floor height (m), Façade spacing (m), View distance (m), Eye above floor (m) and Rays per point, then press Run. The façade is coloured by the chosen measure (Open view (%), Longest view (m), Ground seen (m²) or Landmarks seen) and the table lists every floor, top floor first, with heights measured from the building's base.

    To map the visual impact of a tower, place a landmark on its top and run the Field with Sees landmarks.

  9. 09

    Decide what blocks the view (Obstacles tab). Switch the model categories (Buildings, walls & other model elements, Massing (conceptual masses), Planting, and for the eye-level cut also Terrain (toposolids), Floors & paving and Water), each Revit link, each CAD file and its layers. Under CAD lines stand, choose whether CAD lines block at Full height, or stand 1 m (hedge, low wall), 2 m (fence, screen) or 3 m (wall) above the modelled ground.

  10. 10

    Export and create in Revit (Export tab). Report PDF, Viewpoints CSV and Hi-res PNG export the study. Isovists as filled regions draws each viewpoint's visible area in the active plan view. Save study… keeps viewpoints, settings, obstacle choices and camera in a .lfiso file; Load study… brings them back.

What you get

The model is unchanged until you bake. Isovists as filled regions creates, in the active plan view, one filled region per visible patch (with its holes) of a type named "LandForm Isovist", coloured like its viewpoint at 50 % transparency, with the viewpoint's name, visible area, eye height and method written to Comments, a small circle and a label (name and area) at the viewer, all grouped as a detail group "Isovist name"; the step is named "LF-Isovist Studio: Bake Isovists" and the groups are selected afterwards. Bake to Revit on the Field and Tower tabs writes the values onto the analysed faces of elements of this model as an Analysis Visualization with a legend ("LandForm Isovist Studio" display style); one bake per view, so a new bake replaces the earlier one, and points on linked elements are reported and skipped.

Good to know

Tips

  • Field of view is horizontal: plan isovists have no vertical limit and the 3D viewshed masks by bearing only. About 200° is the whole human visual field including peripheral vision, 120° is what both eyes see, and 60° is central vision where detail, faces and signs are recognised, or a typical camera lens.
  • In line of sight, terrain, floors, paving and water are the ground itself and cannot be switched off as obstacles. Mass floors are shown but never block the view.
  • CAD files start switched off so survey linework and contours do not block the view until you choose them. CAD lines always block the eye-level cut; the chosen height applies to line of sight and the 3D viewshed.
  • Line of sight works on a plan surface model of 0.25 m cells, coarser on very large sites. Overhangs are treated as solid from their lowest to their highest point within a cell, so a sight line under a bridge deck is blocked.
  • Areas are plan areas in square metres.
  • The floor study finds each floor's outline from the building's own elements cut at eye height, closing window openings. Enclosed spaces with nothing of the building above them count as courtyards and get their own inward-facing façade. Façade results can be baked only onto buildings of this model; linked buildings are reported and skipped.
  • Click any element in the preview for its card and Select in Revit to select and show it in the Revit view. Closing the studio keeps its state; start Isovist Analysis again to show it and re-read the view.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Analysis · Studios · Bubble Diagram

Bubble Diagram

Sketch a bubble diagram of the site programme that reacts to the site by rules, compare layout options, and create the chosen one on the plan as coloured filled regions.

Bubble Diagram (the Bubble Studio workspace, under Analysis > Studios) is the early-concept tool: drop the spaces a site needs and let them find their place. Each preset carries its own rules, so a patio pulls toward the building and the entrance, a play area keeps clear of roads and parking, planting beds hug the boundary, and everything packs inside the site and away from the trees. A score tells you how well each space sits, and the whole diagram can be shuffled, kept as an option and finally drawn in Revit.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelStudios ▾Bubble Diagram

Button tooltip: “Sketch a bubble diagram of the site program that reacts to the site by rules.”
Before you start
  • The site as a Floor, a Toposolid or a Property Line; you pick it when the tool starts. A floor or toposolid supplies the boundary and the slope; a property line supplies the boundary, and the slope comes from the largest toposolid under it, if there is one.
  • The context the diagram reacts to is read from the model and its links around the site: walls and roofs as buildings, exterior doors as entrances, roads, floors as paving and planting as trees.
  • A plan view (site or floor plan) open when you press Create in Revit.
  • Rough target areas for each space in square metres.
Tutorial video

Watch Bubble Diagram in action

Video coming soon

Bubble Diagram walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Bubble Diagram: Bubble Studio with a garden programme settled on a toposolid site
Bubble Studio with a garden programme settled on a toposolid site · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Bubble Studio

    Names the site you picked and what was read around it: terrain, entrances and building.

  2. 2
    Spaces

    Drag a space onto the site, or click it to add it; each preset reacts to the others by its own rules.

  3. 3
    Site plan

    The bubbles settle inside the site boundary. Drag a bubble to move it, drag its handle to resize it, press Delete to remove it.

  4. 4
    Status line

    Reports what just happened, such as a space added and settling by its rules.

  5. 5
    Selected space

    Name, Preset, Target area (m²), Lock in place and the rules the clicked bubble follows.

  6. 6
    + Near / + Touch / + Away / + Flow / + View

    Adds a relationship from the selected space; click the other bubble or a site anchor next.

  7. 7
    Select / Near / Touch / Away / Flow → / View

    Draws the same relationships directly on the plan between two bubbles; Select returns to moving.

  8. 8
    Marks

    Expands the marks palette: symbols and line marks to annotate the diagram; only Entrance counts for the rules.

  9. 9
    Program

    Overall fit score, then every space with its Target, Actual area, Slope and Fit, and totals by kind below.

  10. 10
    Site & rules

    Expands Live rules, the display switches, Gap between bubbles (m), Reaction strength, Settle now and Clear all spaces.

  11. 11
    Shuffle / Auto ×5 options / Keep as option

    Finds a new arrangement, generates five layouts, or stores the current one as an option.

  12. 12
    Options strip

    Kept options appear here, so you can bring one back and compare.

  13. 13
    Create in Revit

    Draws the diagram on the active plan view as coloured filled regions, labels and link lines.

  14. 14
    Export PNG / Save study… / Load study…

    Captures the sketch as an image, or keeps the diagram between sessions.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Bubble Diagram

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → Studios ▾ → Bubble Diagram.

  2. 02

    Pick the site. At the prompt "Select the site: a property line, floor or toposolid", click the element. The studio window opens over the Revit view with the site boundary, the terrain tinted by slope and the surrounding buildings, roads, paving and trees drawn as context.

  3. 03

    Drop the spaces. Drag a space from the Spaces palette onto the site, or click it to add it: Building, Lawn, Patio, Play Area, Veg Garden, Utility / Bins, Feature, Seating, Fire Pit, Garden Bed, Privacy Planting, New Tree, Water Feature, Pool, Parking, Shed, Dog Run or a plain Space with no rules. Each bubble attracts, repels and packs by its preset's rules and settles into place; a fit score shows how well it sits.

    Drag a bubble to move it, drag its handle to resize it, press Delete to remove it. Use Building on a site whose building is not in the model: it becomes the anchor every "building" rule looks for.

  4. 04

    Tune a space. Click a bubble: the Selected space panel shows its Name, Preset, Target area (m²), Lock in place and the list of rules it follows. Duplicate and Delete act on it.

  5. 05

    Add relationships. With a space selected, press + Near, + Touch, + Away, + Flow or + View and click the other bubble, or a site anchor such as the entrance or the building. The toolbar modes Near, Touch, Away, Flow → and View do the same directly on the plan between two bubbles; Select returns to moving.

  6. 06

    Add marks. Drag or click Marks for things the diagram should respond to or annotate: Focal point, Heart, Star, Sun, Shade, Existing tree, Water / wet, Noise, Avoid, Entrance, Node, Question, Tick, and the line marks Arrow, Two-way, Circulation, View cone, Wind, Screen, Barrier and Zone edge. A selected mark takes a Label, a Size (m) and a Colour; Flip swaps the ends of a line mark. Marks carry no rules, except that an Entrance mark counts as an entrance for the spaces that look for one.

  7. 07

    Read the programme and set the behaviour. The Program table lists every space with its Target, Actual area, Slope and Fit, with the overall score above and totals by kind below. Under Site & rules, switch Live rules (bubbles keep reacting as you work), the slope tint, the surrounding elements and the rule lines of the selected space, set the Gap between bubbles (m) and the Reaction strength, press Settle now to relax the current arrangement once, or Clear all spaces to start over.

  8. 08

    Explore options. Shuffle finds a new arrangement, Auto ×5 options generates five layouts, and Keep as option stores the current one on the options strip under the plan, where you can bring it back and compare.

  9. 09

    Create in Revit. With a plan view active, press Create in Revit. Export PNG captures the sketch, Fit view recentres it, and Save study… and Load study… keep the diagram between sessions.

What you get

The active plan view gets a detail group named "Bubble Diagram" (plus the option's name when it has one) containing one solid filled region per space, of a type named "LandForm Bubble" and coloured in the space's colour, with the preset, kind, target and actual area, slope and fit written to Comments; a centred text note with the space's name and area; detail lines for the links, with arrowheads on flows; and the marks as detail lines with their labels. The whole creation is one undoable step named "LF-Bubble Studio: Bake Diagram", and the group is selected afterwards. The diagram stays in the studio so you can keep working on it.

Good to know

Tips

  • Slope is read from the terrain, so presets that prefer level ground (patio, pool, parking) drift toward the flatter parts of the site, while beds and planting accept steep ground.
  • A property-line site without a toposolid under it is treated as flat.
  • An outline that Revit cannot draw as a filled region (a squashed or self-crossing one) is created as a circle of the same area instead.
  • The window fits itself over the Revit view; use the buttons at the top right to maximise it, fit it back over the view, or close it. Drag it away from the view to work on a second screen.
  • Only spaces with a target area count toward the programme totals; a bubble's Actual area follows its packed outline, not just its target.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Analysis · Studios · Playground

Playground

Lay out a playground on a floor, toposolid, filled region or property line with live EN 1176 safety zones, impact surfacing and play value, then create it in Revit as equipment families, surfacing floors and zone regions.

Playground is the studio for play areas. You drag generic equipment onto the site and every impact area and free space follows it, sized from the free height of fall; clashes show at once, the impact surfacing is worked out for you, and a scorecard tracks the kinds of play, age groups, capacity and shade. Snapping, design presets, EPDM surface graphics and kept options help you compare arrangements before anything is modelled. When one is right, Create in Revit builds it with the play data written to every element.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelStudios ▾Playground

Button tooltip: “Lay out a playground with live EN 1176 safety zones, surfacing, age groups and play value.”
Before you start
  • The play area as a Floor, Toposolid, Filled Region or Property Line. Select it before you start, or pick it when Revit asks. A filled region takes its heights from the largest toposolid under it.
  • A site plan view if you want the impact areas and free spaces drawn: zone regions are created on the active plan view only. Equipment and surfacing do not depend on the view.
  • The standard is EN 1176 / EN 1177, with an optional Estidama / UAE overlay for shade and hot surfaces. Playground is a design check, not a safety inspection: confirm the result against your licensed copy of the standard.
  • A default impact surfacing in mind: Wetpour, Rubber tiles, Turf / topsoil, Bark, Woodchip, Sand or Gravel.
Tutorial video

Watch Playground in action

Video coming soon

Playground walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Playground: Playground with a play layout placed and two warnings to review
Playground with a play layout placed and two warnings to review · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Search equipment / Group by / Show

    Filter the catalogue by name, group it, show inclusive items only or pick an age chip.

  2. 2
    Equipment cards

    Drag an item onto the play area or click it to add it; hover for a 3D preview with its size and ages.

  3. 3
    Placed equipment

    Each item carries its impact area and free space, which follow it as you move or rotate it.

  4. 4
    Snap

    Turns snapping on or off (F3); the chevron opens the snap settings.

  5. 5
    Warnings to review

    The verdict box counts issues and warnings against the chosen standard and overlay.

  6. 6
    CHECKS

    Lists each finding with the reason; click one to focus it on the plan.

  7. 7
    Zones / Surfacing / Shade / Ages / Labels / Site

    Switch those layers on the plan on or off.

  8. 8
    Wetpour 25/40/50/65 mm

    Legend for the surfacing colours, impact areas and free spaces.

  9. 9
    SELECTED ITEM

    Click an item to set its rotation, surfacing, age group, colour and parameters here.

  10. 10
    NEAP core

    A design preset; hover it for its principles and contents, then drag it onto the plan.

  11. 11
    Play types / children at once / shade over play

    The scorecard tiles for the current layout.

  12. 12
    PLAY VALUE

    The kinds of play covered, broken down by age group, with the inclusion summary.

  13. 13
    Kept options

    Arrangements stored with Keep as option appear here as cards; click one to restore it.

Step by step · 11 steps

How to use Playground

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → Studios ▾ → Playground.

  2. 02

    Pick the play area. If a suitable element is already selected it is used; otherwise click the floor, toposolid, filled region or property line. The Playground window opens over the Revit view with the play area outlined and the buildings, walls, paving and trees around it drawn as context.

  3. 03

    Set the standard, surfacing and ages. Under Standard choose the Safety standard, tick Estidama / UAE overlay (shade, hot surfaces) if it applies, and set the Default impact surfacing, the Wetpour colour (EPDM) and Graphics elsewhere (mm), the thickness of EPDM graphics laid outside the impact surfacing. Under Ages pick the Age groups scheme: manufacturer catalogue steps, the US groups, the UK Fields in Trust areas (LAP, LEAP, NEAP) or an under-3 split.

  4. 04

    Add equipment. Under Equipment, search, Group by equipment type, age group or kind of play, show Inclusive only, or filter by age chips. Drag an item onto the play area or click it to add it. Hover an item for a 3D preview with its size, ages, free height of fall and links to matching product ranges. The catalogue covers swings, slides and towers, climbing, balance and nature play, spinning and rocking, sand, water and sensory play, shade sails and benches; inclusive items carry a dot.

  5. 05

    Place precisely. Equipment snaps to endpoints and corners, midpoints, centres of other equipment, graphics and trees, the nearest edge, or a grid; while moving, alignment guides appear, safety zones slide to just touch a neighbour's or the boundary, and rotation snaps parallel to nearby edges. The Snap button (or F3) turns snapping off, the chevron beside it opens the snap settings, and holding Alt places freely. Drag an item's handle or press R to rotate it; the arrow keys nudge it.

  6. 06

    Watch the checks. The verdict box at the top right counts issues and warnings, and Checks lists them: overlapping free spaces, equipment inside another item's zone, trees, walls and buildings in a zone, zones running past the boundary, equipment too close to a fence or tree, toddler play beside older children's equipment, and sun on slides under the Estidama overlay. Click a finding to focus it. The Zones, Surfacing, Shade, Ages, Labels and Site buttons switch the layers on the plan.

  7. 07

    Edit the selected item. The Selected item panel shows a 3D preview and lets you set Rotation (°), the item's own Surfacing, its Age group, its Surface colour and its parameters (seat count, platform height and so on). Rotate 90°, Duplicate and Delete act on the selection.

  8. 08

    Add surface graphics. Under Surface graphics, pick an EPDM colour, then drag a shape, letter, number or game (hopscotch, number track, alphabet trail, stepping spots, compass) onto the plan. Edit its Text, Font, Rotation and colours, and use Bring forward and Send back to set the drawing order. A free shape is drawn corner by corner; Enter or a double-click closes it.

  9. 09

    Try a design preset. Under Design presets, hover a preset for its design principles and contents, then drag it onto the plan. Place as decides whether it arrives as One group (moves and turns together) or Separate items. Click a group member to move, rotate or duplicate the whole group; double-click a member to edit it alone; the group panel offers Ungroup when you want the pieces apart.

  10. 10

    Read the scorecard. The tiles count play types covered (out of 13), children at once and shade over play. Play value breaks the kinds of play down by age group, and Surfacing lists the area and thickness of every material and colour.

  11. 11

    Keep options and create. Press Keep as option to store the current arrangement as a card under the plan (Option A, B and so on); click a card to restore it. Under Create in Revit, tick Equipment as LandForm families, Impact surfacing as floors and Impact areas and free spaces on the plan view, then press Create in Revit. If the checks still list issues, a dialog asks whether to create anyway.

    Export PNG saves the plan, and Save study… writes the layout and kept options to an .lfplay file that Load study… reopens later.

What you get

The chosen layout now exists in the model in one undo step named "LF-Playground: Create Play Layout". Each piece of equipment is a Site-category family generated from its generic geometry, named LF-PLAY plus the item and its size, placed on the ground and selected when the tool finishes. Impact surfacing is a set of flat floors whose types are named after the material, thickness and colour, with EPDM graphics as separate floors in their own colours. Impact areas and free spaces are filled regions of the types LF-PLAY Impact Area and LF-PLAY Free Space, coloured per item and grouped as LF-PLAY Safety Zones. Equipment and floors carry the play data as shared parameters (LF_Play Item, LF_Play Free Height of Fall, LF_Play Users, LF_Play Ages, LF_Play Types, LF_Play Inclusive, LF_Play Surfacing, LF_Play Standard, LF_Play Option, LF_Play Age Group and LF_Play Product Link), ready for schedules. The status line reports what was created.

More about Playground

Keyboard shortcuts

KeyAction
R / Shift+RRotate the selection 15° clockwise / anticlockwise
Arrow keysNudge the selection 0.1 m (1 m with Shift)
Ctrl+DDuplicate the selection
Delete or BackspaceDelete the selection
Ctrl+Z / Ctrl+YUndo / redo
F3Snapping on or off; hold Alt to move freely
Enter / EscClose / cancel a free shape; Esc also clears the selection
HomeFit the plan in the window
Good to know

Tips

  • Zone regions are drawn on plan views only. If the active view is not a plan when you create, the status notes it; open the site plan and create again with only the zones ticked.
  • Loose-fill thicknesses include the 100 mm top-up for displacement in play. Synthetic thicknesses are typical values; the product's EN 1177 test certificate governs.
  • Equipment is generic LandForm geometry, so the layout stays neutral. The product links open the makers' category pages in your browser; no manufacturer models are placed.
  • On a sloping, shape-edited floor or toposolid the play area outline comes from the element's sketch, so internal face edges do not show as stray lines or openings.
  • The layout is remembered per play area between sessions as a convenience; the study file and the model are the durable copies.
  • Groups are a page-side aid for moving and rotating; when you create in Revit, each member is created on its own.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Analysis · Studios · Sketchy

Sketchy

Redraw the active plan, elevation or section view as a hand sketch, with sketch trees and shrubs standing in for the modelled planting, then save it as a PNG or drop it into the view as an image.

Sketchy (the Render Studio workspace) is for the moment a client wants to see the idea, not the model. It reads what the view shows, links included, and redraws it in a marker, watercolour, ink or pencil style with wobbly linework and a library of planting symbols. You can switch categories and single elements off, recolour them, draw over the top with pen, marker, text and stamp tools, and add diagram marks and redline markups. Nothing in the model changes until you choose Place in view, and even then the only new element is an image.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelStudios ▾Sketchy

Button tooltip: “Redraw the active view as a hand sketch with a planting symbol library.”
Before you start
  • A plan, elevation or section view of a project. Sheets, drafting views and family documents are refused, and 3D views are not supported yet: the tool tells you to open a plan or a section instead.
  • Hide or crop what you do not want sketched before you start. The read is capped at roughly 90 seconds and 12,000 elements, biggest elements first; the page tells you when smaller ones were left unread.
  • Decide how the sketch will be used: a PNG for a presentation (1× to 4× the screen size) or an image placed in the view at a pixel density you choose (default 40 px/m).
Tutorial video

Watch Sketchy in action

Video coming soon

Sketchy walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Sketchy: Sketchy with a planting plan sketched and the Layers tab open
Sketchy with a planting plan sketched and the Layers tab open · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Render Studio

    The panel header names the view that was read and its scale.

  2. 2
    361 of 361 elements

    How many of the elements read from the view are in the sketch.

  3. 3
    Layers / Style / Library / Marks / Sketch / Export

    The six sidebar tabs, from drawing order to export settings.

  4. 4
    All / None / Hidden

    Tick or untick every row at once; Hidden brings hidden elements back.

  5. 5
    Everything / Ink lines / Tint

    Act on the whole drawing; Reset restores the landscape palette.

  6. 6
    Category rows

    Drawing order, top first. Drag the grip to reorder, untick to leave a category out, and set its colour swatch and opacity.

  7. 7
    Sketch canvas

    With Select, click an element to open its card for colour, opacity, symbol and hide options.

  8. 8
    Select / Pen / Marker / Eraser / Text / Stamp / Mark / Markup

    The mode bar for drawing over the sketch.

  9. 9
    Fit / − / + / 1:1

    View controls; 1:1 shows the look the exports use.

  10. 10
    Undo

    Undoes the last stroke, mark or hide action.

  11. 11
    Place in view

    Places the sketch in the active Revit view as an image.

  12. 12
    Save PNG

    Saves the drawing as a PNG at the size set on Export.

  13. 13
    Refresh view

    Reads the view again after model edits, keeping your layers, symbols and strokes.

  14. 14
    Status line

    Guidance for the current tool and its keyboard shortcuts.

Step by step · 10 steps

How to use Sketchy

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → Studios ▾ → Sketchy.

  2. 02

    Wait for the read. A progress window reads the active view, then the workspace opens over the Revit drawing area with the view name in the panel header and the element count in the footer. The sidebar has six tabs: Layers, Style, Library, Marks, Sketch and Export.

  3. 03

    Pick a style. On Style, choose a Preset: Marker sketch, Watercolour, Ink line, Pencil hatch or Digital (clean). Fine-tune Line wobble, Line weight, Pen passes, the Fill mode (Flat, Wash, Hatch or None) and Fill opacity.

    Choose where colours come from with Colours (Landscape palette, Revit materials or Monochrome) and a Paper (White, Cream, Kraft, Grid or Transparent). Ink outlines on fills, Tree shadows with their Shadow angle and Length, and North arrow & scale bar can each be switched off.

  4. 04

    Arrange the layers. On Layers, every category is a row in drawing order, top first. Drag the grip to reorder rows, expand a category to reorder or recolour its types, and untick a row to leave it out. Each row has its own colour swatch and opacity slider; double-click a type swatch to return to the category colour.

    The Everything, Ink lines and Tint controls act on the whole drawing, and Reset restores the landscape palette. All and None tick every row at once.

  5. 05

    Edit single elements. With the Select tool, click an element on the canvas to open its card. Set a colour and opacity for Type (every element of that type) or for This one, pick a planting Symbol for this type, or use Hide element, Hide type and Select in Revit. The Hidden button on the Layers tab brings hidden elements back.

  6. 06

    Choose planting symbols. On Library, filter the gallery by style (trees, shrubs, xeriscape, grasses, tropical, formal, ground covers and more), pick a symbol and press Use for all planting, or let Auto by name read the family and type names (pine, palm, shrub and so on). Replace planting with symbols turns the replacement on and off; Prefer detailed trees and shrubs switches the automatic choice to the sketch-set drawings.

    Under Import your own, Import from image… traces a picture of hand-drawn trees or shrubs into scalable symbols. Choose whether the drawings are used in sections & elevations or as plan symbols, then tick Prefer imported symbols and, if you like, Keep the sheet's colours.

  7. 07

    Draw over the sketch. The mode bar on the canvas holds Select, Pen, Marker, Eraser, Text, Stamp, Mark and Markup. On Sketch, set the Pen style (Ink (pressure), Fineliner or Pencil), the Marker style (Flat marker, Chisel tip, Watercolour wash, Dry brush or Highlighter), the ink and marker colours and widths, and the Text size. Undo, Redo and Clear act on your strokes.

    On Marks, drag a diagram chip (focal points, views, access, wind, screens, zone edges, notes) onto the drawing, or click it and then click on the canvas; drag for arrows and lines. Every stroke, stamp, mark and markup becomes a row on the Layers tab, so it can be reordered or deleted like a category.

  8. 08

    Check the sketch at sheet scale. Use Fit, −, + and 1:1 in the view controls (top right). 1:1 shows the look the exports use. Press Tab to hide the sidebar and see more of the drawing.

  9. 09

    Export or place. On Export, choose a PNG size and, if needed, Transparent background, then press Save PNG. To put the sketch into Revit, set Place at (px/m) and press Place in view; the same button sits on the bottom action bar. Save study… writes the style, layers, symbols and sketch to an .lfrender file that Load study… brings back later.

  10. 10

    Refresh after model edits. Press Refresh view at the bottom of the sidebar to read the view again. Your layer settings, symbol choices and sketch strokes stay.

What you get

Nothing in the model has changed unless you pressed Place in view. That step writes the full drawing to a PNG and places it in the active view as an image, sized to the model, in one undo step named "LF-Render Studio: Place Sketch"; the image is selected afterwards so you can move or resize it like any other image. Saved PNGs render exactly what you see at the chosen size. Sketchy remembers its style, layer colours and symbol choices between sessions, and element-specific colours and the sketch strokes travel in the study file.

More about Sketchy

Keyboard shortcuts

KeyAction
V, P, M, E, T, S, K, RSelect, Pen, Marker, Eraser, Text, Stamp, Mark, Markup tools
Ctrl+Z / Ctrl+YUndo / redo strokes, marks and hide actions
DeleteDelete the selected sketch item, or hide the selected element
EscCancel the current stroke, deselect, or return to the Select tool
TabHide or show the sidebar
Home, + , −Fit the drawing, zoom in, zoom out
F11Maximise the studio to full screen
Good to know

Tips

  • Linework wobble is deterministic: the same view sketches the same way every time, and PNGs and placed images match the fitted look on screen.
  • Symbols scale with the planting family. Where a type carries spread or height parameters they are used; otherwise the family's footprint sets the size, and the element card tells you which.
  • Place in view works only in plan, elevation and section views, and only while the view the sketch was read from is active. Switch back to it, or Refresh view in the new view first.
  • A placed image is not read back by Refresh view, so hide it (or the Raster Images category) before sketching the same view again.
  • Closing the studio keeps its state; the ribbon button shows it again. The collapse button hides it with a small Show Render Studio pill over the view, handy on a single screen.
  • If the window reports that it could not start and mentions the .NET Framework WebView2 SDK, restart Revit and open Sketchy again.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Analysis · Studios · Slope Analysis

Slope Analysis

Check every Floor and Toposolid in the model against a minimum and maximum grade, see the failing patches coloured in 3D, and export the findings as a CSV report.

Slope Analysis (the Slope Studio workspace) answers two questions at once: where will water sit, and where is the ground too steep for what it is meant to be? It loads every Floor and Toposolid of the model without you picking anything, grades each triangle of each top surface, and colours it green where it meets your rule, amber where it is too flat to drain and red where it is too steep. Contiguous patches outside the rule become findings you can zoom to and select in Revit. It is a checker only: the model is never changed, so you fix the ground with the terrain tools and reload to check again.

Where to find it

LandForm tabAnalysis panelStudios ▾Slope Analysis

Button tooltip: “Check every floor and toposolid against a grade rule.”
Before you start
  • A project with at least one Floor or Toposolid whose top surface can be read. The tool refuses to open otherwise and lists the surfaces it skipped and why.
  • A model view, not a sheet. The active view only supplies the ghosted context around the surfaces; the surfaces themselves are read from the whole model.
  • The rule you want to check: the minimum grade below which water will not drain and the maximum grade the surface's use allows. Presets cover accessible routes, paving, ramps, lawns, planting beds and banks.
  • Toposolid sub-divisions are not listed separately; they sit on their host and the host carries the grades.
Tutorial video

Watch Slope Analysis in action

Video coming soon

Slope Analysis walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Slope Analysis: Slope Studio on the Display tab with rule bands, contours and grade arrows
Slope Studio on the Display tab with rule bands, contours and grade arrows · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Slope Studio

    Summary of the surfaces checked, their area, the shares within the rule, too flat and too steep, and the number of findings.

  2. 2
    Rule

    Tabs for the grade rule, the Display options, the Surfaces list and the Findings list.

  3. 3
    3D view

    Every Floor and Toposolid coloured by the rule, with grade labels and downhill arrows; click a coloured patch to open its finding card.

  4. 4
    Hover readout

    The grade under the cursor, whether it is ok, too flat or too steep, the elevation and the surface name.

  5. 5
    View controls

    Zoom extents, Top, 3D and the Ortho toggle.

  6. 6
    Navigation hint

    Orbit with the left or middle button, pan with Shift and the middle button, zoom with the wheel; right-click opens the view menu.

  7. 7
    Grade rule

    Legend for the colours: green within the rule, amber too flat, red too steep.

  8. 8
    Status line

    Counts the surfaces checked and the findings outside the rule.

  9. 9
    Colour surfaces by

    Colours by Rule bands, a Grade heat map, Elevation or Plain; the slider sets Surface opacity.

  10. 10
    Mesh edges

    Switches mesh edges, shape points, Contours with their Interval, Grade arrows with their Spacing, arrow labels and the ghosted model context.

  11. 11
    Elevation datum

    Reads heights from the Survey point (shared) or the Revit internal origin.

  12. 12
    CSV report

    Saves the per-surface areas and every finding; PNG saves the view.

  13. 13
    Reload

    Reads every surface again after you correct the model.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Slope Analysis

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Analysis panel → Studios ▾ → Slope Analysis.

  2. 02

    Wait for the read. A progress window reads the floors and toposolids, then the workspace opens over the Revit drawing area with every surface coloured by the current rule. The summary at the top of the panel gives the surface count and the areas within, below and above the rule.

  3. 03

    Set the rule. On the Rule tab pick a Preset (Accessible route · 1–5%, Paved area · 1–2%, Ramp · 5–8.3%, Lawn · 2–25%, Planting bed · 2–33%, Embankment · max 1:2 (50%) or Steep bank · max 1:1.5 (66.7%)) or type your own Minimum grade and Maximum grade. Grade units switches the whole studio between Percent (%), Ratio (1 : n) and Degrees (°).

    Leave the minimum at 0 to check steepness only. Ignore findings smaller than drops patches below the area you enter (0.25 m² by default) so tiny facets do not clutter the list. The Totals table updates as you type.

  4. 04

    Read the surfaces. Hover anywhere to see the grade under the cursor, whether it is ok, too flat or too steep, the elevation and the surface name. Orbit with the left or middle button, pan with Shift and the middle button, zoom with the wheel; the view controls at the top right give Zoom extents, Top, 3D and an Ortho toggle, and a right-click opens the view menu.

  5. 05

    Open a finding. Click a coloured patch, or a row on the Findings tab, to open its card: too steep or too flat, the surface, its area, the worst grade against the rule, and the surface's category and type. Zoom frames the patch and Show in Revit selects its surface in the model.

    On the Findings tab, Show limits the list to Too steep or Too flat, Sort orders by Largest first or Worst grade first, and Select surfaces with findings in Revit selects every offending surface at once.

  6. 06

    Trim the set. On the Surfaces tab, untick a surface to leave it out of the analysis and the report (building floors, for instance), or use All, None, Toposolids only and Floors only. Each row shows the plan area and the share too flat and too steep; the eye button hides a surface from the view, R selects it in Revit, and clicking the row zooms to it. Hover a name for its level, point and triangle counts and any mesh repair that was applied.

  7. 07

    Tune the display. On Display, colour surfaces by Rule bands, a Grade heat map, Elevation or Plain, and set Surface opacity. Switch Mesh edges, Shape points, Contours (with their Interval), Grade arrows (with their Spacing), Arrow grade labels and the ghosted Model context on or off. Elevation datum reads heights from the Survey point (shared) or the Revit internal origin.

  8. 08

    Report and iterate. Press CSV report to save the per-surface areas and every finding, or PNG to save the view. Correct the model in Revit with Terrain Studio, the mound tools, Relax Surface or the Modify tools, then press Reload to read every surface again and check the result.

What you get

Nothing in the model has changed. You have a CSV with three blocks: one row per surface (name, element id, category, whether it was included, plan area, and the areas and percentages within the rule, too flat and too steep, plus the number of findings), the rule that was applied, and one row per finding with its surface, kind, area, lowest and highest grade and centre coordinates in metres. The PNG shows the coloured surfaces, arrows and labels as they were on screen. The rule you set is remembered the next time you open the studio.

Good to know

Tips

  • Grade arrows point downhill across every surface and carry a percent label; turn off Arrow grade labels or widen the Spacing on a dense site.
  • Surfaces that cannot be read (no top face, or two elevations at the same point) are listed in the note under the Surfaces table rather than stopping the analysis.
  • Where Revit's tessellation leaves duplicate vertices or unstitched seams between merged faces, the mesh is repaired before grading so no false edges appear; the surface tooltip reports what was welded and stitched.
  • Elevations are shown from the survey point by default, matching spot elevations in shared coordinates; switch the datum on the Display tab if your drawings use the internal origin.
  • Esc closes the finding card. Closing the studio with the window button keeps its state; the ribbon button brings it back.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
09

LandForm ribbon panel

Documentation

Legends, colour checks, exports and sheet set-up.

Documentation · Legend · Surface

Surface

Build a legend of your Floor and Toposolid types, with every swatch drawn in its real Revit fill pattern, and write it into a Legend view or as image schedules.

Surface Legend is a studio window that sits over the Revit view while you work. You pick the surface types, decide which type parameters make up each item's text, tidy that text with clean-up rules, and arrange swatches and columns on a paper-space preview that wraps the text exactly as Revit will. You can even drop the legend onto a title block or an existing sheet to check that it fits before anything is created. When the layout is right, Run writes filled regions and text notes into an existing Revit Legend view, or renders a swatch image for each type and builds one schedule per category. Everything you chose is stored with the legend, so it can be reloaded, refreshed and kept in step with the model later.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelLegend ▾Surface

Button tooltip: “Create a floor and toposolid type legend.”
Before you start
  • For the Filled regions output you need an existing Revit Legend view to write into. Revit does not let add-ins create Legend views, so make an empty one first and pick it as the target.
  • Floor types and, in Revit 2024 and later, Toposolid types in the model. Decide whether the legend should list every type or only those placed in the model (Only used types).
  • Know which type parameters should form the legend text. The default is Description, Keynote and Type Comments; a type with no value for any of them shows its type name instead.
  • To test or place the legend on a sheet, the sheet needs a title block: positions are measured from the title block's top-left corner in millimetres.
Tutorial video

Watch Surface in action

Video coming soon

Surface walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Surface: Surface Legend studio previewing 16 Floor and Toposolid types
Surface Legend studio previewing 16 Floor and Toposolid types · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Filled regions, Image schedule

    Chooses whether to write swatches and text into a Legend view or to build image schedules.

  2. 2
    Legend name, Target Legend view

    Names the legend and picks the existing Legend view to write into; Load saved settings restores a stored legend and Open in Revit activates the view.

  3. 3
    Source

    Lists Floor and Toposolid types, optionally only the placed ones, sorted A-Z if you like.

  4. 4
    Surface types

    Tick the types to include; the search box filters the list and Select all and Clear act on the visible rows.

  5. 5
    Selected type text

    Click a type row and type here to override its legend text; Use automatic text clears the override.

  6. 6
    Legend output

    Category headings and title on or off; Update existing reuses earlier elements and Auto-update refreshes the legend when a source type changes.

  7. 7
    Layout (mm on paper)

    Legend width, columns, column gap, swatch size, row gap and text size, all in paper millimetres.

  8. 8
    Preview bar

    1:1 zoom, Guides and Margins, the sheet menu (Legend only by default), the view scale and PNG to save the preview.

  9. 9
    Preview

    Draws every swatch in its real fill pattern, with the text wrapped as Revit will wrap it.

  10. 10
    Info line

    Reports the preview scale, legend size, columns and type count, and warns when the legend runs off the sheet.

  11. 11
    Run

    Writes the legend into the target view, or builds the image schedules.

  12. 12
    Status line

    Shows progress and results, and tells you why Run is disabled.

  13. 13
    Re-read model

    Refreshes types, parameters and legend views from Revit without losing your settings.

  14. 14
    Settings, Preview, Types, Reset

    Hide or show the panels; Reset shows every panel and fits the preview.

Step by step · 10 steps

How to use Surface

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Legend ▾ → Surface.

  2. 02

    Choose what to create. Press Filled regions or Image schedule at the top of the settings panel. Filled regions creates or updates swatches and text in an existing Legend view; Image schedule renders a swatch image for every type, assigns it as the type's Type Image and creates one schedule per Floor or Toposolid category.

  3. 03

    Name the legend and pick the target view. Type the Legend name (it becomes the Legend view's name, or part of each schedule name). For filled regions choose the Target Legend view; views that already hold a LandForm legend are marked with a dot and show their scale. Load saved settings restores everything stored in that legend, and Open in Revit activates the view.

    If you start the tool while a stored Surface Legend view is active, its settings load automatically and the status line says so.

  4. 04

    Pick the surface types. Under Source, tick Floor types and Toposolid types as needed, Only used types to drop unplaced types and Sort A-Z to order by name. In the Surface types list on the right, tick the types to include. The search box filters the list, Select all and Clear act on the visible rows, and Shift-click ticks a range. The status line counts selected, visible and total types.

  5. 05

    Build the item text. Under Legend item text, the chips are the parameters each type shows, in order. Drag a chip to reorder it, press its × to remove it, and click a parameter in the list below (filter it with Add a parameter…) to add it. The list tells you how many of the selected types have a value. Tick Join on one line with and enter a separator to combine the values into one line; type \n in the separator for a line break.

  6. 06

    Clean up the text. Add a Find / Replace with rule, ticking the .\* box to treat Find as a regular expression. Strip code prefix removes everything up to and including the last underscore, so LF-HS-SWE-GT-01_Stepping Stones becomes Stepping Stones; Strip LF- code removes a leading letter code such as LF-SS-. Pick a Case option to force Title, Sentence, UPPER or lower case. Rules apply to automatic text only.

    To give one type its own wording, click its row and type in Selected type text; Use automatic text clears the override. Double-click a category heading or the title in the preview, or press the pen beside a heading in the list, to rename it.

  7. 07

    Set the layout. Under Layout (mm on paper) enter the legend Width, number of Columns and Column gap, the Swatch W and Swatch H, and the Row gap. Text size switches between the 1-column preset (2.5 mm items, 3.5 mm title), the 2-column preset (1.5 mm and 2 mm) and Custom…, which reveals Item text, Title text and Text width. Item text type and Title text type can use existing Text types instead of Automatic (by size). Advanced holds the Text offset between swatch and text and the Left and Top margin. Under Legend output, keep Category headings and Include title on or off, and use Update existing to reuse what the tool created earlier instead of adding to it.

  8. 08

    Check the preview. The canvas draws every swatch with its real foreground and background fill pattern: drafting patterns at paper size, model patterns divided by the view scale in the 1: box, which follows the target view. Use Fit and 1:1, tick Guides for column guides and Margins to see the margin box, and press PNG to save the preview as an image. Choose a title block or an existing sheet from the sheet menu (the default is Legend only) to see the legend on paper with the sheet's existing viewports; drag the legend box into place or type its position in the at … × … mm boxes. The info line in the corner warns when the legend runs off the sheet.

  9. 09

    Run. Press Run. For filled regions LandForm writes the swatches and text into the target Legend view in one undo step named "LF-Surface Legend: Generate Legend" and opens the view. For an image schedule it renders the images, assigns the Type Images and creates or updates the category schedules, reporting the counts in the footer.

  10. 10

    Place it on sheets (optional). With a sheet chosen in the preview, press Place on sheet to put the target Legend view on that sheet at the dragged position; Sheets lets you tick several sheets, and every ticked sheet receives the legend at the same offset from its own title block. Tick on Run to place it automatically after every run.

What you get

For the filled-regions output, the target Legend view now holds a filled region per surface type in that type's own fill colours and patterns, the item text beside it, optional category headings and a title, laid out in the columns you set. Every element carries LandForm metadata, so running again on the same view replaces the earlier swatches instead of stacking a second legend, and Load saved settings brings back the parameters, rules and layout. For the image-schedule output, each selected type has a rendered swatch as its Type Image and each category has a schedule with the image column plus the fields you chose. The footer reports how many type rows, images and schedules were produced.

Good to know

Tips

  • If Run stays disabled, read the footer: it tells you to select at least one type or to create and pick a Revit Legend view.
  • Turn on Auto-update so the legend refreshes itself when a source Floor or Toposolid type changes; the refresh runs as "LF-Surface Legend: Auto Update Legends".
  • Press Re-read model after creating a Legend view, sheet or surface type in Revit while the studio is open; the lists are refreshed without losing your settings.
  • In Image schedule mode, Missing only ticks just the types that have no Type Image yet, Regenerate existing images replaces the ones that do, and Edit columns… beside each category heading chooses that schedule's fields, headings and order. Each category's schedule can be named in the Image schedule output section; an empty name gives "Category + Legend name".
  • The footer buttons Settings, Preview and Types hide or show the panels and Reset restores the layout; drag the splitters to resize a panel, double-click one to reset it. The workspace buttons at the top right maximise the window, move it to the next screen, dock it as a compact strip beside the Revit view or fit it over the view again.
  • The window is modeless, but keep the same project active: the tool refuses to run if you switch to another document.
Control reference · 35 controls

Every control and what it does

Surface Type Legend35 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Filled regionsOption

Creates or updates filled regions and text notes in an existing Revit Legend view.

Image scheduleOption

Renders a swatch image per type, assigns it as the Type Image and creates one schedule per selected category.

Legend Name BoxInput

Name for the target Legend view, or the stem of each category schedule name.

Target Legend Combo BoxSelector

Existing Revit Legend view that receives the filled regions.

Floor typesOption

Lists Floor types as legend sources.

Toposolid typesOption

Lists Toposolid types as legend sources.

Only used typesOption

Keeps only types that have at least one instance placed in the model.

Sort A-ZOption

Orders the items by type name instead of model order.

Category headingsOption

Adds a heading row above each category group in the legend.

Include titleOption

Adds the legend name as a title above the first row.

Update existingOption

Reuses the legend elements or schedules the tool created earlier instead of adding new ones.

Auto-updateOption

Registers the legend for automatic refresh when a source type changes.

LayoutSection

Shows the paper-space layout values: width, columns, gaps, swatch size, text offset and width, text preset and sizes, margins.

Text Size Preset BoxSelector

1 column (2.5 mm items, 3.5 mm title), 2 columns (1.5 mm and 2 mm) or Custom sizes.

Image Size Combo BoxSelector

Pixel size of each rendered swatch image: 256, 512 or 1024 px.

Regenerate existing image valuesOption

Replaces Type Images that already exist instead of keeping them.

Legend item textSection

Shows the parameters that make up each item's text and how they are joined.

Parameter Search BoxInput

Filters the parameter list by name.

Combine valuesOption

Joins the parameter values on one line with the separator instead of one line per value.

UpButton

Moves the selected parameter earlier in the item text.

DownButton

Moves the selected parameter later in the item text.

Is SelectedOption

Includes this parameter in the legend text.

Parameter Separator BoxInput

Text placed between combined parameter values.

New rowButton

Inserts a line break into the separator so the next value starts a new row.

Select visibleButton

Ticks every parameter currently shown by the search.

Clear visibleButton

Unticks every parameter currently shown by the search.

PreviewSection

Draws the legend layout with the current settings without changing the model.

Toggle settings panelButton

Collapses or restores the settings column so the type list gets the full width.

Missing onlyButton

Ticks only the types that have no Type Image yet (image schedule mode).

Select allButton

Ticks every visible surface type.

ClearButton

Unticks every visible surface type.

Type Search BoxInput

Search Floor Types and Toposolid Types by name.

Edit columns...Button

Chooses, orders and renames the schedule fields for that category.

RunButton

Creates the legend or the image schedules with the current settings.

CancelButton

Closes Surface Legend without changing the model.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Legend · Family

Family

Build a legend of the family types shown on a sheet, either as plan-symbol Type Images with one schedule per category, or as true Revit legend views placed back on the sheet.

The Family legend studio reads a sheet for you: every family type visible in the views and schedules placed on it is listed by category with its instance count, so you never have to hunt for what needs a key. Choose Image schedule to render a plan symbol for each type, store it as the type's Type Image and build a schedule that shows it, or Model legend to create Revit legend views from a template Legend Component, grouped and scaled to fit. A live preview in the middle shows the schedules or the legend as you change the settings.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelLegend ▾Family

Button tooltip: “Create a family legend from a sheet.”
Before you start
  • A sheet with the plan views (and any schedules) whose family types you want to document. Open it first; otherwise the studio selects the first sheet in the project.
  • A Legend view holding at least one Legend Component. It is the template: its view direction, detail level and graphics are used for every symbol. The studio needs it for Model legend and for plan-symbol images.
  • Decide which parameters each category should show, for example Type Name plus a botanical or common name for planting.
Tutorial video

Watch Family in action

Video coming soon

Family walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Family: Family Legend set to Image schedule in a project with no sheets yet
Family Legend set to Image schedule in a project with no sheets yet · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Image schedule / Model legend

    Chooses the approach; the hint beneath explains what each one produces.

  2. 2
    Source sheet / Find a sheet…

    The sheet whose placed views and schedules supply the family types; type to filter a long list.

  3. 3
    Template legend (holds a Legend Component)

    The legend view whose Legend Component sets the view direction and graphics for every symbol.

  4. 4
    Open in Revit / Re-read model

    Opens the template legend to check it, or refreshes the lists after you change something in Revit.

  5. 5
    Search family or type… / Missing only / All / None

    Filters the list, selects only types with no Type Image yet, or selects or clears everything.

  6. 6
    Family types on the sheet

    Every type by category with its 3D thumbnail, instance Count and Image state; tick types or whole categories.

  7. 7
    Per category

    Each selected category gets its own box for columns, grouping and sorting, or label values for a model legend.

  8. 8
    Images

    Symbol, Image size, Line weight, whether to Regenerate existing Type Images, and Keep PNG copies in a folder.

  9. 9
    Schedules

    One schedule per category, its Title text and Title layout, and what happens to Existing schedules.

  10. 10
    Preview

    Shows the schedules or the legend as you change the settings.

  11. 11
    Status

    Progress and the run summary appear here in the footer.

  12. 12
    Run

    Generates the images and schedules, or creates the legend, with the current settings.

  13. 13
    Settings / Preview / Types / Reset

    Hide or show each panel of the studio; Reset brings them all back.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Family

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Legend ▾ → Family.

  2. 02

    Choose the approach. Press Image schedule or Model legend at the top of the settings panel. The hint beneath explains what each one produces.

  3. 03

    Pick the sheet and template. Choose Source sheet (type in Find a sheet… to filter a long list) and the Template legend that holds the Legend Component. Open in Revit opens the template legend so you can check it; Re-read model refreshes the lists after you change something in Revit.

  4. 04

    Select the family types. The Family types on the sheet list on the right shows every type by category with its 3D thumbnail, instance Count and Image state. Tick types or whole categories, search with Search family or type…, or press Missing only to select just the types that have no Type Image yet. All and None select or clear everything.

  5. 05

    Set up each category. Under Per category, each selected category gets its own box. For an image schedule, choose the columns (field and optional heading), reorder them with the arrow, strip type-name prefixes such as LF-PL-, and set Group rows by, A–Z, Group header and Blank line between groups. For a model legend, tick the label values shown under each symbol in order, set the Separator and the Grouping parameter.

  6. 06

    Image schedule settings. Under Images, choose the Symbol (Legend symbol (plan) or 3D family preview), Image size and Line weight, and decide whether to Regenerate existing Type Images and Keep PNG copies in a folder. Under Schedules, set the Title text, Title layout, what happens to Existing schedules, which prefixes to strip from headings, and whether to show Bold title and headers and a Count column.

  7. 07

    Model legend settings. Under Legend, enter the Legend name, the number of Columns, how to Group and scale by and the Max scale groups, and choose sorting, Include title, Instance counts, Place on the source sheet and Auto-update labels.

  8. 08

    Check the preview and run. The middle panel previews the schedules or the legend; family and type names are shown, other parameter values appear as their name in brackets until Revit fills them in. Press the button at the bottom right, which reads Generate images + schedules, Generate images or Create legend. Progress and the summary appear in the footer.

What you get

With Image schedule, each selected type has a plan-symbol (or 3D) image assigned as its Type Image, or to the LF_Type Image parameter where the built-in Type Image cannot be set, and each selected category has a schedule named from your title text that shows the image beside the chosen columns. With Model legend, one or more Revit legend views are created from the template Legend Component, one per group at a scale that suits its symbols, and arranged on the source sheet if you asked for it; otherwise Revit opens the new legend. The legend is created in one undo step named "LF-Family Legend: Create Legend", and the footer summary lists the scales used and any types that were skipped.

Good to know

Tips

  • The Image column tells you where each type stands: Assigned, Empty, LF fallback (the image will go to LF_Type Image), Unavailable, or Black background for an older image that Revit shows on black; running again renders those on white.
  • Changing Line weight ticks Regenerate existing Type Images for you, because existing images only change when they are rendered again.
  • With Auto-update labels on, the legend text and instance counts follow later changes to the source family types and placed instances.
  • In-place families and title blocks are never listed. If a type you expect is missing, check that a view on the sheet actually shows an instance of it.
  • Settings, Preview and Types in the footer hide or show each panel, and Reset brings them all back. Drag the dividers to resize the side panels; the compact button docks the studio as a strip beside the Revit view.
Control reference · 45 controls

Every control and what it does

Family Legend45 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Image scheduleOption

Renders a plan symbol for each selected type, assigns it as the Type Image and builds one schedule per category.

Model legendOption

Creates Revit legend views from the template legend, grouped and scaled to fit, and can place them on the source sheet.

Source sheetSelector

The sheet whose placed views and schedules supply the family types.

Find a sheet…Input

Filters the sheet list by sheet number or name.

Template legend (holds a Legend Component)Selector

The legend view whose Legend Component sets the view direction and graphics for every symbol.

Open in RevitButton

Opens the template legend in Revit.

Re-read modelButton

Reads the sheets, legends and family types from Revit again, keeping your settings.

SymbolSelector

Legend symbol (plan) renders the plan symbol through the template; 3D family preview uses the family's 3D thumbnail.

Image sizeSelector

Size of each rendered image: 256, 512 or 1024 px.

Line weightSelector

How heavy the symbol lines are in the image: as in the views, bold, extra bold or hairline.

Regenerate existing Type ImagesOption

Renders and replaces images that are already assigned instead of keeping them.

Keep PNG copiesOption

Also saves every rendered image as a PNG file in the output folder.

Output folderInput

Folder for the PNG copies.

Browse…Button

Chooses the folder for the PNG copies.

Create or update one schedule per categoryOption

Builds a schedule for each selected category; turn it off to only generate images.

Title textInput

Text used in the schedule titles.

Title layoutSelector

Category + title, title + category, or the exact title text.

Existing schedulesSelector

Update the schedule with the matching name, or create a new one.

Strip these prefixes from headingsInput

Comma-separated prefixes removed from the visible column headings.

Bold title and headersOption

Sets the schedule title and column headers in bold.

Count columnOption

Adds a Count column with the number of placed instances.

Legend nameInput

Name of the legend view to create.

ColumnsSelector

Number of columns the legend items are arranged in.

Max scale groupsSelector

The most scale groups, and so legend views, that grouping by displayed size may create.

Group and scale bySelector

Category, a type parameter per category, displayed size, or no grouping (one legend at the template scale).

Sort by categoryOption

Orders the legend by category before the label text.

AscendingOption

Sorts the legend items A to Z; off sorts Z to A.

Include titleOption

Adds the legend name as a title.

Instance countsOption

Adds the number of placed instances after each label.

Place on the source sheetOption

Arranges the finished legend views on the source sheet.

Auto-update labelsOption

Keeps the legend text and counts in step with later changes to the source types and instances.

Search family or type…Input

Filters the family type list.

Missing onlyButton

Selects only the types that have no Type Image yet.

AllButton

Selects every family type on the sheet.

NoneButton

Clears the type selection.

Family types on the sheetList

Every legendable family type on the sheet, by category, with 3D thumbnail, instance count and image state.

+ Add columnButton

Adds another schedule column for that category.

Group rows bySelector

The parameter the category's schedule rows are grouped and sorted by.

Group headerOption

Shows a heading row for each group in the schedule.

Blank line between groupsOption

Adds an empty row between schedule groups.

SeparatorInput

Text placed between the label values in a model legend.

Grouping parameterSelector

The type parameter used to group this category when grouping by type parameter.

Settings / Preview / TypesButton

Hide or show each panel of the studio.

ResetButton

Shows all three panels again.

RunButton

Generates the images and schedules, or creates the legend, with the current settings.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Legend · Filter

Filter

Turn the view filters of a view or view template into a legend drafting view, with a swatch that matches each filter's graphics, its name and optional status notes.

Filter legends are tedious to draw by hand and go stale the moment someone changes a colour. The Filter legend studio reads the filters assigned to a view or template, shows each one with the fill pattern and colours it actually applies, and previews the finished legend on paper at its real size in millimetres. When the layout looks right, one click builds the legend as Filled Regions and text notes in a drafting view, ready to place on a sheet.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelLegend ▾Filter

Button tooltip: “Create a legend from view-filter graphics.”
Before you start
  • A view or view template with filters assigned in Visibility/Graphics. Only views and templates that carry filters are listed.
  • Graphic overrides on those filters: the swatches are drawn from each filter's surface pattern and colour overrides. A filter without a fill override gets a plain grey swatch.
  • The project needs a Drafting View type, because the legend is created as a drafting view.
Tutorial video

Watch Filter in action

Video coming soon

Filter walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Filter: Filter Legend studio previewing the one filter of floor plan L1
Filter Legend studio previewing the one filter of floor plan L1 · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Source view or template

    Click the view whose filters you want; Only views hides view templates and Find a view… filters a long list.

  2. 2
    Open in Revit

    Opens the selected source view in Revit.

  3. 3
    Assigned filters

    The source's filters with their swatch and state; ticked filters become legend rows. All and None select or clear them, Find a filter… narrows the list.

  4. 4
    Title

    Add a title, the Title text, Append the source view name, and the Column headers and Status notes switches.

  5. 5
    Swatches

    Region types creates one reusable Filled Region type per filter graphic; View overrides draws plain regions coloured only in the legend view.

  6. 6
    Layout (mm on paper)

    Legend width, margins, swatch size, row gap, text offset and width, and the three text sizes, all in mm on paper.

  7. 7
    Defaults / Re-read model

    Defaults puts every layout and title value back; Re-read model reads the views, templates and filters from Revit again.

  8. 8
    Preview

    The legend on paper at its real size; it updates as you type. Scroll to zoom and drag to pan.

  9. 9
    Fit

    Shows the whole legend in the preview.

  10. 10
    100% / PNG

    100% shows the preview at 1 mm = 4 pixels; PNG saves the preview as an image.

  11. 11
    128 × 33 mm · 1 row

    The legend size in millimetres and the row count.

  12. 12
    Create legend

    Builds the legend drafting view from the ticked filters and opens it; the footer line beside it reports the filter rows.

  13. 13
    Settings / Preview / Filters / Reset

    Hide or show each panel of the studio; Reset brings all three back and refits the preview.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Filter

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Legend ▾ → Filter.

  2. 02

    Choose the source. In Source view or template on the right, click the view whose filters you want to document. Leave Only views on to list regular views, or turn it off to include view templates; type in Find a view… to filter a long list. Open in Revit opens the selected view.

  3. 03

    Select the filters. Assigned filters lists every filter of the source with its swatch and state (Visible, Hidden or Disabled). All of them start selected; untick the ones to leave out, or use All and None. Find a filter… narrows the list.

  4. 04

    Set the title. Under Title, keep Add a title on and enter the Title text. Append the source view name adds the view name to the title. Turn Column headers and Status notes on or off.

  5. 05

    Choose the swatch type. Under Swatches, pick Region types to create one reusable Filled Region type per filter graphic, or View overrides to draw plain regions coloured only inside the legend view.

  6. 06

    Adjust the layout. Under Layout (mm on paper), set the legend Width, margins, swatch size, Row gap, text offset and width, and the three text sizes. The preview in the middle updates as you type; Defaults puts every value back.

  7. 07

    Check the preview. Scroll to zoom and drag to pan the preview. Fit shows the whole legend, 100% shows it at 1 mm = 4 pixels, and PNG saves the preview as an image. The card in the bottom corner shows the legend size in millimetres and the row count.

  8. 08

    Create the legend. Press Create legend. Revit opens the new drafting view and the footer reports how many filter rows were generated.

What you get

A drafting view named after the source view now holds the legend: an optional title, optional column headers, and for each selected filter a Filled Region swatch with the filter's fill pattern, colours and line colour, plus a text note with its name and any status notes. With Region types the swatches use Filled Region types you can reuse elsewhere; with View overrides they are plain regions overridden in this view only. The whole legend is one undo step named "LF-Filter Legend: Create Legend", and the drafting view can be placed on any sheet like a normal view.

Good to know

Tips

  • Running the studio again for the same source view updates the same legend view: its generated contents are cleared and drawn again, so you never collect duplicates.
  • Status notes add "Disabled in source view", "Hidden in source view", the transparency percentage and "Halftone" under a filter's name, which is useful for review sets.
  • Your title, swatch and layout settings are remembered for the next legend you create.
  • Double-click a source view in the list to create its legend straight away with the current settings.
  • Settings, Preview and Filters in the footer hide or show each panel and Reset brings them back. Drag the dividers to resize the side panels; the compact button docks the studio as a strip beside the Revit view.
Control reference · 35 controls

Every control and what it does

Filter Legend35 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Add a titleOption

Places a title text at the top of the legend.

Title textInput

The legend title; empty uses "Filter Legend".

Append the source view nameOption

Adds the source view name to the title.

Column headersOption

Adds the Surface and Filter column headings above the rows.

Status notesOption

Adds Disabled, Hidden, transparency and halftone notes under a filter's name.

Region typesOption

Creates one reusable Filled Region type per filter graphic.

View overridesOption

Draws plain regions and colours them with overrides in the legend view only.

WidthInput

Overall legend width on paper, in mm.

Left marginInput

Space to the left of the swatches, in mm.

Top marginInput

Space above the title, in mm.

Swatch WInput

Swatch width, in mm.

Swatch HInput

Swatch height, in mm.

Row gapInput

Vertical space between rows, in mm.

Text offsetInput

Gap between a swatch and its text, in mm.

Text widthInput

Width of the filter name text, in mm; longer names wrap.

Header gapInput

Space between the column headers and the first row, in mm.

Item textInput

Text size of the filter names, in mm.

Header textInput

Text size of the column headers, in mm.

Title textInput

Text size of the title, in mm.

DefaultsButton

Restores the LandForm default layout and title settings.

Re-read modelButton

Reads the views, templates and filters from Revit again.

FitButton

Fits the whole legend in the preview.

100%Button

Shows the preview at 1 mm = 4 pixels.

PNGButton

Saves the preview as a PNG image.

Find a view…Input

Filters the source list by view name or view type.

Only viewsOption

Lists only regular views; turn it off to include view templates.

Source view or templateList

Views and templates that carry filters, with their kind and filter count. Double-click one to create its legend.

Open in RevitButton

Opens the selected source view in Revit.

Find a filter…Input

Filters the assigned filter list by name or state.

AllButton

Selects every assigned filter.

NoneButton

Clears the filter selection.

Assigned filtersList

The source's filters with their swatch and state; ticked filters become legend rows.

Settings / Preview / FiltersButton

Hide or show each panel of the studio.

ResetButton

Shows all three panels again and refits the preview.

Create legendButton

Builds the legend drafting view from the selected filters and settings.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Color Splash

Color Splash

Colour the elements visible in the active view by the value of any instance or type parameter, as quick element overrides or as proper Revit view filters.

Color Splash is the fastest way to see how a model is made up: which floors use which build-up, which planting carries which botanical name, which toposolids are still unassigned. You pick a category and a parameter, LandForm lists every value it finds in the view with a count and a colour, and one click paints the view. Choose Apply colors for a quick check, or Create filters when the colouring should stay in the view, travel with a view template and appear in Visibility/Graphics.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelColor Splash

Button tooltip: “Color visible elements by a parameter value.”
Before you start
  • A model view (plan, section, elevation or 3D) where Revit allows visibility overrides. Sheets and views that cannot use overrides are refused.
  • The elements to colour must be visible in that view; only visible model elements are read, so hide or crop the view first if you want a smaller set.
  • A project document; Color Splash does not run in the Family Editor.
Tutorial video

Watch Color Splash in action

Video coming soon

Color Splash walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Color Splash: Color Splash colouring Floors by Type Name with a teal palette
Color Splash colouring Floors by Type Name with a teal palette · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Category

    The model category to colour; only categories visible in the active view are listed.

  2. 2
    Parameter

    The instance or type parameter whose values set the colours; type to narrow the list.

  3. 3
    Value / Count / Color

    Every value found in the view with its element count and colour; double-click a row to choose its colour.

  4. 4
    Parameter values

    The colour palette; changing it recolours every value.

  5. 5
    Randomize / Gradient

    Recolour from the palette, or blend evenly from the first colour to the last.

  6. 6
    Save / Load

    Store the current colours as a scheme, or apply a saved scheme so the same values get the same colours.

  7. 7
    Override targets

    Choose whether lines, foreground fills and/or background fills take the colour.

  8. 8
    Prefix / Category / Parameter / Source / Value

    The text and name parts used to build each filter name.

  9. 9
    Preview

    Shows the first filter name as it will be created.

  10. 10
    Apply colors

    Colours the listed elements with element overrides in this view only.

  11. 11
    Create filters

    Builds or updates one view filter per value and adds it to the active view.

  12. 12
    Select all

    Selects every listed element in Revit so you can inspect them.

  13. 13
    Reset

    Removes this category's colour filters from the view and the project, and clears the element overrides.

  14. 14
    Status line

    Shows guidance for the next step.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Color Splash

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Color Splash.

  2. 02

    Open the right view. Make the plan, section or 3D view you want to colour the active view, then start Color Splash.

  3. 03

    Choose the data. Pick the Category, then the Parameter. Type part of a parameter name in the box to narrow the list. The value table fills with every value found in the view and how many elements carry it.

  4. 04

    Set the colours. Pick a palette from the list above the table. Double-click any row to choose its colour by hand, press Gradient to blend from the first colour to the last, or Randomize to start again from the palette.

    Load applies a saved scheme so the same values get the same colours on every drawing; Save stores the current colours for next time.

  5. 05

    Choose what gets coloured. Under Override targets, tick Projection and cut line color, Surface and cut foreground pattern and/or Surface and cut background pattern. The foreground pattern alone gives the familiar solid colour fill.

  6. 06

    Colour the view. Press Apply colors for element overrides in this view only. Or set the Prefix and name tokens under Filter naming, check the Preview, and press Create filters to build one view filter per value.

  7. 07

    Check and adjust. Look at the view, change a colour and press the same button again to update it. Press Select all to select every listed element in Revit if you want to inspect them.

  8. 08

    Remove the colouring (optional). Press Reset to remove the colour filters of the current category and parameter from the view, delete them from the project, and clear the element overrides on that category.

What you get

With Apply colors, every listed element in the active view carries a graphic override in its value's colour; nothing outside this view changes. With Create filters, the project gains one rule-based view filter per value (for example "Colors - Floors - Type Name - LF_Paving"), each added to the active view with its colour override, so the colouring shows in Visibility/Graphics and can be copied to a view template. Each button is one undo step: "LF-Color Rules: Apply Overrides", "LF-Color Rules: Create Filters" or "LF-Color Rules: Reset Overrides".

Good to know

Tips

  • When lines and fills are both ticked, the line colour is slightly faded so edges stay readable against the fill.
  • Filters are matched by name, so pressing Create filters again with the same naming updates the existing filters instead of making duplicates.
  • Reset only removes filters in the active view whose names match the current prefix, category and parameter, so filters you made by hand are left alone. Matching filters are deleted from the project, so they also disappear from other views that use them.
  • Values are sorted numerically when they are numbers, so lengths and areas read from small to large.
  • Element overrides are lost if someone resets the view's overrides; use Create filters for colouring that needs to last.
Control reference · 21 controls

Every control and what it does

Color Rule21 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Category Combo BoxSelector

Model categories that have elements visible in the active view. Choosing one reloads the parameters and values.

Parameter Combo BoxSelector

Instance and type parameters of the category; type to search. Type Name is selected by default.

Projection and cut line colorOption

Applies the value colour to projection and cut lines.

Surface and cut foreground patternOption

Applies the value colour as a solid foreground fill on surfaces and cuts.

Surface and cut background patternOption

Applies the value colour as a solid background fill on surfaces and cuts.

Filter Prefix Text BoxInput

Text at the start of every filter name; empty uses "Colors".

CategoryOption

Adds the category name to the filter names.

ParameterOption

Adds the parameter name to the filter names.

SourceOption

Adds Instance or Type to the filter names.

ValueOption

A value token is required so every generated filter name remains unique.

Palette Combo BoxSelector

The colour palette; changing it recolours every value.

RandomizeButton

Recolours every value from the selected palette, replacing hand-picked colours.

GradientButton

Blends the colours evenly from the first value to the last. Needs at least two values.

SaveButton

Saves the value colours to a Color Rules scheme file (.cschn).

LoadButton

Loads a scheme file and applies its colours by matching value or by row position.

Select allButton

Selects every element in the value list in Revit.

ClearButton

Clears the Revit selection.

Values Data GridTable

Each value with its element count and colour; double-click a row to choose its colour.

Create filtersButton

Creates or updates one view filter per value and adds it to the active view with that colour.

ResetButton

Removes this category's colour filters from the view, deletes them from the project and clears the element overrides on its elements.

Apply colorsButton

Applies the colours to the listed elements as element overrides in the active view.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Export · Document Export

Document Export

Pick the sheets, views and 3D views you want to issue, choose the file formats each one needs, and publish the whole package to one folder in a single run.

Document Export replaces the round of separate Print, Export DWG and Export NWC dialogs that a drawing issue normally takes. Everything printable in the project is listed in three tabs; you tick Export on the rows you need, add PDF, DWG, DWF, DWFx, NWC or IFC per row, and press Export package. Along the way you can filter by a Revit sheet set or Sheet List schedule, build file names from any sheet or view parameter, add or remove a project revision on the selected sheets, save the selection as a new Revit sheet set, and write a transmittal CSV that lists what was issued. The window is modeless, so you can keep working in Revit while it is open, and all of its settings are remembered between sessions.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelExport ▾Document Export

Button tooltip: “Export coordinated sheets and views.”
Before you start
  • A project with at least one printable sheet, view or 3D view. Placeholder sheets, view templates and views that cannot be printed are not listed.
  • An output folder on disk. Decide whether you want subfolders that mirror the Project Browser organisation.
  • Format prerequisites: NWC needs the Navisworks exporter for your Revit version, DWF and DWFx need Revit's DWF export component, and the two DWG post-processes (Bind images as OLE and Shared-coordinate sheet XREFs) need plain AutoCAD 2022 to 2027 installed on the same computer.
  • If you want to add a revision to the issued sheets, create the project revision first or have a description and date ready for a new one.
Tutorial video

Watch Document Export in action

Video coming soon

Document Export walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 12 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Document Export: Document Export on the Sheets tab with the setup panel hidden
Document Export on the Sheets tab with the setup panel hidden · 12 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    SEARCH QUEUE

    Filters the active tab by number, name, type, revision, scale, level or status.

  2. 2
    SHEET SOURCE

    Shows all sheets, a saved sheet set or the sheets of a Sheet List schedule.

  3. 3
    Sheets, Views, 3D Views

    The three lists of printable items; Views and 3D Views load the first time you open them.

  4. 4
    Check source, Check filtered, Uncheck filtered

    Ticks the sheets of the chosen source, or ticks or clears Export on every visible row.

  5. 5
    Queue grid

    One row per item with its Export tick and a tick per format; highlight several rows to change them together.

  6. 6
    FORMATS FOR ROWS

    PDF, DWG, DWF and DWFx switch a format on or off for the highlighted rows, or the checked rows when none are highlighted.

  7. 7
    Clear row formats

    Removes every format from the target rows and keeps their Export ticks.

  8. 8
    Add revision, Remove revision

    Opens the revision picker to add a project revision to, or remove one from, the highlighted or checked sheets.

  9. 9
    Selection counter

    How many items are selected for export and which formats they carry.

  10. 10
    Show setup

    Reveals the Naming, Package and Options tabs.

  11. 11
    Export package

    Checks the folder, selection and formats, then writes every file.

  12. 12
    Status line

    Shows the selection and file count, and the progress of a running export.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Document Export

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Export ▾ → Document Export.

  2. 02

    Find the rows you need. Type in the SEARCH QUEUE box to filter the active tab by number, name, type, revision, scale, level or status; several words narrow the list further. On the Sheets tab, pick a saved sheet set or a Sheet List · <schedule> entry under SHEET SOURCE to show only those sheets.

  3. 03

    Check Export. Tick Export on each row, or use Check filtered to tick every visible row and Uncheck filtered to clear them. Check source ticks exactly the sheets in the selected sheet set or Sheet List schedule and unticks the rest.

    Tick a box while several rows are highlighted and the same change is applied to all of them.

  4. 04

    Assign formats. Highlight rows (or rely on the checked rows) and press PDF, DWG, DWF or DWFx under FORMATS FOR ROWS to switch that format on; press again to switch it off. On the 3D Views tab the buttons are DWG, DWF, DWFx, NWC and IFC. You can also tick the individual format columns in the grid. Clear row formats removes every format from the target rows. The counter on the right shows how many items are selected and which formats they carry.

  5. 05

    Open the setup panel. Press Show setup in the header to reveal the Naming, Package and Options tabs.

  6. 06

    Set file naming. On Naming, the default rule is <Sheet Number>-<Sheet Name> for sheets and <Type>-<View Name> for views. Press Edit sheet or Edit view next to PDF, DWG or DWFx to open the naming-rule editor, where you add parameters, type a prefix, suffix and separator for each, reorder them and watch the preview. Save a set of rules as a preset with Save so you can switch between office standards with the preset list.

  7. 07

    Set the package. On Package, choose the Output folder, and tick Create subfolders from Project Browser organization if the files should land in folders that match the browser tree. Optionally type a name and press Create from selected sheets to store the checked sheets as a Revit sheet set, pick a revision (or New revision... with a description and date) and press Add to selected sheets, and decide whether to Create transmittal CSV with the title, project, dates, recipient, format and copies it should record.

  8. 08

    Review format options. On Options, expand PDF, DWG, DWF / DWFx, NWC or IFC to adjust the export settings for each format: hidden planes and boxes for PDF, merged views, shared coordinates and DWG version for DWG, the coordinate system and included data for NWC, the schema and view filter for IFC.

  9. 09

    Export. Press Export package. If Bind images as OLE or Shared-coordinate sheet XREFs is on, LandForm first confirms that AutoCAD will be used. The footer shows a progress bar and the item being written; the close button becomes Cancel and stops the run after the current file. A completion dialog lists how many files were written, where, and anything that was skipped.

What you get

The output folder holds one file per checked item per format, named by the rule for that format, plus the transmittal CSV if you asked for one. PDF files are combined per sheet or view, fitted to the page, in colour. In a workshared model, DWG files are exported with temporary type worksets so the layers are split by Revit type; the worksets are rolled back as soon as the export finishes and the model is left unchanged. Only three actions touch the model, and each is a single undoable step: "LF-Document Export: Create Sheet Set", "LF-Document Export: Add Revision" and "LF-Document Export: Remove Revision". The status line and the completion dialog confirm the file count and folder.

More about Document Export

Export formats

FormatApplies toWhat is written
PDFSheets, viewsOne combined PDF per item, fit to page, centred, colour, high raster quality.
DWGSheets, views, 3D viewsOne DWG per item in the chosen DWG version; sheets can keep merged views, native shared coordinates or shared-coordinate XREFs.
DWF / DWFxSheets, views, 3D viewsOne DWF or DWFx per item, with merged views and optional crop box, object data, textures and rooms.
NWC3D views onlyOne Navisworks cache per 3D view in Shared or Internal coordinates.
IFC3D views onlyOne IFC file per 3D view in the chosen IFC version, optionally limited to what the view shows.
Transmittal CSVPackageA record sheet listing number, revision, name, scale and paper size for every exported item, plus the recipient.
Good to know

Tips

  • The Views and 3D Views tabs load the first time you open them; on a large project give the status line a moment to report how many views were found.
  • NWC and IFC apply only to 3D views. A sheet or 2D view with those formats ticked is skipped and reported at the end rather than failing the run.
  • Format buttons under FORMATS FOR ROWS work on the highlighted rows first and fall back to the checked rows when nothing is highlighted, so highlight a few rows to give them a different mix of formats without changing their Export ticks.
  • Revisions you add here are attached as sheet revisions. Revisions placed by revision clouds cannot be removed from this window and stay on the sheet.
  • When a sheet or view has no matching Project Browser folder, it is saved to the output folder root and a warning is listed in the completion dialog.
  • Bind images as OLE opens AutoCAD after each DWG; AutoCAD may show very large images as blank, and raster images inside rotated blocks, polar arrays or clipped images are not converted. Civil 3D is skipped for this step.
  • Shared-coordinate sheet XREFs is experimental and applies to sheet DWGs only. For a dedicated workflow, use the Sheet Shared DWG tool in the same pulldown.
Control reference · 111 controls

Every control and what it does

Document Export99 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Header ToggleToggle

The + / − header on each group of the Options tab. Click it to expand or collapse that format's settings.

Toggle SettingsButton

Shows or hides the Export setup panel with the Naming, Package and Options tabs. Reads Show setup or Hide setup.

Queue SearchInput

Filters the active tab by sheet number, view name, type, revision, scale, level or status. Several words must all match.

Selected Sheet Set FilterSelector

Limits the Sheets tab to All Sheets, a saved Revit sheet set, or the sheets in a Sheet List schedule.

Check sourceButton

Ticks Export on exactly the sheets in the selected sheet set or Sheet List schedule and unticks the rest. With All Sheets it ticks every visible sheet.

Check filteredButton

Ticks Export on every row currently shown by the filter in the active tab.

Uncheck filteredButton

Removes the Export tick from every row currently shown by the filter in the active tab.

PDFButton

Switches PDF on for the highlighted rows, or for the checked Export rows when none are highlighted; press again to switch it off. Hidden on the 3D Views tab.

DWGButton

Switches DWG on or off for the highlighted rows, or for the checked Export rows when none are highlighted.

DWFButton

Switches DWF on or off for the highlighted rows, or for the checked Export rows when none are highlighted.

DWFxButton

Switches DWFx on or off for the highlighted rows, or for the checked Export rows when none are highlighted.

NWCButton

Switches NWC on or off for the highlighted 3D view rows, or for the checked ones when none are highlighted. Shown on the 3D Views tab only.

IFCButton

Switches IFC on or off for the highlighted 3D view rows, or for the checked ones when none are highlighted. Shown on the 3D Views tab only.

Clear row formatsButton

Removes every format from the highlighted rows, or from the checked Export rows when none are highlighted. Export ticks are kept.

Add Revision To Selected SheetsButton

Opens the revision picker so you can add an existing project revision to the highlighted sheets, or to the checked Export sheets. Sheets tab only.

Remove Revision From Selected SheetsButton

Opens the revision picker so you can remove a manually assigned revision, or all of them, from the highlighted or checked sheets. Sheets tab only.

SheetsTab

Lists every printable sheet with its number, current revision and name.

Sheet Queue GridTable

One row per sheet with Export and format ticks. Highlight several rows to change them together.

Is QueuedOption

Includes this sheet in the export.

Include PdfOption

Writes a PDF for this row.

Include DwgOption

Writes a DWG for this row.

Include DwfOption

Writes a DWF for this row.

Include DwfxOption

Writes a DWFx for this row.

ViewsTab

Lists every printable 2D view with its type, name, scale and level. Loads when first opened.

View Queue GridTable

One row per view with Export and format ticks.

Is QueuedOption

Includes this view in the export.

3D ViewsTab

Lists every 3D view (orthographic and perspective) with its status. Loads when first opened.

Three DView Queue GridTable

One row per 3D view with Export, NWC, DWG, DWF, DWFx and IFC ticks.

Is QueuedOption

Includes this 3D view in the export.

Include NwcOption

Writes a Navisworks NWC for this 3D view.

Include IfcOption

Writes an IFC file for this 3D view.

NamingTab

Holds the naming presets and the per-format file naming rules.

Selected Naming Preset NameSelector

Loads a saved naming preset. Its rules replace the current PDF, DWG and DWFx rules.

Naming Preset NameInput

Name under which Save stores the current rules. Saving with an existing name overwrites that preset.

SaveButton

Saves the current naming rules as a preset with the typed name.

DeleteButton

Deletes the selected naming preset. At least one preset must remain.

Configure Active NamingButton

Opens the naming-rule editor for PDF files of the active tab (sheets or views).

Configure Active NamingButton

Opens the naming-rule editor for DWG files of the active tab (sheets or views).

Configure Active NamingButton

Opens the naming-rule editor for DWFx files of the active tab (sheets or views). DWF, NWC and IFC use the default rule.

PackageTab

Holds the output folder, sheet set, revision and transmittal settings.

BrowseButton

Opens a folder picker for the output folder.

Destination DirectoryInput

Folder the files are written to. Created if it does not exist.

Create subfolders from Project Browser organizationOption

Saves each file into subfolders that match the sheet or view organisation in the Project Browser. Items without a matching folder go to the root.

New Sheet Set NameInput

Name for the Revit sheet set created from the checked sheets. A number is appended if the name already exists.

Create from selected sheetsButton

Creates a Revit sheet set containing the checked sheets, so the same selection can be used in Print and in SHEET SOURCE later.

Selected Revision OptionSelector

Chooses New revision... or an existing project revision to add with Add to selected sheets.

New Revision DescriptionInput

Description for a new revision. Required when New revision... is selected.

New Revision DateInput

Date text for a new revision.

Mark issuedOption

Marks a new revision as issued when it is created.

Add to selected sheetsButton

Adds the chosen revision to every checked sheet, creating it first if New revision... is selected.

Create transmittal CSVOption

Writes a transmittal record CSV into the output folder at the end of the export.

Transmittal Record TitleInput

Title line of the transmittal record and its file name.

Project Display NameInput

Project name written to the transmittal. Defaults to the Project Information name or the file name.

Package Issue DateInput

Transmittal date written to the record. Defaults to today.

Package Report DateInput

Report date written to the record. Defaults to today.

Recipient Display NameInput

Contact name written at the end of the transmittal.

Recipient Delivery FormatInput

Delivery format code written next to the recipient, for example C.

Recipient Copy CountInput

Number of copies written next to the recipient. Whole numbers only.

OptionsTab

Holds the export settings for each format.

PDFSection

Settings applied to every PDF written.

Hide reference/work planesOption

Leaves reference and work planes out of the PDF.

Hide scope boxesOption

Leaves scope boxes out of the PDF.

Hide crop boundariesOption

Leaves crop boundaries out of the PDF.

Hide unreferenced tagsOption

Leaves view tags that reference no sheet out of the PDF.

View links in blueOption

Prints view references in blue so they stand out as links.

Thin halftone linesOption

Replaces halftone lines with thin lines.

Mask coincident edgesOption

Masks edges that coincide so they are not drawn twice.

Raster processingOption

Always uses raster processing for the PDF.

Stop on errorOption

Stops the PDF export at the first error instead of continuing.

DWGSection

Settings applied to every DWG written.

Use Shared Coordinate Sheet Xrefs In DwgOption

Experimental, sheet DWGs only. Keeps each paper-space viewport, exports its plan view as a shared-coordinate XREF and uses AutoCAD in the background to restore the viewport's centre and scale. Needs AutoCAD 2022 to 2027.

Merge sheet viewsOption

Exports the views on a sheet into one DWG instead of one XREF per view.

Revit native shared coordinatesOption

Uses Revit's own shared-coordinate export for the DWG geometry.

3D solids as ACISOption

Exports 3D solids as ACIS solids rather than polymesh.

Bind images as OLEOption

Opens plain AutoCAD after each DWG to convert raster image references into embedded OLE objects. Civil 3D is skipped.

Dwg VersionSelector

DWG file version: Default, R2018, R2013, R2010 or R2007.

DWF / DWFxSection

Settings applied to DWF and DWFx files.

Merge viewsOption

Exports the views on a sheet into one DWF or DWFx.

Show crop boxOption

Keeps the crop box visible in the DWF or DWFx.

Object dataOption

Includes element properties in the DWF.

TexturesOption

Includes material textures in the DWF.

Rooms and areasOption

Includes rooms and areas in the DWF.

NWCSection

Settings applied to every Navisworks NWC written.

Nwc Coordinate ModeSelector

Exports the NWC in Shared or Internal coordinates.

Linked CADOption

Converts linked CAD files into the NWC.

Element propertiesOption

Includes element properties in the NWC.

Divide into levelsOption

Splits the NWC by level.

Find materialsOption

Searches for missing materials when writing the NWC.

Room geometryOption

Includes room geometry in the NWC.

LinksOption

Includes linked Revit models in the NWC.

Element IDsOption

Writes Revit element IDs into the NWC.

IFCSection

Settings applied to every IFC file written.

Ifc VersionSelector

IFC schema: Default, IFC4, IFC4RV, IFC4x3, IFC2x3, IFC2x3CV2 or IFC2x3FM.

Use 3D view filterOption

Exports only the elements visible in the 3D view, using the view's geometry.

Base quantitiesOption

Writes base quantities into the IFC.

Split walls/columns by levelOption

Splits walls and columns at each level in the IFC.

Ifc Space Boundary LevelInput

Space boundary level 0, 1 or 2 for the IFC.

Export packageButton

Validates the folder, selection and formats, confirms any AutoCAD step, then writes every file and the transmittal.

Cancel Or CloseButton

Closes the window, or cancels the running export after the current file when an export is in progress.

Export Naming Rules9 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Parameter Queue SearchInput

Filters the list of available sheet or view parameters; several words must all match.

ClearButton

Clears the parameter search so the whole list is shown again.

Selected Available FieldList

Sheet or view parameters you can add to the file name, including every parameter found on the project's sheets or views.

Add parameterButton

Appends the selected parameter to the naming rule. The first part gets a - separator.

Selected Rule PartTable

The parts of the file name in order. Type a Prefix, Suffix and Separator for each; Sample shows the value from the first sheet or view.

Move upButton

Moves the selected part one place earlier in the file name.

Move downButton

Moves the selected part one place later in the file name.

RemoveButton

Removes the selected part from the rule.

RunButton

Applies the rule to the format and tab it was opened for. Parts with an empty value are skipped at export time.

Revision Picker3 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Revision GridTable

Project revisions with number, description, date and issued state. Double-click a row to choose it.

Remove all revisionsButton

Removes every manually assigned revision from the target sheets. Revisions controlled by revision clouds remain. Shown when removing.

ApplyButton

Labelled Run. Adds or removes the selected revision on the target sheets in one undoable step.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Export · Sheet Shared DWG

Sheet Shared DWG

Export selected sheets as DWG packages whose plan viewports sit on true shared coordinates, so the drawings overlay survey and civil files correctly. Experimental.

Revit's own sheet DWG export writes model geometry at project-internal coordinates, which is useless to anyone who needs to drop your sheet onto a coordinated base. Sheet Shared DWG exports each sheet's paper space as normal, exports every plan viewport on it again as a separate shared-coordinate DWG, then runs AutoCAD in the background to attach those drawings as XREFs and restore each viewport's Revit centre, scale and rotation. The title block and sheet annotation are never touched. Use it only when coordinated model space must be shared; for ordinary sheet output, several formats at once or plotted-sheet delivery, use Document Export.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelExport ▾Sheet Shared DWG

Button tooltip: “Experimental DWG-only export. Use only when shared-coordinate model space is required.”
Before you start
  • AutoCAD 2022 to 2027 on the same computer. LandForm prefers AutoCAD Core Console and runs it hidden; if no Core Console is found it drives AutoCAD itself, hidden, and a Civil 3D installation is accepted for this step.
  • Embed images additionally needs plain AutoCAD 2022 to 2027; Civil 3D is skipped for image embedding, and the tool offers to continue without it.
  • Sheets qualify when they are printable and carry at least one floor plan, ceiling plan, area plan or structural plan viewport. The tool refuses to open when no sheet qualifies.
  • An output folder for the sheet DWGs, their XREF files and the log. Expect several DWGs per sheet.
Tutorial video

Watch Sheet Shared DWG in action

Video coming soon

Sheet Shared DWG walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 12 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Sheet Shared DWG: Sheet Shared DWG with one eligible sheet ticked
Sheet Shared DWG with one eligible sheet ticked · 12 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Notice

    A reminder to use this tool only when shared-coordinate model space must be shared; use Document Export otherwise.

  2. 2
    OUTPUT FOLDER, Browse

    The folder for the sheet DWGs, their XREF files and the logs; remembered for next time.

  3. 3
    Embed images

    Converts raster image references into embedded OLE objects using plain AutoCAD.

  4. 4
    Bind XREFs

    Binds the plan drawings into the sheet DWG as blocks, so one file carries everything.

  5. 5
    DWG VERSION

    Pick an older DWG format if the recipient needs one.

  6. 6
    Search

    Filters the sheet list by number or name.

  7. 7
    Select visible, Clear

    Ticks every filtered sheet, or unticks everything.

  8. 8
    Sheet list

    Tick Export per sheet; Plan views shows how many shared-coordinate XREFs it will produce and Status reports progress.

  9. 9
    Selection summary

    How many eligible sheets are ticked.

  10. 10
    Export selected DWGs

    Confirms the summary, then exports each ticked sheet and runs the AutoCAD correction.

  11. 11
    Status line

    Guidance before the run, then each sheet and view being written.

  12. 12
    Close

    Closes the window; during an export it becomes Cancel and stops after the current safe step.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Sheet Shared DWG

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Export ▾ → Sheet Shared DWG.

  2. 02

    Choose where the package goes. Type or Browse to the OUTPUT FOLDER. The folder and the options below are remembered for next time.

  3. 03

    Set the package options. Tick Embed images to convert raster image references in the sheet and its XREFs into embedded OLE objects (AutoCAD opens briefly for each file). Tick Bind XREFs if the recipient should get a single self-contained sheet DWG with the plan drawings bound in as blocks. Pick a DWG VERSION if the recipient needs an older format.

  4. 04

    Select the sheets. Tick Export on each sheet, or type part of a number or name in the search box and press Select visible to tick every filtered row. Clear unticks everything. The Plan views column tells you how many shared-coordinate XREFs each sheet will produce, and the summary above the list reads N of M eligible sheet(s) selected · DWG only.

    If the active view is a sheet, that sheet is ticked when the window opens.

  5. 05

    Export. Press Export selected DWGs and confirm the summary, which repeats how many sheets will be exported and which post-processing steps are on. The Status column changes to Exporting, then Embedding images when that option is on, while the footer reports each sheet and view being written and the AutoCAD correction.

    Press Cancel in the footer to stop after the current safe step; drawings already completed are kept and the sheet being processed keeps its plain Revit export.

  6. 06

    Read the completion report. The final dialog tells you how many sheet packages were corrected, how many XREF files they reference, how many DWGs had their images embedded, and lists the first warnings. Each sheet row now reads Corrected · 2 XREF(s) (with · bound and · OLE when those options were used), Plain DWG when the sheet had no plan viewport to re-reference, or Plain DWG retained when the AutoCAD step failed.

What you get

For every selected sheet the output folder holds <Number> - <Name>.dwg, one <Number> - <Name>-XR01-<View>.dwg per plan viewport in millimetres on Revit shared coordinates, and <Number> - <Name>-landform-log.txt. In the sheet DWG each original paper-space viewport is kept in place and locked, looks through the matching XREF at the Revit centre, scale and rotation, and freezes the other XREF layers so overlapping plans do not bleed into each other. Nothing is written to the Revit model: in a workshared file the temporary type worksets used to split DWG layers by Revit type are rolled back as soon as the export ends.

Good to know

Tips

  • The export is safe by design. AutoCAD works on a copy in a temporary folder, and the plain Revit sheet DWG is replaced only after AutoCAD reports that every viewport was matched and verified; otherwise the plain export is left in place and the row says Plain DWG retained.
  • Several plan viewports per sheet at mixed scales are supported, as are rotated True North and rotated viewports. Each XREF sits on its own LF_SHARED_XR_nn layer.
  • Non-plan viewports such as sections, elevations, details and 3D views keep their native model-space geometry, so the DWG model space then holds both that geometry and the shared-coordinate XREFs. Legends and drafting views live in paper space and are unaffected.
  • Read the log next to the DWG when something looks wrong: it names the east and north offsets, the rotation, every XREF and the AutoCAD status, and it is written whether the sheet succeeded or failed.
  • The AutoCAD correction has five minutes per sheet. If it times out, the script and stage files are kept in the temporary folder named in the message.
  • Avoid output paths with characters outside the basic Latin set; the AutoCAD script may fail to resolve them, and such characters in sheet names are replaced by _ in the file names.
  • The same XREF correction is available inside Document Export as the DWG option Shared-coordinate sheet XREFs (Experimental) when you need PDFs and other formats in the same run.
Control reference · 12 controls

Every control and what it does

Sheet Shared DWG12 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Output FolderInput

Folder for the sheet DWGs, their shared-coordinate XREF files and the logs. Remembered between sessions.

BrowseButton

Opens a folder picker for the output folder.

Embed imagesOption

Converts raster image references in the sheet DWG and its XREFs into embedded OLE objects using plain AutoCAD. Civil 3D is skipped.

Bind XREFsOption

Binds the shared-coordinate XREFs into the final sheet DWG as blocks, so one file carries everything.

Dwg VersionSelector

DWG file version: Default, R2018, R2013, R2010 or R2007.

SearchInput

Filters the sheet list by sheet number or name; several words must all match.

Select visibleButton

Ticks Export on every sheet shown by the current search.

ClearButton

Removes the Export tick from every sheet.

Sheet GridTable

Eligible sheets with number, name, number of plan viewports and the export status of each row.

ExportOption

Includes this sheet in the export.

Cancel Or CloseButton

Closes the window, or cancels a running export after the current safe step.

Export selected DWGsButton

Confirms the package summary, then exports each ticked sheet with its shared-coordinate XREFs and runs the AutoCAD correction.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Export · CAD By Layer

CAD By Layer

Export the active plan or 3D view to DWG with a separate layer for every Revit type, using temporary worksets that are rolled back the moment the export finishes.

Revit's DWG export can only split layers by category, so every paving type, every bench and every tree lands on the same layer as its neighbours. CAD By Layer works around that: it temporarily adds a Workset layer modifier to your chosen DWG export setup, creates one workset named after each Revit type that appears in the view, moves the elements onto those worksets, exports the view, then rolls every one of those changes back inside a single transaction group. The recipient gets a DWG whose layers carry the type names; your model stays exactly as it was.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelExport ▾CAD By Layer

Button tooltip: “Export the active view as CAD layers by temporary type worksets.”
Before you start
  • A workshared project. The tool refuses to start in a non-workshared model or in a family document, because worksets are what drive the layer names.
  • The plan or 3D view you want to export must be the active view and must be printable. Sheets, sections, elevations, legends and drafting views are not supported; open the view itself.
  • At least one DWG export setup in the project (File → Export → Options → Export Setups DWG/DXF). Without one the window opens but Export DWG by layer stays disabled.
  • Save or synchronise first. The tool changes the DWG setup, creates worksets and moves elements during the export, and although all of it is rolled back, you want a clean restore point.
Tutorial video

Watch CAD By Layer in action

Video coming soon

CAD By Layer walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 12 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

CAD By Layer: Export CAD By Layer with the type preview loaded in a project that has no DWG export setup yet
Export CAD By Layer with the type preview loaded in a project that has no DWG export setup yet · 12 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Save or synchronize first

    Reminder that the export changes the model temporarily and rolls every change back afterwards.

  2. 2
    DWG EXPORT SETUP

    The Revit export setup whose layer names, colours and units are used.

  3. 3
    OUTPUT FOLDER

    Folder the DWG files are written to; type a path or press Browse.

  4. 4
    FILE NAME

    Name of a single drawing; it defaults to the view name.

  5. 5
    DRAWING OUTPUT

    Single DWG puts every type on its own layer in one drawing; Separate DWG per category writes one drawing per category.

  6. 6
    Temporary worksets

    Scroll down to choose Active view elements or Whole model for visible categories, and the shape-point reset.

  7. 7
    Type-to-workset preview

    Counts the type rows, selected rows, temporary assignments and new worksets.

  8. 8
    Use

    Untick a row to leave that type on its normal layer; rows with nothing assignable are unticked automatically.

  9. 9
    Category

    Each category and type with the temporary workset, and so the DWG layer, it will get.

  10. 10
    Assignable

    How many elements can be moved; Status says whether the workset will be created or already exists.

  11. 11
    Status band

    Follows each export stage with the progress bar; here it reports that the project has no DWG export setup.

  12. 12
    Export DWG by layer

    Confirms the summary, exports the view and rolls every model change back. Disabled until a DWG export setup exists.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use CAD By Layer

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Export ▾ → CAD By Layer.

  2. 02

    Choose the DWG setup. Pick the Revit export setup under DWG EXPORT SETUP; the active one is marked (active). Its layer names, colours and units are used, and the Workset modifier is added to it only inside the rollback-protected export.

  3. 03

    Choose where the files go. Type or Browse to the OUTPUT FOLDER. For a single drawing, edit FILE NAME (it defaults to the view name).

  4. 04

    Pick the drawing output. Single DWG writes one drawing with every selected type on its own layer. Separate DWG per category writes one drawing per Revit category, each named <Model> - <View> - <Category>, hiding the other categories in turn while it exports.

  5. 05

    Decide which elements get temporary worksets. Active view elements groups only what is visible in the source view. Whole model for visible categories also includes elements elsewhere in the project whose categories occur in the view, which matters for a 3D view with a section box or a plan with a crop region. Changing this reloads the preview.

    Tick Reset visible floor/toposolid shape points only when flattened slabs are required in the DWG; it temporarily resets the shape editing of every visible Floor and Toposolid before export and is slower on a large project.

  6. 06

    Review the type-to-workset preview. Each row is one category and type with the temporary workset it will get, how many elements can be moved (Assignable) and whether that workset already exists (Existing) or will be created (Create). Untick Use on rows you want left on their normal layers; Select all and Clear work on every row, and Reload preview rebuilds the list after you change the model.

    Rows with no assignable elements (for example elements you do not own) are unticked automatically.

  7. 07

    Export. Press Export DWG by layer and read the confirmation, which repeats the view name, the number of type rows, temporary assignments and new worksets, and the files that will be written. Press Yes to run. The footer progress bar and the status band follow each stage: preparing the DWG layers, resetting shapes, creating worksets, assigning elements, exporting, and rolling back.

    Press Cancel to stop after the current Revit operation; the rollback still happens.

  8. 08

    Check the result dialog. It lists the DWG path (or the number of files and their folder), how many elements were assigned to how many temporary worksets, how many shapes were reset, and confirms that the temporary model changes were rolled back.

What you get

The output folder holds one DWG, or one per category, exported in shared coordinates and true colour with the layer naming of your chosen setup plus the Revit type name carried by the Workset modifier, so every type sits on its own layer. The Revit model is unchanged: the worksets, element assignments, shape resets, view visibility changes and DWG setup edits were made inside the "LF-Export CAD By Layer" transaction group and that group is rolled back, so there is nothing to undo and nothing to synchronise. The active view is refreshed afterwards and the preview reloads to show the restored state.

Good to know

Tips

  • Only elements whose Workset parameter you can edit are assignable. Elements owned by another user or borrowed elsewhere stay on their current workset and are counted in the gap between elements and Assignable.
  • Temporary workset names are the type names with path characters replaced and trimmed to 100 characters. If a workset with that name already exists in the model, the row reads Existing and that workset is reused rather than created.
  • Pattern overlays made by the LandForm pattern tools are grouped under their host's type as Pattern Overlay - <type>, so the hatch geometry lands on a layer of its own next to the host surface.
  • The Workset modifier is added to every model category row of the export setup that supports it, for projection and cut layers; the setup is restored by the rollback, so your saved export setup is unchanged afterwards.
  • If the status band says No DWG export setup is available in this project, create or import one through Revit's Export Setups dialog, then press Reload preview.
  • The same type-based layer split runs automatically for DWG output in Document Export and Sheet Shared DWG when the model is workshared.
Control reference · 15 controls

Every control and what it does

Cad Layer Export15 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected Export ConfigurationSelector

Revit DWG export setup whose layers, colours and units are used. The Workset layer modifier is added to it only inside the rollback-protected export.

Output FolderInput

Folder the DWG file or files are written to. Created if it does not exist.

BrowseButton

Opens a folder picker for the output folder.

File NameInput

File name for a Single DWG; defaults to the view name. Category exports are named from the model, view and category instead.

Single DWGOption

Writes one drawing containing every selected type on its own layer.

Separate DWG per categoryOption

Writes one drawing per selected Revit category, hiding the other categories in the view while each is exported.

Active view elementsOption

Groups only the model elements visible in the source view into temporary type worksets.

Whole model for visible categoriesOption

Also groups model elements throughout the project whose categories occur in the source view. Reloads the preview.

Reset visible floor/toposolid shape pointsOption

Temporarily resets the shape editing of every visible Floor and Toposolid before export so slabs export flat. Rolled back with everything else; slower on large projects.

Reload previewButton

Rebuilds the type-to-workset preview from the current model and scope without changing anything.

Select allButton

Ticks Use on every row that has assignable elements.

ClearButton

Removes the Use tick from every row.

Workset RowsTable

One row per category and type: the temporary workset name, how many elements can be assigned, and whether that workset exists or will be created.

Export DWG by layerButton

Confirms the summary, then prepares the DWG layers, creates the temporary worksets, assigns elements, exports the view and rolls every model change back.

Cancel Or CloseButton

Closes the window, or cancels a running export after the current Revit operation.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Export · LandXML

LandXML

Export floors, footprint roofs, toposolids and topography as exact LandXML 1.2 TIN surfaces, in metres and shared coordinates, ready for civil-engineering and survey software; or import a LandXML surface from Civil 3D or a survey package and create it as a Toposolid.

LandXML is the hand-over format most civil and survey packages read, and the same small modeless toolbar runs both ways. Export takes the surfaces you select in Revit, triangulates their top faces exactly as Revit models them and writes one LandXML surface per element, so the engineer receives the geometry you graded rather than a re-interpolated copy; nothing in the model changes. Import reads a LandXML file, places its points through the project's shared coordinates and builds each surface as a Toposolid with the exact outline of the TIN, every TIN point as a shape point and the file's breaklines as split lines, so the surveyor's ground arrives on the survey grid as editable terrain.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelExport ▾LandXML

Button tooltip: “Export surfaces to LandXML 1.2, or import a LandXML surface as a Toposolid.”
Before you start
  • A project model (not a family) open in a plan or 3D view. The toolbar refuses to start, select, export or import from any other kind of view.
  • The project's Survey Point and True North set correctly, because the file is written and read in shared coordinates. For an import, the project must share the file's survey grid (Acquire Coordinates from a linked survey, or Specify Coordinates at Point), or the surface lands outside Revit's 20 mile design area and is refused.
  • To export: at least one Floor, footprint Roof, Toposolid or legacy Topography surface. Select them before you start if you like; LandForm picks the selection up as the initial export set. Somewhere to save the .xml file: the default is your Desktop, with a name made from the project title and the active view.
  • To import: a LandXML 1.x .xml file with a TIN surface (or a point group), Revit 2024 or newer, and at least one Toposolid type in the project.
Tutorial video

Watch LandXML in action

Video coming soon

LandXML walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 8 steps

How to use LandXML

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Export ▾ → LandXML.

  2. 02

    Pick the direction. Click Export at the left of the bar (the bar reopens in the direction you used last). For the other direction, see Import workflow below.

  3. 03

    Select the surfaces. Click Select, then window-select or click the floors, roofs, toposolids or topography to export and press Finish on the Revit options bar. The button changes to Select (N) and the status line reads "N surface(s) ready. Choose the XML file and export."

    Press Esc during the pick to keep the previous set unchanged. Clicking Select again replaces the set rather than adding to it.

  4. 04

    Decide how many surfaces the file should hold. Leave Combine (experimental) off to write one LandXML surface per Revit element, each named after the element and its unique ID. Turn it on only when the receiving software needs a single surface; the status line warns that overlapping sources may produce artifacts.

  5. 05

    Decide how light the surface should be. Leave Simplify off to write Revit's own triangles exactly. Tick it for a lighter file: the outline stays as it is, interior points are kept only where the shape needs them, and the triangles are rebuilt as a clean Delaunay TIN instead of the long slivers a Revit top face often has. The box next to it is the tolerance in metres: no point that is left out sits further than that, up or down, from the lighter surface (5 m by default; a larger value gives a lighter file, a smaller one keeps more detail). Max edge (50 m by default) makes the triangles even: no triangle edge is longer than that, and no triangle has an angle under 20°, so long fans of slivers become a regular mesh. New points are placed at the surface's own elevation. Leave Max edge empty for no size limit; the triangles are then only kept free of slivers.

  6. 06

    Choose the file. Accept the suggested path on your Desktop, type a new one, or press Browse and pick a folder and name. The extension must be .xml; LandForm adds it if you leave it off.

  7. 07

    Export. Press Export LandXML. The status line counts the surfaces as they are converted ("Converted 2 of 3: ..."), reports "Writing LandXML 1.2 file..." and then turns green with the totals and the full path of the file. With Simplify on, it also says how many points the surfaces had before, for example "1,759 point(s) (simplified from 90,000 within 5 m)". While a large surface is simplified, the bar keeps moving and the status line names the stage ("choosing points", "evening out the triangles") with a running count and the time spent so far.

  8. 08

    Hand the file over. Import the .xml into your civil-engineering or survey software as a surface. Because every surface is written in shared coordinates and metres, it should land on the survey grid without a further transformation.

What you get

After an export, a LandXML 1.2 file exists at the path shown in the status line. It holds one surface per selected element (or one combined surface), each defined as a TIN of points and triangles that reproduces Revit's own top-face triangulation, with northing, easting and elevation in metres in the project's shared coordinates: each point carries the same values Manage > Coordinates > Report Shared Coordinates shows for it, so an acquired coordinate system, a moved Survey Point and True North are all accounted for. The Revit model is untouched: there is no transaction, nothing to undo and no parameter is written. After an import, one Toposolid per chosen surface stands in the model on the chosen level, with the LandXML surface name (and the file name) in its Comments. Its boundary is the exact outline of the file's visible triangles, openings included where the TIN has holes; every TIN point is an editable shape point at its file elevation; and each breakline that went in is a split line. Plan duplicates within 0.1 mm were merged (Revit holds one elevation per plan position) and triangles the file marks invisible, which lie outside the surface boundary, were left out. The import is one undo step per surface ("LF-LandXML: Create Toposolid", then "LF-LandXML: Add Breaklines"). The toolbar stays open, so you can change the selection or the file and run again.

More about LandXML

Import workflow

  1. Pick Import at the left of the bar. The export controls give way to the import ones.
  2. Choose the file. Press Browse and pick the .xml, or paste its path into File. LandForm reads it at once and the status line describes it: how many surfaces, the unit the file names (metres, feet, US survey feet and the other LandXML units are all understood), the point, triangle and breakline counts. A file that is not LandXML, or holds no surface with three points, is reported in red.
  3. Pick the surface. The Surface box lists every surface in the file with its point count, and All surfaces when there is more than one. Each surface becomes its own Toposolid. A file with only point groups (CgPoints) lists them as Points: group name and imports the points.
  4. Pick the level and type. Level is the host level of the new Toposolid; the points keep the elevations in the file. Type is the Toposolid type.
  5. Check the coordinate switch. Leave Shared coords on for a surveyed file: its northing, easting and elevation are read as shared coordinates and mapped through the project's shared coordinate system, so the surface lands on the survey grid. Untick it only for a file that is already in Revit's internal coordinates.
  6. Decide about breaklines. Leave Breaklines on to replay the file's breaklines as split lines on the Toposolid, so Revit's own triangulation keeps the kerb lines and crests the surveyor drew. Untick it on a file with thousands of breakline segments to skip that pass.
  7. Decide how light the Toposolid should be. A survey file can hold tens of thousands of points, and a Toposolid with every one of them is slow to draw and edit. Tick Simplify to keep the outline and only the interior points the shape needs within the tolerance in the box beside it (metres, 5 by default), plus evenly spaced points about Max edge apart (50 m by default) taken from the file's surface; Revit then triangulates the points itself into an even mesh. Breaklines, when on, still add their own points back along the kerbs and crests.
  8. Import. Press Import LandXML. The status line reports each surface as it is read, simplified, created and given its breaklines. Revit builds each Toposolid in one long call that cannot report as it goes, so before it starts the status line says "Revit is building the toposolid from … points. Revit stays busy until it finishes"; the time spent so far shows once the run passes two seconds. At the end, the status line turns green with the totals: how many Toposolids, how many points (how many the file had before simplifying, and how many plan duplicates were merged), how many breakline segments went in and how the boundary was built.
Good to know

Tips

  • Simplify works the same way in both directions: every outline and hole vertex stays, and then the interior point the lighter surface misses by most is added, again and again, until every remaining point is within the tolerance. Flat or evenly sloping areas end up with a few large triangles, while ridges, banks and pits keep the points they need. On export, Revit hands a Toposolid's top over as many face patches; Simplify treats the seams between them as interior and keeps only the surface's real edge, and points along straight stretches of that edge are thinned where the edge moves no more than 0.02 m, then spaced evenly again by Max edge. A surface whose lighter TIN would not cover exactly the same ground is written exact instead, and the status line says so.
  • To check an export, run Report Shared Coordinates on a corner of the surface in Revit and compare it with the nearest point in the file (the file lists northing first, then easting, in metres).
  • The suggested export file name includes the active view's name, so exports taken from different views of the same project do not overwrite each other.
  • Floors, roofs and toposolids export their upward-facing top faces only, including shape-edited slopes and sub-elements; the underside and edges are ignored. Legacy topography exports its full mesh.
  • The breakline count in the export status line is normally 0. The exact triangle connectivity already carries every edge and crease, which imports more reliably than replaying them as breakline operations.
  • Export LandXML is greyed out while the surface count is 0 or File is empty; Import LandXML is greyed out until a readable file, a level and a type are chosen. A red status line names the problem, for example an output folder that does not exist or an extension other than .xml.
  • Revit builds a Toposolid's triangles itself, so an imported surface reproduces the file's points and outline exactly and its triangulation closely; the breaklines are what keep the edges the surveyor drew. When Revit refuses the exact outline (a self-touching boundary, say), LandForm falls back to the outline without its openings and then to the points alone, whose boundary is the convex hull, and the status line says which it used.
  • A surface that lands up to tens of kilometres from Revit's internal origin is a coordinate problem, not a file problem: the file is in a survey grid the project does not share yet. Set up shared coordinates on that grid and import again.
  • If you switch to another project, or to a sheet, section or elevation, while the toolbar is open, the next Select, Export or Import stops with a message asking you to return to a plan or 3D view of the original project.
  • Combine (experimental), Simplify with its tolerance and max edge, the import file, level, type and the two import switches are remembered between sessions; the export file path is reset to the Desktop default each time you open the tool.
Control reference · 19 controls

Every control and what it does

Land Xml Export19 controls
ControlTypeFunction
ExportOption

Shows the export controls: write selected Revit surfaces to a LandXML 1.2 file.

ImportOption

Shows the import controls: read a LandXML surface and create it as a Toposolid.

Select SurfacesButton

Returns to Revit to window-select or click floors, footprint roofs, toposolids or topography; press Finish to accept. The label shows the current count, for example Select (3).

Combine (experimental)Option

Experimental: write all selected geometry as one TIN. Overlapping source surfaces can produce artifacts; separate surfaces are the lossless option.

SimplifyOption

Shown in both directions. Export writes a lighter Delaunay TIN; Import builds the Toposolid from fewer points. The outline always stays; interior points are kept only where the shape needs them within the tolerance.

Tolerance (m)Input

Largest height difference allowed between a dropped point and the lighter surface, in metres (above 0, up to 10; 5 by default). A value typed in millimetres, such as 50, is refused rather than read as 50 m. Enabled while Simplify is ticked.

Max edge (m)Input

Longest triangle edge, in metres, for even Delaunay triangles of about that size (50 by default; empty for no size limit). Triangles are always kept above 20° at their sharpest corner. Enabled while Simplify is ticked.

File PathInput

Full path of the .xml file to write. The folder must already exist; the .xml extension is added if you leave it off, and any other extension is rejected.

BrowseButton

Opens a Save dialog filtered to LandXML (*.xml) files, starting in the folder currently shown.

Export LandXMLButton

Converts the selected surfaces to LandXML 1.2 in metres and shared coordinates and writes the file. Enabled once at least one surface is selected and a path is set.

File (Import)Input

Full path of the LandXML file to import. The file is read as soon as the path points at one, and the status line describes it.

Browse (Import)Button

Opens an Open dialog filtered to LandXML (*.xml) files.

SurfaceList

Which surface of the file to build, or All surfaces. Every surface becomes its own Toposolid; point groups appear as Points: name.

LevelList

Host level for the created Toposolid. Points keep their file elevations.

TypeList

Toposolid type for the created surface.

Shared coordsOption

Read the file as shared (survey) northing, easting and elevation and place it through the project's shared coordinates. Untick only for a file already in Revit's internal coordinates.

BreaklinesOption

Replay the file's breaklines as split lines so kerbs and crests keep their edges. Slower on files with thousands of breakline segments.

Import LandXMLButton

Creates a Toposolid from each chosen LandXML surface. Enabled once a readable file, a level and a type are chosen.

CloseButton

Closes the toolbar.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Export · GIS Export

GIS Export

Export floors, roofs, toposolids and topography to GIS as attributed GeoJSON or an Esri File Geodatabase, with every Revit parameter carried along as feature attributes.

GIS Export is the bridge from your Revit site model to the planning team's GIS. Each surface becomes one feature: either the exact 3D TIN that Revit models or, with Flat boundaries on, a filled 2D footprint polygon. Every feature carries the element's identity, type, level, materials, phases, workset and design option together with all of its instance and type parameters, and you can promote any parameter to its own attribute field for symbolising and querying. Coordinates are written in metres in the project's shared coordinate system and tagged with the EPSG code you confirm, so the layer lands in the right place without guesswork. The toolbar is modeless and read-only; the model is never changed.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelExport ▾GIS Export

Button tooltip: “Export selected surfaces with their Revit data to GIS.”
Before you start
  • A project model open in a plan or 3D view, with at least one Floor, footprint Roof, Toposolid or legacy Topography surface. Select them before you start if you like; the toolbar begins with them in the set.
  • The EPSG code of the projected coordinate reference system your shared coordinates were set up in, for example EPSG:32640. If the project's site location already stores a coordinate system, LandForm shows it in the CRS box; otherwise you pick one from the catalogue. Never guess it from latitude and longitude.
  • For File Geodatabase output, GDAL 3.6 or newer on this machine (it comes with QGIS and OSGeo4W) so that ogr2ogr.exe can be found on the PATH, in a standard install folder, or at the path in the LANDFORM_OGR2OGR environment variable. GeoJSON needs nothing extra.
  • For Flat boundaries, surfaces that have a sketch: floors, roofs and toposolids. Legacy topography has no sketch boundary and stops the export in this mode.
Tutorial video

Watch GIS Export in action

Video coming soon

GIS Export walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 10 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

GIS Export: GIS Export toolbar set for flat boundaries to a File Geodatabase, waiting for surfaces
GIS Export toolbar set for flat boundaries to a File Geodatabase, waiting for surfaces · 10 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Surfaces: Select

    Window-select or click the floors, roofs, toposolids or topography to export and press Finish; the label shows the count.

  2. 2
    Flat boundaries

    Exports filled 2D footprint polygons from each element's sketch instead of the 3D TIN surface.

  3. 3
    Parameters (5)

    Chooses which parameters become their own attribute fields; available once surfaces are selected.

  4. 4
    Format

    GeoJSON (.geojson) writes one file; File Geodatabase (.gdb) writes a folder and needs GDAL installed.

  5. 5
    CRS

    The coordinate reference system the export is tagged with; it cannot be typed into.

  6. 6
    Select

    Opens the searchable catalogue of coordinate reference systems.

  7. 7
    File

    Full path of the file or .gdb folder to write; the extension follows the format.

  8. 8
    Browse

    Chooses the destination in a Save dialog.

  9. 9
    Export GIS

    Writes the attributed GeoJSON or File Geodatabase; enabled once surfaces, a path and a CRS are set.

  10. 10
    Status line

    Tells you what to do next and shows export progress; the surface count is at its right end.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use GIS Export

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Export ▾ → GIS Export.

  2. 02

    Select the surfaces. Click Select, window-select or click the surfaces to export and press Finish on the Revit options bar. The button becomes Select (N) and the count appears at the right of the status line.

    Press Esc during the pick to keep the previous selection. Clicking Select again replaces the set.

  3. 03

    Choose the geometry. Leave Flat boundaries off for the exact 3D TIN surface, written as one polygon per triangle with elevations. Turn it on for filled 2D footprint polygons taken from each element's sketch, holes included; the attributes are the same either way.

  4. 04

    Choose the attribute fields. Press Parameters (default). The dialog lists every instance and type parameter found on the selected surfaces and their types. Tick the ones your GIS workflow filters or labels on, or type in the filter box and press Select visible to tick a whole group, then press Add parameters. The button now reads Parameters (N).

    Until you configure it, the default set is Area, Type Name and, for 3D export, Volume. The complete parameter sets are always written as well, as nested instance_parameters and type_parameters objects.

  5. 05

    Pick the format. Choose GeoJSON (.geojson) or File Geodatabase (.gdb) under Format. The extension of the path in File switches to match.

  6. 06

    Confirm the coordinate reference system. If CRS is empty, or shows something other than the system your shared coordinates use, press Select beside it. Filter the catalogue by name or EPSG code, then double-click the row or press Select. Recently used systems are listed first.

    The CRS box cannot be typed into; the selector is the only way to set it, and Export GIS stays disabled until it holds a value.

  7. 07

    Set the destination. Accept the Desktop path named after the project and the active view, type a new one, or press Browse. GeoJSON is a single file; a File Geodatabase is a .gdb folder.

  8. 08

    Export. Press Export GIS. The status line shows each surface being read and converted with a percentage, then "Writing attributed GeoJSON GIS file..." or "Creating the Esri File Geodatabase with GDAL...", and finally turns green with a summary such as "Exported 3 3D TIN feature(s) with 1240 triangle(s) to ..." followed by the path.

What you get

A GeoJSON FeatureCollection, or a .gdb folder containing a LandForm_Surfaces layer, exists at the chosen path and is tagged with the CRS you confirmed. Each selected surface is one MultiPolygon feature: triangles with east, north and elevation in metres for the 3D TIN, or flat footprint rings for boundaries. Its properties carry the Revit element ID and unique ID, name, category, family and type, level, workset, design option, phases created and demolished, pinned state, triangle and vertex counts, a material list with areas and volumes, the complete instance and type parameter sets, and one param_... or type_param_... field per parameter you promoted. A landform_metadata block records the source model and path, Revit version, coordinate order (east, north, elevation), unit and site location. Nothing in the Revit model changes.

Good to know

Tips

  • Coordinates are taken from the project's active Project Location, so in a model with several named locations make sure the right one is current before you export; its name is written into the metadata.
  • LandForm fills CRS automatically when the site location stores an EPSG code or a recognisable coordinate-system definition, including Revit's UTM-style IDs such as UTM84-40N, which map to the matching WGS 84 UTM zone. Anything else leaves the box empty on purpose.
  • The CRS catalogue is read from GDAL's projinfo when it is installed; otherwise a built-in list of WGS 84 UTM zones and Pseudo-Mercator is offered, plus whatever the project stores. Up to eight recently used systems are remembered between sessions.
  • Promoted fields are named after the parameter with anything that is not a letter or digit replaced by an underscore, prefixed param_ for instance parameters and type_param_ for type parameters and cut to 60 characters; a clash gets a _2 suffix. In a File Geodatabase the nested parameter objects and the material list are written as text, because that format has no nested fields.
  • Parameters is only available once at least one surface is selected, because the list is read from the surfaces themselves. Your tick list is remembered between sessions.
  • If ogr2ogr.exe cannot be found the export stops with a red message explaining how to install GDAL or set LANDFORM_OGR2OGR; the conversion itself is limited to two minutes.
  • Format, Flat boundaries, the CRS and the parameter selection are remembered between sessions; the file path is reset to the Desktop default each time you open the tool.
Control reference · 20 controls

Every control and what it does

Gis Export10 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Select SurfacesButton

Returns to Revit to window-select or click floors, footprint roofs, toposolids or topography; press Finish to accept. The label shows the current count, for example Select (3).

Flat boundariesOption

Export attributed, filled 2D footprint polygons taken from each element's sketch instead of the 3D TIN surface. Legacy topography has no sketch and cannot be exported this way.

Select ParametersButton

Opens the parameter dialog listing the instance and type parameters of the selected surfaces, so you can promote them to individual GIS attribute fields. The label shows (default) or the number chosen.

Selected FormatSelector

GeoJSON (.geojson) writes a single file; File Geodatabase (.gdb) writes a folder through GDAL's ogr2ogr and needs GDAL 3.6 or newer installed. Switching also swaps the extension in File Path.

Coordinate ReferenceInput

The projected coordinate reference system the export is tagged with, for example EPSG:32640. Read-only: it is filled from the project's stored site coordinate system or from the selector, never guessed from latitude and longitude.

SelectButton

Opens the searchable coordinate reference system catalogue; the chosen authority ID is written into Coordinate Reference.

File PathInput

Full path of the .geojson file or .gdb folder to write. The parent folder must exist and the extension must match the chosen format (it is added if left off).

BrowseButton

Opens a Save dialog filtered to the chosen format, starting in the folder currently shown.

Export GISButton

Reads the selected surfaces, converts them to shared coordinates in metres and writes the attributed GeoJSON or File Geodatabase. Enabled once surfaces, a path and a CRS are all set.

CloseButton

Closes the toolbar.

Gis Export Parameter Selection6 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Filter BoxInput

Search parameter name or scope.

Select visibleButton

Ticks every parameter currently shown by the filter, so you can add a whole group at once.

ClearButton

Unticks every parameter in the list, including rows hidden by the filter.

Parameter GridTable

One row per instance or type parameter found on the selected surfaces and their types. Tick Add to export it as its own attribute field; Scope shows whether it is an Instance or Type parameter.

CancelButton

Closes the dialog and keeps the previous parameter selection.

Add parametersButton

Saves the ticked parameters as the attribute fields to add; the toolbar button then shows their count.

Gis Coordinate Reference Selection4 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Filter BoxInput

Search by CRS name, EPSG code, or authority.

Crs GridTable

Projected coordinate reference systems with their authority ID, for example EPSG:32640; recently used systems are listed first. Double-click a row to choose it.

CancelButton

Closes the selector and keeps the previous CRS.

SelectButton

Uses the highlighted CRS for the export and adds it to the recently used list.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Export · Cloud Export

Cloud Export

Batch-export Revit cloud models and local files to Navisworks NWC, DWFx or a detached local central RVT, one after another, without leaving the project you have open.

Cloud Model Export browses the Forma, ACC and BIM 360 hubs available to the Autodesk account you are signed in to in Revit, so no separate login is needed. You queue the models you want, from the cloud tree or from .rvt files on disk, tick the output formats, and LandForm opens each model in the background, exports it, checks that every file was really written and closes it again. Exporter pop-ups and warnings that would normally stall an unattended run are dismissed and recorded, and a model that fails is reported while the rest of the batch carries on.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelExport ▾Cloud Export

Button tooltip: “Batch export cloud and local Revit models to NWC, DWFx, or a local central.”
Before you start
  • Sign in to your Autodesk account in Revit (the sign-in at the top right of the Revit window) before you press Load hubs. Local .rvt files can be queued without signing in.
  • For NWC, the Navisworks NWC exporter matching your Revit version must be installed; for DWFx, Revit's DWF export must be available on this installation.
  • A destination folder for the output. It defaults to your Desktop and every format writes into the same folder.
  • Time. The window is modal, so Revit is busy until you close it, and each model is opened, exported and closed in turn.
Tutorial video

Watch Cloud Export in action

Video coming soon

Cloud Export walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 11 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Cloud Export: Cloud Model Export with one hub loaded and the queue still empty
Cloud Model Export with one hub loaded and the queue still empty · 11 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Load hubs

    Reads the hubs of your signed-in Autodesk account; the badge beside it shows how many were found.

  2. 2
    Status line

    Tells you what to do next and shows progress while the batch runs.

  3. 3
    Cloud browser

    Expand hubs, projects and folders and tick the models you want; each branch loads the first time you open it.

  4. 4
    Search loaded hubs, projects, folders, and models

    Filters the names already loaded; it never loads new branches.

  5. 5
    Add to queue

    Queues the ticked models, or the highlighted model or folder when nothing is ticked.

  6. 6
    Add local file(s)

    Queues .rvt files from disk with the source Local file.

  7. 7
    Export base name (editable)

    The queue: rename each output here, and follow Status and Detail during the run.

  8. 8
    Remove / Clear

    Removes the highlighted row, or empties the queue.

  9. 9
    Output formats and settings

    Expand to tick NWC, DWFx and/or Save as Model, set their options and choose the destination folder.

  10. 10
    Export NWC

    Runs the batch; the label follows the formats you ticked.

  11. 11
    Close

    Closes the window; during a batch it becomes Cancel and stops after the current model.

Step by step · 10 steps

How to use Cloud Export

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Export ▾ → Cloud Export.

  2. 02

    Load your hubs. Press Load hubs. The badge next to Cloud browser changes from Not loaded to the number of hubs found and the status line asks you to expand one. Expand hubs, projects and folders; each branch is read the first time you open it and shows Loading... meanwhile.

    Type in the search box to filter the names already loaded. Searching never loads new branches, so expand the project first.

  3. 03

    Queue cloud models. Tick the models you want, in any folders, and press Add to queue. With nothing ticked, the button adds the highlighted model, or every model inside the highlighted folder. The ticks are cleared afterwards and a model already in the queue is refused.

  4. 04

    Queue local files (optional). Press Add local file(s) and choose one or more .rvt files. They join the queue with the source Local file.

  5. 05

    Tidy the queue. The card title counts the queued models. Edit the Export base name (editable) cell to rename the output; the extension is added per format, and a blank name falls back to the model's title. Highlight a row and press Remove, or press Clear to empty the queue.

  6. 06

    Tick the formats. Expand Output formats and settings and tick NWC, DWFx and/or Save as Model in the tab headers. Every ticked format writes its own file and they run in the order NWC, DWFx, then Save as Model.

  7. 07

    Set each format's options. On NWC, tick the Navisworks options you need and choose Entire project (full model) or One 3D view whose name contains the text you type. On DWFx, choose Temporary full-model 3D view or a named view and whether to Export object data (properties) and Export textures. On Save as Model, decide whether to Overwrite existing files.

  8. 08

    Choose the destination folder in the text box or with Browse....

  9. 09

    Run the batch. Press the main button. Its label follows your ticks: Export NWC, Export DWFx, Save as Model, or Export selected outputs when more than one format is ticked. The Status column moves through Queued, Exporting and Done, Skipped or Failed, with the reason in Detail, while the footer shows progress. The close button becomes Cancel and stops the batch after the current model.

  10. 10

    Read the report. When the batch ends a dialog summarises how many models succeeded, how many files were written, skipped or failed, the destination folder, any notes and the path of the diagnostic log. Models that did not finish stay in the queue as Queued; press the export button again to retry only those.

What you get

The destination folder holds one .nwc, .dwfx and/or .rvt file per queued model, each named from its editable base name and verified to be non-empty before it counts as written. A saved RVT is a new detached local central with worksets preserved, and the _backup folder Revit creates beside it is removed. Your open project is never re-pathed or edited; when the window closes Revit simply refreshes the active view. Successful rows leave the queue, failed or skipped rows remain for a retry, and everything that happened, including any exporter dialogs that were dismissed, is written to LandForm-CloudExport-diag.txt in your temp folder.

More about Cloud Export

Formats

  • NWC — Exports the entire project, or one 3D view chosen by part of its name. The Navisworks options are all available: element properties, URLs, element IDs, links, parts, room geometry and room attributes, missing-material lookup, dividing the file into levels, faceting factor, linked CAD and lights, parameter scope and shared or internal coordinates.
  • DWFx — Exports one 3D view per model: a temporary full-model isometric view created for the export and deleted again afterwards, or the first 3D view whose name contains your text. Object data (properties) and textures are optional.
  • Save as Model — Writes a new detached local central RVT with worksets preserved, ready for transmittal or eTransmit. It always runs last because saving changes the document's path.
NWC optionWhat it does
Convert element propertiesWrites the Revit element properties into the NWC.
Export linksIncludes linked Revit models.
Room as attributeAttaches room information to elements as an attribute.
Find missing materialsLooks up materials that are not assigned directly.
Divide into levelsGroups the exported elements by level.
Export partsExports Parts instead of their parent elements; views set to Show Original always export the originals.
Room geometryExports rooms as geometry.
All parameters / Element parametersChoose which parameter set goes into the file; untick both for none.
Export element IDsWrites the Revit element ID with each item.
Internal coordinatesUses Revit internal coordinates; unticked exports shared coordinates.
Export URLsIncludes URL parameters.
Linked CAD (Revit 2020+)Converts linked CAD formats.
Convert lights (Revit 2020+)Converts Revit lights.
Faceting factor (Revit 2020+)Tessellation factor for curved surfaces, accepted between 0 and 1 (default 1).
Good to know

Tips

  • A cloud model exported to NWC is first saved to a private temporary local copy and reopened from there, because Revit can report "no suitable geometry" for a valid cloud 3D view. This adds a little time per model and the copy is deleted afterwards.
  • If a cloud model fails to open, the failure dialog is closed for you and the open is retried up to two more times once Revit is idle; the attempts are listed in the report.
  • A named 3D view is matched case-insensitively on part of its name and the alphabetically first match is used, so one NWC or DWFx file is written per model. View templates are ignored.
  • Export parts is switched off automatically for a model that contains no Parts, otherwise the NWC would be empty; for a named view, the view's Parts Visibility decides.
  • Untick both All parameters and Element parameters to export no parameters at all. Internal coordinates left unticked exports shared coordinates.
  • Models open with their last-viewed worksets, as a manual open would. Local files are detached from their central while they are open, so the original file is never touched.
  • All options and the destination folder are remembered between sessions. If the status says your Autodesk session could not be read, sign in again in Revit and press Load hubs.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Sheets · By Scope Box

By Scope Box

Create a coordinated series of plan views and sheets for every level and scope box you tick, numbered, named and placed to one rule, in a single run.

Setting up site plan sheets by hand means creating a plan per level, duplicating it per scope box, applying each scope box, making a sheet, placing the viewport in the same spot every time and numbering it all consistently. By Scope Box does that for one or more drawing sets at once. Each set is a plan view type with its own start number; each ticked level gets a parent plan, an optional overall sheet and one dependent view and sheet per ticked scope box; and every viewport lands at the same sheet coordinates. Naming patterns, numbering, viewport type, a sheet parameter and a generic annotation stamp are set once under Settings and remembered for next time.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelSheets ▾By Scope Box

Button tooltip: “Create sheets and plan views by scope box.”
Before you start
  • A title block family loaded in the project. The TITLE BLOCK list shows every title block type; if it is empty the status line says so.
  • The scope boxes drawn and named the way you want them to read in view names, because each one becomes a dependent view cropped to it.
  • At least one floor-plan or structural-plan view type; the Plan type column lists them.
  • Your numbering rule: a prefix such as L-, how many digits to pad to, a start number per drawing set and the step between levels (default 100), chosen so nothing collides with sheets that already exist.
  • Your sheet layout: the viewport centre in millimetres from the sheet origin (defaults 320, 295) and, if you want a stamp on every sheet, a generic annotation family and where it should sit.
Tutorial video

Watch By Scope Box in action

Video coming soon

By Scope Box walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

By Scope Box: By Scope Box in a project with no title block types loaded yet
By Scope Box in a project with no title block types loaded yet · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    TITLE BLOCK

    The title block type, listed as family: type, used on every sheet in this run.

  2. 2
    LEVELS

    Tick the levels to document, lowest first; All and None tick or clear the whole list.

  3. 3
    SCOPE BOXES

    Tick each scope box that should get its own dependent view and sheet on every ticked level.

  4. 4
    Use / Set / Plan type / Start

    One row per drawing set: include it, name it, choose its plan view type and its first sheet number.

  5. 5
    Add / Remove

    Add another drawing set, or delete the highlighted row.

  6. 6
    Settings

    Unfolds the Views, Naming and Output settings for scales, name patterns and numbering.

  7. 7
    Run

    Checks the inputs, then creates every view and sheet in one step.

  8. 8
    Status line

    Reports missing inputs, such as no title block types, and names each sheet as it is created.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use By Scope Box

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Sheets ▾ → By Scope Box.

  2. 02

    Pick the title block. Choose a type from TITLE BLOCK, listed as family: type. Every sheet in this run uses it.

  3. 03

    Tick the levels. In LEVELS, tick the levels to document, or press All or None. Levels are listed from lowest to highest.

  4. 04

    Tick the scope boxes. In SCOPE BOXES, tick each box that should get its own dependent view and sheet on every ticked level.

    If you only want overall sheets, leave the list unticked and turn off Create scope-box sheets under Settings.

  5. 05

    Define the drawing sets. Each row in DRAWING SETS is one plan series: tick Use, type a Set name (it appears in view and sheet names; the first row is called Plan), choose the Plan type and enter the Start sheet number. Press Add for another series, for example a planting set on a different plan type with its own number range, and Remove to delete the highlighted row.

  6. 06

    Review the settings (optional). Press Settings to unfold the sheet settings; the same button then reads Hide.

    Views: tick Create overall sheet (one per level at the overall Scale, default 500 for 1:500) and Create scope-box sheets (at the scope-box Scale, default 200), decide whether to Set annotation crop offsets to zero and Hide annotation categories in scope views, and set the VIEWPORT CENTER (MM) X and Y where every viewport is placed. Naming: edit the patterns for the overall, scope-box and parent view names and for the sheet name using {SetName}, {Level}, {ScopeBox} and {ViewName}. The Example line under each box updates as you type. Output: set Number prefix, Minimum digits (zero padding, default 3) and Level step (default 100), pick a Viewport type or keep Project default, optionally name a Sheet parameter and the Parameter value to write on every new sheet, and tick Place generic annotation with a symbol and its X and Y in millimetres to stamp each sheet. Save settings stores all of this without running; running stores it too.

  7. 07

    Run. Press Run. LandForm first checks the inputs, including that no planned sheet number repeats or already exists in the project, and stops with a precise message if something is missing. The status line then names each sheet as it is created, for example "Created 101 - Plan - L1 OVERALL", while the progress bar fills.

  8. 08

    Confirm. A dialog reports "Scope-box sheets created" with the number of sheets and views, and the window closes.

What you get

For every ticked drawing set and level the project now holds a parent plan view, named by the parent pattern and set to the scope-box scale, plus an overall plan view and sheet when enabled, plus one dependent plan view with its scope box applied and one sheet for each ticked scope box. Every sheet carries the chosen title block, a name from the sheet pattern, a number built from the prefix, start, level step and digit count, its viewport centred at the X and Y you set and switched to the chosen viewport type, the optional sheet parameter value and the optional generic annotation. The whole series is created in one transaction named "LF-Sheet By Scope Box: Create Sheets", so a single Undo removes it all.

Good to know

Tips

  • Numbers run per set: the first ticked level starts at Start, each further level adds Level step, and within a level the overall sheet takes the first number followed by one number per scope box. With the defaults (start 1, step 100, 3 digits) the first level gives 001, 002, 003 and the next level 101, 102, 103.
  • If the run stops with "Sheet number ... would be created more than once" or "... already exists", increase Level step, change a Start number or add a Number prefix so each set has its own range.
  • The parent view is never placed on a sheet. It hosts the dependent scope-box views, so detail you draw in it appears in all of them; the overall view is an independent duplicate taken at creation time.
  • Each scope-box view has its annotation crop switched on. Set annotation crop offsets to zero pulls that crop tight to the scope box so viewports line up exactly; Hide annotation categories in scope views switches off every annotation category in those views for a clean base.
  • A view name that already exists gets a (2) suffix rather than stopping the run, and characters Revit does not allow in names are replaced with a hyphen.
  • The Sheet parameter must already exist on sheets and be editable; text, whole-number and number parameters are filled, and anything else is skipped silently.
  • The title block is chosen fresh each session; everything else, including the drawing set rows, viewport type and annotation symbol (matched by name), is remembered.
Control reference · 39 controls

Every control and what it does

Sheet By Scope Box39 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected Title BlockSelector

Title block type placed on every sheet created in this run, listed as family: type.

AllButton

Ticks every level (or every scope box, for the button above that list).

NoneButton

Unticks every level (or every scope box).

LevelsList

Project levels from lowest to highest; tick the ones that should receive views and sheets.

Is SelectedOption

The tick in front of each level or scope box that includes it in the run.

Scope BoxesList

Scope boxes in the project; each ticked box gets a dependent view and sheet on every ticked level.

AddButton

Adds another drawing set row with the first plan type and start number 1.

RemoveButton

Deletes the highlighted drawing set row.

Selected Drawing SetTable

One row per plan series: Use includes it, Set names it, Plan type is the view type it creates and Start is its first sheet number.

View Type NameSelector

Floor-plan or structural-plan view type used for every view of that drawing set.

Save settingsButton

Stores the Views, Naming and Output settings and the drawing sets for next time without creating anything.

ViewsTab

Which sheet kinds to create, their scales, crop handling and the viewport position.

Create overall sheetOption

Creates one overall plan view and sheet per level and drawing set.

Overall ScaleInput

Scale denominator for the overall views; 500 means 1:500.

Create scope-box sheetsOption

Creates one dependent view and sheet per ticked scope box, per level and drawing set.

Scope Box ScaleInput

Scale denominator for the parent and scope-box views; 200 means 1:200.

Set annotation crop offsets to zeroOption

Pulls each scope-box view's annotation crop tight to the scope box so the viewports line up exactly.

Hide annotation categories in scope viewsOption

Switches off every annotation category in the scope-box views.

Viewport Center XInput

Horizontal position of each viewport centre in millimetres from the sheet origin.

Viewport Center YInput

Vertical position of each viewport centre in millimetres from the sheet origin.

NamingTab

Name patterns for the views and sheets, with live examples.

Overall View Name TemplateInput

Pattern for the overall view name; placeholders {SetName} and {Level}.

Scope View Name TemplateInput

Pattern for each scope-box view name; placeholders {SetName}, {Level} and {ScopeBox}.

Parent View Name TemplateInput

Pattern for the parent plan that hosts the dependent views; placeholders {SetName} and {Level}.

Sheet Name TemplateInput

Pattern for the sheet name; {ViewName} copies the generated view name and the other placeholders also work.

OutputTab

Numbering, viewport type, sheet parameter and annotation stamp settings.

Sheet Number PrefixInput

Text placed in front of every sheet number, for example L-.

Sheet Number Minimum DigitsInput

Zero-pads the numeric part to at least this many digits; 3 turns 1 into 001.

Level Number StepInput

Added to the start number for each further level, so every level gets its own number range.

Selected Viewport TypeSelector

Viewport type applied to every placed viewport, or Project default to leave Revit's default.

Sheet Parameter NameInput

Optional name of an existing editable sheet parameter to fill on every new sheet.

Sheet ParameterInput

Value written to that parameter; text, whole numbers and numbers are accepted.

Place generic annotationOption

Places a generic annotation symbol on every sheet, for example a stamp.

Selected Annotation SymbolSelector

Generic annotation type to place, or None.

Annotation XInput

Horizontal position of the annotation in millimetres from the sheet origin.

Annotation YInput

Vertical position of the annotation in millimetres from the sheet origin.

SettingsButton

Shows or hides the sheet settings tabs; the label switches between Settings and Hide.

RunButton

Validates the inputs and creates all views and sheets in one transaction, then closes the window.

CloseButton

Closes the window without creating anything.

Back to tool index ↑

Documentation · Sheets · Align Viewports

Align Viewports

Move viewports on any number of sheets so they line up exactly with one correctly placed viewport, matched by its centre or a chosen corner.

A drawing set reads far better when every plan sits in the same spot on its sheet, but nudging viewports by eye across dozens of sheets is slow and never quite exact. Align Viewports lists every viewport in the project, lets you tick the ones to fix, and then asks you to pick one viewport on the open sheet that is already where it should be. Each ticked viewport is moved on its own sheet so its centre or corner lands at the same sheet position as that template.

Where to find it

LandForm tabDocumentation panelSheets ▾Align Viewports

Button tooltip: “Align viewports across sheets.”
Before you start
  • Open a sheet that holds the correctly positioned viewport: the tool only starts from a sheet, and the template is picked there.
  • The target viewports should show views with the same crop size as the template if you want their edges, not just their anchors, to line up.
  • Decide which point should match: the centre, or one of the four corners of the viewport.
Tutorial video

Watch Align Viewports in action

Video coming soon

Align Viewports walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 7 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Align Viewports: Align Viewports with one viewport listed and no target ticked yet
Align Viewports with one viewport listed and no target ticked yet · 7 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Search

    Filters the list by sheet number, sheet name, view name or view type.

  2. 2
    Target viewports

    Shows how many viewports are selected and how many the search leaves visible.

  3. 3
    Use / Sheet / View / Type

    Every viewport in the project; tick Use on each one to move.

  4. 4
    Select visible / Clear

    Select visible ticks every row the search shows; Clear unticks them all.

  5. 5
    Settings

    Shows the Alignment anchor and the Exclude legends and Exclude schedules options.

  6. 6
    Status line

    Tells you the next step: choose the targets, then pick the template viewport.

  7. 7
    Run

    Hides the window so you can click the template viewport on the active sheet, then aligns the ticked targets.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Align Viewports

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Documentation panel → Sheets ▾ → Align Viewports.

  2. 02

    Open the template sheet. Make the sheet with the correctly placed viewport the active view, then start Align Viewports. The window lists every viewport in the project by sheet, view and view type.

  3. 03

    Find the targets. Type in the search box to filter by sheet number, sheet name, view name or view type, for example a level name or FloorPlan. The line under Target viewports shows how many are selected and how many are visible.

  4. 04

    Tick the targets. Tick Use on each viewport to move, or press Select visible to tick every row the search shows. Clear unticks them all.

  5. 05

    Choose the anchor (optional). Press Settings to show the alignment options. Pick the Alignment anchor: Center, Top left, Top right, Bottom left or Bottom right. Leave Exclude legends and Exclude schedules on to keep those out of the list.

  6. 06

    Pick the template and align. Press Run. The window hides and Revit asks you to select the template viewport on the active sheet; click it. Every ticked viewport moves so its anchor matches the template's anchor position on the sheet.

    Press Esc instead of picking to cancel; the window comes back with your ticks kept.

What you get

Every ticked viewport now sits at the same position on its own sheet as the template viewport, measured at the anchor you chose. Only viewport positions change; views, crops and sheets are untouched. The move is one undo step named "LF-Align Viewports", and a message confirms how many viewports were aligned.

Good to know

Tips

  • Only viewports can be picked as the template, and it must be on the active sheet; otherwise the run stops with a message and the window comes back. When the alignment finishes, the window closes on its own.
  • If the template viewport is also ticked as a target, it is simply left where it is.
  • Use a corner anchor when the views have different crop sizes but should share a common edge, for example the top-left corner of every plan.
  • The anchor choice, the two exclude options and the search text are remembered the next time you open the tool.
Control reference · 10 controls

Every control and what it does

Align Viewports10 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Selected Alignment ModeSelector

The point matched between the template and each target: Center, Top left, Top right, Bottom left or Bottom right.

Exclude legendsOption

Hides legend viewports from the list and unticks any that were selected.

Exclude schedulesOption

Hides schedule viewports from the list and unticks any that were selected.

SearchInput

Search sheet number, sheet name, view name, or view type.

Select visibleButton

Ticks every viewport the current search shows.

ClearButton

Unticks every target viewport.

Filtered TargetsTable

Every viewport in the project with its sheet, view and view type; tick Use on the ones to move.

SettingsButton

Shows or hides the alignment anchor and exclude options.

RunButton

Pick the positioned template viewport, then align the checked targets.

CloseButton

Closes Align Viewports without moving anything.

Back to tool index ↑
10

LandForm ribbon panel

Management

Rename, parameters, surface types, worksets, clean-up and pinning.

Management · Rename

Rename

Rename dozens of families and types at once from a preview grid, or export checked loadable families as RFA files, without touching the model until you press **Apply renames**.

Rename is the tool for bringing a project's names into line with a standard: adding an LF_ prefix to every planting type, fixing a typo repeated across forty types, or swapping a client code for a new one. You choose where the names come from (the whole project, the active view or your current selection), build proposed names with prefix, suffix, removal and find/replace rules, check the result row by row, and apply the checked rows in one step. The same grid doubles as a family exporter: switch to Export families and each checked loadable family is saved as its own editable .rfa file.

Where to find it

LandForm tabManagement panelRename

Button tooltip: “Batch rename project families and types.”
Before you start
  • Open a project document. Rename refuses to run in a family document.
  • Decide the scope. If you want Current selection, select the elements in Revit before you open the tool; the grid lists the types of whatever is selected.
  • Decide whether you are renaming Family name or Type name. System families (Floors, Walls, Toposolids, Railings and so on) only allow type names; their family names are read-only.
  • For a family export, know the folder you want the files in. The default is a LandForm Family Export folder in your Documents.
Tutorial video

Watch Rename in action

Video coming soon

Rename walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 13 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Rename: Rename set to Rename names, with nothing found in the Active view scope
Rename set to Rename names, with nothing found in the Active view scope · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Workflow

    Rename names changes names in the model; Export families saves checked loadable families as RFA files.

  2. 2
    Collection scope

    Entire project, Active view or Current selection; the grid reloads immediately.

  3. 3
    Status line

    Shows how many rows were loaded, the run totals and the export progress; here it reports that nothing matched the scope.

  4. 4
    Sources and target

    Tick Loadable families, System families or both, then pick Family name or Type name below.

  5. 5
    Category and search

    Show only one Revit category, or search names and status to narrow the rows.

  6. 6
    Select visible / Clear visible / Reload

    Ticks or unticks Use on every row shown, or reads the names from Revit again.

  7. 7
    Naming rows

    One row per family or type with its current and Proposed name; tick Use on the rows to apply. You can type straight into a proposed name.

  8. 8
    Naming rules

    Prefix, Suffix, Remove from position and Character count; the proposed names preview as you type.

  9. 9
    Find and replace

    Matches Find text in the current names, then Replace selected or Replace all visible prepares proposed names without changing the model.

  10. 10
    Import Excel / Export Excel

    Saves the visible rows to a workbook for bulk edits, then loads the ProposedName column back.

  11. 11
    Counter

    How many rows are visible, selected and pending.

  12. 12
    Apply renames

    Renames the checked pending rows in one undoable step; reads Export families in export mode.

  13. 13
    Close

    Saves the settings and closes Rename.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Rename

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Management panel → Rename.

  2. 02

    Choose the job. Under Workflow, keep Rename names to change names in the model, or pick Export families to save checked loadable families as RFA files.

  3. 03

    Set the scope. Pick Entire project, Active view or Current selection. The grid reloads immediately and the status line tells you how many naming rows were loaded.

  4. 04

    Choose what to rename. Tick Loadable families, System families or both, then pick Family name or Type name. Family name lists one row per family; type name lists one row per type.

    System family names are read-only, so ticking System families keeps the target on Type name.

  5. 05

    Narrow the list. Use the category drop-down and the search box to show just the rows you care about, then press Select visible to tick Use on all of them. Clear visible unticks them again.

  6. 06

    Build the proposed names. Type a Prefix or Suffix, or set Remove from position and Character count to strip characters; the Proposed name column previews every change at once.

    To swap text, enter Find text and Replacement, use Find next or Find all to see which current names match, then press Replace selected for the highlighted rows or Replace all visible for every visible match. You can also type straight into a Proposed name cell. For bulk edits outside Revit, press Export Excel, change the ProposedName column in the workbook, then press Import Excel to load the names back by RenameElementId.

  7. 07

    Check the pending rows. Rows whose proposed name differs from the current name show Pending. Make sure Use is ticked on each one you want to apply; the counter above the grid shows how many are selected and pending.

  8. 08

    Apply. Press Apply renames. LandForm renames the checked rows in one undoable step named "LF-Rename Families and Types" and sets each row's Status to Renamed, Skipped or Failed.

    In export mode, set the Output folder (or Browse folder), choose whether to Group files by Revit category, Overwrite existing family files and Delete numbered Revit backup files, then press Export families.

What you get

In rename mode the checked families or types now carry their proposed names, the grid shows Renamed on each row, and the status line totals the renamed, skipped and failed rows. One Undo in Revit reverts the whole batch. In export mode nothing in the model changes; instead the output folder holds one .rfa per checked loadable family (in category subfolders when grouping is on), the status line shows the counts and the folder path, and families that Revit cannot edit are reported as skipped. Your scope, sources, filters, removal rule and export options are saved for the next session.

Good to know

Tips

  • Find and the replace buttons match the current names, not the proposed names, and they are greyed out while Find text is empty.
  • Find all filters the grid to matching rows. Change the category drop-down or clear Find text to see every row again.
  • Revit refuses a name that already exists in the same family or category. That row shows Failed with Revit's message while the other checked rows are still renamed.
  • An Excel import only needs the RenameElementId and ProposedName columns, read from the first worksheet. Rows whose ID is not in the current grid are ignored, so reload the same scope before importing.
  • Exporting opens each family in the background and saves it, so a long list takes a while; the progress bar in the footer shows how far it has got. With Overwrite existing family files off, a clash is saved as Name 2.rfa rather than replaced.
Control reference · 37 controls

Every control and what it does

Rename37 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Import ExcelButton

Reads the first worksheet of a workbook and copies its ProposedName values onto the rows whose RenameElementId matches; other rows are left unchanged.

Export ExcelButton

Saves the visible rows (ID, source, target, category, family, type, current name, proposed name, status) to an .xlsx workbook you can edit and import again.

Rename namesOption

Rename mode: proposed names are written to the model when you press Apply renames.

Export familiesOption

Export mode: checked loadable families are saved as .rfa files instead of being renamed. Sources switch to loadable families and the grid lists one row per family.

Entire projectOption

Collects every loadable family type and model system type in the project.

Active viewOption

Collects only the types used by elements visible in the active view.

Current selectionOption

Collects only the types of the elements that were selected in Revit when you opened the tool.

Loadable familiesOption

Includes types of families loaded from .rfa files. At least one source always stays ticked.

System familiesOption

Includes model system types such as Floor, Wall and Toposolid types. Their family names are read-only, so ticking this keeps the target on Type name.

Family nameOption

Lists one row per family and renames the family itself. Loadable families only.

Type nameOption

Lists one row per type and renames the type.

Selected CategorySelector

Show only rows from one Revit category.

SearchInput

Search category, family, type, current name, proposed name, and status.

Select visibleButton

Ticks Use on every row currently shown by the filters.

Clear visibleButton

Unticks Use on every row currently shown by the filters.

ReloadButton

Read matching names from the current Revit document again.

Rows Data GridTable

Check Use on the rows to include in the next rename or family export. Status reads Ready, Pending, Read-only, Renamed, Exported, Skipped or Failed.

Proposed NameInput

Edit the proposed name directly or use the naming rules. Read-only on system family name rows.

FindInput

Text to look for in the current names, ignoring case. The find and replace buttons stay disabled while it is empty.

ReplaceInput

Text written in place of every match of Find when you prepare a replacement. Leave it empty to delete the matched text.

Find nextButton

Highlights the next visible row whose current name contains the Find text and reports "Found n of m"; wraps round to the first match.

Find allButton

Filters the grid to the rows whose current name contains the Find text. Change the category or clear Find to show every row again.

Replace selectedButton

Prepares proposed names for the highlighted rows (or the focused row) by applying the removal, find/replace, prefix and suffix rules. The model is not changed.

Replace all visibleButton

Prepares proposed names for every visible row whose current name contains the Find text.

PrefixInput

Text added at the start of every proposed name; the preview updates as you type.

SuffixInput

Text added at the end of every proposed name; the preview updates as you type.

Remove Start IndexInput

Position of the first character to strip from each current name, counting from 1.

Remove Character CountInput

Number of characters to strip from that position. 0 removes nothing.

Undo previewButton

Resets every proposed name to the current model name and clears the Pending state.

Clear rulesButton

Empties Find, Replacement, Prefix and Suffix, resets the removal to position 1 and count 0, and rebuilds the preview.

Export FolderInput

Folder where exported Revit family files will be saved. Defaults to a LandForm Family Export folder in Documents.

Browse folderButton

Opens a folder picker for the export folder.

Group files by Revit categoryOption

Saves each exported family in a subfolder named after its Revit category.

Overwrite existing family filesOption

Replaces an existing .rfa of the same name. When off, a numbered copy such as "Name 2.rfa" is written instead.

Delete numbered Revit backup filesOption

After the export, deletes Revit backup copies (files ending .0001.rfa and similar) found in the output folder.

PrimaryButton

Reads Apply renames in rename mode and Export families in export mode. Enabled once a checked row has a pending change, or a checked loadable family is available to export.

CloseButton

Saves the settings and closes Rename.

Back to tool index ↑

Management · Parameter Manager

Parameter Manager

Review every project parameter binding in one grid, stage new shared parameters, rebind or delete existing ones, and exchange definitions with Excel or a shared parameter file.

Parameter Manager replaces the long round trip through Revit's Project Parameters dialog when you need to set up a batch of parameters at once. The window loads every parameter already bound in the project, lets you add new rows by name (ten at a time if you like), assign categories to several rows in one go, and only writes to the model when you press Run. Everything you stage can be imported from, or exported to, an Excel workbook or a Revit shared parameter file.

Where to find it

LandForm tabManagement panelParameter Manager

Button tooltip: “Create, review, exchange, bind, and remove project parameters.”
Before you start
  • Open a project document. The tool refuses to run in a family.
  • Decide where new definitions should live. By default LandForm writes them to its own shared parameter file, LF_SharedParameters.txt in the LandForm Tools data folder, under the group LF Parameters. Point Definition file at your office file if you prefer.
  • Know which categories each parameter must bind to and whether it is an Instance or Type parameter. Rows with no categories are skipped on Run.
  • Deleting a project parameter removes its values from the model. Save or back up before you delete anything.
Tutorial video

Watch Parameter Manager in action

Video coming soon

Parameter Manager walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Parameter Manager: Parameter Manager with the project's existing parameters loaded
Parameter Manager with the project's existing parameters loaded · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Shared parameter destination

    Definition file, Browse file and Definition group set the shared parameter file and group that receive new definitions.

  2. 2
    Parameter rows

    Every bound project parameter with its source, name, data type, group, binding, categories and status; check rows to include them in batch actions.

  3. 3
    Search, Select visible, Clear visible, Reload from Revit

    Filters the grid, checks or unchecks every row shown, or discards staged rows and reads the project again.

  4. 4
    Show existing project parameters

    Untick it to see only the rows you have staged.

  5. 5
    Name or names

    Type one or more new parameter names, separated by commas, semicolons or new lines.

  6. 6
    Data type, Group under, Binding

    Sets the parameter's data type, its Properties palette group, and whether it is an Instance or Type parameter.

  7. 7
    Description, Visible, User modifiable

    The description and flags stored in the shared parameter definition.

  8. 8
    Add new row(s), Update selected

    Adds one checked New row per name, or reapplies every editor setting, categories included, to the checked or highlighted rows.

  9. 9
    Import Excel, Export Excel, Excel template

    Stages rows from a workbook, exports the visible rows, or creates an import-ready workbook.

  10. 10
    Shared parameter exchange

    Import definitions stages rows from a shared parameter .txt file; Export checked definitions writes the checked rows to one.

  11. 11
    Categories

    Filter and tick the categories to bind; ticking one while rows are checked or highlighted stages it on those rows.

  12. 12
    Duplicate, Delete

    Copies the target rows as new staged rows, or removes them; deleting an existing parameter is permanent after you confirm.

  13. 13
    Run

    Creates and binds the checked rows in Revit after a confirmation.

  14. 14
    Status line

    Shows how many rows are visible, checked and new, and what the last action did.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Parameter Manager

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Management panel → Parameter Manager.

  2. 02

    Review what is already there. The grid lists every bound project parameter with its Source, Name, Data type, Group under, Binding, Categories and Status. Type in the search box to filter by any of those; untick Show existing project parameters to see only the rows you have staged.

  3. 03

    Add new rows. In Parameter editor, type one or more names in Name or names (separate them with commas, semicolons or new lines), choose the Data type (Text, Multiline Text, Integer, Number, Length, Area, Volume, Angle, Yes/No or URL) and Group under, pick Instance or Type, add a Description, set Visible and User modifiable, then press Add new row(s). Each name becomes a checked row with the status New.

    You can also stage rows with Import Excel (a workbook made with Excel template) or Import definitions (a Revit shared parameter .txt file).

  4. 04

    Assign categories. Filter the Categories list, tick the categories you need, and press Assign to rows to write them to the checked rows (or the highlighted rows when nothing is checked). Ticking a category while rows are checked or highlighted also stages it straight away. Categories left ticked when you press Run act as the fallback for rows that still have none.

  5. 05

    Rebind an existing parameter. Click an existing row to load it into the editor, change Binding, Group under or the categories, and the row's status changes to Binding pending. Press Update selected to reapply every editor setting, categories included, to all checked or highlighted rows. Existing parameters cannot be renamed here.

  6. 06

    Duplicate or remove rows. Duplicate copies the target rows as new staged rows named "Name Copy". Delete removes staged rows outright; for existing parameters it asks you to confirm and then permanently deletes them from the project.

  7. 07

    Run. Check the rows to apply and press Run. After a confirmation, LandForm creates the new shared parameters in the definition file and group, binds them to their categories, and re-inserts the bindings of existing rows. The Status column reports Created, Binding updated, Skipped: no categories or Failed per row and a summary dialog follows.

  8. 08

    Export when you need a record. Export Excel writes the visible rows to a workbook, Export checked definitions writes the checked rows to a shared parameter .txt file, and Excel template creates an import-ready workbook with instructions and a sample row.

What you get

The project now carries the checked parameters as shared project parameters, bound to the categories you chose, with the binding kind, group, description and visibility you set. New definitions are also appended to the shared parameter file so other projects can reuse the same GUIDs. The whole apply is one undo step named "LF-Parameter Manager: Apply Parameters"; deletions are a separate step named "LF-Parameter Manager: Delete Parameters". The summary line under the grid shows how many rows are visible, checked and new.

Good to know

Tips

  • Checked rows always win: batch actions use them when any are checked and fall back to the highlighted rows only when none are.
  • Importing from Excel or a definitions file only stages rows. Nothing changes in Revit until you press Run, and Reload from Revit throws staged rows away.
  • The Excel workbook must contain a sheet named Parameters; the Categories cell takes several names separated by semicolons, and the Shared Parameter Token column (TEXT, LENGTH, YESNO and so on) decides the data type.
  • Imported definitions arrive as Instance rows grouped under the first group option. Change Binding and Group under before you run if that is not what you want.
  • A row whose categories are all missing from the project is skipped with the status Skipped: no categories; assign categories and run again.
Control reference · 33 controls

Every control and what it does

Parameter Manager33 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Import ExcelButton

Stage parameter rows from a Parameter Manager Excel workbook.

Export ExcelButton

Export all visible parameter rows to Excel.

Excel templateButton

Create an import-ready workbook with instructions and a sample row.

Shared Parameter FileInput

Shared parameter file used when new project parameters are created.

Browse fileButton

Picks the shared parameter .txt file that new definitions are written to.

Shared Parameter GroupInput

Group inside the shared parameter file that receives new definitions (LF Parameters by default); also written into exported definition files.

Import definitionsButton

Reads the PARAM lines of a Revit shared parameter .txt file and stages each one as a new, checked Instance row.

Export checked definitionsButton

Writes the checked rows to a new Revit shared parameter .txt file, keeping each row's GUID where it has one.

Show existing project parametersOption

Shows or hides the rows that already exist in the project, so you can work on staged rows alone.

SearchInput

Search name, data type, property group, binding, category, or status.

Select visibleButton

Checks every row currently shown by the search and visibility filters.

Clear visibleButton

Unchecks every row currently shown.

Reload from RevitButton

Discard staged rows and read current project parameter bindings again.

Rows Data GridTable

Check rows to include them in Apply, Delete, Duplicate, or export actions.

DuplicateButton

Copies the checked (or highlighted) rows as new staged rows named "Name Copy".

DeleteButton

Remove staged rows or permanently delete existing project parameters.

Editor NameInput

Name of the parameter to add; several names separated by commas, semicolons or new lines create one row each. Also renames a single staged row. Existing parameters cannot be renamed.

Selected SpecSelector

Data type of the parameter: Text, Multiline Text, Integer, Number, Length, Area, Volume, Angle, Yes/No or URL.

Selected GroupSelector

Properties palette group the parameter is shown under: Data, Identity Data, Text, Dimensions, Materials and Finishes, Graphics, Constraints and every other Revit group.

InstanceOption

Binds the parameter to each element instance.

TypeOption

Binds the parameter to the element type.

Editor DescriptionInput

Description stored in the shared parameter definition.

VisibleOption

Sets the Visible flag of the shared parameter definition, so the parameter shows in Revit's properties.

User modifiableOption

Sets the User Modifiable flag, so users can edit the value in Revit.

Add new row(s)Button

Adds one checked New row per name in the editor, with the current data type, group, binding, description and the ticked categories.

Update selectedButton

Reapplies every editor setting, including the ticked categories, to the checked (or highlighted) rows.

Category SearchInput

Filter bindable Revit categories.

Categories ViewList

Bindable Revit categories; ticking one stages it on the checked (or highlighted) rows.

Is SelectedOption

Ticks a category for the target rows.

ClearButton

Unticks every category.

Assign to rowsButton

Writes the ticked categories to the checked (or highlighted) rows and marks them New or Binding pending.

RunButton

Apply the checked parameter rows to Revit.

CloseButton

Close Parameter Manager.

Back to tool index ↑

Management · Surface Type Manager

Surface Type Manager

Review every Floor and Toposolid type in one grid and edit names, compound layers, materials and material graphics in place, then write all the changes in one step.

Surface Type Manager replaces a long round of Edit Type, Edit Assembly and Material Browser dialogs when you tidy a project's paving, planting and earth build-ups. Every type with a compound structure is listed with its kind, usage, total thickness, layer count and top material. Expand a row to edit its layers, copy a thickness or a material from one type and paste it to many, or recolour the surface patterns of a whole palette of types at once. Nothing touches the model until you press Run, so you can stage edits freely and close the window to throw them away.

Where to find it

LandForm tabManagement panelSurface Type Manager

Button tooltip: “Edit Floor and Toposolid compound layers and material graphics.”
Before you start
  • A project document (not a family) that contains at least one Floor or Toposolid type with a compound structure. Toposolid types exist in Revit 2024 and later.
  • Remember that materials are shared. Changing a material's colour, pattern or name changes it everywhere it is used, so decide first which layers need their own copy.
  • Thicknesses are typed in the project's length units, exactly as Revit formats them.
Tutorial video

Watch Surface Type Manager in action

Video coming soon

Surface Type Manager walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Surface Type Manager: Surface Type Manager listing 16 Floor and Toposolid types, nothing staged yet
Surface Type Manager listing 16 Floor and Toposolid types, nothing staged yet · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Search

    Finds types by name, by kind or by a layer material they use.

  2. 2
    Floors / Toposolids / Used types only

    Clear a kind to hide it, or tick Used types only to list only types placed in the model.

  3. 3
    16 visible of 16 types

    Shows how many types the current filters leave in the grid.

  4. 4
    Type name

    Click a cell to rename the type.

  5. 5
    Surface FG color

    Click the swatch to set the top material's surface foreground colour.

  6. 6
    Total thickness

    Type a new depth; finish layers stay as they are and the structural or core layer makes up the difference.

  7. 7
    Top material

    Picks a different material for layer 1.

  8. 8
    Changed

    Shows Yes on rows whose name or layers you have edited.

  9. 9
    Expand arrow

    Opens the row's compound structure layers so you can edit each layer and its material graphics.

  10. 10
    Copy thickness / Paste thickness to selected / Paste material to selected

    Copy a depth or material from one type and paste it to the Ctrl- or Shift-selected rows.

  11. 11
    Surface foreground colors

    Pick one colour or a random palette, then the scope: Selected types, All visible types or All types.

  12. 12
    Apply colors

    Stages the chosen colours on the top materials of the target types; nothing is written until Run.

  13. 13
    Status line

    Shows guidance, and names the cell to fix if Run finds a problem.

  14. 14
    Run

    Checks every staged edit and writes them all to the project in one step.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Surface Type Manager

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Management panel → Surface Type Manager.

  2. 02

    Filter the grid. Type in the search box to find types by name, by kind or by a layer material they use. Clear Floors or Toposolids to hide that kind, and tick Used types only to list only the types placed in the model. The count on the right shows how many types are visible.

  3. 03

    Edit at type level. Click a Type name cell to rename the type, type a new Total thickness, or pick a different Top material for layer 1. Click the Surface FG color swatch to set the top material's surface foreground colour. Rows whose name or layers you edit show Yes under Changed.

    A new total thickness keeps the finish layers as they are and adjusts the structural or core layer to make up the difference.

  4. 04

    Open the layer editor. Click the arrow at the start of a row. The row expands to show its Compound structure layers: one line per layer, grouped as above core, core or below core.

  5. 05

    Edit the layers. For each layer set the function (Func.), Material and thickness (Thick.), and tick Wrap, Struct. or Var. where Revit allows it. Then edit the material itself on the same line: its Name, Render appearance for shading, Shade colour, transparency (Trans.) and the Surface FG, Surface BG, Cut FG and Cut BG patterns, each with its own colour swatch.

    Press Unique first if this layer should get its own copy of the material, so the graphic changes do not spread to other types.

  6. 06

    Copy and paste between types (optional). To reuse a material, select a layer and press Copy material, then Ctrl- or Shift-click the target type rows and press Paste material to selected. To reuse a build-up depth, select a row, press Copy thickness, select the targets and press Paste thickness to selected.

    A pasted material goes onto the active layer of the expanded row and onto layer 1 of every other selected row.

  7. 07

    Recolour surfaces in bulk (optional). In the Surface foreground colors row, pick Choose one color... or one of the random palettes, pick the scope (Selected types, All visible types or All types) and press Apply colors.

    A single colour is applied once to each top material, so types that share a material stay consistent. A random palette first gives each type its own copy of its top material, then gives each copy a different colour.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run. LandForm checks the staged values, writes everything in one transaction and shows a summary of the types and materials it updated before the window closes.

What you get

Every staged change is now in the project: renamed types, new layer structures and thicknesses, reassigned materials, and updated material colours, patterns, transparency and render-appearance settings. Material copies you made with Unique or a random palette exist as new project materials named after the source material and the type. The whole job is one undo step named "LF-Surface Type Manager: Apply Type and Material Changes", and the completion message tells you how many types and materials changed and how many material copies were created.

Good to know

Tips

  • Run stops and reports the problem instead of writing anything if a type or material name is empty or duplicated, a layer thickness is zero or invalid, a membrane layer has a thickness, or a transparency value is outside 0 to 100. Fix the cell named in the status line and press Run again.
  • Choosing Membrane as a layer function sets the thickness to zero and locks it. Only one layer per type can be Struct. and only one can be Var.; ticking another clears the first.
  • If the copy buttons are greyed out, select a type row first; Copy material also needs a layer selected in the expanded editor.
  • The window stays open while you work in Revit, but Run only works when the project that opened it is the active one.
  • Use Close to leave without applying anything; every staged edit is discarded.
Control reference · 36 controls

Every control and what it does

Surface Type Manager36 controls
ControlTypeFunction
SearchInput

Search type names, Floor/Toposolid kind, or assigned layer materials.

FloorsOption

Show or hide Floor types.

ToposolidsOption

Show or hide Toposolid types.

Used types onlyOption

Limit the grid to types assigned to model elements.

Copy thicknessButton

Copy the total thickness of the current type row so you can paste it to other selected rows.

Selected Surface Color PaletteSelector

Choose one shared colour, or random greens, greys or beiges for bulk surface foreground colours.

Selected Surface Color ScopeSelector

Apply to the selected type rows, every currently visible filtered row, or all types.

Apply colorsButton

Stage the chosen surface foreground colours on the top materials of the target types. Nothing is written until Run.

Types Data GridTable

Review type kind, editable type name, usage, total thickness, layer count, top material, and changed state. Ctrl/Shift-select rows for bulk material paste.

Total ThicknessInput

New total thickness for the type. Finish layers stay as they are and the structural or core layer absorbs the difference.

Top Material IdSelector

Search or choose the material assigned to layer 1. Revit does not expose its native Material Browser as a value-returning picker.

Copy materialButton

Copy the material assignment from the active layer.

Workspace.Selected LayerTable

The compound structure layers of the expanded type. Select a layer to make it the active layer for copying and editing.

FunctionSelector

Layer function: Structure, Substrate, Thermal / Air, Finish 1, Finish 2, Membrane or Structural Deck.

Material IdSelector

Material assigned to this layer.

ThicknessInput

Layer thickness in project length units. Locked at zero for membrane layers.

WrapsOption

Let this layer wrap at edges. Only layers outside the core can wrap.

Is StructuralOption

Make this layer the type's structural material. Only one layer per type can be structural.

Is VariableOption

Make this layer variable in thickness. Only one layer per type can be variable, and not a Structural Deck layer.

Material Editor.NameInput

Rename the layer's material. The new name applies wherever the material is used.

Material Editor.Use Render AppearanceOption

Use the material's render appearance for shaded display.

Material Editor.TransparencyInput

Shading transparency of the layer's material, 0 to 100.

Material Editor.Surface Foreground Pattern IdSelector

Surface foreground pattern of the layer's material, shown with a preview swatch. The swatch button beside it sets its colour.

Material Editor.Surface Background Pattern IdSelector

Surface background pattern of the layer's material. The swatch button beside it sets its colour.

Material Editor.Cut Foreground Pattern IdSelector

Cut foreground pattern of the layer's material. The swatch button beside it sets its colour.

Material Editor.Cut Background Pattern IdSelector

Cut background pattern of the layer's material. The swatch button beside it sets its colour.

UniqueButton

Make this layer material unique before editing project-wide graphics.

Make uniqueButton

Stage a copy of the selected material and assign it only to the selected layer. This side panel is hidden in the current layout; use the layer's Unique button.

Workspace.Selected Material.NameInput

Side-panel copy of the layer's material Name field; hidden in the current layout.

Use Render AppearanceOption

Use the render appearance asset for shaded display. Side-panel copy of the layer's Render tick box; hidden in the current layout.

Workspace.Selected Material.TransparencyInput

Side-panel copy of the layer's Trans. field; hidden in the current layout.

Workspace.Selected Material.Surface Foreground Pattern IdSelector

Side-panel copy of the layer's Surface FG pattern; hidden in the current layout.

Workspace.Selected Material.Surface Background Pattern IdSelector

Side-panel copy of the layer's Surface BG pattern; hidden in the current layout.

Workspace.Selected Material.Cut Foreground Pattern IdSelector

Side-panel copy of the layer's Cut FG pattern; hidden in the current layout.

Workspace.Selected Material.Cut Background Pattern IdSelector

Side-panel copy of the layer's Cut BG pattern; hidden in the current layout.

RunButton

Validate every staged edit and write it to the project in one transaction, then close.

Back to tool index ↑

Management · Workset Manager

Workset Manager

Set up and police the worksets of a workshared project from one window: create them from a list, rename them, move grids, levels, links and families onto them, build workset 3D views and switch them on or off in views and templates.

Workset Manager replaces the slow round of Worksets dialog, Properties palette and Visibility/Graphics edits you normally make when a project is first workshared or when a model drifts out of order. Each tab handles one job and works on the rows you tick, so you can review what will change before you press the button. Every button writes its own undo step, and the lists reload afterwards so the Current workset columns always show the model as it is now.

Where to find it

LandForm tabManagement panelWorkset Manager

Button tooltip: “Create, rename, assign, review, and control project worksets.”
Before you start
  • A workshared project. The tool will not open in a family or in a project without worksharing.
  • For the Create tab, a plain text file with one workset name per line. Open template gives you a starter file.
  • If you plan to use Assign all to Shared Levels and Grids, make sure a user workset with exactly that name exists; create it on the Create tab first if needed.
  • Elements whose Workset parameter Revit will not let you change are skipped and counted in the status line rather than stopping the whole operation.
Tutorial video

Watch Workset Manager in action

Video coming soon

Workset Manager walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Workset Manager: Workset Manager on the Create tab before a name list is loaded
Workset Manager on the Create tab before a name list is loaded · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Status line

    Reports how many worksets, grids and levels, links, family instances and views were found, and what each operation moved or skipped.

  2. 2
    Refresh model data

    Reloads everything from the model; press it after changing the model outside the tool.

  3. 3
    Tabs

    Each tab handles one job: Create, Rename, Grids & Levels, Links, 3D Views, Families and Visibility.

  4. 4
    Open template

    Opens a starter text file with one workset name per line; save your edited copy somewhere permanent.

  5. 5
    Browse list

    Chooses the text file with one workset name per line and checks each name against the project.

  6. 6
    List file

    Shows the path of the chosen name list.

  7. 7
    Create / Workset name / Status

    Each name from the list as Existing or Missing; missing names are ticked in Create automatically.

  8. 8
    Create selected

    Creates the ticked missing worksets in one undo step.

  9. 9
    Create all missing

    Creates every name marked Missing, whether ticked or not.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Workset Manager

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Management panel → Workset Manager.

  2. 02

    Check what was loaded. The status line reports how many worksets, grids and levels, links, family instances and views were found. Press Refresh model data whenever you have changed the model outside the tool.

  3. 03

    Create missing worksets. On Create, press Browse list and choose your text file. Each name is listed as Existing or Missing, and missing names are ticked automatically. Press Create selected for the ticked names or Create all missing for every missing name.

    Blank and duplicate lines are ignored, and names that already exist are never created twice.

  4. 04

    Rename worksets. On Rename, type the new name in the New name column, tick Use on those rows and press Rename selected worksets. A name that is already taken is skipped.

  5. 05

    Place grids and levels. On Grids & Levels, use Show grids and Show levels to filter the list, tick the rows (or press Select visible), choose the target workset and press Assign selected. To move every grid and level in one go, press Assign all to Shared Levels and Grids.

  6. 06

    Place links and CAD imports. On Links, tick the Revit links and CAD imports. Choose a target workset and press Assign to target to move them and their types together, or press Create separate worksets to give each link its own workset named with the prefix you typed (LINK_ by default) followed by the link name.

  7. 07

    Move family instances. On Families, narrow the list with the search box and the category, workset and selection filters, tick the instances, pick the target workset and press Assign selected.

  8. 08

    Make workset 3D views (optional). On 3D Views, tick worksets and press Create combined 3D view for one isometric view showing only those worksets, or Create one view per workset for an isolated view of each. Press Export model breakdown to save a text report of element and category counts per user workset.

  9. 09

    Control visibility in views and templates. On Visibility, tick views or templates on the left and worksets on the right. Press Show selected worksets or Hide selected worksets to set their visibility explicitly, or Check visibility to report the current state in the details box without changing anything.

What you get

The worksets, names and element assignments you chose are in the model, each operation as its own undo step named after it, for example "LF-Workset Manager: Create Worksets", "LF-Workset Manager: Assign Family Instances" or "LF-Workset Manager: Hide Worksets in Views". New 3D views are named LF_WS_Combined or LF_WS_ followed by the workset name, with only the chosen worksets visible. After every change the lists reload, so the Current workset columns and the status line confirm what moved and what was skipped.

Good to know

Tips

  • Open template writes a starter list to a temporary folder and opens it. Save your edited copy somewhere permanent before you choose it with Browse list.
  • A rename that only changes letter case is ignored, because the tool compares workset names without case.
  • Assign to target on the Links tab also moves the link's type, so the link instance and its type always end up on the same workset.
  • Check visibility lists, for every selected workset, how many of the chosen views show it, hide it, or use the global setting.
  • The tool only offers user worksets as targets. View, family and standard worksets are managed by Revit.
Control reference · 49 controls

Every control and what it does

Workset Manager49 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Refresh model dataButton

Reload worksets, grids, levels, links, family instances, views, and templates.

CreateTab

Create worksets from a text list of names.

Create File PathInput

Selected workset list text file.

Browse listButton

Choose the text file with one workset name per line and check each name against the project.

Open templateButton

Open a starter text file with one workset name per line.

Create ItemsTable

Names from the list with their status, Existing or Missing. Tick Create on the names to add; missing names are ticked automatically.

Create selectedButton

Create the ticked missing worksets in one undo step.

Create all missingButton

Create every name marked Missing, whether ticked or not.

RenameTab

Rename user worksets in bulk.

Rename ItemsTable

Current and new name of every user workset. Edit New name and tick Use on the rows to rename.

Rename selected worksetsButton

Rename the ticked worksets in one undo step; names already in use are skipped.

Grids & LevelsTab

Move grids and levels to a workset.

Show gridsOption

Include grids in the list.

Show levelsOption

Include levels in the list.

Selected Grid Level TargetSelector

Target user workset for the selected grids and levels.

Select visibleButton

Tick every row the current filter shows.

Clear visibleButton

Untick every row the current filter shows.

Grid Level ViewTable

Grids and levels with their kind and current workset. Tick Use on the rows to move.

Assign selectedButton

Move the ticked grids and levels to the target workset.

Assign all to Shared Levels and GridsButton

Assign every grid and level in the project to the standard Shared Levels and Grids workset.

LinksTab

Move Revit links and CAD imports to worksets.

Selected Link TargetSelector

Target workset for a shared assignment.

Link Workset PrefixInput

Prefix added when creating a separate workset for each selected link.

Select allButton

Tick every row in the list.

ClearButton

Untick every row in the list.

Link ItemsTable

Revit links and CAD imports with their kind and current workset. Tick Use on the rows to move.

Assign to targetButton

Move the ticked links and their types to the target workset.

Create separate worksetsButton

Create a workset named prefix plus link name for each ticked link, then move the link and its type onto it.

3D ViewsTab

Build workset 3D views and the model breakdown report.

WorksetsTable

User worksets. Tick Use on the worksets to include.

Create combined 3D viewButton

Create one isometric view named LF_WS_Combined with only the ticked worksets visible.

Create one view per worksetButton

Create an isometric view named LF_WS_ plus the workset name for each ticked workset, showing only that workset.

Export model breakdownButton

Export element and category counts for every user workset to a text file.

FamiliesTab

Move placed family instances to a workset.

Family SearchInput

Search category, family, type, workset, or element ID.

Selected Family CategorySelector

Show only one category of family instances, or All categories.

Selected Family WorksetSelector

Show only instances on one workset, or All worksets.

Selected Family SelectionSelector

Show All, only Selected (ticked) or only Unselected rows.

Clear filtersButton

Reset the search text and the three family filters.

Family ViewTable

Family instances with category, family, type, current workset and element ID. Tick Use on the rows to move.

Clear allButton

Untick every family instance, including rows hidden by the filters.

Selected Family TargetSelector

Target workset for checked family instances.

VisibilityTab

Show, hide or check worksets in views and view templates.

View ItemsTable

Views and view templates. Tick Use on the ones to change or check.

Details MessageInput

Visibility check details and operation guidance.

Show selected worksetsButton

Set the ticked worksets to Show in every ticked view or template.

Hide selected worksetsButton

Set the ticked worksets to Hide in every ticked view or template.

Check visibilityButton

Report, per ticked workset, how many ticked views show it, hide it or use the global setting, without changing the model.

CloseButton

Close Workset Manager.

Back to tool index ↑

Management · CleanUp

CleanUp

Find views, schedules, legends, CAD, import line styles, unplaced rooms and spaces, and unused scope boxes that clutter the project, review them item by item, and delete only the ones you tick.

Revit's own Purge Unused leaves a lot behind: working views nobody placed on a sheet, schedules and legends from old issues, CAD you imported once for tracing, and dozens of import line styles from those drawings. CleanUp, whose window is called Model Purger, gathers all of that into nine categories so you can see what is there, untick anything you need to keep, export a record, and remove the rest in one pass. It is a good last step before you archive a model or hand it over.

Where to find it

LandForm tabManagement panelCleanUp

Button tooltip: “Review and delete unused project content.”
Before you start
  • An open project document (not a family). The window is modal, so finish any other edit first.
  • Make the view you want to keep working in the active view. The active view is never offered or deleted.
  • Know which unplaced views must stay, such as working 3D views or coordination views. Views whose names contain NWC, Navisworks or ACC are protected automatically.
  • Save or sync before a large purge. Deleting an item can also delete elements that depend on it.
Tutorial video

Watch CleanUp in action

Video coming soon

CleanUp walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

CleanUp: Model Purger before the first analysis
Model Purger before the first analysis · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Analyze model

    Scans the project and fills Purge categories; every candidate starts ticked.

  2. 2
    Purge categories

    Each category with its item count. Click a row to review its items; untick Use to keep the whole category.

  3. 3
    No category selected

    Names the chosen category and explains what it contains.

  4. 4
    Purge / Name / Type / Element ID

    The items of the chosen category; untick Purge on anything that must stay.

  5. 5
    Search

    Filters the list by name, type or element ID.

  6. 6
    Select visible / Clear

    Ticks or unticks only the items the search shows.

  7. 7
    Export CSV

    Saves every analysed candidate with its category, type, element ID and whether it is ticked.

  8. 8
    Purge selected

    Deletes the ticked items after you confirm, then analyses the model again.

  9. 9
    Status line

    Guides you through the steps and counts the items that could not be deleted.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use CleanUp

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Management panel → CleanUp.

  2. 02

    Analyse. Press Analyze model. LandForm scans the project and fills Purge categories with each category and its item count. Every candidate starts ticked.

  3. 03

    Pick a category to review. Click a category row to list its items on the right with their name, type and element ID. The line under the list explains what the category contains.

  4. 04

    Keep what you need. Untick Purge on any item that must stay. Untick Use on a category row to keep the whole category; tick it again to select all of its items.

  5. 05

    Search within a category (optional). Type in the search box to filter the list by name, type or element ID, then press Select visible or Clear to tick or untick only the filtered items.

  6. 06

    Export a record (optional). Press Export CSV to save every analysed candidate with its category, type, element ID and whether it is ticked. The message shows where the file was saved.

  7. 07

    Purge. Press Purge N selected and answer Yes to the confirmation, which defaults to No. LandForm deletes the ticked items, then reanalyses the model so the lists show what is left.

What you get

The ticked views, schedules, legends, CAD instances, import line styles, rooms, spaces and scope boxes are gone, together with any elements Revit deletes with them. The deletion runs as one transaction named "LF-Model Purger: Delete Selected Items". A message reports how many elements were deleted including dependents; if some items could not be deleted, a warning lists each one with Revit's reason, and the status line counts them. The fresh analysis afterwards confirms what remains.

More about CleanUp

Categories it reviews

CategoryWhat is listed
Unplaced ViewsViews other than legends and schedules that are not placed on a sheet. The active view and names containing NWC, Navisworks or ACC are protected.
LegendsLegend views not placed on a sheet.
SchedulesSchedules not placed on a sheet.
Imported CADDWG or DXF instances embedded in the model.
Linked CADDWG or DXF link instances.
Import Line StylesCAD layer and object styles under Import Object Styles.
Unplaced RoomsRooms with no location and no measurable area.
Unplaced SpacesSpaces with no location and no measurable area.
Unused Scope BoxesScope boxes not used by any view's Scope Box parameter.
Good to know

Tips

  • Imported CAD and Linked CAD list every CAD instance in the project, not only unused ones. Untick any drawing that is still needed in a view.
  • Import Line Styles picks out graphics styles under Import Object Styles that look like CAD layers. Styles that Revit protects or still uses may be kept and are reported after the purge.
  • Unplaced Views skips sheets, schedules, legends and view templates; legends and schedules have their own categories. A view counts as placed only when it sits on a sheet.
  • Unused Scope Boxes are scope boxes that no view uses through its Scope Box parameter.
  • CSV reports are saved in the Reports\ModelPurger folder of your LandForm data folder, named after the project and the time of export.
Control reference · 9 controls

Every control and what it does

Model Purger9 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Analyze modelButton

Scan the active project and refresh all Model Purger candidates.

Selected GroupTable

Purge categories with their item counts. Click a row to review its items; untick Use to keep the whole category.

SearchInput

Search the selected category by name, type, or Revit element id.

Select visibleButton

Tick every item the search currently shows in the selected category.

ClearButton

Untick every item the search currently shows in the selected category.

Visible CandidatesTable

Items in the selected category with name, type and element ID. Untick Purge on anything to keep.

Export CSVButton

Export every analyzed candidate and its current selection state to CSV.

PurgeButton

Delete the checked candidates after confirmation, then refresh the analysis.

CloseButton

Close Model Purger.

Back to tool index ↑

Management · Pin · Viewports

Viewports

Pin every viewport on every sheet in the project with one click, so finished sheet layouts cannot be nudged out of place by accident.

Once sheets are composed and views are aligned, a stray drag is all it takes to move a viewport. Pin > Viewports scans the whole project, pins each viewport that is not pinned yet, and reports what it did. There is no window to fill in and nothing to select first.

Where to find it

LandForm tabManagement panelPin ▾Viewports

Button tooltip: “Pin all viewport elements in the project.”
Before you start
  • Open a project document with sheets. The tool refuses to run in a family document.
  • Nothing needs to be selected; every viewport in the project is included, whichever view is active.
  • If a few viewports must stay movable, plan to unpin them afterwards with Revit's own Unpin; the tool pins all of them.
Tutorial video

Watch Viewports in action

Video coming soon

Viewports walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 4 steps

How to use Viewports

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Management panel → Pin ▾ → Viewports.

  2. 02

    Run the command. Press Viewports in the Pin pulldown. LandForm immediately collects every viewport on every sheet and pins the ones that are free.

  3. 03

    Read the summary. A dialog reports how many viewports were found, how many were pinned now, how many were already pinned and how many failed. If anything failed, the dialog appears as a warning and lists up to five failures with the element name and ID.

  4. 04

    Close the dialog. The sheets are ready; pinned viewports show Revit's pin icon when selected.

What you get

Every viewport in the project is pinned, so Revit asks before letting anyone move it. The change is a single undoable step named "LF-Pin Viewports". Viewports that were already pinned are counted but not touched, so running the tool again is harmless.

Good to know

Tips

  • Run the tool again whenever new sheets have been laid out; only the newly placed viewports are changed.
  • A viewport you cannot edit, for example one owned by another user in a workshared model, is counted as Failed and the remaining viewports are still pinned.
  • Use Pin > CAD Links, RVT Links or All Links for linked files; viewports are never included in those commands.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
11

LandForm ribbon panel

CAD

Turn CAD linework, hatches, text and blocks into Revit elements and families.

CAD · CAD · AutoCAD Block To Family

AutoCAD Block To Family

Place a Revit family instance at every block reference in a linked or imported CAD drawing, with each CAD block name mapped to the family type you choose.

Planting plans, lighting layouts and furniture schemes often arrive as a DWG in which every tree, bollard or bench is a block. Instead of placing hundreds of families by hand, you pick the import, let Smart Map pair each block name with a loaded family type, correct the rows that need it and press Run. Every instance lands on the block's insertion point, turned to the block's rotation and lifted to the block's own elevation, so the Revit model takes over exactly where the CAD left off.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelCAD ▾AutoCAD Block To Family

Button tooltip: “Place Revit families from CAD block references.”
Before you start
  • A CAD import or link (DWG or DXF) visible in the active plan or 3D view; the tool refuses to start on a sheet and will not pick while the view shows no CAD. The symbols must still be block references: linework that was exploded in CAD has no block name to map.
  • The families you want to place loaded in the project. Only loadable model families that can be placed at a point are offered, so tags, title blocks, detail items, profiles, in-place families and line-based or adaptive families never appear in the list.
  • The Level the instances should belong to, and whether an Offset in metres should be added above the block's elevation.
Tutorial video

Watch AutoCAD Block To Family in action

Video coming soon

AutoCAD Block To Family walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 8 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

AutoCAD Block To Family: AutoCAD Block To Family toolbar warning that the project has no CAD yet
AutoCAD Block To Family toolbar warning that the project has no CAD yet · 8 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick CAD

    Click the CAD import or link whose block references should become families.

  2. 2
    No CAD selected

    Shows the name of the picked drawing.

  3. 3
    Status line

    Reports how many block names were found, warns about problems and shows the final count; here the project has no CAD link or import yet.

  4. 4
    Map

    Opens the Block Mapping panel and runs Smart Map; correct a row's family type or untick Use to skip a block.

  5. 5
    No map

    Mapping counter, which reads "N/N mapped · N inst" once blocks are mapped.

  6. 6
    Level

    Level the placed instances are hosted on.

  7. 7
    Offset

    Height in metres added above each block's elevation.

  8. 8
    Run

    Places one family instance per mapped block reference in one undoable step.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use AutoCAD Block To Family

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → CAD ▾ → AutoCAD Block To Family.

  2. 02

    Pick the drawing. Press Pick CAD and click the CAD import or link in the view. The toolbar shows its name and the status line reads "Found N CAD block name(s)".

    If the drawing holds no block references the status says so; the symbols were probably exploded before the file reached you.

  3. 03

    Open the mapping. Press Map. The Block Mapping panel lists every block name with its instance Count, and Smart Map runs automatically, scoring the words shared between the block name and each family and type name.

    A block whose name matches nothing is given the first family in the list, so read every row rather than trusting the counter alone.

  4. 04

    Correct the rows. Change the Revit Family Type drop-down on any row, or untick Use to leave that block unplaced. For a long family list press Families, choose a category, type part of a name, then drag the type onto a row or double-click it for the row you selected last.

    The toolbar counter updates to "N/N mapped · N inst" as you go.

  5. 05

    Set the level and height. Choose the Level and type an Offset in metres. Each instance is placed at its block's elevation plus this offset.

  6. 06

    Run. Press Run. The progress bar counts through the blocks and the status line finishes with "Block complete. Created: N. Skipped: N."

What you get

The model now holds one family instance for every block reference whose name was ticked and mapped, each sitting on the block's insertion point, rotated to the block's X direction and hosted on the chosen level. The whole placement is a single undoable step named "LF-AutoCAD Block To Family: Place Block Families". The Skipped count covers block references on unmapped or unticked names and any instance Revit refused to create. Your mappings, level and offset are saved and reloaded the next time you open the tool.

Good to know

Tips

  • Smart Map scores whole words, so family names that reuse the block codes of your CAD standard (for example LF-PL-Delonix Regia) match far more reliably than generic names.
  • Mappings are remembered per block name. Running the tool on a second drawing from the same office usually needs no new mapping at all.
  • A family you expect but cannot find in the browser is almost certainly annotation, a detail item, in-place or line-based; load a point-placed model family instead.
  • If Pick CAD reports that the view shows no CAD, link or import the drawing into this view first, or switch to the view where it is visible.
  • Instances are placed with Revit's quiet failure handling, so a block that lands somewhere a family cannot sit is skipped rather than stopping the run.
Control reference · 14 controls

Every control and what it does

Cad Block To Family14 controls
ControlTypeFunction
_Pick CADButton

Returns to Revit so you can click the CAD import or link whose block references should become families.

BlockSelector

Limits the run to one block name, or All blocks. Not shown in the current toolbar, so every mapped block is placed.

_MapButton

Shows or hides the Block Mapping panel; opening it runs Smart Map automatically.

LevelSelector

Level the placed family instances are hosted on.

OffsetInput

Height in metres added above each block's elevation. Long-press and drag vertically to scrub the value.

FamilySelector

Choose the fallback family type. Only loadable model families that can be placed at a point are listed; tags, title blocks, detail items, in-place families and curve-driven families such as beams are left out.

RotationOption

Turns each instance to match the block's rotation. Not shown in the current toolbar and always on.

ElevationOption

Places each instance at the block's own elevation instead of the level. Not shown in the current toolbar and always on.

_RunButton

Places one family instance per block reference that has an enabled mapping, in one undoable step.

Smart MapButton

Re-matches every block name to the loaded family type with the most similar name.

FamiliesButton

Shows or hides the family browser beside the mapping rows.

Mapping CategorySelector

Narrow the family browser to one model category, or keep All Categories.

Mapping Search BoxInput

Filters the family browser to names containing the text you type.

Mapping Family ListList

Model family types that match the category and search. Drag one onto a mapping row, or double-click it for the selected CAD block.

Back to tool index ↑

CAD · CAD · Set Type By Text

Set Type By Text

Read the text labels in a CAD drawing and assign every Floor or Toposolid that sits under a label the type that label stands for.

Planting and paving plans label their areas with codes such as ACA OER or PAVING 01. Once you have made the surfaces (with Hatch, Line Tracer or Hatch To Floor / Toposolid), this tool reads the CAD Text and MText, lists every unique value with how often it appears, and lets you map each value to an existing type or to a new type named from the text. Press Run and each surface whose top face contains a label point switches to the mapped type, in one undoable step with its own Undo.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelCAD ▾Set Type By Text

Button tooltip: “Assign floor or toposolid types from CAD text labels.”
Before you start
  • A CAD import or link (DWG or DXF) with Text or MText labels, visible in the active plan or 3D view and not on a sheet.
  • The Floors or Toposolids the labels sit on, already in the model, with each label's insertion point inside the surface it describes. Toposolid targets need Revit 2024 or later.
  • The types you want to assign, or a template type and a naming rule for Auto Create to build new ones.
Tutorial video

Watch Set Type By Text in action

Video coming soon

Set Type By Text walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 12 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Set Type By Text: Set Type By Text toolbar warning that the project has no CAD drawing yet
Set Type By Text toolbar warning that the project has no CAD drawing yet · 12 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick CAD

    Click the CAD import or link whose Text and MText labels should be read.

  2. 2
    Read Text

    Reads the drawing's text again instead of reusing the copy cached earlier in the session.

  3. 3
    Toposolid

    Tick to retype Toposolids; leave it clear to retype Floors.

  4. 4
    Refresh

    Reloads the project's Floor or Toposolid types after you have added new ones.

  5. 5
    Map

    Opens the workspace with the CAD Text list, the Text Mapping grid and the type browser.

  6. 6
    Auto Create

    Builds new types named from the CAD text instead of assigning existing ones.

  7. 7
    Naming

    Sets the text placed before and after the CAD value in each new type name.

  8. 8
    LF-ACA OER

    Preview of a new type name built with the current naming rule.

  9. 9
    Random color / Teal (green tones)

    In Auto Create mode, gives each new type its own material coloured from the chosen palette.

  10. 10
    Run

    Switches every surface with a mapped label on its top face to the mapped type, in one undoable step.

  11. 11
    Undo

    Puts back the previous type of every surface the last run changed.

  12. 12
    No CAD in this project…

    Status line; here it warns that there is no CAD drawing to pick, and after a pick it reports how many text values were read.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Set Type By Text

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → CAD ▾ → Set Type By Text.

  2. 02

    Pick the drawing. Press Pick CAD and click the CAD import or link. LandForm exports the drawing on its own to a temporary DXF, reads every Text and MText entity and reports "Read N unique CAD text value(s)".

    If the tool was used on this drawing earlier in the session, the cached text is reused and the status says so; press Read Text to read it again.

  3. 03

    Choose the target. Leave Toposolid clear to retype Floors, or tick it to retype Toposolids. Press Refresh if you have just added types to the project.

  4. 04

    Open the workspace. Press Map. The CAD Text list on the left shows each value with its count, the Text Mapping grid sits in the middle, and the type browser on the right lists the project's Floor or Toposolid types with a search box.

  5. 05

    Add rows. Select a value and press Add (double-clicking a value does the same), or press Add All for a row per value. If a type is selected in the browser when you press Add, it is assigned at once.

  6. 06

    Assign existing types. Press Smart Find to match each row to the type with the most similar name, including botanical codes such as AER JAV for Aerva javanica. Rows with no match stay unassigned and are highlighted red for you to finish by hand: pick from the row's Revit Type drop-down, drag a type from the browser onto a row, or select rows and double-click a type.

  7. 07

    Or create new types. Tick Auto Create. Press Naming to set the text placed before and after the CAD value (the default makes LF-ACA OER) and watch the preview. The grid now shows New Type Name per row and the browser lists Floor Templates or Toposolid Templates: Smart Find picks a template for each row, and you can drag another onto any row. Tick Random color and choose a palette to colour each new type's material; click a colour cell to change one. Create Types builds or reuses the types now so you can inspect them before running.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run. LandForm collects every Floor or Toposolid, finds the label whose insertion point lies on each surface's top face, and switches the surface to the mapped type. A summary reports how many type changes were applied, how many new types were created and how many matched labels had no mapping row.

  9. 09

    Undo if needed. Press Undo on the toolbar to put back the previous type of every surface the last run changed; the status reads "Restored N type assignment(s)".

What you get

Every Floor or Toposolid that contains a mapped label now carries that label's type, changed in one undoable step named "LF-Set Type By Text: Set Types from CAD Text". In Auto Create mode the new types are duplicates of their template named from your rule, created in "LF-Set Type By Text: Create Types from CAD Text", and with Random color each has its own coloured material. Surfaces with no label, and labels with no mapping row, are left untouched and counted in the summary. Undo reverses the last run as "LF-Set Type By Text: Undo Set Types".

Good to know

Tips

  • A surface takes the first label found inside it, so one label per area is enough; a label that falls on the gap between two surfaces matches neither.
  • The text read needs the CAD on screen: if the status says the view shows no CAD, switch to the view where the import is visible before pressing Pick CAD or Read Text.
  • Foundation slab types are left out of the Floor list on purpose.
  • When Auto Create targets Toposolids, planting codes that match LandForm's bundled planting catalogue get that catalogue's coordinated library type instead of a plain duplicate; rows without a catalogue match are highlighted red and use the generic template.
  • The Toposolid switch, naming rule, palette and search text are remembered between sessions; the text locations are cached only while Revit stays open.
Control reference · 26 controls

Every control and what it does

Cad Type By Text21 controls
ControlTypeFunction
_Pick CADButton

Pick the CAD import/link that contains the source text.

_Read TextButton

Export the active view to DXF temporarily and read CAD Text/MText values.

_MapButton

Expand the text-to-type mapping workspace.

ToposolidOption

When checked, mapping rows update Toposolid types instead of Floor types.

_RefreshButton

Reload available Revit floor or toposolid types from the active document.

Auto CreateOption

Create missing Floor/Toposolid types from the selected base type and the CAD text value.

Random colorOption

In Auto Create mode, gives each new type its own material coloured from the palette and shows the Color column.

Color Palette Combo BoxSelector

Color Rules palette the new type colours are taken from; Teal (green tones) by default.

_NamingButton

Set how new Floor/Toposolid types are named.

Create _TypesButton

Create or reuse the generated Floor/Toposolid types, then populate the mapping rows.

_UndoButton

Undo the type changes from the last Apply.

_RunButton

Apply the mapping rows to matching floors or toposolids.

Text Values List BoxList

Every unique CAD text value with its count. Select one for Add, or double-click it to add its row.

_AddButton

Add a row from the selected CAD text. If a Revit type is selected, it is assigned too.

Add _AllButton

Add mapping rows for every loaded CAD text value.

Smart _FindButton

Match CAD text rows to similar Revit type names.

_ClearButton

Clear all mapping rows.

Mappings Data GridTable

The mapping rows: CAD Text, Revit Type or New Type Name, Color, and a cross to remove the row. Drop a type onto a row to assign it.

Type IdSelector

Revit Type drop-down in each row; the type the surfaces under that text receive.

Type Search BoxInput

Search Revit types.

Types List BoxList

Project Floor or Toposolid types, or templates in Auto Create mode. Drag onto a row or double-click for the selected rows.

Cad Type By Text Naming5 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Prefix Text BoxInput

Text added before each CAD text value.

Sample Text BoxInput

Example CAD text used for the preview only.

Suffix Text BoxInput

Text added after each CAD text value.

_CancelButton

Closes the window without changing the naming rule.

_OKButton

Saves the naming rule and renames the pending Auto Create rows with it.

Back to tool index ↑

CAD · CAD · Hatch To Floor / Toposolid

Hatch To Floor / Toposolid

Turn every hatch in a CAD drawing into a Floor or Toposolid, with each CAD hatch layer mapped to an existing type or to a new type LandForm creates for it.

Landscape CAD plans carry their surfaces as hatches: lawn on one layer, paving on another, planting beds on a third. This tool reads those hatch faces, groups them by layer, and either assigns each layer an existing Floor or Toposolid type or duplicates a template type once per layer, optionally with its own material colour. One press of Run then builds a clean, editable surface from every closed hatch boundary.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelCAD ▾Hatch To Floor / Toposolid

Button tooltip: “Create floors or toposolids from CAD hatch boundaries.”
Before you start
  • A CAD import or link (DWG or DXF) with real hatch objects, visible in the active plan or 3D view and not on a sheet. Outlines drawn as linework are not hatches; use Hatch or Line Tracer for those.
  • The Floor and Toposolid types you want to use already in the project, or one template type whose structure and material the new types can copy. Toposolid output needs Revit 2024 or later.
  • The base Level for the new surfaces.
Tutorial video

Watch Hatch To Floor / Toposolid in action

Video coming soon

Hatch To Floor / Toposolid walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 10 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Hatch To Floor / Toposolid: Hatch To Floor / Toposolid toolbar in a project with no CAD drawing yet
Hatch To Floor / Toposolid toolbar in a project with no CAD drawing yet · 10 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick CAD

    Click the CAD import whose hatches you want to convert.

  2. 2
    Status line

    Reports how many hatch faces were found and the run totals; here it warns that the project has no CAD drawing to pick.

  3. 3
    Layer

    Converts one CAD hatch layer, or All layers.

  4. 4
    Level

    Base level for the new surfaces.

  5. 5
    Output

    Creates Toposolid or Floor elements.

  6. 6
    Mode

    Use existing types maps each layer to a type; Create new types duplicates the template once per layer.

  7. 7
    Map

    Opens one row per hatch layer and runs Smart Map to fill each row's surface type.

  8. 8
    Template

    The Floor or Toposolid type duplicated for each layer in Create new types mode.

  9. 9
    Random color / Palette

    Gives each new type its own material colour from the chosen palette.

  10. 10
    Run

    Creates one surface from every closed hatch boundary in one undoable step.

Step by step · 6 steps

How to use Hatch To Floor / Toposolid

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → CAD ▾ → Hatch To Floor / Toposolid.

  2. 02

    Pick the drawing. Press Pick CAD and click the CAD import. The status line reports how many hatch faces were found and the Layer list fills with the layers they use.

  3. 03

    Choose the output. Set Level, pick Toposolid or Floor under Output, and choose the Mode.

  4. 04

    Map layers to existing types. With Use existing types selected, press Map. One row appears per hatch layer and Smart Map fills the Surface Type of each from the type whose name shares the most words with the layer, preferring the Output kind. Fix any row from its drop-down, or press Types, filter and search, then drag a type onto the row or double-click it. Untick Use on layers you do not want converted.

  5. 05

    Or create a type per layer. Switch Mode to Create new types and pick the Template type. Each row now shows a New type name box (the layer name by default) that you can edit; a name that clashes or is empty is outlined until you fix it. Tick Random color and choose a Palette to give each new type its own material colour, and click any colour cell to pick a different colour for that layer.

  6. 06

    Run. Press Run. The progress bar steps through the hatches and the status line ends with "Hatch complete. Created: N. Skipped: N."

What you get

The model now contains one Floor or Toposolid per closed hatch boundary, on the chosen level, each carrying the type its layer was mapped to. In Create new types mode the new types are duplicates of the template named after the layer (or your edited name), and with Random color each has its own duplicated material with the palette colour applied to its shading and patterns; a type that already exists under that name is reused rather than duplicated. The whole run is one undoable step named "LF-Hatch To Floor / Toposolid: Create Floors / Toposolids". Hatches whose boundary did not form a usable closed profile are counted as Skipped.

Good to know

Tips

  • Once mapping rows exist they decide which layers are converted, whatever the Layer box says. The Layer filter applies when you run without opening Map and in Create new types mode.
  • Smart Map adds a bonus for types of the chosen Output kind, so set Output before pressing Map to steer it.
  • If a run stops with a message about an appearance asset that already exists, rename that row's new type so its type, material and appearance names can match.
  • Every mapping, mode, template and colour choice is saved and reloaded next time, so a second drawing from the same standard converts in two clicks.
  • Hatches with no layer name are grouped as "CAD Hatch" when new types are created.
Control reference · 15 controls

Every control and what it does

Cad Hatch To Surface15 controls
ControlTypeFunction
_Pick CADButton

Select the CAD import that contains hatch boundaries.

_MapButton

Show inline hatch mapping and run Smart Map.

LayerSelector

Choose a CAD hatch layer, or All layers.

LevelSelector

Base level for the created surfaces.

OutputSelector

Create Toposolids or Floors from the selected hatch profiles.

Creation ModeSelector

Use mapped existing types, or duplicate a template into new types.

TypeSelector

Floor or Toposolid type to duplicate when creating colored output types.

Random colorOption

Duplicate the selected template type and its material for each CAD hatch layer, then assign a palette color.

PaletteSelector

Color Rules palette used for duplicated materials.

_RunButton

Create surfaces from the selected CAD hatch geometry.

Smart MapButton

Automatically match hatch layers to Floor or Toposolid types.

TypesButton

Show or hide the Floor/Toposolid type browser for drag/drop mapping.

Mapping KindSelector

Filter by output type: Floor or Toposolid.

Mapping Search BoxInput

Search Floor or Toposolid type names.

Mapping Surface Type ListList

Drag a Floor or Toposolid type onto a hatch layer row, or double-click to assign it to the selected row.

Back to tool index ↑

CAD · CAD · Detail Converter

Detail Converter

Rebuild a CAD typical detail as native Revit linework, filled regions and text notes, with every CAD layer mapped to a Revit line style and every CAD hatch pattern rebuilt as its own filled region type.

Office standard details usually live as DWGs full of layers named for pen weights. Detail Converter reads the import in your drafting or detail view, matches each layer to a line style (by name first, then by the weight words such as THIN, MEDM, HVY and HIDDEN), previews every style at its real weight and dash pattern, and converts lines, hatches and text in one run. CAD hatch patterns come across as drafting fill patterns and filled region types of their own, so you do not need the original .pat files.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelCAD ▾Detail Converter

Button tooltip: “Convert CAD detail linework, hatch, and text into Revit elements.”
Before you start
  • A CAD import or link holding the detail, visible in a plan, section, elevation or drafting view. Sheets, 3D views, schedules and legends cannot take detail lines, filled regions or text notes, so the tool asks you to switch.
  • The Revit line styles, filled region types and text note types you want to use already in the project. New filled region types are created automatically when Auto is on.
  • If the office keeps a shared layer standard, the mapping workbook with its CADLayers and RevitLineStyle columns, or a few minutes to make one with Template.
Tutorial video

Watch Detail Converter in action

Video coming soon

Detail Converter walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 10 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Detail Converter: Detail Converter toolbar in a project with no CAD yet
Detail Converter toolbar in a project with no CAD yet · 10 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick CAD

    Click the CAD import or link that holds the detail.

  2. 2
    Status line

    Counts the layers found, summarises the run, and here says the project needs a linked or imported CAD drawing first.

  3. 3
    Map

    Opens the layer mapping panel and runs Smart Map to match each CAD layer to a line style.

  4. 4
    Lines

    Converts mapped CAD linework into Detail lines or Model lines.

  5. 5
    Hatch

    Converts closed CAD hatches into filled regions, of the region type chosen here when Auto is off.

  6. 6
    Auto

    Rebuilds each CAD hatch pattern as its own filled region type.

  7. 7
    Text

    Converts CAD Text and MText into text notes of the chosen type.

  8. 8
    Run

    Converts the picked detail with the current mapping in one undo step.

  9. 9
    Leader

    Adds a straight leader to every selected text note that has none.

  10. 10
    Leader End

    Click a note, then where its arrow should land; the elbow stays orthogonal.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Detail Converter

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → CAD ▾ → Detail Converter.

  2. 02

    Pick the detail. Press Pick CAD and click the import or link. Its name appears on the toolbar and the status line counts the layers it found.

  3. 03

    Map layers to line styles. Press Map. The Layer Mapping panel lists one row per CAD layer and Smart Map runs at once, preferring a style that shares a whole word with the layer name and otherwise falling back to the weight words your CAD standard uses. Each row previews its style at the style's own weight, colour and dash pattern. Click a row to draw that layer's CAD linework on screen in the row's colour so you can see what it covers.

    Untick Use on a layer you do not want converted. Smart Map leaves Revit's bracketed boundary, separation and sketch styles alone.

  4. 04

    Fix rows by hand. Change a row's style from its drop-down, or press Styles to open the line style browser, search for a style, then drag it onto a row or double-click it for the selected row.

  5. 05

    Or drive the run from a workbook. Tick Use workbook. Press Template to write a starter workbook from the picked layers and this project's line styles and open it, edit its CADLayers and RevitLineStyle columns, then press Import to load the rows back in. Browse picks an existing workbook.

  6. 06

    Choose what to convert. Tick Lines and choose Detail lines or Model lines; tick Hatch and either leave Auto on or clear it and pick a single Region Type; tick Text and choose the Text Type for converted Text and MText.

    Model lines need a view with a work plane; detail lines, filled regions and text need an annotation view.

  7. 07

    Review the hatch patterns. With Auto on, the CAD Hatch Patterns section lists every pattern found in the detail with a drawn preview. Edit the New type prefix (LF-PATT- by default), rename the types that will be created, untick patterns you do not want, and click a row to shade every hatch that uses that pattern on screen.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run. When text or automatic patterns are involved the tool first exports the detail to read them, then converts. Curves are grouped by target style and created in batches, and the status line summarises the result: "Lines: N. Filled regions: N. Text notes: N", how many regions matched their CAD pattern, which patterns were matched to the closest project pattern instead, and how many curves were skipped on unmapped layers.

  9. 09

    Finish the leaders. CAD leaders rarely survive the export, so their linework arrives as lines. Select the text notes that need a leader and press Leader to add a straight leader to each, then press Leader End, click a note and click where its arrow should land; the elbow stays orthogonal. Keep picking notes and press Esc to finish.

What you get

The view now contains native detail or model lines in the mapped line styles, filled regions in types named after their CAD patterns (or the single region type you chose), and text notes in the chosen text type, all placed where the CAD geometry was. The conversion is one undoable step named "LF-Detail Converter: Convert CAD Details"; leaders you add afterwards are separate steps named "LF-Detail Converter: Add Leaders" and "LF-Detail Converter: Place Leader End". Generated fill patterns and region types carry your prefix so they sort together, and an existing project pattern or region type of the same name is reused instead of duplicated.

Good to know

Tips

  • Every mapping choice, created type name and prefix is saved per user and restored on the next run, so the second detail from the same standard converts without remapping.
  • If Run reports "No layer is mapped to a Revit line style", open Map and press Smart Map, or tick Use workbook and import your standard.
  • A layer named for several weights resolves most specific first: A-DETL-HIDDEN becomes the hidden style rather than falling through to thin.
  • Revit renumbers hatch pattern names in the export (FP_1, FP_2 and so on), so the suggested type names use the layer and pattern together; rename them in the pattern rows before you run.
  • Set the Lines kind to Model lines only when the detail must exist in the model; detail lines keep the drafting view self-contained.
Control reference · 21 controls

Every control and what it does

Cad Detail Converter21 controls
ControlTypeFunction
_Pick CADButton

Select the CAD import that holds the typical detail.

_MapButton

Show the CAD layer to Revit line style mapping and run Smart Map.

LinesOption

Convert mapped CAD linework into Revit curves.

Line KindSelector

Create view-specific detail lines, or model lines on the view sketch plane.

HatchOption

Convert closed CAD hatch boundaries into filled regions.

Region TypeSelector

Filled region type used for every converted CAD hatch. Not used while Auto is on, because the type then comes from the CAD pattern.

AutoOption

Rebuild each CAD hatch pattern as its own filled region type, named after the CAD layer. Clear this to place every region with the type on the left.

TextOption

Convert CAD Text and MText into Revit text notes.

Text TypeSelector

Text note type used for converted CAD text.

_LeaderButton

Add a straight leader to every selected text note that has none.

Leader _EndButton

Pick a text note and its leader endpoint. The elbow stays orthogonal.

_RunButton

Convert the selected CAD detail using the current mapping.

Smart MapButton

Automatically match each CAD layer to the closest Revit line style.

StylesButton

Show or hide the line style browser for drag/drop mapping.

Use workbookOption

Run the conversion from the mapping workbook instead of the rows below.

Workbook Path BoxInput

Workbook holding the CADLayers and RevitLineStyle columns.

BrowseButton

Select an existing mapping workbook.

TemplateButton

Write a starter workbook from the picked CAD layers and this project's line styles, then open it.

ImportButton

Load the workbook rows into the mapping rows below.

Mapping Search BoxInput

Search Revit line style names.

Mapping Line Style ListList

Drag a line style onto a CAD layer row, or double-click to assign it to the selected row.

Back to tool index ↑

CAD · CAD · Toposolid From CAD

Toposolid From CAD

Build a Toposolid straight from the 3D points and curves of a CAD link or import, with a live point preview so you can judge the density before Revit does the work.

Survey contours and spot levels usually reach you as a DWG. Instead of exporting to a points file, you pick the link, tick the layers that carry elevations, choose a level and Toposolid type and press Run. LandForm samples the curves at the spacing you set, removes duplicate plan positions Revit cannot accept, and keeps every surviving point editable. If Revit refuses a point set it retries with simplified linework, and a DirectShape option builds a plain mesh when the terrain is denser than a Toposolid can hold.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelCAD ▾Toposolid From CAD

Button tooltip: “Create a toposolid from CAD link curves.”
Before you start
  • A CAD link or import (DWG or DXF) with real elevations in its geometry, visible in the active plan or 3D view and not on a sheet. Flat 2D contours produce a flat surface, and the tool warns you about it before you run.
  • The CAD placed within Revit's 20 mile (about 32 km) design area around the internal origin. Linework left in world coordinates is rejected with a message telling you to re-link it with Auto - Origin to Internal Origin.
  • A Toposolid type and base Level. Toposolids need Revit 2024 or later.
Tutorial video

Watch Toposolid From CAD in action

Video coming soon

Toposolid From CAD walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Toposolid From CAD: Toposolid From CAD toolbar warning that the project has no CAD yet
Toposolid From CAD toolbar warning that the project has no CAD yet · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Pick CAD

    Click the CAD link or import; its name replaces "No CAD selected".

  2. 2
    Status line

    Reports what the pick found and warns about problems; here the project has no CAD link or import yet.

  3. 3
    Layer

    Tick the layers that carry elevations, or leave All layers ticked.

  4. 4
    Level

    Base level for the Toposolid.

  5. 5
    Type

    Toposolid type for the new surface.

  6. 6
    DirectShape

    Builds a plain terrain mesh instead, with no point limit but not editable as terrain.

  7. 7
    Subdivide / Spacing (m)

    Inserts extra points along each curve at this spacing, 5 m by default.

  8. 8
    Preview

    Redraws the point preview and refreshes the point counter without changing the model.

  9. 9
    Run

    Creates the Toposolid, or the DirectShape, from the ticked layers.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Toposolid From CAD

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → CAD ▾ → Toposolid From CAD.

  2. 02

    Pick the drawing. Press Pick CAD and click the link or import. The toolbar shows its name, the status line reports how many point or curve source objects it found, and the Layer list fills.

  3. 03

    Tick the layers. Open Layer and tick one or more layers, or leave All layers ticked. The closed box reads the single layer name or "N layers". Ticking only the contour and spot-level layers keeps building outlines and text out of the surface.

  4. 04

    Choose the output. Set the Level and the Toposolid Type. Tick DirectShape instead if you want a plain terrain mesh that follows the spacing exactly and has no point limits, at the cost of not being editable as terrain.

  5. 05

    Set the density. Tick Subdivide and type a Spacing (m) (5 m by default) to insert extra points along each curve. Smaller spacing follows curves more closely but multiplies the point count.

  6. 06

    Read the preview. Points are drawn in the view as soon as you change a setting, and the counter on the right of the status bar shows how many points Run will request; press Preview to redraw it. A very dense setting shows "~N points" instead of drawing, a flat selection is called out in the status line, and from 100,000 points the status warns that Revit will be slow.

  7. 07

    Run. Press Run. The status line finishes with the number of CAD source objects and points used, the elevation range from lowest to highest point, how many duplicate plan positions were removed and how many points had unusable coordinates.

What you get

A Toposolid of the chosen type now sits on the level with one editable shape point for every sampled CAD vertex, created in one undoable step named "LF-Toposolid From CAD: Create Toposolid" (or "LF-Toposolid From CAD: Create Terrain Shape" for a DirectShape). The reported elevation range tells you at once whether the drawing carried real heights. If Revit rejected the full point set, the message explains that shape-redundant vertices were dropped and how far the kept linework deviates from the CAD, so you know what was simplified.

Good to know

Tips

  • If the status says "These layers are flat", every sampled point sits at one elevation: tick only the layers that carry heights, or use 3D survey points or contours.
  • Two different elevations at one plan position cannot both exist in a Toposolid; the first reading is kept and the message tells you how many removed duplicates disagreed and by how much.
  • When Revit will not accept a dense set, the error suggests a coarser Spacing that brings the linework down to about 50,000 points, which Revit edits comfortably; or tick DirectShape.
  • The tool is modeless: if you switch to another document before pressing Run, it asks you to return to the document where the CAD was picked.
  • Your layer ticks, type, level, spacing and DirectShape choice are remembered for the next run.
Control reference · 10 controls

Every control and what it does

Toposolid From Cad Link10 controls
ControlTypeFunction
_Pick CADButton

Select the CAD link or import that contains the curves.

LayerSelector

Drop-down of CAD layers with a tick box each; the closed box reads the layer name or "N layers".

Is CheckedOption

Tick box beside each layer in the list. All layers excludes the specific layers and vice versa; nothing ticked falls back to All layers.

LevelSelector

Base level for the created toposolid.

TypeSelector

Toposolid type for the created surface.

DirectShapeOption

Build the terrain as a DirectShape mesh instead of a toposolid. Handles any point count and follows the spacing exactly, but the result is plain geometry, not editable terrain.

SubdivideOption

Insert extra points along each curve at the given spacing for a denser toposolid.

Spacing BoxInput

Maximum distance between subdivided points, in metres (5 by default). Must be a positive number.

PreviewButton

Redraws the point preview in the view and refreshes the point counter without changing the model.

_RunButton

Create a toposolid (or DirectShape) from the ticked CAD layers with the current settings.

Back to tool index ↑

CAD · CAD · SketchUp Import(BETA)

SketchUp Import (BETA)

Open a SketchUp `.skp` file and rebuild its concept terrain, surfaces and components as native Revit Toposolids, DirectShapes and placed families.

Concept design often happens in SketchUp and then has to be redrawn in Revit. SketchUp Import reads the file directly, with no intermediate export, and shows you a mapping of its groups, painted materials and components. You decide what each becomes: a Toposolid (with a type created from the SketchUp material and colour if you like), a DirectShape in a Revit category, a loaded family type, or a family generated from the component geometry itself. Press Run and the concept lands in Revit at its true positions and rotations, ready for detailed design.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelCAD ▾SketchUp Import(BETA)

Button tooltip: “Import SketchUp concept terrain and planting.”
Before you start
  • A 3D view open. The tool builds terrain and places components in 3D, so it runs only from a 3D view and checks again before every run.
  • SketchUp installed on this machine (its program folder is found automatically), or the free SketchUp C SDK from developer.sketchup.com with the DLLs from its binaries\sketchup\x64 folder copied next to the LandForm add-in. Open SKP checks at once and tells you exactly which file is missing.
  • The .skp file, a Toposolid type and Level for the terrain, and any families you want components mapped to already loaded. Toposolids need Revit 2024 or later.
Tutorial video

Watch SketchUp Import (BETA) in action

Video coming soon

SketchUp Import (BETA) walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 7 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

SketchUp Import (BETA): SketchUp Import toolbar before a file is opened
SketchUp Import toolbar before a file is opened · 7 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Open SKP

    Choose the .skp file; it is read in the background.

  2. 2
    Status line

    Gives the next step, then how many groups, components and instances the file holds, and the run summary.

  3. 3
    Type

    The Toposolid type used for the terrain.

  4. 4
    Level

    The level the terrain and components are built on.

  5. 5
    Offset

    Metres added to the SketchUp elevations.

  6. 6
    Map

    Opens the SketchUp Mapping panel for groups, materials and components.

  7. 7
    Run

    Builds the terrain, then the shapes, then places the components.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use SketchUp Import (BETA)

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → CAD ▾ → SketchUp Import(BETA).

  2. 02

    Open the file. Press Open SKP and choose the .skp. The model is read in the background and the status line reports how many groups and components it holds and how many component instances.

    If the file cannot be read, a dialog explains why; a version mismatch is usually fixed by resaving the model in SketchUp.

  3. 03

    Set the terrain defaults. Choose the Toposolid Type, the Level and an Offset in metres added to the SketchUp elevations.

  4. 04

    Open the mapping. Press Map. The SketchUp Mapping panel shows three sections, each with a count and a Set all... box that applies one choice to every row.

  5. 05

    Decide what each group becomes. In Groups & Geometry set each row to Skip, Toposolid, DirectShape (and pick its Revit category) or By Material, which pools the group's faces by their painted material into the next section.

  6. 06

    Map the materials. In Materials (from groups set to By Material) set each material to Skip, Toposolid or DirectShape. A Toposolid row can use an existing type or (Auto — from material), which creates a type named after the toolbar type and the material with a matching Revit material in the SketchUp colour.

  7. 07

    Map the components. In Components tick the ones to place and pick a family type, or choose (Auto — create from SketchUp geometry) to generate a loadable family from the component itself. Smart Map matches components to loaded families by name; Set all... offers Enable all, Disable all and Auto-create unmapped.

  8. 08

    Set the placement options. Keep Match rotation and Use SKP elevation on to reproduce each instance exactly. Tick Top surfaces only when DirectShapes should keep just the visible finish surfaces and drop walls and risers; Toposolids always use top faces.

  9. 09

    Run. Press Run. Terrain is built first, then shapes, then components, and the status line summarises "Toposolids: N (points). Shapes: N. Placed: N. Generated types: N. Skipped: N." with the first warning.

What you get

Each mapped group or material is now a Toposolid whose boundary was traced from the mesh, with every disjoint patch its own cleanly bounded surface, or a DirectShape per material in the chosen category. Components stand at their SketchUp positions and rotations as the families you mapped or as new generated families. The work is split into undo steps named "LF-SketchUp Import: Create Terrain", "LF-SketchUp Import: Create Shapes", "LF-SketchUp Import: Create Types", "LF-SketchUp Import: Create Component Family" and "LF-SketchUp Import: Place Families". Every warning is appended to SketchUpImport-warnings.log in the LandForm folder of your Windows temp directory, and the summary names it.

Good to know

Tips

  • Where an exact outline cannot be traced or Revit rejects it, the surface falls back to Revit's automatic boundary and a warning says which group it was.
  • Nothing mapped means nothing happens: set at least one group or material to Toposolid or DirectShape, or map one component, before pressing Run.
  • A group set to DirectShape with Top surfaces only on and nothing but near-vertical faces produces no shape; the log records it.
  • Groups, materials and components you map are remembered by name, so re-importing a revised model keeps your earlier choices.
  • The Materials section is the main working area; the Groups and Components sections can be collapsed to keep the panel short.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑

CAD · Hatch · Hatch

Hatch

Click inside a closed area of CAD linework and get a Floor or Toposolid of that shape, the way a hatch fills an enclosed boundary in AutoCAD.

When a CAD plan arrives with paving, lawns and beds drawn as outlines rather than hatches, Hatch is the fastest way to turn them into Revit surfaces one by one. You choose the output type, level and height once, press Pick and click inside each enclosed region while a preview outlines the area under your cursor. The CAD geometry is read once and kept between picks, so each click is instant, and All converts every detected region in one go.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelHatch ▾Hatch

Button tooltip: “Create floors or toposolids by clicking inside closed CAD linework.”
Before you start
  • A CAD import or link (DWG or DXF) visible in a plan or 3D view; the tool will not start on a sheet or in other view kinds. Select the import before you start to skip the pick prompt.
  • Boundaries that actually close: connected lines, arcs and closed polylines. Gaps leave regions undetected, so use Line Tracer when you need to draw closing lines.
  • The Floor or Toposolid type and Level you want, and the Z (m) height above that level. Toposolid output needs Revit 2024 or later.
Tutorial video

Watch Hatch in action

Video coming soon

Hatch walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 9 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Hatch: Hatch toolbar set to Toposolid, warning that the project has no CAD yet
Hatch toolbar set to Toposolid, warning that the project has no CAD yet · 9 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Output

    Floor or Toposolid; the Type list follows this choice.

  2. 2
    Type

    The floor or toposolid type for the created surfaces.

  3. 3
    Level

    The level the surfaces are hosted on, and the elevation at which the CAD regions are read.

  4. 4
    Z (m)

    Height above the level, written to each surface as its height offset.

  5. 5
    Arcs

    Keeps the CAD's true arcs and circles in the boundary instead of short segments.

  6. 6
    Pick

    Click inside closed CAD regions one by one while a preview outlines the area under the cursor; Esc finishes.

  7. 7
    Status line

    Tells you the next step, warns when there is no CAD to read, and counts the surfaces created.

  8. 8
    Trace

    Works like Pick but cleans each boundary first; use it on overlapping or doubled linework.

  9. 9
    All

    Turns every detected closed region into a surface after you confirm.

Step by step · 5 steps

How to use Hatch

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → Hatch ▾ → Hatch.

  2. 02

    Choose the output. Set Output to Floor or Toposolid, pick the Type (foundation slabs are hidden from the floor list), the Level and the Z (m) height offset above it. Tick Arcs to keep the CAD's true arcs and circles in the created boundary instead of short segments.

  3. 03

    Press Pick. If no CAD import is selected, Revit asks you to click the import containing the closed boundaries. LandForm reads every closed region once and reports how many it retained.

  4. 04

    Click inside regions. Hover over an enclosed area and its outline is previewed on screen; click to create the surface. Keep clicking other regions; the status line counts what you have created. Press Esc to finish.

    Trace works the same way and cleans each boundary before it is created; use it for drawings with overlapping or doubled linework.

  5. 05

    Or convert everything. Press All, confirm the prompt, and every detected closed region becomes a surface. Complex, open or self-intersecting boundaries that Revit rejects are skipped and counted.

What you get

Each region you picked is now a Floor or Toposolid of the chosen type on the chosen level, with its Height Offset From Level set to your Z (m) value, and the created elements are left selected so you can check them. Each pick is committed as an undoable step named "LF-Hatch: Create Floors / Toposolids", and the status line reports "Created N hatch surface(s)" with any skipped count. Your output, type, level, offset and arcs settings are remembered for the next session.

Good to know

Tips

  • The CAD boundaries are retained for the same import and level, so later picks and reruns start immediately; change the level and they are read again.
  • "No closed CAD regions were found" means the linework does not close anywhere. Draw the missing edges in Line Tracer, or ask for closed polylines.
  • If the status warns that the view shows no CAD, link or import the drawing into this view or switch to the view where it is visible.
  • Several CAD imports can be selected before you press Pick; their regions are read together.
  • For dozens of regions at once, or when you want to merge a selection into one outline, open Line Tracer in the same Hatch pulldown.
Control reference · 9 controls

Every control and what it does

Hatch9 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Surface KindSelector

Floor or Toposolid output; the Type list follows this choice.

Selected TypeSelector

Floor or Toposolid type for the created surfaces. Foundation slab types are left out.

Selected LevelSelector

Level the created surfaces are hosted on; also the elevation at which the CAD regions are read.

OffsetInput

Z (m): height above the level, written to each surface as Height Offset From Level.

ArcsOption

Keep the CAD's real arcs and circles in the created boundary instead of short line segments.

AllButton

Create every detected closed CAD region.

TraceButton

Keep clicking inside CAD regions to clean and create them; press Esc to finish.

PickButton

Pick inside closed CAD regions one by one.

CloseButton

Close Hatch.

Back to tool index ↑

CAD · Hatch · Line Tracer

Line Tracer

Read a CAD drawing once, see every closed region on a canvas, select the ones you want and create them all as Floors or Toposolids in a single step.

Line Tracer is the batch version of Hatch. It opens as the Hatch Studio window over your Revit view and shows the drawing's linework with every detected closed region tinted. You hover, click and box-select regions, close gaps in the CAD by drawing lines or arcs, give each CAD hatch layer its own output type, and even turn a run of regions into a flight of steps. One press of Convert builds everything in one Revit transaction, and regions that already have a surface are marked so you never create them twice.

Where to find it

LandForm tabCAD panelHatch ▾Line Tracer

Button tooltip: “Select many closed CAD regions on a canvas, then create them all at once.”
Before you start
  • A CAD import or link (DWG or DXF) visible in a plan or 3D view, not on a sheet. Select the import first to skip the pick prompt; after the read, the canvas works even if you switch views.
  • The Floor and Toposolid types you want to use, and the Level the surfaces should sit on. Toposolid output needs Revit 2024 or later.
  • WebView2 runtime, which ships with Windows and Revit; the window follows the Revit UI theme.
Tutorial video

Watch Line Tracer in action

Video coming soon

Line Tracer walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 1 screen · 14 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Line Tracer: Hatch Studio with a landscape plan read and every closed region tinted
Hatch Studio with a landscape plan read and every closed region tinted · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Canvas

    The drawing's linework with every detected closed region tinted. Drag to pan, scroll to zoom.

  2. 2
    Legend

    Explains the colours: detected, hover, selected, CAD hatch, created, drawn and skipped.

  3. 3
    All regions / Hatches only / Lines only

    Keeps DWG hatch boundaries from mixing with the regions traced from linework.

  4. 4
    Footer counts

    Segments, closed regions and CAD hatches read from the drawing; progress and the convert summary also appear in the footer.

  5. 5
    Floor / Toposolid

    The default output, used wherever a CAD hatch layer has no type of its own.

  6. 6
    Type / Level / Height offset from level (m)

    The surface type, the level it sits on and its offset above that level.

  7. 7
    Merge the selection into one outline / Keep the CAD arcs and circles / Cut smaller hatches out of larger ones

    Unions the selected regions with islands kept as openings, keeps true arcs, and stops overlapping fills from stacking.

  8. 8
    Select regions

    Click a region to select it, or Shift+drag a box for many.

  9. 9
    Click to convert

    Each region you click is created at once with the current settings (Q).

  10. 10
    Close gaps

    Draw lines or arcs where a CAD boundary fails to meet; the regions are detected again straight away (D).

  11. 11
    Steps

    Drag across a run of regions to turn them into stacked floors or a Revit stair (S).

  12. 12
    Regions / Clear

    How many regions are selected and their area; Clear drops the selection.

  13. 13
    Convert to Floor

    Creates every selected region in one undoable step (or press Enter).

  14. 14
    Hint line

    The mouse and keyboard shortcuts for the canvas.

Step by step · 9 steps

How to use Line Tracer

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → CAD panel → Hatch ▾ → Line Tracer.

  2. 02

    Pick the drawing and choose what to read. Click the CAD import or link when asked. The Read CAD dialog then lists every layer and block with its object counts, heaviest first: untick layers you do not need, untick Read inside block references to skip plant and furniture symbols, or keep Read hatch objects as boundaries so the DWG's fills arrive as ready-made regions. Press Read CAD; your choice is remembered for the next time.

  3. 03

    Read the canvas. The drawing opens in Hatch Studio with every closed region tinted and the footer counting segments, closed regions and CAD hatches. Drag to pan, scroll to zoom, and press Fit view to see it all. The legend explains the colours: detected, hover, selected, CAD hatch, created, drawn and skipped.

  4. 04

    Set the default output. In the sidebar choose Floor or Toposolid, the Type, the Level and the Height offset from level (m). Tick Merge the selection into one outline to union the selected regions, with islands kept as openings; keep Keep the CAD arcs and circles on for true arcs; and leave Cut smaller hatches out of larger ones on so overlapping fills do not stack.

  5. 05

    Give hatch layers their own types. Open the CAD hatches card. Each DWG layer row shows its hatch count and a type box: Auto-match picks the floor or toposolid type with the most similar name (LAWN to grass, POOL to water), Default uses the sidebar output, Skip (don't convert) leaves the layer out, or choose any Floor or Toposolid type. Press Select to add a layer's hatches to the selection or Convert to create them straight away. Expand widens the card so long names read in full.

  6. 06

    Select regions. In Select regions mode click a region to select it, Shift+drag a box for many, and use All or Invert in the sidebar. Hide regions smaller than (m²) filters out slivers. Switch to Click to convert (Q) and each region you click is created at once with the current settings.

  7. 07

    Close gaps where the CAD is open. Choose Close gaps (D), then Line (L) or Arc (A), and draw where a boundary fails to meet; points snap to endpoints, midpoints and the nearest point of any line. Right-click, Enter or a double-click ends a line, an arc takes start, end and a point it passes through, and Edit points (E) drags or deletes what you drew. Every change re-detects the regions, so a closed area becomes selectable immediately.

  8. 08

    Build steps (optional). Choose Steps (S) and drag a line from the lower terrace across the treads onto the upper terrace, or click the bottom tread and then the top one. The card reports treads, risers, rise, the going range and the 2R+G comfort check. Give a Riser (mm) or a total Rise (m), keep Bottom and top from the model to read the surfaces at both ends, and set Build as to Stacked floors (one surface per tread at its own height) or Revit stair in the stair type you choose.

  9. 09

    Convert. The action bar shows how many regions are selected and their area; press Convert (or Enter). The footer tracks the progress and finishes with "Created 3 floors and 2 toposolids on L1", listing anything Revit skipped. Press Clear or Esc to drop the selection.

What you get

Every selected region is now a Floor or Toposolid of its type on the chosen level, created in one undoable step named "LF-Line Tracer: Create Floors / Toposolids"; a stair built in Steps mode is one native Revit stair created as "LF-Line Tracer: Create Stair". Stacked step surfaces are numbered bottom to top in their Comments as "LandForm Steps - Tread N of M". Each surface remembers which regions it came from, so the canvas marks them created with the hatched colour, and a later Re-read CAD keeps that mark even after openings were cut or regions merged.

Good to know

Tips

  • Keyboard: Ctrl+A selects all, Esc clears or leaves a mode, D, Q and S switch modes, H toggles Hatches only, F11 maximises the window.
  • Use the All regions, Hatches only and Lines only buttons at the top left to stop DWG hatch boundaries mixing with the regions traced from linework.
  • The workspace buttons at the top right collapse the window to a small Show pill so you can check the model, maximise it, move it to the next screen, fit it back over the Revit view or close it; closing keeps the state for the ribbon button to reopen.
  • Re-read CAD refreshes after the drawing changes and keeps your drawn gap-closing lines; Read filter... reopens the layer and block choice.
  • Drawn lines are detection helpers only and never enter the model; the kind, type, level, offset, merge, arcs, minimum area, layer types and steps settings are remembered between sessions.
  • A slope that would make risers thinner than 40 mm or taller than 400 mm is reported rather than built.
Control reference · 0 controls

Every control and what it does

No separate LandForm window. This command runs directly from Revit selection and prompts; follow the workflow above and the messages shown beside the cursor or on Revit's status bar.

Back to tool index ↑
12

LandForm ribbon panel

Excel

Move structured data between Excel workbooks and Revit.

Excel · Excel · Surface Types

Surface Types

Turn the rows of a materials spreadsheet into Floor or Toposolid types, each with its own material, shading colour, surface pattern, type image and type parameters filled from the sheet.

When a hardscape or soft-landscape schedule already lives in Excel, Surface Types saves you from building every paving, gravel or planting-bed type by hand. You pick the workbook and worksheet, choose a template type to copy, select the rows you want, and press Run. LandForm duplicates the template once per row, names the new type from the row's code and name, gives it a new material coloured from the row's picture or a palette, and writes every column of the row into matching type parameters so you can tag and schedule the types straight away.

Where to find it

LandForm tabExcel panelExcel ▾Surface Types

Button tooltip: “Create floor or toposolid types from a workbook or table.”
Before you start
  • An Excel workbook with one heading row and one row per surface. Template Copy in the settings saves the built-in template, which already has the layout the tool expects.
  • A template type to duplicate: a Floor type (foundation slabs are not offered) or a Toposolid type, which needs Revit 2024 or later. Its compound structure and the material of layer 1 are copied into every new type.
  • A shared parameter file. Parameters that do not exist in the project yet are added to it before they are bound to the Floor or Toposolid category.
  • Pictures placed on a row of the sheet, floating or in a cell, become type images and drive the shading colour. A column headed Pattern, Fill Pattern or Hatch chooses the surface pattern by name.
Tutorial video

Watch Surface Types in action

Video coming soon

Surface Types walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 2 screens · 27 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Surface Types: Floor / Toposolid Types From Excel with eight paving rows loaded
Floor / Toposolid Types From Excel with eight paving rows loaded · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Settings

    Opens the settings: heading and data rows, Code and Name columns, shared parameter file, prefix and naming rule.

  2. 2
    Browse

    Picks the Excel workbook; its path shows in the box beside the button.

  3. 3
    Worksheet

    The sheet whose rows are read into the table on the right.

  4. 4
    Create as

    Creates Floor types or Toposolid types.

  5. 5
    Template type

    The existing type duplicated once per selected row; its structure and layer 1 material are copied.

  6. 6
    Shading color

    Match colors to row images takes each row's shading colour from its picture; the palette below colours rows without one.

  7. 7
    Settings Summary

    Shows the shared parameter file, heading and data rows, and the Code and Name columns in use.

  8. 8
    Rows

    One line per spreadsheet row with its picture, sheet columns and proposed New Type Name. Filter with the funnel in a heading; edit a name cell to override the rule.

  9. 9
    Color

    The row's shading colour; click a cell to choose a colour by hand.

  10. 10
    Pattern

    The surface pattern for the row's material; click a cell to pick a pattern, No Pattern or Template Pattern.

  11. 11
    Select Visible

    Selects every row the filters leave visible; Clear Filters removes all column filters. The count shows visible and selected rows.

  12. 12
    Status line

    Reports what was loaded, or which layout setting to check when the sheet does not read correctly.

  13. 13
    Run

    Creates one type per selected row and reports how many were created and skipped.

  14. 14
    Collapse source panel

    Hides the Source panel so the row table fills the window.

Surface Types: Floor / Toposolid Types Settings with the standard template layout
Floor / Toposolid Types Settings with the standard template layout · 13 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Excel workbook

    Default workbook opened with the tool; Browse picks a different file.

  2. 2
    Template Copy

    Saves an editable copy of the built-in template, already laid out the way the tool expects, and opens it.

  3. 3
    Shared parameter file

    The .txt file new type parameters are added to; Browse picks another.

  4. 4
    Code comes from

    The Excel columns used for the Code and Name parts of the default type name.

  5. 5
    Column headings row

    The Excel row holding the headings, and the First data row of values (2 and 3 in the template).

  6. 6
    Edit rule

    Opens the naming rule editor to build type names from columns, separators, prefixes and suffixes; the line beside it previews the first name.

  7. 7
    Shared parameter group

    Group inside the shared parameter file that holds the generated parameters.

  8. 8
    Parameter prefix

    Starts every generated parameter name, followed by a hyphen and the Excel heading.

  9. 9
    Generated parameter examples

    Previews the parameter names the current prefix and headings produce.

  10. 10
    Schedule parameter suffix

    Creates an extra schedule parameter filled with the Schedule value; leave the value blank to skip it.

  11. 11
    Parameter Behavior

    Adds the parameters to the project, copies row values into them and writes text in capitals. Existing type names are always skipped, ticked or not.

  12. 12
    Status line

    Reminds you how type names and parameter names are built.

  13. 13
    Save

    Saves the settings and closes the window.

Step by step · 8 steps

How to use Surface Types

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Excel panel → Excel ▾ → Surface Types.

  2. 02

    Check the settings once. Press the settings button in the header. Confirm the Column headings row and First data row (2 and 3 in the template), which columns the Code and Name come from, the shared parameter file, and the parameter prefix (LF by default). Press Edit rule to change how type names are built, then Save.

  3. 03

    Open the workbook. Click Browse and pick the Excel file, then choose the Worksheet. The rows appear on the right with a proposed New Type Name, an Image, a Color and a Pattern for each.

    If the sheet does not read correctly, the status line explains which layout setting to check.

  4. 04

    Choose what to create. Set Create as to Floor or Toposolid and pick the Template type to duplicate.

  5. 05

    Set the colours. Tick Match colors to row images to take each row's shading colour from its picture, and pick a palette for rows without a picture. Click any Color cell to choose a colour by hand; hand-picked colours are kept when you change the palette.

  6. 06

    Set the patterns (optional). Click a Pattern cell to choose a model or drafting pattern for that row's material, No Pattern, or Template Pattern to keep the template's pattern.

  7. 07

    Select the rows. Use the funnel in a column heading to filter, then press Select Visible, or Ctrl- and Shift-click rows. Rows hidden by a filter are never created. Edit a New Type Name cell if one name needs to differ from the rule.

  8. 08

    Run. Press Run. LandForm checks the inputs, creates the types and reports how many were created, how many existing names were skipped, and how many parameters were written.

What you get

The project now has one new Floor or Toposolid type per selected row, named from the naming rule or your edited name. Each type has its own copy of the template's layer 1 material with the same name as the type, Graphics > Shading set to the row's colour and the chosen surface pattern. Every spreadsheet column is written as a text type parameter named with the prefix and the heading, for example LF-Description, a LF-Schedule As parameter carries the schedule value if you set one, and rows with a picture get it as the type image. The whole run is one undo step named "LF-Surface Types: Create Types from Excel".

Good to know

Tips

  • A type whose name already exists is skipped and left unchanged, so you can rerun the same sheet after adding rows.
  • If a material with the new type's name already exists while the type does not, the run stops and nothing is created. Rename the type in New Type Name or rename the old material.
  • With Uppercase text values on (the default), parameter values are written in capitals. Turn it off in the settings to keep the sheet's spelling.
  • A picture Revit cannot import is skipped and counted in the completion message; the type is still created.
  • Collapse the Source panel with the arrow beside its title to give the row table more room.
Control reference · 31 controls

Every control and what it does

Hardscape Types From Excel13 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Collapse source panelButton

Hides the Source panel so the row table fills the window.

Excel Path Text BoxInput

Excel workbook that contains floor or toposolid type data. The file path is saved in settings.

BrowseButton

Select an Excel workbook.

Worksheet Combo BoxSelector

Worksheet whose header row and data rows define type names and parameter values.

Host Kind Combo BoxSelector

Choose whether selected Excel rows create Revit floor types or toposolid types.

Template Combo BoxSelector

Existing type duplicated for each selected spreadsheet row.

Match colors to row imagesOption

Fill the Color column with the base color of each row's image. The Color column becomes Graphics > Shading > Color of each new type's material. Only new types receive colors; an existing type name is reused without changing its material.

Color Palette Combo BoxSelector

Colour palette used for rows without an image, or for every row when image matching is off. Click a Color cell to pick any colour.

Expand source panelButton

Shows the Source panel again after it was collapsed.

Select VisibleButton

Select only the rows currently visible after filtering.

Clear FiltersButton

Clear all column filters.

Rows Data GridTable

Select spreadsheet rows to convert into Revit types. Hidden filtered rows are ignored during creation.

RunButton

Create floor or toposolid types from the selected rows.

Hardscape Types From Excel Settings18 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Excel Path Text BoxInput

Default workbook path used when the tool opens.

BrowseButton

Choose the default workbook, or the shared parameter file on the line below.

Template CopyButton

Save an editable copy of the built-in Floor / Toposolid Types Excel template and open it.

Shared Parameter File Text BoxInput

Shared-parameter .txt file used for type parameter definitions.

Code Column Combo BoxSelector

Excel column used for the Code part of the default type name.

Name Column Combo BoxSelector

Excel column used for the Name part of the default type name.

Header Row Text BoxInput

Excel row containing headings such as Code, Material, and Description.

Data Start Row Text BoxInput

First Excel row containing values that will create types.

Edit ruleButton

Opens the naming rule editor, where you assemble type names from Excel columns, separators, prefixes and suffixes with a live preview.

Shared Parameter Group Text BoxInput

Group inside the shared-parameter file.

Parameter Prefix Text BoxInput

All generated parameter names use this prefix followed by a hyphen and the Excel header.

Schedule Suffix Text BoxInput

Optional suffix that creates a generated schedule/classification parameter.

Schedule Value Text BoxInput

Value written to the schedule/classification parameter. Leave blank to skip.

Add parameters to the projectOption

Make the generated parameters available to the selected Floor or Toposolid types.

Copy Excel valuesOption

Write each selected row value into matching generated type parameters.

Uppercase text valuesOption

Convert text values to uppercase before writing parameters.

Skip types that already existOption

Saved with the settings. Types whose name already exists are always skipped and never overwritten, whether or not this is ticked.

SaveButton

Save settings and close this dialog.

Back to tool index ↑

Excel · Excel · Family Placeholder

Family Placeholder

Turn the rows of a spreadsheet into placeholder families, one loadable family per row, with every column of the row written into its parameters and the family loaded straight into the project.

Early in a design you often know which benches, bins, lights, signs or trees you need long before the real manufacturer families exist. Family Placeholder lets you keep that list in Excel and still work with it in Revit: each selected row becomes a family in the category you choose, named from the row's code and name, carrying the row's values as parameters and its picture as the type image. You can schedule, tag and later swap these placeholders for real content. The tool creates and loads the families; it does not place any instances in the model.

Where to find it

LandForm tabExcel panelExcel ▾Family Placeholder

Button tooltip: “Place family instances from workbook coordinates.”
Before you start
  • An Excel workbook with one heading row and one row per item. Template Copy in the settings saves the built-in template with the expected layout.
  • Revit's English family template library installed. Only categories whose template file is found are offered, and each family is started from that category's template, for example Metric Planting or Metric Furniture.
  • A shared parameter file and an output folder for the generated .rfa files. Both are set in the settings and have sensible defaults.
  • Decide the parameter prefix (LF by default). Every heading becomes a parameter named with the prefix, a hyphen and the heading, for example LF-Code.
Tutorial video

Watch Family Placeholder in action

Video coming soon

Family Placeholder walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Tool window · 2 screens · 28 callouts

The window, control by control

Numbers on the screenshot match the legend. Hover a number or a legend row to highlight the other.

Family Placeholder: Family Placeholders From Excel with a furniture worksheet loaded
Family Placeholders From Excel with a furniture worksheet loaded · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Settings

    Opens the settings: heading and data rows, Code and Name columns, output folder, shared parameter file and parameter prefix.

  2. 2
    Browse

    Picks the Excel workbook; its path shows in the box beside the button.

  3. 3
    Worksheet

    Chooses the sheet whose rows become families.

  4. 4
    Family category

    Type here to search the category list below.

  5. 5
    Show all loadable

    Adds the other mapped loadable categories to the landscape ones listed first.

  6. 6
    Category list

    Pick the category the new families are created in; each starts from that category's Revit template.

  7. 7
    Status line

    Reports what was loaded, here 6 rows with 6 pictures, and names the template of the chosen category.

  8. 8
    Rows

    One line per spreadsheet row with its picture and values. Filter with the funnel in a column heading and Ctrl- or Shift-click to select; filtered-out rows are never created.

  9. 9
    Select Visible

    Selects every row the filters leave visible.

  10. 10
    Clear Filters

    Removes all column filters.

  11. 11
    Bin button

    Clears the current row selection.

  12. 12
    New Family Name

    The name proposed by the naming rule; edit a cell when one family needs a different name.

  13. 13
    Run

    Opens the validation checks, then creates and loads one family per selected row.

  14. 14
    Arrow

    Collapses the Source panel so the row table fills the window.

Family Placeholder: Family Placeholder Settings with the template layout and the LF prefix
Family Placeholder Settings with the template layout and the LF prefix · 14 calloutsFull size ↗
  1. 1
    Excel workbook

    Default workbook opened with the tool; Browse picks another.

  2. 2
    Template Copy

    Saves an editable copy of the built-in Excel template and opens it.

  3. 3
    Folder for generated families

    Where the generated .rfa files are saved.

  4. 4
    Shared parameter file

    Shared-parameter .txt file used for the family parameters.

  5. 5
    Code comes from / Name comes from

    Excel columns used for the Code and Name parts of the default family name; Automatic takes the first and second columns.

  6. 6
    Column headings row / First data row

    Excel row numbers of the headings and of the first item, 2 and 3 in the template.

  7. 7
    Placeholder family names

    Sample family name built by the current naming rule.

  8. 8
    Edit rule

    Opens the naming rule editor to build names from columns, separators, prefixes and suffixes with a live preview.

  9. 9
    Shared parameter group

    Group inside the shared-parameter file that holds the parameters.

  10. 10
    Parameter prefix

    Text placed before every heading; the examples beside it show the resulting names, such as LF-Code.

  11. 11
    Schedule parameter suffix / Schedule value

    Optional schedule parameter and the value written to it; leave the value blank to skip it.

  12. 12
    Parameter Behavior

    Add parameters to the project binds them to the category, Delete generated files after loading clears every .rfa in the output folder, Uppercase text values writes text in capitals.

  13. 13
    Status line

    Reminds you how family and parameter names are formed.

  14. 14
    Save

    Saves the settings and closes the window.

Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Family Placeholder

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Excel panel → Excel ▾ → Family Placeholder.

  2. 02

    Check the settings once. Press the settings button in the header. Confirm the Column headings row and First data row (2 and 3 in the template), which columns the Code and Name come from, the Folder for generated families, the shared parameter file and the parameter prefix. Press Edit rule to change how family names are built, then Save.

  3. 03

    Open the workbook. Click Browse, pick the Excel file and choose the Worksheet. The rows appear on the right with a proposed New Family Name and any row picture in the Image column.

  4. 04

    Choose the family category. Pick a category in the Family category list. At first only landscape categories such as Planting, Site, Furniture, Entourage and Generic Models are listed; press Show all loadable for the other mapped categories, or type in the search box above the list. The status line names the Revit template that category uses.

  5. 05

    Select the rows. Use the funnel in a column heading to filter, then press Select Visible, or Ctrl- and Shift-click rows. Rows hidden by a filter are never created. Edit a New Family Name cell if one name needs to differ from the rule.

  6. 06

    Run and review the checks. Press Run. A validation window lists each check (document, workbook, worksheet, rows, category, family template, output folder, shared parameters, parameter naming) as OK, Note or Fix. Continue stays unavailable while any line says Fix; once all checks pass, press it to create the families.

  7. 07

    Wait for the families to load. LandForm builds each family, saves it to the output folder, loads it into the project and reports how many families were created and how many parameters were written.

What you get

The project now contains one loaded family per selected row, in the chosen category, with a single type named like the family. Each family carries the row's values as type parameters named with the prefix and the heading, plus a schedule parameter if you set a schedule value, and rows with a picture get it as the type image. With Add parameters to the project on, the same parameters are bound to the category so they show in schedules and tags. Find the new families in the Project Browser under their category; the .rfa files stay in the output folder unless you chose to delete them.

Good to know

Tips

  • Running again with the same names reloads the families and overwrites their parameter values, so you can update the placeholders after editing the spreadsheet.
  • Delete generated files after loading removes every .rfa file in the output folder, not only the ones just created. Keep that folder for generated placeholders only.
  • Uppercase text values is off by default; turn it on to write text parameters in capitals.
  • If the category list is empty, Revit's English family templates are missing from this installation.
  • Collapse the Source panel with the arrow beside its title to give the row table more room.
Control reference · 32 controls

Every control and what it does

Family Placeholder12 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Collapse source panelButton

Hides the Source panel so the row table fills the window.

Excel Path Text BoxInput

Excel workbook containing the placeholder family data.

BrowseButton

Select an Excel workbook.

Worksheet Combo BoxSelector

Worksheet whose headers and data rows define the new families.

Category Search Text BoxInput

Search the displayed family categories.

Show all loadableButton

Show every mapped loadable model category.

Category List BoxList

Landscape categories are shown by default. Use Show all loadable for other mapped model categories.

Expand source panelButton

Shows the Source panel again after it was collapsed.

Select VisibleButton

Select only the rows currently visible after filtering.

Clear FiltersButton

Clear all column filters.

Rows Data GridTable

Select spreadsheet rows to convert into placeholder families. Hidden filtered rows are ignored during creation.

RunButton

Create placeholder families from the selected rows.

Family Placeholder Settings18 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Excel Path Text BoxInput

Default workbook path used when the tool opens.

BrowseButton

Choose the default workbook, the output folder or the shared parameter file, depending on the line it sits on.

Template CopyButton

Save an editable copy of the built-in Family Placeholder Excel template and open it.

Target Folder Text BoxInput

Folder where generated placeholder family files are saved.

Shared Parameter File Text BoxInput

Shared-parameter .txt file used for generated family parameters.

Code Column Combo BoxSelector

Excel column used for the Code part of the default family name.

Name Column Combo BoxSelector

Excel column used for the Name part of the default family name.

Header Row Text BoxInput

Excel row containing headings such as Code and Description.

Data Start Row Text BoxInput

First Excel row containing values that will create families.

Edit ruleButton

Opens the naming rule editor, where you assemble family names from Excel columns, separators, prefixes and suffixes with a live preview.

Shared Parameter Group Text BoxInput

Group inside the shared-parameter file.

Parameter Prefix Text BoxInput

Text placed before every Excel heading, for example LF-Code.

Schedule Suffix Text BoxInput

Optional heading used to create a schedule/classification parameter.

Schedule Value Text BoxInput

Value written to the schedule parameter. Leave blank to skip it.

Add parameters to the projectOption

Make generated parameters available to the selected family category in this project.

Delete generated files after loadingOption

Delete generated .rfa files after the families are loaded into Revit. This clears every .rfa file in the output folder.

Uppercase text valuesOption

Convert Excel text values to uppercase before writing family parameters.

SaveButton

Save settings and close this dialog.

Family Placeholder Validation2 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Validation GridTable

One line per check with its status (OK, Note or Fix) and the detail, such as the row count, the family template or the output folder.

ContinueButton

Continue with family placeholder creation.

Back to tool index ↑

Excel · Excel · Import Table

Import Table

Bring Excel worksheets and CSV, TSV or TXT tables into Revit as native key schedules that keep the table's text, cell colours and pictures, and update them later from the same file.

Plant lists, material legends, area tables and specification notes are usually kept in Excel. Pasting them onto sheets as images goes stale, and retyping them takes hours. Import Table, whose window is called Import Excel, turns each worksheet into a key schedule whose header shows the table cell by cell, with your fonts, cell fills and embedded images. Each schedule remembers the file and worksheet it came from, so when the spreadsheet changes you open the tool, press Run, and the schedule is rebuilt in place on every sheet it is placed on.

Where to find it

LandForm tabExcel panelExcel ▾Import Table

Button tooltip: “Import parameter values from a workbook or table.”
Before you start
  • The tables as .xlsx or .xlsm workbooks, or as .csv, .tsv or .txt files. Every worksheet of a workbook is offered as its own table.
  • Lay out the area you want in Excel. The tool reads the used range, the print area, or a named range of each worksheet.
  • A category for the key schedules. Any category that Revit allows key schedules for is offered, and each new schedule is created as a key schedule of that category.
  • Keep tables to a sensible size. A table of more than 20,000 cells is skipped.
Tutorial video

Watch Import Table in action

Video coming soon

Import Table walkthrough. Until it is published, the steps and the annotated window below walk through the same workflow.

LandForm on YouTube ↗
Step by step · 7 steps

How to use Import Table

  1. 01

    Open LandForm tab → Excel panel → Excel ▾ → Import Table.

  2. 02

    Add the tables. Press Add Tables and pick one or more files. Each worksheet or text file appears as a row under Tables with its source, type, worksheet, size, modified date and status, already ticked.

    Schedules created earlier with this tool are listed automatically when the window opens; press Load Links to list them again.

  3. 03

    Name the schedules. Edit the View Name of any row. New names start as "Table -" followed by the file and worksheet name.

  4. 04

    Choose the category and region. Pick the Key schedule category. Set Region to Used Range, Print Area or Named Range; for a named range, type its name in the box below.

  5. 05

    Set the look. Enter Text mm for the text height, Image mm for the largest side of embedded pictures, Row mm for the row height and Padding mm for the space inside each cell, then choose the Font. Tick Black and white to drop the Excel cell colours.

  6. 06

    Pick the rows to process. Untick any row you do not want, or select rows and press the delete button to remove them from the list.

  7. 07

    Run. Press Run. LandForm creates a key schedule for each new table, updates the schedules that are already linked, and writes the outcome into each row's Status. The status line sums up how many schedules were created, updated or skipped and how many cells and images were written.

What you get

Each ticked table now exists as a key schedule in the chosen category, named as you set it, with the spreadsheet drawn in its header: the text in your font and size, cell background and text colours unless you chose black and white, and pictures embedded in their cells. Place it on a sheet like any other schedule. A linked schedule keeps its link to the source file and worksheet, so running the tool again replaces its content with the current spreadsheet. The whole run is one undo step named "LF-Import Table: Create Schedules".

Good to know

Tips

  • To refresh tables after the spreadsheet changes, open Import Table, check that the linked rows show "Linked. Ready to update.", and press Run. A row that says "Missing source file." needs the file back in its old location.
  • If a row is skipped with "no table data" or shows "Failed", check the Region setting: the worksheet may have no print area, or the named range may be spelt differently in Excel.
  • Renaming a linked row in View Name also renames its schedule on the next run.
  • Allowed values: text 1 to 20 mm, images 4 to 80 mm, rows 3 to 100 mm, padding 0 to 20 mm.
Control reference · 13 controls

Every control and what it does

Table Gen13 controls
ControlTypeFunction
Add TablesButton

Choose .xlsx, .xlsm, .csv, .tsv or .txt files. Each worksheet or text file is added as a table row.

Load LinksButton

List the key schedules in this model that were created by Import Table and are linked to a source file.

Key Category Combo BoxSelector

Category the new key schedules are created in.

Region Mode Combo BoxSelector

Part of each worksheet to read: Used Range, Print Area or Named Range.

Named Region Text BoxInput

Named Excel range used when Region is Named Range.

Text Size Text BoxInput

Text height in millimetres, from 1 to 20.

Image Size Text BoxInput

Maximum width or height used for embedded Excel images.

Row Height Text BoxInput

Row height in millimetres, from 3 to 100.

Cell Padding Text BoxInput

Space inside each cell in millimetres, from 0 to 20.

Font Name Combo BoxSelector

Font used for imported schedule text.

Black and whiteOption

Ignore Excel cell fills and text colours and create the schedule in black and white.

Tables Data GridTable

The tables to process, with source file, type, worksheet, editable view name, size, modified date and status. Untick a row to leave it out.

RunButton

Create or update the table views.

Back to tool index ↑